owner`s manual
Information
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as
shown below.
AFRICA
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street,
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,
Cairo 11341, EGYPT
TEL: 20-2-417-1828
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules Hermann,
Chaudron - BP79 97 491
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
REUNION ISLAND
TEL: (0262) 218-429
SOUTH AFRICA
11 Melle St., Braamfontein,
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA
P.O.Box 32918, Braamfontein 2017
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (011) 403 4105
Paul Bothner (PTY) Ltd.
IRELAND
OMNI MUSIC
Roland Ireland
140 & 142, Jalan Bukit Bintang
55100 Kuala Lumpur,MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 2144-3333
75 Avenida Norte y Final
Alameda Juan Pablo ,
Edificio No.4010 San Salvador,
EL SALVADOR
TEL: 262-0788
G2 Calmount Park, Calmount
Avenue, Dublin 12
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 4294444
MEXICO
ITALY
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar
de los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F.
MEXICO
TEL: (55) 5668-6699
Viale delle Industrie 8,
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
PHILIPPINES
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
TEL: (02) 899 9801
SINGAPORE
Swee Lee Company
150 Sims Drive,
SINGAPORE 387381
TEL: 6846-3676
CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE
LTD
Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E,
#02-2148, SINGAPORE 489980
TEL: 6243-9555
TAIWAN
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan
N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN,
R.O.C.
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
P.O.BOX 23032, Claremont 7735,
SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 674 4030
THAILAND
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
ASIA
330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2,
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 2248821
CHINA
VIETNAM
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
Shanghai 200090, CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(BEIJING OFFICE)
10F. No.18 Anhuaxili
Chaoyang District, Beijing 100011
CHINA
TEL: (010) 6426-5050
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(GUANGZHOU OFFICE)
2/F., No.30 Si You Nan Er Jie Yi
Xiang, Wu Yang Xin Cheng,
Guangzhou 510600, CHINA
Tel: (020) 8736-0428
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
Service Division
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen
Wan, New Territories,
HONG KONG
TEL: 2415 0911
Saigon Music
Suite DP-8
40 Ba Huyen Thanh Quan Street
Hochiminh City, VIETNAM
Tel: (08) 930-1969
AUSTRALIA
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty., Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
TEL: (02) 9982 8266
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Corporation Ltd.
32 Shaddock Street, Mount Eden,
Auckland, NEW ZEALAND
TEL: (09) 3098 715
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
ARGENTINA
8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39
Chatham Road South, T.S.T,
Kowloon, HONG KONG
TEL: 2333 1863
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
INDIA
BRAZIL
409, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi
Flats Compound Off. Dr. Edwin
Moses Road, Mumbai-400011,
INDIA
TEL: (022) 2493 9051
INDONESIA
PT Citra IntiRama
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
KOREA
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855
PARAGUAY
Distribuidora De
Instrumentos Musicales
J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira
Asuncion PARAGUAY
TEL: (021) 492-124
URUGUAY
Roland Brasil Ltda
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
COSTA RICA
JUAN Bansbach
Instrumentos Musicales
Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237,
San Jose, COSTA RICA
TEL: 258-0211
CHILE
Comercial Fancy
S.A.
Rut.: 96.919.420-1
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor
Santiago - Centro, CHILE
TEL: (02) 688-9540
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Kontor Norge
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
TEL: (021) 285-4169
ISRAEL
Halilit P. Greenspoon &
Sons Ltd.
8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St.
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
JORDAN
AMMAN Trading Agency
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
TEL: 2273 0074
245 Prince Mohammad St.,
Amman 1118, JORDAN
TEL: (06) 464-1200
POLAND
Easa Husain Al Yousifi Est.
P. P. H. Brzostowicz
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND
TEL: (022) 679 44 19
PORTUGAL
KUWAIT
Abdullah Salem Street,
Safat, KUWAIT
TEL: 243-6399
LEBANON
Chahine S.A.L.
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine Bldg.,
Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-5857
Beirut, LEBANON
TEL: (01) 20-1441
Todo Musica S.A.
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771
C.P.: 11.800
Montevideo, URUGUAY
TEL: (02) 924-2335
Cais Das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto
4050-465 PORTO
PORTUGAL
TEL: (022) 608 00 60
VENEZUELA
ROMANIA
Musicland Digital C.A.
FBS LINES
Av. Francisco de Miranda,
Centro Parque de Cristal, Nivel
C2 Local 20 Caracas
VENEZUELA
TEL: (212) 285-8586
Piata Libertatii 1,
RO-4200 Gheorghehi
TEL: (095) 169-5043
SAUDI ARABIA
RUSSIA
aDawliah Universal
Electronics APL
MuTek
EUROPE
Roland Austria GES.M.B.H.
Siemensstrasse 4, P.O. Box 74,
A-6063 RUM, AUSTRIA
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
BELGIUM/HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG
Roland Benelux N. V.
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
TEL: (014) 575811
DENMARK
3-Bogatyrskaya Str. 1.k.l
107 564 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 169 5043
SPAIN
Roland Electronics
de España, S. A.
Calle Bolivia 239, 08020
Barcelona, SPAIN
TEL: (93) 308 1000
SWEDEN
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWITZERLAND
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
TEL: 3916 6200
Roland (Switzerland) AG
FRANCE
Roland France SA
4, Rue Paul Henri SPAAK,
Parc de l'Esplanade, F 77 462 St.
Thibault, Lagny Cedex FRANCE
TEL: 01 600 73 500
FINLAND
Av.Santa Fe 2055
(1123) Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA
TEL: (011) 4508-2700
NORWAY
MOCO, INC.
Tecnologias Musica e Audio,
Roland Portugal, S.A.
AUSTRIA
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
Parsons Music Ltd.
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A.
Boulevard Andrews, Albrook,
Panama City, REP. DE PANAMA
TEL: 315-0101
17 Werdmuller Centre,
Main Road, Claremont 7708
SOUTH AFRICA
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
PANAMA
IRAN
QATAR
Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio
& Stores)
P.O. Box 62, Doha, QATAR
TEL: 4423-554
Corniche Road, Aldossary Bldg.,
1st Floor, Alkhobar,
SAUDI ARABIA
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 898 2081
Khaled Ebn Al Walid St.
Bldg. No. 47, P.O.BOX 13520,
Damascus, SYRIA
TEL: (011) 223-5384
TURKEY
Barkat muzik aletleri ithalat
ve ihracat Ltd Sti
Zak Electronics & Musical
Instruments Co. L.L.C.
Elannontie 5
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 702701
CANADA
MIDDLE EAST
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Toronto Office)
BAHRAIN
170 Admiral Boulevard
Mississauga On L5T 2N6
CANADA
TEL: (905) 362 9707
Oststrasse 96, 22844 Norderstedt,
GERMANY
TEL: (040) 52 60090
GREECE
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
Patras 26442, GREECE
TEL: 2610 435400
HUNGARY
Roland East Europe Ltd.
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY
TEL: (23) 511011
Moon Stores
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,
State of BAHRAIN
TEL: 211 005
CYPRUS
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.
17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,
CYPRUS
TEL: (022) 66-9426
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS” (Owner’s manual p. 2), “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (Owner’s
manual p. 3), and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (Owner’s manual p. 4). These sections
provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit.
Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every
feature provided by your new unit, Owner’s Manual, Sound/Parameter List should
be read in its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a
convenient reference.
This Owner's Manual applies to both the Fantom-S and the Fantom-S88. The manual uses
the term “Fantom-S” to indicate both models. If you have the Fantom-S88, please read
“Fantom-S” as “Fantom-S88.”
NORTH AMERICA
UNITED KINGDOM
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
.
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai, U.A.E.
TEL: (04) 3360715
Roland Scandinavia As,
Filial Finland
GERMANY
/
Siraselviler Caddesi Siraselviler
Pasaji No:74/20
Taksim - Istanbul, TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 2499324
U.A.E.
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the Roland
Technical Light & Sound
Center
UKRAINE
Mira Str. 19/108
P.O. Box 180
295400 Munkachevo, UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
OWNER’S MANUAL
SYRIA
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,
CH-4452 Itingen,
SWITZERLAND
TEL: (061) 927-8383
TIC-TAC
OWNER’S MANUAL
That Other Music Shop
(PTY) Ltd.
EL SALVADOR
BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD
/
REUNION
MALAYSIA
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Head Office)
5480 Parkwood Way Richmond
B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA
TEL: (604) 270 6626
U. S. A.
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,
U. S. A.
TEL: (323) 890 3700
As of July 1, 2003 (Roland)
03121989
’03-07-5N
Copyright © 2003 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without
the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with
one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the
third prong are provided for your safety. When the provided
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12. Never use with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
or table except as specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing
is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any
way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid
has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,
the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does
not operate normally, or has been dropped.
For the U.K.
WARNING:
THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
GREEN-AND-YELLOW: EARTH, BLUE: NEUTRAL, BROWN: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the
letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
2
For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Reference_e.book 3 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
The
symbol alerts the user to important instructions
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
* Material damage refers
other adverse effects
respect to the home
furnishings, as well
animals or pets.
The
symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
to damage or
caused with
and all its
to domestic
The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the powercord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
001
008a
• Before using this unit, make sure to read the instructions
below, and the Owner’s Manual.
• The unit should be connected to a power supply only of
the type described in the operating instructions, or as
marked on the unit.
..........................................................................................................
003
• Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts within
it (except when this manual provides specific instructions
directing you to do so). Refer all servicing to your retailer,
the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized
Roland distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.
..........................................................................................................
002b
• Do not open or perform any internal modifications on the
unit. (The only exception would be where this manual
provides specific instructions which should be followed
in order to put in place user-installable options; see p.
203.)
..........................................................................................................
004
• Never use or store the unit in places that are:
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct sunlight
in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating duct, on top of
heat-generating equipment); or are
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors); or are
• Humid; or are
• Exposed to rain; or are
• Dusty; or are
• Subject to high levels of vibration.
..........................................................................................................
008e
• Use only the attached power-supply cord.
..........................................................................................................
009
• Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord, nor
place heavy objects on it. Doing so can damage the cord,
producing severed elements and short circuits. Damaged
cords are fire and shock hazards!
..........................................................................................................
010
• This unit, either alone or in combination with an
amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be capable of
producing sound levels that could cause permanent
hearing loss. Do not operate for a long period of time at a
high volume level, or at a level that is uncomfortable. If
you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears,
you should immediately stop using the unit, and consult
an audiologist.
..........................................................................................................
011
• Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material, coins,
pins); or liquids of any kind (water, soft drinks, etc.) to
penetrate the unit.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
005
013
• This unit should be used only with a rack or stand that is
recommended by Roland.
• In households with small children, an adult should
provide supervision until the child is capable of
following all the rules essential for the safe operation of
the unit.
..........................................................................................................
006
• When using the unit with a rack or stand recommended
by Roland, the rack or stand must be carefully placed so
it is level and sure to remain stable. If not using a rack or
stand, you still need to make sure that any location you
choose for placing the unit provides a level surface that
will properly support the unit, and keep it from
wobbling.
..........................................................................................................
014
• Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
3
Reference_e.book 4 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
015
109a
• Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to share an
outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices. Be
especially careful when using extension cords—the total
power used by all devices you have connected to the
extension cord’s outlet must never exceed the power
rating (watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive
loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and
eventually melt through.
• Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and unplug
the power cord from the outlet.
..........................................................................................................
016
..........................................................................................................
110a
• Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your
area, pull the plug on the power cord out of the outlet.
..........................................................................................................
115a
• Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult with
your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an
authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.
• Install only the specified circuit board(s) (SRX Series).
Remove only the specified screws (p. 203).
..........................................................................................................
• Should you remove screws, make sure to put them in a
safe place out of children's reach, so there is no chance of
them being swallowed accidentally.
022a
• Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord
before attempting installation of the circuit board (SRX
Series; p. 203).
..........................................................................................................
118
..........................................................................................................
023
• DO NOT play a CD-ROM disc on a conventional audio
CD player. The resulting sound may be of a level that
could cause permanent hearing loss. Damage to speakers
or other system components may result.
..........................................................................................................
101a
• The unit should be located so that its location or position
does not interfere with its proper ventilation.
..........................................................................................................
101c
• This unit for use only with Roland stand KS-12 (FantomS)/KS-17(Fantom-S88). Use with other stands is capable
of resulting in instability causing possible injury.
Before using the stand, be sure to read the owner's
manual included with it.
..........................................................................................................
102b
• Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply cord
when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this
unit.
..........................................................................................................
104
• Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming
entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be placed so
they are out of the reach of children.
..........................................................................................................
106
• Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on the
unit.
..........................................................................................................
107b
• Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet hands
when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this
unit.
..........................................................................................................
108a
• Before moving the unit, disconnect the power plug from
the outlet, and pull out all cords from external devices.
..........................................................................................................
4
The display screens printed in this owner's
manual are based on the factory settings.
However, please be aware that in some cases
they may differ from the actual factory settings.
Reference_e.book 5 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
IMPORTANT NOTES
291b
553
In addition to the items listed under “IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS” and “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on pages 2
and 3, please read and observe the following:
• Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s buttons,
sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks and
connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.
Power Supply
• When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the connector
itself—never pull on the cable. This way you will avoid causing
shorts, or damage to the cable’s internal elements.
301
• Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any device
that will generate line noise (such as an electric motor or variable
lighting system).
307
• Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the power to
all units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/or damage to
speakers or other devices.
Placement
351
• Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment
containing large power transformers) may induce hum. To
alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this unit; or move
it farther away from the source of interference.
352a
• This device may interfere with radio and television reception. Do
not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers.
352b
• Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices, such
as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of this unit. Such noise
could occur when receiving or initiating a call, or while
conversing. Should you experience such problems, you should
relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance
from this unit, or switch them off.
354a
• Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near devices
that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed vehicle, or otherwise
subject it to temperature extremes. Excessive heat can deform or
discolor the unit.
355b
• When moved from one location to another where the temperature and/or humidity is very different, water droplets (condensation) may form inside the unit. Damage or malfunction may
result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition. Therefore,
before using the unit, you must allow it to stand for several
hours, until the condensation has completely evaporated.
556
557
• A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal
operation.
558a
• To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s volume
at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use headphones, so you
do not need to be concerned about those around you (especially
when it is late at night).
559a
• When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box
(including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise, you
will need to use equivalent packaging materials.
561
• Use only the specified expression pedal (DP-8; sold separately).
By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk causing
malfunction and/or damage to the unit.
562
• Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using some
other make of connection cable, please note the following precautions.
• Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use cables
that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit. The use
of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low,
or impossible to hear. For information on cable specifications,
contact the manufacturer of the cable.
Before Using Cards
704
• Carefully insert the memory card all the way in—until it is firmly
in place.
358
• Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard. This can
be the cause of malfunction, such as keys ceasing to produce
sound.
Maintenance
401a
• For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry cloth or one
that has been slightly dampened with water. To remove stubborn
dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a mild, non-abrasive detergent.
Afterwards, be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry
cloth.
402
• Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any kind, to
avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or deformation.
Additional Precautions
551
• Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably
lost as a result of a malfunction, or the improper operation of the
unit. To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important
data, we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of
important data you have stored in the memory card.
552
• Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents of
data that was stored in the unit’s memory once it has been lost.
Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of
data.
705
• Never touch the terminals of the memory card. Also, avoid
getting the terminals dirty.
Handling CD-ROMs
801
• Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside (encoded
surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-ROM discs may not be
read properly. Keep your discs clean using a commercially
available CD cleaner.
Copyright
851
• Unauthorized recording, distribution, sale, lending, public
performance, broadcasting, or the like, in whole or in part, of a
work (musical composition, video, broadcast, public performance, or the like) whose copyright is held by a third party is
prohibited by law.
853
• Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a
copyright held by a third party. We assume no responsibility
whatsoever with regard to any infringements of third-party
copyrights arising through your use of this unit.
554
• Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
5
Reference_e.book 6 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Contents
USING THE UNIT SAFELY ......................................................................................... 3
IMPORTANT NOTES .................................................................................................. 5
Main Features ........................................................................................................... 13
Panel Descriptions................................................................................................... 14
Overview of the Fantom-S....................................................................................... 17
How the Fantom-S Is Organized............................................................................................................ 17
About Memory.......................................................................................................................................... 19
About the Onboard Effects ..................................................................................................................... 20
About the Sequencer ................................................................................................................................ 21
About the Sampling Section.................................................................................................................... 23
Basic Operation of the Fantom-S............................................................................................................ 24
Playing in Patch Mode ............................................................................................. 26
About the Patch Play Screen ................................................................................................................... 26
Displaying Patch Play Screen ...................................................................................................... 26
Selecting a Patch ....................................................................................................................................... 27
Selecting Favorite Patches (Favorite Sound) ............................................................................. 28
Selecting Patches from the List.................................................................................................... 28
Auditioning Patches (Phrase Preview) ...................................................................................... 29
Selecting Patches by Category (Patch Finder) .......................................................................... 29
Registering a Favorite Patch (Favorite Sound) ......................................................................... 30
Registering Favorite Rhythm Sets (Favorite Sound)................................................................ 31
Transposing the Keyboard in Octave Units (Octave Shift) ................................................................ 31
Transposing the Keyboard in Semitone Steps (Transpose)................................................................ 32
Selecting the Tones That Will Sound (Tone On/Off).......................................................................... 32
Playing Single Notes (Mono) .................................................................................................................. 32
Creating Smooth Pitch Changes (Portamento) .................................................................................... 33
Selecting the Parameter Controlled by the Realtime Controllers or
D Beam Controller (Control Setting) ..................................................................................................... 33
Specifying the Part that Will be Affected by the Controller ................................................... 33
Assigning a Parameter to a Controller....................................................................................... 34
Playing Percussion Instruments............................................................................................................. 37
Selecting a Rhythm Set ................................................................................................................. 37
Playing a Rhythm Set ................................................................................................................... 38
Creating a Patch....................................................................................................... 39
How to Make the Patch Settings ............................................................................................................ 39
Editing in a Graphic Display (Zoom Edit) ................................................................................ 40
Initializing Patch Settings (Init)................................................................................................... 40
Copying Patch (Tone) Settings (Copy)....................................................................................... 40
Cautions When Selecting a Waveform ...................................................................................... 41
Saving Patches You’ve Created (Write) ................................................................................................ 42
Auditioning the Save-Destination Patch (Compare) ............................................................... 42
Functions of Patch Parameters ............................................................................................................... 43
Settings Common to the Entire Patch (General)....................................................................... 43
Modifying Waveforms (Wave) ................................................................................................... 45
Changing How a Tone Is Sounded (TMT) ................................................................................ 46
Modifying Pitch (Pitch/Pitch Env)............................................................................................. 49
Modifying the Brightness of a Sound with a Filter (TVF/TVF Env)..................................... 50
Adjusting the Volume (TVA/TVA Env) ................................................................................... 53
Modulating Sounds (LFO) ........................................................................................................... 56
Apply Portamento or Legato to the Sound (Solo Porta) ......................................................... 58
Miscellaneous Settings (Misc.) .................................................................................................... 60
Matrix Control Settings (Ctrl1–4)................................................................................................ 61
Setting Effects for a Patch (Effects/MFX/MFX Control/Chorus/Reverb) .......................... 63
6
Reference_e.book 7 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Contents
Creating a Rhythm Set............................................................................................. 64
How to Make the Rhythm Set Settings ................................................................................................. 64
Editing in a Graphic Display (Zoom Edit) ................................................................................ 64
Initializing Rhythm Set Settings (Init)........................................................................................ 65
Copying Rhythm Tone Settings (Copy)..................................................................................... 65
Cautions When Selecting a Waveform ...................................................................................... 66
Saving Rhythm Sets You’ve Created (Write) ....................................................................................... 66
Auditioning the Save-Destination Rhythm Set (Compare) .................................................... 67
Functions of Rhythm Set Parameters .................................................................................................... 67
Making Settings Common to the Entire Rhythm Set (General) ............................................. 67
Modifying Waveforms (Wave) ................................................................................................... 68
Changing How a Rhythm Tone Is Sounded (WMT) ............................................................... 70
Modifying Pitch (Pitch/Pitch Env)............................................................................................. 71
Modifying the Brightness of a Sound with a Filter (TVF/TVF Env)..................................... 72
Adjusting the Volume (TVA/TVA Env) ................................................................................... 73
Output Settings.............................................................................................................................. 75
Setting Effects for a Rhythm Set (Effects/MFX/MFX Control/Chorus/Reverb) ............... 75
Playing in Performance Mode................................................................................. 76
Displaying Performance Layer Screen .................................................................................................. 76
Displaying Performance Mixer Screen.................................................................................................. 76
Functions in the PERFORMANCE Layer/Mixer Screen ........................................................ 77
Selecting a Performance........................................................................................................................... 78
Selecting Performances from the List......................................................................................... 78
Selecting Favorite Performances (Favorite Sound) .................................................................. 78
Registering a Favorite Performance (Favorite Sound) ............................................................ 79
Using the Layer Screen ............................................................................................................................ 79
Selecting a Part .............................................................................................................................. 79
Selecting the Part that You want to Sound................................................................................ 79
Selecting the Sound for a Part ..................................................................................................... 79
Combining and Playing Sounds Together (Layer) .................................................................. 80
Playing Different Sounds in Different Areas of the Keyboard (Split) ................................... 80
Using the Mixer Screen............................................................................................................................ 81
Selecting a Part .............................................................................................................................. 81
Selecting the Sound for a Part ..................................................................................................... 81
Editing the Part Settings............................................................................................................... 82
Selecting a Part to Play Individually (Solo)............................................................................... 82
Silencing the Playback of a Specific Part (Mute) ...................................................................... 82
Viewing the Part Settings as a List (Performance Part View) ............................................................ 83
Performing with the Arpeggio/Rhythm function ................................................................... 83
Performing with the Realtime Controllers and D Beam Controller ...................................... 83
Confirming MIDI Information for Each Part (Part Information) ...................................................... 83
Creating a Performance........................................................................................... 84
Viewing the Part Settings as a List (Performance Part View) ............................................................ 84
Adjusting the Parameters of Each Part ................................................................................................. 84
Selecting the Parameter Controlled by the Realtime Controllers or
D Beam Controller (Control Setting) ..................................................................................................... 91
Make Settings for the Realtime Controllers and D Beam Controller (Ctrl).......................... 92
Setting Effects for a Performance (Effects/MFX/MFX Control/Chorus/Reverb) ............. 95
Changing the Settings of the Patch Assigned to a Part....................................................................... 95
Initializing Performance Settings (Init) ................................................................................................. 96
Saving Performance You’ve Created (Write) ....................................................................................... 96
Modifying the Sound in Real Time ......................................................................... 98
Waving Your Hand Over the D Beam to Modify the Sound (D Beam Controller) ........................ 98
Making Settings for the D Beam Controller .............................................................................. 98
Using Knobs or Buttons to Modify the Sound (Realtime Controller) ............................................ 101
7
Reference_e.book 8 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Contents
Making Realtime Controller Settings ....................................................................................... 101
Using a Pedal to Modify the Sound (Control Pedal)......................................................................... 102
Making Control Pedal Settings ................................................................................................. 102
Playing Arpeggios (ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM Function) .......................................... 104
About Arpeggio ...................................................................................................................................... 104
Playing Arpeggios .................................................................................................................................. 104
Turning Arpeggio On and Off .................................................................................................. 104
Determining the Tempo for Arpeggio Performances............................................................ 104
Holding an Arpeggio.................................................................................................................. 104
Turning Arpeggio Switch On and Off ..................................................................................... 105
Arpeggio Settings ................................................................................................................................... 105
Selecting Styles for Arpeggio Performances (Arpeggio Style) ............................................. 105
Changing the Beat and Shuffle (Grid)...................................................................................... 106
Applying Staccato and Tenuto (Duration) .............................................................................. 106
Selecting Ascending/Descending Variations (Different Ways of Playing the Sounds) (Motif)....... 106
Adjusting the Velocity of the Arpeggio (Arpeggio Velocity)............................................... 106
Selecting the Part that Will Play Arpeggios in Performance Mode (Part).......................... 107
Hanging the Range of the Arpeggio (Octave Range) ............................................................ 107
Changing the Accent Strength (Accent Rate).......................................................................... 107
Using the Realtime Control Knobs to Edit the Arpeggio Settings....................................... 107
Creating Your Own Styles..................................................................................................................... 107
Saving the Styles You Have Created (WRITE)................................................................................... 109
Using the Chord Memory Function (CHORD MEMORY) .................................... 110
About the Chord Memory Function.................................................................................................... 110
Performing with the Chord Memory Function.................................................................................. 110
Turning Chord Memory Function On and Off....................................................................... 110
Selecting Chord Forms ............................................................................................................... 110
Creating Your Own Chord Forms ....................................................................................................... 111
Saving the Chord Forms You Have Created ...................................................................................... 111
Playing Rhythms .................................................................................................... 112
About Rhythm Patterns......................................................................................................................... 112
Using Rhythm Groups........................................................................................................................... 112
Playing Rhythm ...................................................................................................................................... 112
Turning Rhythm On and Off..................................................................................................... 112
Determining the Tempo for Rhythm Pattern Performances ................................................ 112
Select the Rhythm Group........................................................................................................... 113
Rhythm Pattern Settings........................................................................................................................ 113
Selecting Rhythm Patterns......................................................................................................... 113
Changing the Beat and Shuffle (Grid)...................................................................................... 113
Applying Staccato and Tenuity (Duration)............................................................................. 114
Changing the velocity of Rhythm Pattern (Rhythm Pattern Velocity) ............................... 114
Changing the Accent Strength (Accent Rate).......................................................................... 114
Using the Realtime Control Knobs to Control the Rhythm .................................................. 114
Turning Rhythm Switch On and Off........................................................................................ 114
Creating Your Own Styles (Rhythm Pattern Edit) ............................................................................ 115
Saving the Patterns You Have Created (WRITE) .............................................................................. 116
Creating Your Own Styles (Rhythm Group Edit).............................................................................. 116
Saving the Rhythm Group You Have Created (WRITE) .................................................................. 117
Sampling ................................................................................................................. 118
Making Input Source Settings (INPUT SETTING) ............................................................................ 118
Input Effect Setup Settings.................................................................................................................... 119
Sampling Procedure............................................................................................................................... 119
Dividing a Sample During Sampling ....................................................................................... 121
Sampling Earlier in Time (Skip Back Sampling)................................................................................ 121
8
Reference_e.book 9 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Contents
Editing a Sample .................................................................................................... 122
Selecting a Sample (Sample List).......................................................................................................... 122
Selecting a Sample....................................................................................................................... 122
Loading a Sample........................................................................................................................ 123
Loading all Samples.................................................................................................................... 123
Unloading a Sample.................................................................................................................... 123
Deleting a Sample ....................................................................................................................... 123
Importing a Audio File............................................................................................................... 124
Displaying Sample Edit Screen ............................................................................................................ 124
Magnifying/Shrinking the Waveform Display (Zoom In/Out).......................................... 124
Setting the Start/End Points of the Sample........................................................................................ 125
Making Settings for Sample (Sample Parameters) ............................................................................ 125
Assigning Samples to a Pad (Assign To Pad) .................................................................................... 126
From Patch Mode ........................................................................................................................ 126
From Performance Mode ........................................................................................................... 126
Assigning a Sample as a Patch to a Part (Assign to Keyboard)....................................................... 127
From Patch Mode ........................................................................................................................ 127
From Performance Mode ........................................................................................................... 127
Create a Rhythm Set (Create Rhythm) ................................................................................................ 128
Creating a Multisample (Create Multisample) .................................................................................. 128
Unloading a Sample (Unload) .............................................................................................................. 129
Removing Unwanted Portions of a Sample (Truncate) .................................................................... 129
Boosting or Limiting the High-frequency Range of the Sample (Emphasis) ................................ 130
Maximizing the Volume of a Sample (Normalize)............................................................................ 130
Amp .......................................................................................................................................................... 131
Stretching or Shrinking a Sample (Time Stretch)............................................................................... 131
Dividing a Sample into Notes (Chop) ................................................................................................. 132
Procedure for Dividing a Sample ............................................................................................. 132
Automatically Dividing a Sample (Auto Chop) ..................................................................... 132
Auditioning the Divided Samples ............................................................................................ 133
Joining Two or More Samples (Combine) .......................................................................................... 133
Saving a Sample...................................................................................................................................... 134
Using the Pads ....................................................................................................... 135
Using the Hold Function to Sustain a Sound ..................................................................................... 135
Using the Roll Function to Play Sounds.............................................................................................. 135
Using the Clipboard to Copy Pad Settings......................................................................................... 136
Copying one Pad Setting............................................................................................................ 136
Copying Two or More Pad Setting........................................................................................... 136
Adjusting the Pad Settings (PAD SETTING) ..................................................................................... 136
Multi-Velocity.............................................................................................................................. 137
Assigning a Pattern to a Pad (RPS Function) ..................................................................................... 137
Using the Pads to Play Rhythms .......................................................................................................... 137
Playing Back a Song.............................................................................................. 138
Playing a Song Immediately (Quick Play).......................................................................................... 138
Playing Back Songs Consecutively (Chain Play) ............................................................................... 138
Various Playback Methods ................................................................................................................... 139
Fast-Forward and Rewind During Playback .......................................................................... 139
Playing Back Correctly from the Middle of the Song (MIDI Update)................................. 139
Muting the Playback of a Specific Instrument ........................................................................ 139
Changing the Playback Tempo of a Song................................................................................ 139
Playing a Song Back at a Fixed Tempo (Muting the Tempo Track) .................................... 140
Playing Back a S-MRC Format Song ........................................................................................ 140
Playing Back a Song Repeatedly (Loop Play) ......................................................................... 140
Using the D Beam Controller to Start/Stop Song Playback ................................................. 140
9
Reference_e.book 10 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Contents
Recording Songs ................................................................................................... 141
Two Recording Methods............................................................................................................ 141
Before You Record a New Song ........................................................................................................... 141
Select the Sound to be Used for Recording ............................................................................. 141
Erasing the Song/Pattern from Internal Memory (Song Clear)........................................... 141
Specify the Time Signature ........................................................................................................ 141
Recording Your Performance as You Play It (Realtime Recording) ............................................... 142
Basic Operation for Realtime Recording ................................................................................. 142
Recording Tempo Changes in a Song (Tempo Recording)................................................... 143
Loop Recording and Punch-In Recording............................................................................... 143
Correct the Timing of Your Playing as You Record (Recording Quantize) ....................... 144
Selecting the Sequencer Data that will Be Recorded (Recording Select) ............................ 145
Erasing Unwanted Data While You Record (Realtime Erase).............................................. 145
Auditioning Sounds or Phrases While Recording (Rehearsal Function)............................ 145
Inputting Data One Step at a Time (Step Recording)........................................................................ 146
Inputting Notes and Rests ......................................................................................................... 146
Assigning a Pattern to a Phrase Track ..................................................................................... 148
Editing Songs ......................................................................................................... 149
Loading the Song You Want to Edit .................................................................................................... 149
Loading Individual Tracks/Patterns of Song Data................................................................ 149
Using Different Sound Generators for Each Track ................................................................ 150
Silencing the Playback of a Track (Mute) ................................................................................ 150
Assigning Markers (Locate Positions) to a Song .................................................................... 150
Specifying the Area of a Song that will Repeat (Loop Points).............................................. 151
Editing Sequencer Data Over the Specified Range (Track Edit) ..................................................... 151
Basic Operation for Track Editing ............................................................................................ 151
Aligning a Song’s Timing (Quantize) ...................................................................................... 152
Erasing Unwanted Performance Data (Erase) ........................................................................ 154
Deleting Unwanted Measures (Delete).................................................................................... 155
Copying Phrases (Copy) ............................................................................................................ 155
Inserting a Blank Measure (Insert) ........................................................................................... 156
Transpose the Key (Transpose)................................................................................................. 156
Changing the Velocity (Volume) (Change Velocity) ............................................................. 157
Changing the MIDI Channel (Change Channel) .................................................................... 158
Modifying the Length of Notes (Change Duration) .............................................................. 158
Combining Two Phrase Tracks or Patterns into One (Merge) ............................................. 159
Extracting and Moving a Part of Sequencer Data (Extract) .................................................. 159
Shifting Performance Data Forward and Back (Shift Clock) ................................................ 160
Thinning Out the Sequencer Data (Data Thin) ....................................................................... 161
Swapping Two Phrase Tracks or Patterns (Exchange) .......................................................... 161
Adjusting the Song’s Playback Time (Time Fit) ..................................................................... 162
Deleting Blank Measures (Truncate) ........................................................................................ 162
Editing Individual Items of Sequencer Data (Micro Edit)................................................................ 162
Editing Sequencer Data (Basic Procedure in the Microscope).............................................. 162
Sequencer Data Handled by a Phrase Track/Pattern............................................................ 163
Viewing Sequencer Data (View) ............................................................................................... 164
Inserting Sequencer Data (Create) ............................................................................................ 165
Erasing Sequencer Data (Erase) ................................................................................................ 165
Moving Sequencer Data (Move) ............................................................................................... 165
Copying Sequencer Data (Copy) .............................................................................................. 166
Changing the Tempo Midway Through the Song ................................................................. 166
Changing the Time Signature Midway Through the Song................................................... 167
Assigning a Name to a Song (Song Name)......................................................................................... 167
Saving/Loading a song (SAVE/LOAD) ................................................................. 168
Saving a Song (Save) .............................................................................................................................. 168
Basic Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 168
10
Reference_e.book 11 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Contents
Saving a Song with Samples (Save Song+Samples)............................................................... 168
Saving a Song (Save Song) ......................................................................................................... 169
Saving Samples (Save All Samples).......................................................................................... 169
Saving a Song as an SMF File (Save as SMF)...................................................................................... 170
Loading a Song (Load)........................................................................................................................... 170
Basic Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 170
Loading a Song with Samples (Load Song+Samples) ........................................................... 171
Loading a song (Load Song)...................................................................................................... 171
Loading Samples (Load All Samples) ...................................................................................... 171
Importing a WAV/AIFF File (Import Audio).................................................................................... 171
Playing a Phrase at the Touch of a Finger (RPS Function)................................ 172
Before You Use the RPS Function ........................................................................................................ 172
Record a Pattern .......................................................................................................................... 172
Settings for the RPS Function .................................................................................................... 172
Using the RPS Function While You Perform...................................................................................... 173
Recording a Performance Using the RPS Function................................................................ 174
Adding Effects........................................................................................................ 175
Turning Effects On and Off................................................................................................................... 175
Making Effect Settings ........................................................................................................................... 175
Applying Effects in Patch Mode .......................................................................................................... 175
Specifying How the Sound Will Be Output (Routing) .......................................................... 175
Signal Flow Diagram and Parameters ..................................................................................... 176
Applying Effects in Performance Mode.............................................................................................. 178
Specifying How the Sound Will Be Output (Routing) .......................................................... 178
Signal Flow Diagram and Parameters ..................................................................................... 178
Making Multi-Effects Settings (MFX1–3) ............................................................................................ 180
Making Multi-Effects Settings (MFX Control) ................................................................................... 181
Specifying the multi-effect structure (MFX Structure)...................................................................... 182
Making Chorus Settings (Chorus) ....................................................................................................... 182
Making Reverb Settings (Reverb) ........................................................................................................ 182
Mastering Effect...................................................................................................................................... 183
Transferring Data to/from Your Computer via USB ............................................ 184
Before You Use USB Connection.......................................................................................................... 184
Connections.................................................................................................................................. 184
Specify the Connection-Destination Area (USB) .................................................................... 184
Cautions Regarding Folders and Files ..................................................................................... 184
Importing Audio file (Import Audio).................................................................................................. 185
Using a Bitmap File as a Background in the Display ........................................................................ 185
Importing a Bitmap File (Import BMP).................................................................................... 185
Canceling USB Communication........................................................................................................... 186
File-Related Functions (File Utility) ...................................................................... 187
Basic Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 187
Copying a File (COPY) .......................................................................................................................... 187
Deleting a File (DELETE) ...................................................................................................................... 187
Moving a File (MOVE)........................................................................................................................... 187
Initializing a Memory Card (Format) .................................................................................................. 187
Settings Common to All Modes (System Function)............................................ 188
How to Make the System Function Settings....................................................................................... 188
Saving the System Settings (Write) ...................................................................................................... 188
Functions of System Parameters .......................................................................................................... 189
Pedal/D Beam ............................................................................................................................. 189
Keyboard ...................................................................................................................................... 189
System Ctrl ................................................................................................................................... 190
Screen Saver ................................................................................................................................. 190
11
Reference_e.book 12 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Contents
Background .................................................................................................................................. 190
Sync/Temp .................................................................................................................................. 190
Metronome................................................................................................................................... 192
MIDI .............................................................................................................................................. 192
Sound ............................................................................................................................................ 193
Preview ......................................................................................................................................... 194
Scale Tune..................................................................................................................................... 194
Sampling....................................................................................................................................... 195
Start up.......................................................................................................................................... 195
System Information ................................................................................................................................ 195
Data Management Functions
Reset to Default Factory Settings (Factory Reset) ............................................. 196
Basic Procedure....................................................................................................................................... 196
Backing Up User Data (User Backup) ................................................................................................. 196
Restoring User Data that You Backed Up (User Restore) ................................................................ 196
Factory Reset ........................................................................................................................................... 196
Playing in Piano Mode ........................................................................................... 197
Selecting Piano Mode............................................................................................................................. 197
Selecting a Patch ..................................................................................................................................... 197
Selecting Patches by Category................................................................................................... 197
Selecting from the Patch List Screen......................................................................................... 197
Changing the Piano Sound (Open/Close).......................................................................................... 197
Adjusting the Keyboard Touch (Key Touch) ..................................................................................... 198
Adjusting the Depth of Resonance (Resonance) ................................................................................ 198
Saving a Sound (Patch) .......................................................................................................................... 198
Using Fantom-S Editor .......................................................................................... 199
Installing Fantom-S Editor into Your Computer ............................................................................... 199
Making Connections .............................................................................................................................. 199
Using Fantom-S Librarian ..................................................................................................................... 199
Fantom-S Editor System Requirements .............................................................................................. 199
System Requirements (Windows) ............................................................................................ 199
System Requirements (Mac OS)................................................................................................ 200
About V-LINK.......................................................................................................... 201
Installing the Wave Expansion Board .................................................................. 203
Installation de la carte d’expansion Wave ........................................................... 205
Expanding the Memory.......................................................................................... 207
Ajouter de la mémoire ........................................................................................... 209
Troubleshooting..................................................................................................... 211
Problems Concerning the Entire Fantom-S ............................................................................. 211
Issues Related to Sound ............................................................................................................. 211
Issues Related to Effects ............................................................................................................. 213
Issues Related to Saving Data ................................................................................................... 213
Issues Related to Sequencer....................................................................................................... 214
Issues Related to MIDI and External Devices ......................................................................... 215
Issues Related to Sampling ........................................................................................................ 215
Issues Related to a Memory Card............................................................................................. 216
Specifications......................................................................................................... 217
Index........................................................................................................................ 218
12
Reference_e.book 13 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Main Features
Speedy music production
Mastering functionality
The “S” in Fantom-S stands for its advanced studio functionality and
its powerful sampling capabilities. Careful attention has been paid to
the quality and diversity of its internal sounds. Its rich array of
internal sounds can be expanded by installing up to four wave
expansion boards (SRX series). In addition, you can utilize the
sampling functions to create your own sounds. A powerful
sequencer and numerous performance functions that enhance your
musical creativity are also built in, making music production fast
and efficient.
The large panel LCD keeps you informed of the operating status
from all angles. In particular, the Mixer screen displays the volume,
pan, and effect send level of each part, just as if you were seated at a
studio console.
78 (Fantom-S: 77) different multi-effects, chorus, and reverb are
provided. Since the mastering effects that are indispensable as the
final step of the music production process are also provided, you can
create songs with a level of quality that approaches a commercially
released CD.
Newly developed synthesizer sounds
The completely new wave ROM was developed with one idea:
deliver maximum inspiration to the artist. The Fantom-S contains a
top-quality synthesizer sound generator. Workhorse sounds like
strings and piano have been further upgraded, and the wide range of
built-in sounds include new sounds that foreshadow the music scene
of the future.
Heavy-duty sampler
The Fantom-S features a high-performance 44.1 kHz sampler. Audio
data that you sample can be used as wave data in the same way as
the internal sounds or wave expansion boards (SRX series) to create
original sounds. Multisamples are also supported. The full range of
sample-manipulating functions, such as Chop and Normalize, rivals
the capabilities of a dedicated sampler. Thirty-two megabytes of
sampling memory is standard, and you can add expansion DIMM
modules to expand the sampling memory to as much as 288
megabytes.
Skip-back sampling function
The Fantom-S is constantly recording what you play. You can cut a
several-beat phrase of your prior playing and play it back from the
pads. This unique function is a great way to capture your
improvisations, and can be used in a wide range of situations.
Built-in 16-track sequencer
A high-resolution 16-track sequencer is built in. With functions like
Loop recording that lets you record each part non-stop, it’s designed
not to interfere with your creative imagination. After you’ve input
your data, you can take advantage of the large LCD to edit track data
graphically.
Dynamic pad bank
The Fantom-S features a dynamic pad bank that is sensitive to
velocity and aftertouch. They can be used as trigger pads to play
favorite sounds like hits or bass sounds, to recall RPS sequence
phrases, or assigned to play skip back-sampled phrases. In another
idea, rhythm sounds that were “chopped” from a loop phrase can be
assigned to the pads and played for realtime input into the
sequencer.
USB connection to your computer, and
SmartMedia support
The Fantom-S can be connected to your computer with just a single
USB cable, allowing sophisticated linked functions such as
importing and exporting audio data.
Fantom-S88 features a Piano mode
The Fantom-S88 has an 88-note progressive hammer action
keyboard, and a Piano mode that lets you press a single button and
use the instrument as a dedicated piano.
V-LINK functionality
V-LINK lets you synchronize music and images to create completely
new forms of expression. Realtime controllers such as the D Beam
controller and the dynamic pads can be used to control images while
you perform music.
Fantom-S Editor/Librarian included
The included editor and librarian software lets you edit and manage
Fantom-S sounds from your computer.
General MIDI
General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to
provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary
designs, and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound
generating devices. Sound generating devices and music files
that meet the General MIDI standard bear the General MIDI
logo (
). Music files bearing the General MIDI logo can be
played back using any General MIDI sound generating unit to
produce essentially the same musical performance.
General MIDI 2
The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 (
)
recommendations pick up where the original General MIDI left
off, offering enhanced expressive capabilities, and even greater
compatibility. Issues that were not covered by the original
General MIDI recommendations, such as how sounds are to be
edited, and how effects should be handled, have now been
precisely defined. Moreover, the available sounds have been
expanded. General MIDI 2 compliant sound generators are
capable of reliably playing back music files that carry either the
General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo.
In some cases, the conventional form of General MIDI, which
does not include the new enhancements, is referred to as
“General MIDI 1” as a way of distinguishing it from General
MIDI 2.
13
Reference_e.book 14 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Panel Descriptions
Front Panel
fig.00-01S88
1
2
4
9
14
10
12
7
5
15
3
6
8
11
13
[-OCT], [+OCT]
1
D BEAM
Transposes the pitch of the keyboard in 1 octave units (-3- +3
octaves).
You can apply a variety of effects to sounds simply by moving your
hand. → (p. 98)
Switches RPS on/off.
ASSIGNABLE
Turn on the D Beam function for the Keyboard part or pad part. →
(p. 98)
PAD TRIGGER
Instead of striking the pads themselves, you can also use the D Beam
controller to control the sounding of the pads. → (p. 99)
[RPS]
5
Perform functions related to the arpeggio, rhythm pattern, chord
memory function. → (p. 104, p. 110, p. 112)
[ON/OFF]
Switches the arpeggio and Rhythm on/off.
SOLO SYNTH
[ARPEGGIO HOLD]
Play the Fantom-S as a monophonic synthesizer. → (p. 100)
Switches the Arpeggio Hold function on/off.
* Hold down [SHIFT] and press one of the corresponding buttons to
access the D Beam setting screen.
2
EXT SOURCE
Make external input settings. → (p. 118)
[CHORD MEMORY]
Switches the Chord Memory function on/off.
[SELECT/EDIT]
Make arpeggio, rhythm and chord memory settings.
[BEAT] (Beat Indicator)
3
This blinks in sync with the tempo and beat of the song.
[VOLUME]
Adjusts the overall volume that is output from the rear panel
OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks and PHONES jack. → (Quick Start; p. 4)
Make V-Link settings. → (p. 201)
Moves the song position to the first beat of the previous measure. →
(p. 138)
]REALTIME CONTROL knob
You can assign a variety of parameters and functions to the four
knobs and use them to modify the sound in realtime. → (p. 33)
The operation will depend on the parameter or function that is
assigned.
], [
]ASSIGNABLE switch
You can assign a variety of parameters and functions to the tow
buttons and use them to modify the sound in realtime. → (p. 33)
The operation will depend on the parameter or function that is
assigned.
14
Moves the song position to the first measure. → (p. 138)
[BWD]
4
[
Perform sequencer operations such as playback and record.
[RESET]
[V-LINK]
[
6
[FWD]
Moves the song position to the first beat of the next measure. → (p. 138)
[Play]
Controls sequencer play.
[STOP]
Controls sequencer stop.
While stopped, you can hold down [SHIFT] and Press [PLAY] to
perform MIDI Update. → (p. 138)
Reference_e.book 15 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Panel Descriptions
[REC]
[CURSOR]
The display changes to the Recording Standby window. Æ (p. 142)
If you press this during recording, the Rehearsal function will be
activated. → (p. 145)
Moves the cursor location up/down/left/right.
7
Display
This displays information regarding the operation you are
performing
8
[MENU]
Opens the MENU. The contents of the menu will depend on the
current mode.
[1]–[8]
During editing, these buttons execute a variety of functions, and
their function will differ depending on the screen.
[TEMPO]
Sets the tempo (BPM). → (p. 139)
9
LCD CONTRAST knob
Adjusts the display contrast. → (Quick Start; p. 5)
[WRITE]
Save edited settings into internal memory or a memory card.
→ (p. 42, p. 66, p. 96, p. 134, p. 168)
[EDIT]
[SHIFT]/[JUMP]
This button is used in conjunction with other buttons to execute
various functions.
[ENTER]
Use this button to execute an operation.
[EXIT]
Return to the previous screen, or close the currently open window.
In some screens, this causes the currently executing function to be
aborted.
12
[SAMPLE EDIT]
Edit a sample. → (p. 124)
[SAMPLE LIST]
View the sample list. → (p. 122)
[SAMPLING]
View the Sampling Menu screen. → (p. 119)
[SKIP BACK SAMPLING]
Sample the performance for a specified duration prior to the moment
you pressed the button. → (p. 121)
[PAD SETTING]
Make pad settings. → (p. 19)
[CLIP BOARD]
Stores pad velocity and note number. → (p. 136)
Make various settings.
[SAVE/LOAD]
[SONG EDIT]
Saves/loads data in the internal memory (p. 19) or sample memory
(p. 23) to/from internal memory or a memory card.
Make settings for song data and song edit. → (p. 138)
[EFFECTS]
Make effect-related settings. Here you can also make mastering
settings. → (p. 175)
10
[MIXER]
View the Performance mode’s Mixer screen. → (p. 76)
[LAYER/SPLIT]
View the Performance mode’s Layer screen. → (p. 76)
[PATCH/RHYTHM]
Enter Patch/Rhythm mode. → (p. 27)
11
VALUE Dial
This is used to modify values. If you hold down [SHIFT] as you turn
the VALUE dial, the value will change in greater increments.
[DEC], [INC]
This is used to modify values. If you keep on holding down one
button while pressing the other, the value change accelerates. If you
press one of these buttons while holding down [SHIFT], the value
will change in bigger increments.
[PAD 1–16]
Use as a keyboard to play sound.
[ROLL]
Turn “roll” playback on/off. → (p. 135)
[HOLD]
Turn “hold” (sustaining the sound after you release the pad) on/off.
→(p. 135)
13
Pitch Bend/Modulation Lever
This allows you to control pitch bend or apply vibrato.
14
Here you can install a wave expansion board (SRX series) or install
separately sold memory. On the Fantom-S this is located on the
bottom panel. → (p. 203)
15
[PIANO MODE]
Switches to a special mode optimal for playing piano sounds. This
button is found only on the Fantom-S88. → (p. 197)
15
Reference_e.book 16 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Panel Descriptions
Rear Panel
fig.00-02
fig.00-03
DIGITAL OUT Connectors
(S/P DIF OPTICAL, S/P DIF COAXIAL)
The Fantom-S features both optical and coaxial digital out
connectors (conforming to S/P DIF).
These connectors output a digital audio signal (stereo). The output
signal is identical to the signal that is output from the OUTPUT A
(MIX) jacks.
POWER ON Switch
Press to turn the power on/off. → (Quick Start; p. 4)
AC Inlet
* S/P DIF is a digital interface format used for consumer digital audio
devices.
fig.00-07
Connect the included power cord to this inlet. → (Quick Start; p. 3)
SmartMedia card slot
Insert a SmartMedia card (3.3V, maximum 128 MB) here.
USB Connector
OUTPUT A (MIX) Jacks (L (MONO), R)
This connector lets you use a USB cable to connect your computer to
the Fantom-S. → (p. 184)
These jacks output the audio signal to the connected mixer/amplifier
system in stereo. For mono output, use the L jack. → (Quick Start; p. 3)
fig.00-04
OUTPUT B Jacks (L, R)
These jacks output the audio signal to the connected mixer/amplifier
system in stereo.
CTL (CONTROL) PEDAL Jack
You can connect optional expression pedals (DP-8, etc.) to these
jacks. By assigning a desired function to a pedal, you can use it to
select or modify sound or perform various other control. You can
also connect optional pedal switches (DP series etc.) to sustain
sound. → (Quick Start; p. 26)
HOLD PEDAL Jack
An optional pedal switch (DP series etc.) can be connected to this
jack for use as a hold pedal. → (Quick Start; p. 26)
This can also be set so it supports the use of half-pedaling
techniques. So, after connecting an optional expression pedal (DP-8,
etc.), you can employ pedal work to achieve even finer control in
performances in which piano tones are used. → (p. 33)
fig.00-05
MIDI Connectors (IN, OUT, THRU)
These connectors can be connected to other MIDI devices to receive
and transmit MIDI messages.
fig.00-06
16
INDIVIDUAL 1–4 Jacks
These jacks output audio signals in mono to an amp or mixer.
The setting determining whether these jacks are used as stereo
OUTPUT jacks or monaural INDIVIDUAL jacks is made with the
Output Assign setting (p. 176, p. 176).
AUDIO INPUT Jack (L, R)
Accept input of audio signals in stereo (L/R) from external devices.
If you want to use mono input, connect to the L jack.
When recording from a mic, connect it to the L jack, and set Input
Select (p. 118) to “MICROPHONE.”
PHONES Jack
This is the jack for connecting headphones (sold separately). →
(Quick Start; p. 3)
Overview of the Fantom-S
How the Fantom-S Is Organized
Classification of Fantom-S Sound
Types
Basic Structure
When using the Fantom-S, you will notice that a variety of different
categories come into play when working with sounds. What follows
is a simple explanation of each sound category.
Broadly speaking, the Fantom-S consists of a controller section, a
sound generator section, and a sequencer section. These sections are
internally connected via MIDI.
fig.01-01.e
Audio Input
Sampling
Sampler
Section
Tones
On the Fantom-S, the tones are the smallest unit of sound. However,
it is not possible to play a tone by itself. The patch is the unit of
sound which can be played, and the tones are the basic building
blocks which make up the patch.
fig.01-02.e
Sequencer
Section
Playback
Recording
Sound
Generator
Section
Resampling
Tone
LFO 1
LFO 2
Play
Controller Section (controllers
such as keyboard, pad, pitch bend lever, etc.)
Controller Section
This section consists of the keyboard, pad, pitch bend/modulation
lever, panel knobs and buttons, and D Beam controller. It also
includes any pedals that may be connected to the rear panel. The
performance information generated when you do things such as
press/release a key or pad, or depress the hold pedal is converted
into MIDI messages and sent to the sound generator section,
sequencer section, and/or an external MIDI device.
Sound Generator Section
The sound generator section produces the sound. It receives MIDI
messages from the keyboard controller section and sequencer section
and/or from an external MIDI device, generates musical sound
according to the MIDI messages that were received, and outputs the
sound from the output jacks or headphone jack.
Sequencer Section
WG
TVF
TVA
Pitch
Envelope
TVF
Envelope
TVA
Envelope
audio signal
control signal
Tones consist of the following five components.
WG (Wave Generator)
Specifies the PCM waveform (wave) that is the basis of the sound,
and determines how the pitch of the sound will change.
The Fantom-S has 1,228 different waveforms. All patches built into
the Fantom-S consist of combinations of tones which are created
based on these waveforms.
There are four wave generators for each rhythm tone (percussion
instrument sounds).
TVF (Time Variant Filter)
This section records operations of the keyboard controller section as
MIDI messages, and transmits the recorded MIDI messages to the
sound generator section. MIDI messages recorded on the sequencer
can also be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector to allow the
Fantom-S to also control external MIDI devices.
Specifies how the frequency components of the sound will change.
The Sampler section
Envelope
A sampler is a device that captures sounds from a CD player or mic
connected to the audio input (or sounds from a wave file) as
“samples.”
You use Envelope to initiate changes to occur to a sound over time.
There are separate envelopes for Pitch, TVF (filter), and TVA
(volume). For example if you wish to modify the way in which the
sound attacks or decays over time, you would adjust the TVA
envelope.
Samples you record can be used in the same way as the waveforms
that are built into the internal sound generator. (p. 119)
TVA (Time Variant Amplifier)
Specifies the volume changes and the sound’s position in a stereo
soundfield.
The Fantom-S can load WAV or AIFF format wave files as samples
via a USB connection. Loaded sample can be used in patches or
rhythm sets.
17
Overview of the Fantom-S
Reference_e.book 17 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Reference_e.book 18 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Overview of the Fantom-S
LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)
fig.01-04.e
Use the LFO to create cyclic changes (modulation) in a sound. The
Fantom-S has two LFOs. Either one or both can be applied to effect
the WG (pitch), TVF (filter) and/or TVA (volume). When an LFO is
applied to the WG pitch, a vibrato effect is produced. When an LFO
is applied to the TVF cutoff frequency, a wah effect is produced.
When an LFO is applied to the TVA volume, a tremolo effect is
produced.
Rhythm Set
Note Number 98 (D7)
Note Number 97 (C#7)
Note Number 36 (C2)
Note Number 35 (B1)
Rhythm Tone (Percussion instrument sound)
LFO is not included in the rhythm tones (percussion instrument
sounds).
WG
TVF
TVA
Pitch
Envelope
TVF
Envelope
TVA
Envelope
Patches
Patches are the basic sound configurations that you play during a
performance. Each patch can be configured by combining up to four
tones. How the four tones are combined is determined by the
Structure Type parameter (p. 46).
Each percussion instrument consists of the following four elements.
(For details, refer to the explanations for “Tones.”)
WG (Wave Generator)
TVF (Time Variant Filter)
fig.01-03.e
Patch
TVA (Time Variant Amplifier)
Envelope
Tone 4
Tone 3
Tone 2
Tone 1
Performances
LFO 1
LFO 2
A performance has a patch or rhythm set assigned to each of the 16
parts, and can simultaneously handle 16 sounds.
The Fantom-S has two screens: a Layer screen and a Mixer screen (p.
76).
WG
Pitch
Envelope
TVF
TVF
Envelope
TVA
TVA
Envelope
Use the Layer screen if you want to play two or more patches
together (Layer) or play different patches in separate areas of the
keyboard (Split).
Use the Mixer screen if you want to “mix” by individually adjusting
the pan and level settings for each of the sixteen parts.
Because the Fantom sound generator can control multiple sounds
(instruments) it is called a Multi-timbral sound generator.
fig.01-05.e
Rhythm Sets
Performance
Layer
Mixer
Rhythm sets are groups of a number of different percussion
instrument sounds. Since percussion instruments generally do not
play melodies, there is no need for a percussion instrument sound to
be able to play a scale on the keyboard. It is, however, more
important that as many percussion instruments as possible be
available to you at the same time. Therefore, each key (note number)
of a rhythm set will produce a different percussion instrument.
Part 16
Part 1
Patch/
Rhythm Set
18
Overview of the Fantom-S
Part
Voice Reserve
On the Fantom-S, a “part” is something to which you assign a patch
or rhythm set. Patch mode has two parts, the Pad part and the
Keyboard part, and you can assign a patch or rhythm set to each of
these parts. In Performance mode, each performance has sixteen
parts, and you can assign a patch or rhythm set to each part.
The Fantom-S has a Voice Reserve function that lets you reserve a
minimum number of notes that will always be available for each
part. For example if Voice Reserve is set to “10” for part 16, part 16
will always have 10 notes of sound-producing capacity available to it
even if a total of more than 64 notes (total for all parts) are being
requested. When you make Voice Reserve settings, you need to take
into account the number of notes you want to play on each part as
well as the number of tones used by the selected patch (p. 88).
About Simultaneous Polyphony
The Fantom-S can play a maximum of 64 sounds simultaneously.
The following paragraphs discuss what this means, and what will
happen when more than 64 simultaneous voices are requested from
the Fantom-S.
Calculating the Number of Voices
Being Used
The Fantom-S is able to play up to 64 notes simultaneously. The
polyphony, or the number of voices (sounds) does not refer only to
the number of sounds actually being played, but changes according
to the number of tones used in the patches, and the number of
Waves used in the tones. The following method is used to calculate
the number of sounds used for one patch being played.
(Number of Sounds Being Played) x (Number of tones Used by
Patches Being Played) x (Number of Waves Used in the tones)
For example, with a patch combining four tones, each of which uses
two Waves, the actual number of sounds being played comes to 8.
Also, when playing in Performance mode, the number of sounds for
each part is counted to obtain the total number of sounds for all
parts.
How a Patch Sounds
When the Fantom-S is requested to play more than 64 voices
simultaneously, currently sounding notes will be turned off to make
room for newly requested notes. The note with the lowest priority
will be turned off first. The order of priority is determined by the
Voice Priority setting (p. 43).
Voice Priority can be set either to “LAST” or “LOUDEST.” When
“LAST” is selected, a newly requested note that exceeds the 64 voice
limit will cause the first-played of the currently sounding notes to be
turned off. When “LOUDEST” is selected, the quietest of the
currently sounding notes will be turned off. Usually, “LAST” is
selected.
It is not possible to make Voice Reserve settings that would
cause the total of all parts to be greater than 64 voices.
About Memory
Patch and performance settings are stored in what is referred to as
memory. There are three kind of memory: temporary, rewritable,
and non-rewritable.
fig.01-06.e
Fantom
Preset E (PR-E)
System
Preset D (PR-D)
Preset C (PR-C)
Preset B (PR-B)
Preset A (PR-A)
User (USER)
Patch
128
Patch
256
GM (GM2)
Rhythm Set
32 * 1
Performance
64 * 1
Rhythm Set
9
Select
Select * 2
Since Performance mode is usually used to play an ensemble consisting
of several patches, it is important to decide which parts take priority.
Priority is specified by the Voice Reserve settings (p. 88). When a note
within a patch needs to be turned off to make room for a new note, the
Voice Priority setting of the patch will apply (p. 43).
Performance
64
Select
Write
Temporary Area
Select
Select
Write
EXP D Slot
EXP C Slot
EXP B Slot
Note Priority in Performance Mode
Rhythm Set
32
Patch
256
EXP A Slot
Patch
Rhythm Set
Wave Expansion Board
Patch
256
Rhythm Set
32
Performance
64
Memory Card
* 1 Only in PR-A (PRST)
* 2 The selected Patches/Rhythm Sets cannot be changed.
19
Overview of the Fantom-S
Reference_e.book 19 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Reference_e.book 20 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Overview of the Fantom-S
Temporary Memory
Temporary Area
This is the area that holds the data for the patch or performance that
you’ve selected using the panel buttons.
When you play the keyboard or play back a sequence, sound is
produced based on data in the temporary area. When you edit a
patch or performance, you do not directly modify the data in
memory; rather, you call up the data into the temporary area, and
edit it there.
Settings in the temporary area are temporary, and will be lost when
the power is turned off or when you select another patch/
performance. To keep the settings you have modified, you must
write them into rewritable memory.
Rewritable Memory
System Memory
System memory stores system parameter settings that determine
how the Fantom-S functions.
User Memory
User memory is where you normally store the data you need. USER
memory contains 128 patches, 16 rhythm sets and 64 performances.
Memory Card (Optional: power supply
voltage 3.3 V, capacity: 8 MB–128 MB)
Patches, rhythm sets, and performances can be saved on a memory
card just as they can in user memory.
About the Onboard Effects
Effect Types
The Fantom-S has built-in effect units, and you can independently
edit each unit’s settings.
Multi-Effects
The multi-effects are multi-purpose effects that completely change
the sound type by changing the sound itself. Contained are 78
(Fantom-S; 77) different effects types; select and use the type that
suits your aims. In addition to effects types composed of simple
effects such as Distortion, Flanger, and other such effects, you can
also set up a wide variety of other effects, even connecting effects in
series or in parallel. Furthermore, while chorus and reverb can be
found among the multi-effects types, the following chorus and
reverb are handled with a different system. In Performance mode,
three types of multi-effect can be used simultaneously; these are
referred to as MFX1, MFX2, and MFX3. In Patch mode, the Keyboard
part can use MFX1 and the Pad part can use MFX2.
Chorus
Chorus adds depth and spaciousness to the sound. You can select
whether to use this as a chorus effect or a delay effect.
Reverb
Reverb adds the reverberation characteristics of halls or
auditoriums. Five different types are offered, so you can select and
use the type that suits your purpose.
Mastering Effect
Non-Rewritable Memory
Preset Memory
Data in Preset memory cannot be rewritten. However, you can call
up settings from preset memory into the temporary area, modify
them and then store the modified data in rewritable memory (except
GM2).
Wave Expansion Boards (optional: SRX Series)
The Fantom-S can be equipped with up to three Wave Expansion
Boards (four SRX series). Wave Expansion Boards contain Wave
data, as well as patches and rhythm sets that use this Wave data,
which can be called directly into the temporary area and played.
20
This is a stereo compressor (limiter) that is applied to the final
output of the Fantom-S. It has independent high, mid, and low
ranges. Independently for the high-frequency, mid-frequency, and
low-frequency regions, this compresses any sounds that exceed the
specified level, making the volume more consistent.
Overview of the Fantom-S
How Effects Units Work in Different
Modes
In Patch Mode
The multi-effects, chorus and reverb effects can be set up
individually for each patch/rhythm set. Adjusting the signal level to
be sent to each effects unit (Send Level) provides control over the
effect intensity that’s applied to each tone.
fig.01-07
Keyboard part
Patch
TONE
Multi-Effects
About the Sequencer
A sequencer records keyboard performance and controller
movements as MIDI messages (sequencer data). As the data plays
back, the recorded MIDI messages are sent to a sound generator
which will produce the required sounds. The sequencer actually
plays instruments instead of the musician, and since it can record a
musical performance, it is a tape recorder as well.
But in reality a sequencer doesn’t record sound, but actually the
steps that cause the sound generator to produce sound, so it offers
several advantages. Sound quality is always excellent, the equivalent
of first-generation tape, no matter how many times the data plays
back; tempo changes have no effect on pitch; detailed editing is
possible, etc.
What Is a Song?
For the Fantom-S, musical performance data for one song or
composition is referred to as a song. A song combines sequencer
data recorded on Phrase tracks 1–16, a Tempo track, a Beat track and
a Pattern track, as discussed below.
Pad part
Rhythm Set
A0
C8
RHYTHM
TONE
Multi-Effects
+
Chorus
+
fig.01-09.e
Song
Phrase track 16
Reverb
Phrase track 2
Phrase track 1
* To each part you can assign either a Patch or a Rhythm Set.
In the Performance Mode
Tempo track
The multi-effects, chorus and reverb effects can be set individually
for each performance. The intensity of each effect will be set for each
part.
Beat track
When you apply effects in Performance mode, the effect settings of
the patch or rhythm set assigned to each part will be ignored, and
the effect settings of the performance will be used. Thus, the effects
for the same patch or rhythm set may differ when played in Patch
mode and in Performance mode. However, depending on the
settings, you can have effect settings for a patch or rhythm set
assigned to a part applied to the entire performance. In addition,
when using the multi-effects settings of a performance, you can use
three different multi-effects simultaneously, depending on the effect
type (p. 175).
fig.01-08.e
Performance/Multitimbre
Pattern
1
Pattern
2
Pattern
100
What Is a Track?
Each section of a song which stores musical performance data is
called a track.
Phrase Tracks 1–16
Part 1
Patch
Part16
TONE
Pattern track
Multi-Effects
Chorus
Reverb
Phrase tracks record the musical performance. Each Phrase track
records musical performance data for 16 MIDI channels. Totally, up
to 16 tracks x 16 MIDI channels of data can be recorded. It’s helpful if
you’ve made decision prior to recording such as recording melody
on Phrase track 1, bass on Phrase track 2, drums on Phrase track 10,
and accompaniment on the remaining Phrase tracks.
21
Overview of the Fantom-S
Reference_e.book 21 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Reference_e.book 22 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Overview of the Fantom-S
Tempo Track
Positions for Storing a Song
The Tempo track records tempo changes of a song over time. It can
be used for tempo changes during a song. If a song has the same
tempo from beginning to end, the Tempo track can be ignored.
Internal Memory
When a song is first recorded on the Fantom-S, a tempo setting at the
time of recording will be stored at the beginning of the Tempo track.
Therefore when song playback starts from the beginning, the song
will always play back at this initial tempo.
Thus playback tempo is determined by the Tempo track setting. If
you modify the tempo during playback, the overall tempo of the
song will be controlled by the setting you make.
Beat Track
The Beat track records the time signature of each measure of a song.
Set the Beat track when recording a new song, or when you want to
change time signature during a song.
Pattern Track
You can also use the Pattern track to record musical passages, separately
from the Phrase tracks. Musical data in the Pattern track is regarded as
separate Patterns. Up to 100 Patterns can be created, and each Pattern
can contain data for 16 MIDI channels, as with Phrase tracks.
Patterns can be assigned to a Phrase track, so if you are using repetitive
phrases such as drums and bass, it is convenient to record each musical
phrase in a pattern, and then use the MICROSCOPE screen to assign the
pattern to the track (p. 148). In this case, the Phrase track contains only
the Pattern Call numbers that refer to the desired Pattern, and not the
actual Pattern data. Therefore the same Pattern can be used any number
of times with a negligible increase in memory used.
The RPS function (p. 172) for immediate playback also applies to
Patterns. Patterns are therefore convenient for live performance, if
you’ve recorded necessary sequencer data as Patterns and take them
to the gig.
Patterns also make fine scratch-pads for musical ideas.
Songs and the Sound Generator Mode
The sequencer has an area called internal memory that can temporarily
store one song. So we call this temporary song Internal Song.
To play back a song saved to a disk with the Fantom-S, it doesn’t
have to be loaded into internal memory. Only when you’re going to
record a song or edit a song saved to disk, do you have to load it into
internal memory. Since only one song can be worked on during
recording or editing, all the internal memory has to do is store one
song (about 120,000 notes).
The song in internal memory is volatile and will be lost when the
power is turned off. To keep a song, you must save it to user
memory or memory card.
Memory Card/User Memory
When keeping a recorded or edited song in internal memory, save it
to user memory or memory card as a song file. Up to 256 songs can
be saved to a card and user memory.
If you want to keep the song in internal memory that you recorded
or edited, you must save it as a song file onto a memory card or into
user memory. Either method lets you save up to 256 songs.
A card and user memory can contain two file types. The three-letter
symbol shown in parentheses ( ) is a file name extension that
distinguishes the different file types.
Song File (.SVQ)
This file is a song created on the Fantom-S. It is called an MRC Pro
song.
Standard MIDI File (.MID)
Standard MIDI File is a standard file format that allows sequencer
data to be exchanged between most musical applications. Fantom-S
files can be saved as Standard MIDI Files. This also allows you to
play back commercially available music data (GM scores) that is
compatible with the GM/GM2 system.
fig.01-11.e
The Fantom-S’s sequencer can be used at any time, regardless of the
mode of the sound generator (Patch/Performance).
Temporary Memory
In Performance mode you can use up to sixteen sounds, with each
part playing a different sound. This means that Performance mode is
ideal for recording or playing an ensemble that uses multiple
instruments, such as drums, bass, and piano.
Internal Memory
Song file
Standard MIDI file
In Patch mode you can play using the sounds that are assigned to the
Keyboard part and the Pad part.
Fantom-S
Memory Card
Song file
Standard MIDI file
22
User Memory
Overview of the Fantom-S
About the Sampling Section
The Sampling section samples (records) external sounds from an
audio device or mic as digital data. Sampled sounds can be played as
a patch or rhythm set. You can also import WAV/AIFF format files
and use them in the same way.
Where Samples are Stored
Samples that you record or import are stored in sample memory.
This sample memory is temporary, and its data will be lost when
you turn off the power. If you want to keep these samples, you must
save them to user memory or a memory card.
* You cannot save data to the preset memory.
fig.01-05c.e
Samples
A sample contains the waveform data sampled by the Fantom-S. In
addition to the actual waveform data itself, a sample also contains
parameters such as start point, loop start, and loop end. The FantomS can hold 9,000 samples.
fig.01-05b.e
Sample
Temporary Memory
Sampler Section
Sample Memory
Preset Bank
Write
User Bank
Sample List
0001 User Sample
0002
Sampling
ad
Lo
Write
Card Bank
Preset Memory
Wr
ite
Load
Write
User Memory
rite
W
Added
automatically
Drum
Wave
(Sample)
2000
Load/Write
Fantom-S
Multisamples
Two or more samples assigned to the keyboard are collectively
called a multisample. A multisample is divided into 128 “splits.”
Each split contains the number of a sample in the sample list—it
does not contain the actual sample data itself.
Memory Card
Sampling
The Fantom-S has 128 internal samples (preset samples), and in
addition can store up to 128 user samples in a separately sold
memory card.
fig.01-05a.e
Multisample
Multisample
Multisample
sample
No.001
sample
No.002
No.128
No.001
sample
No.003
A multisample is
divided into 128
sample
No.127
sample
No.128
Number in the sample list
23
Overview of the Fantom-S
Reference_e.book 23 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Reference_e.book 24 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Overview of the Fantom-S
Basic Operation of the Fantom-S
To select the Mixer screen
1. Press [MIXER].
fig.MIXER_50
Switching the Sound Generator Mode
The Fantom-S has two sound generating modes: Patch mode,
Performance mode. You can select the sound generating mode (state)
that is most appropriate for how you are playing the Fantom-S.
Use the following procedure to switch between these modes.
Patch mode
In this mode you can use the keyboard and pads to play individual
sounds (patches/rhythm sets).
The keyboard and pads each have their own sound generator and
part, and are connected on a single MIDI channel.
To select Patch mode
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM].
fig.KBD_50
About the [1]–[8] Buttons
In the PLAY screen, the eight [1]–[8] buttons located below the
display, these buttons execute various functions, and their operation
will differ depending on the screen. Functions will be listed in the
bottom of the screen.
fig.01-19
Performance Mode
This mode allows you to combine multiple sounds (patches or
rhythm sets).
LAYER/SPLIT display
Use this screen when you want to play two or more sounds
(patches/rhythm sets) together.
You can play patches together (Layer) or divide the keyboard into
two regions and play different patches in each region (Split).
MIXER display
Use this screen when you want to mix the sounds by adjusting the
level and pan for each of the 16 parts.
To select the Layer screen
Window
The somewhat smaller screens that appear temporarily on top
of the normal screens are called windows. Various types of
windows appears according to the situation. Some display lists,
others allow you to make settings, and still others ask you to
confirm an operation.
fig.01-17a.e
1. Press [LAYER/SPLIT].
fig.LAYER_50
Window
Press [EXIT] to close the window. Some windows will close
automatically when an operation is performed.
24
Overview of the Fantom-S
Moving the Cursor
A single screen or window displays multiple parameters or items for
selection. To edit the setting of a parameter, move the cursor to the value of
that parameter. To select an item, move the cursor to that item. When
selected with the cursor, a parameter value or other selection is highlighted.
When the cursor is located at a parameter value, press [ENTER]
to display a window where you can set the value. Use
to select a value, and then press [ENTER] to finalize the setting.
[INC] and [DEC]
fig.01-19a.e
Cursor
Pressing [INC] increases the value, and [DEC] decreases it. Keep the
button pressed for continuous adjustment. For faster value increases,
keep [INC] pressed down and press [DEC]. For decreasing value
faster, keep [DEC] pressed down and press [INC].
If you press [INC] or [DEC] while holding down [SHIFT], the value
increments will get bigger.
Assigning a Name
Move the cursor with the
,
,
and
(cursor buttons).
: moves the cursor up.
: moves the cursor down.
: moves the cursor to the left.
: moves the cursor to the right.
On the Fantom-S, you can assign names to each patch, rhythm set,
performance, Song, Sample, and Pattern. The procedure is the same
for any type of data.
1. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the location where
you wish to input a character.
2. Turn the VALUE dial, or press [INC]/[DEC] to specify the
character.
Available characters/symbols are:
• By holding down [SHIFT] and pressing a cursor button, you can
make the cursor location jump to the edge of the same block.
• If you hold down one cursor button while you also press the
cursor button for the opposite direction, the cursor will move
more rapidly in the direction of the first-pressed cursor button.
Modifying a Value
To modify the value, use the VALUE dial or the [INC]/[DEC] buttons.
fig.01-21
space, A–Z, a–z, 0–9, ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ]
Song file names may not contain lowercase characters or certain
symbols (“ * + , . / : ; < = > ? [ \ ] |).
* From a naming screen you can press [MENU] and select "Undo" to
return the name to what it was before you changed it. From [MENU]
you can select "To Upper" or press
to change the character at the
cursor to uppercase. From [MENU] you can select "To Lower" or press
to change the character at the cursor to lowercase. From [MENU]
you can select "Delete All" to clear all the characters you were
inputting.
You can use the pads to specify characters.
By pressing a pad one or more times, you can successively select
the letters, numerals, and symbols that appear on the pad. For
example, if you repeatedly press pad 1, you will cycle through
the available choices like this: 1 → A → B → C → 1 → A...
In each screen of the Fantom-S, you can use the cursor to move
the area displayed as black characters on white background, and
modify its value.
• You can switch between uppercase and lowercase letters for the
character to be entered by pressing CAPS LOCK.
• Press SPACE to replace the character at the cursor location with a space.
• Press INS to insert a space at the cursor location.
• Press DEL to delete the character at the cursor location.
Each parameter has its own range of possible values, so you
cannot set any value smaller than the minimum value or greater
than the maximum value.
• Press BS to delete the character to the left of the cursor location.
fig.pad_name
VALUE Dial
Rotating the VALUE dial clockwise increases the value,
counterclockwise decreases the value. Holding down [SHIFT] as you
move the VALUE dial increases value increments so you can make
large value changes faster.
25
Overview of the Fantom-S
Reference_e.book 25 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Reference_e.book 26 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing in Patch Mode
In Patch mode, the keyboard and the pads are each used to play a
single sound (patch/rhythm set).
The keyboard controller section and the pad controller section each
have their own sound generator part, and each are connected by
their own MIDI channel. This means you can play separate sounds
on the keyboard and the pads.
4. Press [7] to switch the Patch Play screen.
This screen simultaneously displays the settings of the Keyboard
part and the Pad part.
fig.PATCH_50
About the Patch Play Screen
Displaying Patch Play Screen
To access the Patch Play screen, use the following procedure.
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM].
You will enter Patch mode, and the Patch Play screen appears.
The Fantom-S has two parts; a Keyboard part and a Pad part.
2. Press [1 (Kbd Part)] to select the Keyboard part.
fig.02-00a.e
Patch type Patch group
Patch number
Patch Category
Patch name
Press [8 (Part Level)] to adjust the volume of the keyboard part
and pad part.
Pressing [8 (Part Level)] will open a window where you can
adjust the volume of the keyboard part and pad part.
Press [6] (keyboard part) or [7] (pad part) to select the part, and
turn the VALUE dial or use [INC][DEC] to adjust the volume.
Press [8 (Close)] to close the window.
fig.02-00c_50
3. Press [2 (Pad Part)] to select the Pad part.
fig.02-00b.e
Patch type
Patch group
26
Patch Category
Patch number / Patch name
Reference_e.book 27 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Functions in the Patch Play screen
Selecting a Patch
fig.02-01.e
7
8
9
The Fantom-S has eight patch groups, including the User group and
Preset groups A–E and GM, with each group storing 128 patches
(256 in GM, USER). What’s more, you can further expand your
options by installing up to four optional Wave Expansion Boards
(four SRX series), enabling you to select from a huge assortment of
available patches.
USER
This is the group inside the Fantom-S which can be rewritten.
patches you yourself create can be stored in this group. The FantomS includes 256 preset patches.
3
4
PR-A–E (Preset A–E)
1
5
2
7
8
9
6
10
11
7
8
9
12
13
11
14
15
16
17
18
19
This is the group inside the Fantom-S which cannot be rewritten.
However you may modify the settings of the currently selected
patch, and then store the modified patch in User memory. Banks A–
E already contain 128 prepared patches each, for a total of 640
patches.
* The Fantom-S88 provides preset F, which contains eight patches.
CARD (Memory Card)
This group lets you use patches stored on a memory card inserted in
the rear panel card slot. Since the data in this group can be rewritten,
you can use this group to store patches that you create.
1
Indicates the current sound generating mode.
GM (GM2)
2
Indicates the volume of the Keyboard part and Pad part.
3
Indicates multi-effects (MFX1, 2), chorus (CHO), reverb (REV),
and masterring (MASTER) on and off.
4
Indicates the name of the currently selected song,
the measure location
5
Indicates the time signature, and the tempo.
Indicates the Loop Play on/off (LOOP).
This is an internal group of patches compatible with General MIDI 2,
a system of MIDI function specifications designed to transcend
differences between makers and types of devices; these patches
cannot be overwritten. Furthermore, settings of currently selected
patches from this group cannot be changed. The Fantom-S includes
256 preset patches.
6
Sets the Transpose (Trans). And indicates the Octave Shift (Oct).
Patch/rhythm set select switch
7
Determines whether you will be selecting patches or rhythm sets.
8 Indicates/selects the patch category.
Selects whether the patch category will be locked.
9
Indicates/selects the group, number,
and name of the selected patch.
10 Indicates the tone On/Off status.
11 Indicates whether the controller settings will apply
to the keyboard or the pads.
XP-A–D (Wave Expansion Boards installed in
EXP-A–D Slots)
These are groups used when using patches from Wave Expansion
Boards installed in the EXP A–D slots, and cannot be rewritten.
However you may modify the settings of the currently selected
patch, and then store the modified patch in User memory and
Memory card. The number of onboard patches depends on the
specific Wave Expansion Boards installed.
12 Indicates the state of the pad settings.
13 Indicates the rhythm tone.
14 Indicates the functions that are assigned to each
realtime controller knob (●) and assignable switch (■).
XP-A–D patches can be selected only if a Wave Expansion Board
SRX series (sold separately) is installed in the corresponding slot.
15 This indicates the function that is assigned to the D Beam controller,
and the response status of the D Beam controller.
16 Switches the cursor location to either the Keyboard section
or the Pad section.
17 Indicates the names of the parameters that can be selected
If SRX/RAM Mode (p. 195) is set to “2 SRX,” only EXP slots A
and B can be used.
by [3]–[6].
18 Switches the display between the view of only one part and
the view of two parts.
19 Sets the volume of the Keyboard part and Pad part.
27
Playing in Patch Mode
Playing in Patch Mode
Reference_e.book 28 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing in Patch Mode
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen.
fig.02-00a.e
Patch type Patch group
Patch number
Patch Category
Patch name
Selecting Favorite Patches
(Favorite Sound)
You can bring together your favorite and most frequently used
patches in one place by registering them in the Favorite sound. By
using this function, you can rapidly select favorite patches from
internal memory or a Wave Expansion Board.
If a patch stored in a Wave Expansion Board has been registered
as a Favorite Sound, it cannot be selected unless the
corresponding wave expansion board is installed.
2. Press [1 (Kbd Part)] or [2 (Pad Part)] to move the cursor to
the pad part or the keyboard part.
For instructions on how to register to the Favorite Sounds, refer
to “Registering a Favorite Patch (Favorite Sound)” (p. 30).
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen.
fig.02-02.e
Patch type
Patch group
Patch number
2. Press [4 (Favorite)].
The Favorite List window appears.
fig.02-03_50
3. If you selected a patch group, turn the VALUE dial or use
[INC][DEC] to choose the patch group.
USER:
User
PR-A–E: Preset A–E
CARD:
Memory Card
GM:
GM (GM2)
3. Press
or
to choose the patch.
4. To change the bank, turn the VALUE dial or use [INC][DEC].
5. After you have changed the bank, press [1]–[8] to select a
patch.
6. Press [EXIT] to close the Favorite window
XP-A–D: Wave Expansion Boards installed in EXP-A–D Slots
* Make sure that the patch type select switch is set to “Patch.” If this is
set to “Rhythm,” use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the switch, and
turn the VALUE dial or press [DEC] to select “Patch.”
With the cursor located at “Rhythm,” press [ENTER] to open the
Patch Type window. You can also use CURSOR to select “Patch” and
then press [8 (Select)] to make the selection.
4. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the patch group.
5. Turn the VALUE dial, or press [INC]/[DEC] to select a patch
group.
Selecting Patches from the List
You can display a list of patches and select a patch from that list.
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen.
2. Press [3 (Patch List)].
The Patch List screen appears.
fig.02-06_50
6. If you selected a patch for the pad part, play the pads to hear
the sound. If you selected a patch for the keyboard part, play
the keyboard to hear the sound.
3. Use
or
to select a patch.
If [6 (Categ)] has a check mark (✔), the list will show the
categories. If you press [6 (Categ)] to remove the check mark, the
list will show the patch groups.
28
Reference_e.book 29 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
fig.01-18_50
Selecting Patches by Category
(Patch Finder)
The Fantom-S provides a “Patch Search function” (Patch Finder)
which allows you to specify a type (category) of patch so that you
can quickly find the desired patch. There are a total of 38 categories.
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen.
fig.02-00a.e
Patch type Patch group
Patch number
Patch Category
Patch name
To switch groups, press [1 (⇑)] [2 (⇓)].
By Pressing [7 (Preview)] you can audition the sound of the
patch, by means of a phrase preselected as being suitable for that
particular type (category) of patch (Phrase Preview).
4. Press [8 (Select)] to select the patch.
Auditioning Patches
(Phrase Preview)
The Fantom-S allows you to preview patches by hearing a phrase
appropriate for each type of patch.
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen.
2. Press [3 (Patch List)] to access the Patch List screen.
fig.01-18_50
2. Make sure that the patch type is set to “PATCH.”
If this is set to “Rhythm,” use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to
the switch, and turn the VALUE dial or press [DEC] to select
“Patch.”
3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the “Patch Category,”
and turn the VALUE dial, or press [INC]/[DEC] to select the
desired category.
4. Press
to move the cursor to “Lock,” and turn the VALUE
dial or press [INC] to add a check mark (✔).
5. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the patch group or
patch number, and turn the VALUE dial or use [INC]/[DEC] to
select the patch.
3. Press and hold [7 (Preview)].
The patch selected in the Patch List screen will be sounded.
4. Release your finger from [7 (Preview)], and the phrase will
stop playing.
When the cursor is located at the Patch group, you can select the
group. When the cursor is located at the Patch number, you can
specify the number.
If you wish to change how the phrase is played by Phrase
Preview, you can edit the Preview Mode parameter (p. 194).
29
Playing in Patch Mode
Playing in Patch Mode
Reference_e.book 30 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing in Patch Mode
The following categories can be selected.
Using [1]–[8] to Register
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen to
select the patch that you wish to register (p. 27).
Category
Contents
---
No Assign
No assign
PNO
AC.Piano
Acoustic Piano
EP
EL.Piano
Electric Piano
KEY
Keyboards
Other Keyboards (Clav, Harpsichord etc.)
BEL
Bell
Bell, Bell Pad
MLT
Mallet
Mallet
ORG
Organ
Electric and Church Organ
ACD
Accordion
Accordion
HRM
Harmonica
Harmonica, Blues Harp
AGT
AC.Guitar
Acoustic Guitar
EGT
EL.Guitar
Electric Guitar
DGT
DIST.Guitar
Distortion Guitar
BS
Bass
Acoustic & Electric Bass
3. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to select the Bank.
SBS
Synth Bass
Synth Bass
STR
Strings
Strings
4. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [1]–[8] to execute the
registration.
ORC
Orchestra
Orchestra Ensemble
HIT
Hit&Stab
Orchestra Hit, Hit
WND
Wind
Winds (Oboe, Clarinet etc.)
FLT
Flute
Flute, Piccolo
BRS
AC.Brass
Acoustic Brass
SBR
Synth Brass
Synth Brass
SAX
Sax
Sax
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen to
select the patch that you wish to register (p. 27).
HLD
Hard Lead
Hard Synth Lead
2. Press [3 (Patch List)].
SLD
Soft Lead
Soft Synth Lead
TEK
Techno Synth
Techno Synth
PLS
Pulsating
Pulsating Synth
FX
Synth FX
Synth FX (Noise etc.)
SYN
Other Synth
Poly Synth
BPD
Bright Pad
Bright Pad Synth
SPD
Soft Pad
Soft Pad Synth
VOX
Vox
Vox, Choir
PLK
Plucked
Plucked (Harp etc.)
ETH
Ethnic
Other Ethnic
FRT
Fretted
Fretted Inst (Mandolin etc.)
PRC
Percussion
Percussion
SFX
Sound FX
Sound FX
BTS
Beat&Groove
Beat and Groove
4. Press [1 (⇑)] or [2 (⇓)] to select the Bank.
DRM
Drums
Drum Set
5. Press
CMB
Combination
Other patches which use Split and Layer
2. Press [4 (Favorite)].
fig.02-03_50
The patch will be registered to the button you pressed.
5. When you have finished registering, press [EXIT].
Using the Favorite List Screen to Register
3. Press [3 (Favorite)].
The Favorite List screen appears.
fig.02-04_50
or
to select a favorite number.
6. Press [5 (Regist)] to execute the registration.
The patch will be registered to the button you pressed.
Registering a Favorite Patch
(Favorite Sound)
You can bring together your favorite and most frequently used
patches in one place by registering them in the Favorite sound. By
using this function you can rapidly select favorite patches from
internal memory or a Wave Expansion Board. You can register a
total of 64 sounds (8 sounds x 8 banks) as favorite sounds.
For details on selecting a favorite sound, refer to “Selecting
Favorite Patches (Favorite Sound)” (p. 28).
30
7. When you have finished registering favorite sounds, press
[EXIT] to close the Favorite List screen.
By pressing [7 (Preview)] you can audition the sound of the
registered patch (Phrase Preview).
Canceling a patch registration
By pressing [4 (Remove)] you can cancel the patch registration
that is selected in the Favorite List screen.
Reference_e.book 31 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Registering Favorite Rhythm Sets
(Favorite Sound)
You can bring together your favorite and most frequently used
rhythm sets in one place by registering them in the Favorite sound.
By using this function you can rapidly select favorite rhythm sets
from internal memory or a Wave Expansion Board. You can register
a total of 64 sounds (8 sounds x 8 banks) as favorite sounds.
For details on selecting a favorite sound, refer to ““Selecting
Favorite Patches (Favorite Sound)” (p. 28).
Using [1]–[8] to Register
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen,
and select the rhythm set that you wish to register (p. 37).
2. Press [4 (Favorite)].
3. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to select the Bank.
4. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [1]–[8] to execute the
registration.
The rhythm set will be registered to the button you pressed.
5. When you have finished registering, press [EXIT].
Using the Favorite List Screen to
Register
Canceling a patch registration
By pressing [4 (Remove)] you can cancel the patch registration
that is selected in the Favorite List screen.
Transposing the Keyboard in
Octave Units (Octave Shift)
The Octave Shift function transposes the pitch of the keyboard in 1
octave units (-3– +3 octaves).
For playing a bass part more easily using your right hand, transpose
the keyboard down by 1 or 2 octaves.
* Octave Shift applies only to the keyboard part.
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen.
2. Press [7] to switch the Patch Play screen.
3. Press KEYSHIFT [-OCT] or [+OCT] to set the amount of
transposition (-3–+3).
The button will light if this is set.
* Each time you press [+OCT], the amount of transposition will change
in the order of +1, +2, and +3. Each time you press [-OCT], the
amount of transposition will change in the order of -1, -2, and -3.
If you press both buttons simultaneously, the amount of movement will
be zero.
fig.02-07
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen,
and select the rhythm set that you wish to register (p. 37).
2. Press [3 (Patch List)].
3. Press [3 (Favorite)].
The Favorite List screen appears.
fig.04-10b_50
There is a single Octave Shift setting (Setup parameter) for the
entire Fantom-S. The changed setting will be remembered even
if you switch patches or performances.
4. Press [1 (⇑)] or [2 (⇓)] to select the Bank.
5. Press
or
to select favorite number.
6. Press [5 (Regist)] to execute the registration.
The rhythm set will be registered to the button you pressed.
7. When you have finished registering favorite sounds, press
[EXIT] to close the Favorite List screen.
By pressing [7 (Preview)] you can audition the sound of the
registered rhythm set (Phrase Preview).
31
Playing in Patch Mode
Playing in Patch Mode
Reference_e.book 32 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing in Patch Mode
Transposing the Keyboard in
Semitone Steps (Transpose)
fig.02-09
Transpose changes keyboard pitch in units of semitones.
This function is useful when you play transposed instruments such
as trumpet or clarinet following a printed score.
* Transpose applies only to the keyboard part.
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen.
2. Press [1 (Kbd Part)] to move the cursor to the keyboard part.
3. Press [7] to switch the Patch Play screen.
4. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “Trans.”
fig.02-08
4. Press [1 (Tone Sw)]/[4 (Tone Sw)] to turn each tone on/off.
The setting will switch on/off each time you press the
button.
5. Press [EXIT] to close the window.
If you want just one or two tones to sound in a patch, turn the
others off and store that setting on a patch. This cuts
nonessential use of the Fantom-S’s simultaneous voices.
Playing Single Notes (Mono)
5. Either turn the VALUE dial or use [INC]/[DEC] to adjust the
Transpose setting (G–F#: -5–+6 semitones).
When using a patch for a naturally monophonic instrument such as
sax or flute, it is effective to play in mono.
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen.
There is a single Transpose setting (Setup parameter) for the
entire Fantom-S. The changed setting will be remembered even
if you switch patches or performances.
2. Press [1 (Kbd Part)] to move the cursor to the keyboard part.
3. Press [EDIT] to access the Patch Edit screen.
4. Press [1 (⇑)] or [2 (⇓)] to select the “Solo/Porta” tab.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
If you assign “Transpose Up” “Transpose Down” as a function
to be controlled by the realtime assignable switches ([
]/
[
]), you can easily change the Transpose by pressing these
buttons (p. 101).
fig.03-01_50
Selecting the Tones That Will
Sound (Tone On/Off)
Since a patch is a combination of up to four tones, you can switch
unwanted (tones out of the four) off and get just the sound of a
specific tone.
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen.
2. Press [1 (Kbd Part)] or [2 (Pad Part)] to move the cursor to
the pad part or the keyboard part.
3. Press [6 (Tone Sw/Sel)].
32
5. Press
or
to move the cursor to “Mono/Poly.”
6. Turn the VALUE dial or press [DEC] to select “MONO.”
Now you can play in mono mode.
If you assign “Mono/Poly” as a function to be controlled by the
assignable switch ([
]/[
]), you can easily switch between
mono/poly by pressing a button (p. 101).
Reference_e.book 33 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating Smooth Pitch Changes
(Portamento)
Portamento is an effect which smoothly changes the pitch from the
first-played key to the next-played key. By applying portamento
when Mono mode is selected (see the preceding item), you can
simulate performance effects such as slurring on a violin.
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen.
2. Press [1 (Kbd Part)] to move the cursor to the keyboard part.
3. Press [EDIT] to access the Patch Edit screen.
4. Press [1 (⇑)] or [2 (⇓)] to select the “Solo/Porta” tab.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Selecting the Parameter
Controlled by the Realtime
Controllers or D Beam Controller
(Control Setting)
The Fantom-S lets you assign the parameters that will be affected
when you operate the realtime control knobs, assignable switches, D
Beam, pitch bend, or modulation lever. This lets you modify the
sound in a variety of ways by operating the controllers.
Specifying the Part that Will be
Affected by the Controller
You can specify whether operating the controller will affect the sound
assigned to the keyboard part or the sound assigned to the pad part.
fig.03-01_50
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen.
2. Press [5 (Ctrl Setting)].
3. Press [6 (Ctrl Part)].
fig.02-27_50
When you press [7 (Zoom Edit)], the Solo Synth Zoom Edit
screen will appear, which displays the above parameters in
graphical fashion, simulating an analog synthesizer. To exit from
this screen, press [8 (Exit)] or [EXIT].
5. Press
Switch.”
or
to move the cursor to “Portamento
6. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC] to select “ON.”
You’re ready to play portamento.
7. When you want to change the portamento setting, edit the
following parameters in the screen of step 6.
Portamento Mode, Portamento Type, Portamento Start,
Portamento Time
4. Use [CURSOR] to select the parameter.
5. Either turn the VALUE dial or use [INC][DEC] to turn the
setting.
6. If you want to keep the settings, press [8 (System Write)].
7. When you have finished making settings, press [EXIT] to
return to the Patch Play screen.
See p. 59 for each parameter’s functions.
8. Press [EXIT] to return to the Patch Play screen and play.
If you assign “Portamento” as a function to be controlled by the
assignable switches ([
]/[
]), you can use a button to easily
turn portamento on/off (p. 101).
When Patch mode is selected, controller settings cannot be saved
for each individual patch. Controller settings are saved as
system settings.
Bender and Modulation Part Select
Selects the part that will be controlled by pitch bend messages or
modulation messages.
Value: KBD, PAD
Beam Part Select
Selects the part that will be controlled by the D Beam.
Value: KBD, PAD
Knob Part Select
Selects the part that will be controlled by the realtime control knobs.
Value: KBD, PAD
33
Playing in Patch Mode
Playing in Patch Mode
Reference_e.book 34 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing in Patch Mode
Assigning a Parameter to a
Controller
Here's how to specify the parameter that will be affected when you
operate a controller.
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen.
2. Press [5 (Ctrl Setting)].
3. Press [5 (Ctrl Setting)].
D Beam (Pad Trigger)
Instead of striking the pads themselves, you can also use the D Beam
controller to control the sounding of the pads.
Settings for the PAD trigger are saved independently for each
performance as part of the performance settings. This lets you create
performances that make effective use of controller settings.
fig.02-21_50
fig.02-20_50
4. Press [1 (⇑)] or [2 (⇓)] to select the parameter.
5. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the parameter.
For details on the setting, refer to “Assigning a Parameter to a
Controller” (p. 34).
Pad Number
6. Either turn the VALUE dial or use [INC][DEC] to set the
value.
Specifies the pad number affected by the D Beam.
7. If you want to keep the settings, press [8 (System Write)].
Value: 0–16
Pad Velocity
When Patch mode is selected, controller settings cannot be saved
for each individual patch. Controller settings are saved as
system settings.
8. When you have finished making settings, press [EXIT] to
return to the Patch Play screen.
Specifies the strength of the pad sound played by the D Beam
controller.
Value: 1–127
Pad Control Mode
• Button at the right of the realtime control knobs
This specifies how the D Beam will behave when it is obstructed. If
this is set to MOMENTARY, the parameter will be on only while the
D Beam is obstructed, and will turn off when you stop obstructing it.
If this is set to LATCH, the parameter will alternately be switched
on/off each time you obstruct the D Beam.
• Assignable switch
Value: MOMENTARY, LATCH
You can jump directly to various setting screens by holding
down the [JUMP] and operating the following buttons or knobs.
• D BEAM ASSGINABLE button
D Beam (Solo Synth)
You can use the D Beam controller to perform in a way similar to on
a mono synth.
fig.02-22_50
For details on the setting, refer to “Assigning a Parameter to a
Controller” (p. 34).
34
Reference_e.book 35 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
When you press [7 (Panel View)], the Panel View screen will
appear, which displays the above parameters in graphical
fashion, simulating an analog synthesizer. From the Panel View
screen, you can press [2 (Image View)] to open the Image View
screen, where you can see a graphical indication of the D Beam
output value. Press [EXIT] to leave this screen. To exit from this
screen, press [EXIT].
OSC 1/2 Waveform
create wah-wah effects by employing an LFO to change the
cutoff frequency cyclically.
Cutoff
Selects the frequency at which the filter begins to have an effect on
the waveform’s frequency components.
Value: 0–127
Resonance
Select the waveform. SAW is a sawtooth wave, and SQR is a square
wave.
Emphasizes the portion of the sound in the region of the cutoff
frequency, adding character to the sound. Excessively high settings
can produce oscillation, causing the sound to distort.
Value: SAW, SQR
Value: 0–127
OSC 1/2 Pulse Width
Level
Specifies the pulse width of the waveform. By cyclically modifying
the pulse width you can create subtle changes in the tone.
Sets the volume.
* The Pulse Width is activated when “SQR” is selected with OSC1/2
waveform.
Value: 0–127
Value: 0–127
Chorus Send Level
Sets the level of the signal sent to chorus.
Value: 0–127
OSC 1/2 Coarse Tune
Reverb Send Level
Adjusts the pitch of the tone’s sound up or down in semitone steps
(+/-4 octaves).
Sets the level of the signal sent to reverb.
Value: -48–+48
Value: 0–127
OSC 1/2 Fine Tune
LFO Rate
Adjusts the pitch of the tone’s sound up or down in 1-cent steps (+/50 cents).
Adjusts the modulation rate, or speed, of the LFO.
Value: -50–+50
Value: 0–127
LFO Osc 1 Pitch Depth
OSC2 Level
Specifies the depth to which the LFO will modulate the OSC1 pitch.
Adjust the OSC2 level.
Value: -63–+63
Value: 0–127
LFO Osc 2 Pitch Depth
OSC Sync Switch
Specifies the depth to which the LFO will modulate the OSC2 pitch.
Turning this switch on produces a complex sound with many
harmonics. This is effective when the OSC1 pitch is higher than the
OSC2 pitch.
Value: -63–+63
Value: OFF, ON
Specifies the depth to which the LFO will modulate the pulse width
of the OSC1 waveform.
Filter Type
Selects the type of filter.
OFF: No filter is used.
LPF: Low Pass Filter. This reduces the volume of all frequencies
above the cutoff frequency (Cutoff Frequency). in order to
round off, or un-brighten, the sound. This is the most common
filter used in synthesizers.
BPF: Band Pass Filter. This leaves only the frequencies in the region
of the cutoff frequency (Cutoff Frequency), and cuts the rest.
This can be useful when creating distinctive sounds.
HPF: High Pass Filter. This cuts the frequencies in the region below
the cutoff frequency (Cutoff Frequency). This is suitable for
creating percussive sounds emphasizing their higher ones.
PKG: Peaking Filter. This emphasizes the frequencies in the region
of the cutoff frequency (Cutoff Frequency). You can use this to
LFO Osc 1 Pulse Width Depth
* The Pulse Width is activated when “SQR” is selected with OSC1/2
waveform.
Value: -63–+63
LFO Osc 2 Pulse Width Depth
Specifies the depth to which the LFO will modulate the pulse width
of the OSC2 waveform.
* The Pulse Width is activated when “SQR” is selected with OSC1/2
waveform.
Value: -63–+63
Range (Solo synth range)
Specifies the range in which the pitch of the solo synth will vary.
Value: 2 OCTAVES, 4 OCTAVES, 8 OCTAVES
35
Playing in Patch Mode
Playing in Patch Mode
Reference_e.book 36 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing in Patch Mode
D Beam (Assignable)
Knob
By assigning a variety of functions to the D Beam controller you can
apply different effects to the sound in real time.
fig.02-25_50
fig.02-23_50
For details on the setting, refer to “Assigning a Parameter to a
Controller” (p. 34).
For details on the setting, refer to “Assigning a Parameter to a
Controller” (p. 34).
Assignable Type
Knob parameters are valid only when the REALTIME
CONTROL button is set to “ASSIGNABLE.”
Value
Knob Assign 1–4
(Realtime Control Knob Assign 1–4)
CC01–31, 33–95: Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95
Specify the functions that will be controlled by the [
Specifies the function controlled by the D Beam controller.
] knobs.
Value
For more information about Control Change messages, please
refer to “MIDI Implementation” (Parameter List).
CC01–31, 33–95: Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95
Bend Up:
Raises the pitch in semitone steps
(up to 4 octaves higher).
Bend Down:
Lowers the pitch in semitone steps
(up to 4 octaves lower).
Pitch Bend:
Pitch Bend
Aftertouch:
Aftertouch
Start/stop:
Starts/Stops the sequencer.
Arp Style:
Arpeggio Style
TAP Tempo:
Tap tempo
(a tempo specified by the interval at which you
move your hand over the D Beam controller).
Arp Grid:
Arpeggio Grid
Arp Duration: Arpeggio Duration
Arp Grid:
Arpeggio Grid
Arp Duration: Arpeggio Duration
Arp Motif:
Arpeggio Motif
Arp Oct Up:
The range in which the arpeggio is sounded will
rise in steps of an octave (maximum 3 octaves).
Arp Oct Down: The range in which the arpeggio is sounded will
lower in steps of an octave (maximum 3 octaves).
Range Min (D Beam Range Lower)
Specify the lower limit of the range of the D Beam controller.
Value: 0–127
Range Max (D Beam Range Upper)
Specify the upper limit of the range of the D Beam controller.
By setting Range Max below Range Min you can invert the range of
change.
Value: 0–127
36
For more information about Control Change messages, please
refer to “MIDI Implementation” (Parameter List).
Arp Motif:
Arpeggio Motif
Chord Form:
Chord Form
Master Level: The volume of the entire Fantom-S.
Reference_e.book 37 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing Percussion Instruments
Switch
fig.02-26_50
In Patch mode, you can play percussion instruments from the
keyboard and pad by selecting a rhythm set. As the rhythm tone
assigned to each key and pad varies by the rhythm set selected, you
can play a wide range of percussion instruments.
Selecting a Rhythm Set
For details on the setting, refer to “Assigning a Parameter to a
Controller” (p. 34).
Assignable switches are valid only when the keyboard part is
selected.
Switch 1/2 (Assignable Switch 1–2)
Specify the functions that will be controlled by the [
buttons.
]/[
]
Value
Transpose Down: Lowers the key range in semitone steps
(up to 5 semitones lower).
The Fantom-S has four rhythm set groups, including the User group,
Preset group and GM group, with 32 rhythm sets in the User group,
32 rhythm sets in Preset group, and 9 rhythm sets in GM group.
Rhythm sets can also be saved on a memory card. What’s more, you
can further expand your options by installing up to three optional
Wave Expansion Boards (four SRX series), enabling you to select
from a large selection of rhythm sets.
USER
This is the group inside the Fantom-S which can be rewritten.
rhythm sets you yourself create can be stored in this group. The
Fantom-S includes 32 preset rhythm sets.
PRST (Preset)
This is the group inside the Fantom-S which cannot be rewritten.
However, you can modify the settings of the currently selected
rhythm set, and then save the modified settings in User memory.
The Fantom-S contains 32 preset rhythm sets.
Transpose Up:
Raises the key range in semitone steps
(up to 6 semitones higher).
Tap Tempo:
Tap tempo (a tempo specified by the interval at
which you press the button).
Mono/Poly:
Pressed to toggle between polyphonic (POLY)
and monophonic (MONO) play of a patch.
Portamento:
Portamento On/Off
GM (GM2)
Hold:
Hold play On/Off
MFX1–3 Sw:
Multi-effect 1–3 switch
Chorus Sw:
Chorus switch
This is an internal group of rhythm sets compatible with General
MIDI 2, a system of MIDI function specifications designed to
transcend differences between makers and types of devices; these
rhythm sets cannot be overwritten. Furthermore, settings of
currently selected rhythm sets from this group cannot be changed.
The Fantom-S includes nine preset rhythm sets.
Reverb Sw:
Reverb switch
Mastering Sw:
Mastering switch
Loop:
Loop play On/Off
Rhythm Start/Stop: Rhythm pattern playback On/Off
CARD (Memory Card)
This group lets you use patches stored on a memory card inserted in
the rear panel card slot. Since the data in this group can be rewritten,
you can use this group to store patches that you create.
XP-A–D (Wave Expansion Boards installed in
EXP-A–D Slots)
These groups are for when using rhythm sets from a Wave
Expansion Board installed in slots EXP A–D, and cannot be
rewritten. However, you can modify the settings of the currently
selected rhythm set, and then save the modified settings in User
memory and Memory card. The number of onboard rhythm sets
depends on the specific Wave Expansion Boards installed.
A Rhythm Set XP-A–D cannot be accessed if the Wave
Expansion Board (SRX series: sold separately) it belongs to has
not been installed.
37
Playing in Patch Mode
Playing in Patch Mode
Reference_e.book 38 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing in Patch Mode
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen.
Playing a Rhythm Set
2. Press [1 (Kbd Part)] or [2 (Pad Part)] to select the pad part or
the keyboard part.
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen,
and then press [7].
fig.02-15.e
Patch Type
Rhythm set group
The Patch Play screen switches.
Rhythm set number
2. Press [1 (Kbd Part)] or [2 (Pad Part)] to select the part. Select
the rhythm set that you wish to play.
3. Press a key or a pad on the keyboard to play a percussion
instrument.
Below the rhythm set name, the screen shows the note name of
the key you pressed, and the name of the percussion instrument
(rhythm tone name) assigned to that key.
fig.02-16.e
* Make sure that the Patch Type is set to “Rhythm.” If this is set to
“Patch,” use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the switch, and
turn the VALUE dial or press [INC] to select “Patch.” With the
cursor located at “Patch (Rhythm),” press [ENTER] to open the Patch
Type window. You can also use CURSOR to select “Rhythm (Patch)”
and then press [8 (Select)] to make the selection.
3. Press
to move the cursor to the rhythm set group.
4. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to select the
rhythm set group.
USER:
User
PRST:
Preset
CARD:
Memory card
GM:
Preset GM (GM2)
XP-A–D: Wave Expansion Boards installed in EXP-A–D Slots
5. Press
to move the cursor to the rhythm set number.
6. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to select the
rhythm set number.
7. If you selected a rhythm set for the pad part, play the pads to
hear the sound. If you selected a rhythm set for the
keyboard part, play the keyboard to hear the sound.
You can select favorite rhythm sets in the same way as when
selecting patches. For details on the procedure, refer to
“Selecting Favorite Patches (Favorite Sound)” (p. 28).
38
Note name
Rhythm tone name
Reference_e.book 39 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
fig.03-01_50
Creating a Patch
With the Fantom-S, you have total control over a wide variety of
settings. Each item that can be set is known as a parameter. When
you change the values of parameters, you are doing what is referred
to as Editing. This chapter explains the procedures used in creating
patches, and the functions of the patch parameters.
How to Make the Patch
Settings
Start with an existing patch and edit it to create a new patch. Since a
patch is a combination of up to any four tones, you should listen to
how the individual tones sound before you edit.
Four Tips for Editing Patches
● Select a patch that is similar to the sound you wish to
create (p. 27).
It’s hard to create a new sound that’s exactly what you want if
you just select a patch and modify its parameters at random. It
makes sense to start with a patch whose sound is related to
what you have in mind.
● Decide which tones will sound (p. 32).
When creating a patch, it is important to decide which tones
you are going to use. In the Patch Edit screen, set Tone Switch
1–4 to specify whether each tone will sound (on), or not (off). It
is also important to turn off unused tones to avoid wasting
voices, unnecessarily reducing the number of simultaneous
notes you can play.
3. The parameters are organized into several editing groups.
Press [1 (⇑)] or [2 (⇓)] to select the tab for the editing group
that contains the parameter you wish to edit.
For details on how the parameters are grouped, refer to
“Parameter list” (Parameter List).
• To change the part that you want to edit
Press [7 (Part Select)].
4. Press
or
wish to modify.
to move the cursor to the parameter you
5. Press [8 (Tone Sw/Sel)] to select the tone that you want to
edit.
The Tone Sw Select window appears.
fig.03-01a_50
● Check the Structure setting (p. 46).
The important Structure parameter determines how the four
tones combine. Before you select new tones, make sure you
understand how the currently selected tones are affecting each
other.
● Turn Effects off (p. 175).
Since the Fantom-S effects have such a profound impact on its
sounds, turn them off to listen to the sound itself so you can
better evaluate the changes you’re making. Since you will hear
the original sound of the patch itself when the effects are turned
off, the results of your modifications will be easier to hear.
Actually, sometimes just changing effects settings can give you
the sound you want.
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen,
and select the part (keyboard part or pad part) and patch
whose settings you want to edit (p. 27).
You cannot edit the patches in the GM2 group.
Press any one of the [5 (Tone Select)]–[8 (Tone Select)] buttons to
select the tone that you want to edit.
• Simultaneously editing the same parameter of multiple
tones
Simultaneously press two or more of the [5 (Tone Select)]–[8
(Tone Select)] buttons to select the tones that you want to edit at
the same time. When a tone is on, a check mark (✔) will be
displayed.
• To switch a tone on/off
Press a [1 (Tone Sw)]–[4 (Tone Sw)] button to switch the
corresponding tone on/off.
* Press
or
, you can select the tone.
6. When you have made your selection, press [EXIT].
If you want to create all your patches from the ground up, rather
than the patches that have already been prepared, carry out the
Initialize operation (p. 40).
2. Press [EDIT].
The Patch Edit screen appears.
7. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to get the value
you want.
If you’ve selected two or more tones, your editing will modify
the parameter values for all selected tones by the same amount.
8. Repeat steps 5–7 to complete a patch.
39
Reference_e.book 40 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
9. If you wish to save the changes you’ve made, press [WRITE]
to perform the Save operation (p. 42). If you do not wish to
save changes, press [EXIT] to return to the Patch Play
screen.
If you return to the Patch Play screen without saving, an “*” will
be displayed at the left of the patch number, indicating that the
patch settings have been edited.
If you turn off the power or select a different sound while the
display indicates “*,” your edited patch will be lost.
You can also select the edit group by holding down [SHIFT] and
pressing
or
. It is convenient to use this feature when
the Tone SW/Select window is displayed.
Initializing Patch Settings (Init)
“Initialize” means to return the settings of the currently selected
sound to a standard set of values.
The Initialize operation will affect only the currently selected
sound; the sounds that are stored in user memory will not be
affected. If you wish to restore all of the Fantom-S’s settings to
their factory values, perform a Factory Reset (p. 196).
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen,
and select the part (keyboard part or pad part) and patch
that you want to initialize (p. 27).
2. Press [EDIT].
3. Press [4 (Init)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
Editing in a Graphic Display
(Zoom Edit)
4. Press [8 (Exec)].
You can edit while viewing a graphic display of the most frequently
used important parameters.
Zoom Edit lets you edit the following parameters.
Parameter
Pitch Envelope
TVF
TVF Envelope
TVA Envelope
page
p. 50
p. 50
p. 52
p. 54
Parameter
TVA Envelope
Structure Type
LFO 1/2
page
p. 54
p. 46
p. 56
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen,
and select the part (keyboard part or pad part) and patch
that you want to edit.
2. Press [EDIT], and then press [3 (Zoom Edit)].
The Zoom Edit screen will appear.
fig.03-03a_50
The initialization will be carried out, and you’ll be returned to
the Patch Edit screen.
To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
Copying Patch (Tone) Settings
(Copy)
This operation copies the settings of any desired patch to the
currently selected patch. You can use this feature to make the editing
process faster and easier.
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen,
and select the part (keyboard part or pad part) that you want
to edit and the copy-destination patch (p. 27).
2. Press [EDIT].
3. Press [5 (Tone Copy)].
The Patch Copy window appears.
fig.03-03_50
3. The parameters are organized into several edit groups.
Press [1]–[4] to select the tab for the parameters that you
want to edit.
• To switch the parameter you want to edit
Press [6].
• To switch to a different part for editing
Press [7 (Part Select)].
• To select a tone for editing or switch a tone on/off
Press [8 (Tone Sw/Sel)].
4. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the parameter that you
want to edit.
You can use the realtime control knob to set the value.
5. Turn the VALUE dial or use [INC][DEC] to modify the value.
6. When you have finished editing, press [EXIT].
40
4. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor, select the “Source
(copy-source)” bank and number, and patch/tone.
5. Turn the VALUE dial or use [INC][DEC] to make settings.
6. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor, select the “Destination
(copy-destination)” patch/tone/number.
7. Turn the VALUE dial or use [INC][DEC] to make settings.
8. Press [8 (Exec)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
9. Press [8 (Exec)] to return to the Patch Edit screen.
To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
Reference_e.book 41 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
The Compare Function
For the Patch Effect Copy and Patch Tone Copy operations, you
can use the Compare function.
If you want to play the copy-source patch, press [6 (Compare)]
to add a check mark. Now you can play the copy-source patch
from the keyboard or pad.
fig.03-06_50
It is not possible to use the envelope to modify a one-shot waveform
to create a decay that is longer than the original waveform, or to turn
it into a sustaining sound. If you were to program such an envelope,
you would be attempting to shape a portion of the sound that simply
doesn’t exist, and the envelope would have no effect.
Cautions When Using a Loop
Waveform
The patch auditioned using the Compare function may
sound slightly different than when it is played normally.
With many acoustic instruments such as piano and sax, extreme
timbral changes occur during the first few moments of each note.
This initial attack is what defines much of the instrument’s character.
For such waveforms, it is best to use the complex tonal changes of
the attack portion of the waveform just as they are, and to use the
envelope only to modify the decay portion. If you attempt to use the
envelope to modify the attack portion as well, the characteristics of
the original waveform may prevent you from getting the sound that
you intend.
fig.03-08.e
Cautions When Selecting a
Waveform
Level
Looped portion
The sounds of the Fantom-S are based on complex PCM waveforms,
and if you attempt to make settings that are contrary to the type of
the original waveform, the results will not be as you expect.
The internal waveforms of the Fantom-S fall into the following two
groups.
One-shot: These waveforms contain sounds that have short decays.
A one-shot waveform records the initial rise and fall of the sound.
Some of the Fantom-S’s one-shot waveforms are sounds that are
complete in themselves, such as percussive instrument sounds. The
Fantom-S also contains many other one-shot waveforms that are
elements of other sounds. These include attack components such as
piano-hammer sounds and guitar fret noises.
Tone change stored
with the wave
Time
Envelope
for the TVF filter
Resulting
tone change
Looped: These waveforms include sounds with long decays as well
as sustained sounds. Loop waveforms repeatedly play back (loop)
the portion of the waveform after the sound has reached a relatively
steady state. The Fantom-S’s looped waveforms also include
components of other sounds, such as piano-string resonant
vibrations and the hollow sounds of brass instruments.
The following diagram shows an example of sound (electric organ)
that combines one-shot and looped waveforms.
fig.03-07.e
TVA ENV for looped Organ
waveform (sustain portion)
TVA ENV for one-shot Key
-click waveform (attack portion)
Resulting TVA ENV
change
Level
+
Note off
Time
=
Note off
41
Creating a Patch
Cautions When Using a One-shot
Waveform
Reference_e.book 42 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
Saving Patches You’ve Created
(Write)
Changes you make to sound settings are temporary, and will be lost
if you turn off the power or select another sound. If you want to keep
the modified sound, you must save it in the internal USER group
(user memory)
When you edit the patch settings, an “*” will appear in the Patch
Play screen.
When you perform the save procedure, the data that previously
occupied the save destination will be lost.
1. Make sure that the patch you wish to save is selected.
5. When you have finished inputting the name, press [8
(Write)].
A screen will appear, allowing you to select the write-destination
patch.
6. Turn the VALUE dial or use [INC][DEC] and [2 (⇑)][3 (⇓)] to
select the write destination and patch number.
The write destination can be either the Fantom-S's internal user
area (User), or a memory card (Card).
By pressing [6 (Compare)] you can check the save-destination
patch (Compare function).
7. Press [8 (Write)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
2. Press [WRITE].
The Write Menu screen appears.
Never switch off the Fantom-S while data is being saved.
fig.03-08a_50
8. Press [8 (Exec)] to execute the save operation.
* To cancel the operation, press [7 (Cancel)].
Auditioning the Save-Destination
Patch (Compare)
Before you save a patch, you can audition the patch which currently
occupies the save destination to make sure that it is one you don’t
mind overwriting. This can help prevent important patches from
being accidentally overwritten and lost.
3. Press [2 (Patch/Rhythm)].
* Alternatively, you can use
and then press [ENTER].
or
to select “Patch/Rhythm,”
The Patch Write screen appears.
1. Follow the procedure in “Saving Patches You’ve Created
(Write)” through step 6 to select the save destination.
2. Press [6 (Compare)] to add a check mark (✔)
fig.03-10.e
fig.03-09
Save-destination patch
3. Play the keyboard or pad to sound the save destination
patch, then check whether you really want to overwrite it.
4. Assign a name to the patch.
• [1 (Change Type)]: Selects the type of character. Each time you
press this, you will alternately select the first character of a
character set: uppercase (A), lowercase (a), or numerals and
symbols (0).
• [2 (Delete)]: Deletes the character at the cursor location, and
moves the subsequent characters one space forward.
• [3 (Insert)]: Inserts a space at the cursor location.
•
or
:Move the cursor.
• [VALUE dial] [INC][DEC]:Selects a character.
* If you decide to discard your input, press [7 (Cancel)].
* You can use the pads to specify characters (p. 25).
42
The patch auditioned using the Compare function may sound
slightly different than when it is played normally.
4. If you wish to change the save destination, re-specify the
save-destination patch by using
or
.
5. Press [8 (Write)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
6. Press [8 (Exec)] once again to execute the Save operation.
Reference_e.book 43 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
Functions of Patch Parameters
Patch Level 1
This section explains the functions the different patch parameters
have, as well as the composition of these parameters.
Specifies the volume of the patch.
Parameters marked with a “★” can be controlled using specified
MIDI messages (Matrix Control). Settings in the Control screen
will determine how these parameters are controlled (p. 61).
Creating a Patch
Value: 0–127
Patch Pan 2
Specifies the pan of the patch. “L64” is far left, “0” is center, and
“63R” is far right.
Value: L64–0–63R
If a number is displayed for the parameter name, (
1
,
2
,
3
,
4
),
you can use the realtime controller knob of the corresponding number
(the left most knob is number 1, the right most knob is number 4) to set
the value.
When you enter the Patch Edit screen, the indicator at the right of the
Realtime Control knobs will go out, and the Realtime Control knobs
can be used to edit the parameters of the patch or rhythm set. If you
once again press the button located at the right of the Realtime
Control knobs to make the indicator light, the knobs will control
their original functions. When you exit the Patch Edit screen, the
indicator will automatically return to its previous lit state.
Patch Priority
This determines how notes will be managed when the maximum
polyphony is exceeded (64 voices).
Value
LAST:
The last-played voices will be given priority, and
currently sounding notes will be turned off in order,
beginning with the first-played note.
LOUDEST: The voices with the loudest volume will be given
priority, and currently sounding notes will be turned off,
beginning with the lowest-volume voice.
fig.knob edit
Octave Shift
Adjusts the pitch of the patch’s sound up or down in units of an
octave (+/-3 octaves).
Value: -3– +3
1
2
3
4
You can use the same knobs to edit the values in the Zoom Edit
screen as well.
Settings Common to the Entire Patch
(General)
fig.03-01_50
Patch Coarse Tune ★
Adjusts the pitch of the patch’s sound up or down in semitone steps
(+/-4 octaves).
Value: -48– +48
Patch Fine Tune 3
Adjusts the pitch of the patch’s sound up or down in 1-cent steps (+/
-50 cents).
Value: -50– +50
One cent is 1/100th of a semitone.
Stretch Tune Depth
For details on the setting, refer to “How to Make the Patch
Settings” (p. 39).
Patch Category
Specifies the type (category) of the patch.
This setting allows you to apply “stretched tuning” to the patch.
(Stretched tuning is a system by which acoustic pianos are normally
tuned, causing the lower range to be lower and the higher range to
be higher than the mathematical tuning ratios would otherwise
dictate.) With a setting of “OFF,” the patch’s tuning will be equal
temperament. A setting of “3” will produce the greatest difference in
the pitch of the low and high ranges.
Value: OFF, 1–3
The diagram shows the pitch change relative to equal temperament
that will occur in the low and high ranges. This setting will have a
subtle effect on the way in which chords resonate.
It also determines the phrase that will be sounded when using the
Phrase Preview function.
For details on the possible category names, refer to (p. 30).
43
Reference_e.book 44 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
Attack Time Offset
fig.Stretch.e
Pitch difference from
equal temperament
2
Attack Time Offset alters the attack time of the overall patch, while
preserving the relative differences between the attack time values set
for each tone in the A-Env Time 1 parameters (p. 54), F-Env Time 1
parameters (p. 52).
1
Range: -63– +63
Parameter value
3
OFF
OFF
* Attack Time: The time it takes for a sound to reach maximum volume
after the key is pressed and sound begun.
This value is added to the attack time value of a tone, so if the
attack time value of any tone is already set to “127” (maximum),
positive “+” settings here will not produce any change.
1
2
3
Low note range
High note range
Analog Feel (Analog Feel Depth) 4
Specifies the depth of 1/f modulation that is to be applied to the
patch. (1/f modulation is a pleasant and naturally-occurring ratio of
modulation that occurs in a babbling brook or rustling wind.)
By adding this “1/f modulation,” you can simulate the natural
instability characteristic of an analog synthesizer.
Release Time Offset
Release Time Offset alters the release time of the overall patch, while
preserving the relative differences between the release time values
set for each tone in the A-Env Time 4 parameters (p. 54), F-Env Time
4 parameters (p. 52).
Range: -63– +63
* Release Time: The time from when you take your finger off the key
until the sound disappears.
Value: 0–127
Cutoff Offset
Cutoff Frequency Offset alters the cutoff frequency of the overall patch,
while preserving the relative differences between the cutoff frequency
values set for each tone in the Cutoff Frequency parameters (p. 51).
Range: -63– +63
This value is added to the cutoff frequency value of a tone, so if
the cutoff frequency value of any tone is already set to “127”
(maximum), positive “+” settings here will not produce any
change.
This value is added to the release time value of a tone, so if the
release time value of any tone is already set to “127” (maximum),
positive “+” settings here will not produce any change.
Velocity Sens Offset (Velocity Sensitivity Offset)
Velocity Sensitivity Offset alters the Velocity Sensitivity of the
overall patch while preserving the relative differences between the
Velocity Sensitivity values set for each tone in the parameters below.
Cutoff V-Sens parameter (p. 51)
Level V-Sens parameter (p. 53)
Range: -63– +63
* Velocity: Pressure with which the key is pressed.
Resonance Offset
Resonance Offset alters the resonance of the overall patch, while
preserving the relative differences between the resonance values set
for each tone in the Resonance parameter (p. 51).
Range: -63– +63
* Resonance: emphasizes the overtones in the region of the cutoff
frequency, adding character to the sound.
This value is added to the resonance value of a tone, so if the
resonance value of any tone is already set to “127” (maximum),
positive “+” settings here will not produce any change.
44
This value is added to the velocity sensitivity value of a tone, so
if the velocity sensitivity value of any tone is already set to “+63”
(maximum), positive “+” settings here will not produce any
change.
Reference_e.book 45 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Modifying Waveforms (Wave)
Wave Tempo Sync
fig.03-15_50
When you wish to synchronize a Phrase Loop to the clock (tempo),
set this to “ON.” This is valid only when a separately sold wave
expansion board is installed, and a waveform that indicates a tempo
(BPM) is selected as the sample for a tone.
Value: OFF, ON
• If a waveform from a wave expansion board is selected for the
tone, turning the Wave Tempo Sync parameter “ON” will cause
pitch-related settings (p. 49) and FXM-related settings (p. 45) to
be ignored.
For details on the setting, refer to “How to Make the Patch
Settings” (p. 39).
Wave Group
Selects the group for the waveform that is to be the basis of the tone.
Value
INT:
Waveforms stored in internal memory
EXP:
Waveform stored in a Wave Expansion Board (SRX series)
installed in EXP slots.
SAMP: Sample waveforms
MSAM: Multisample waveforms
You cannot select a waveform group of a Wave Expansion Board
that is not installed.
Wave Bank
• If a sample is selected for a tone, Wave Tempo Sync will require
twice the normal number of voices.
• When the Wave Tempo Sync parameter is set to “ON,” set the Delay
Time parameter (p. 60) to “0.” With other settings, a delay effect will
be applied, and you will be not be able to play as you expect.
Phrase Loop
Phrase loop refers to the repeated playback of a phrase that’s
been pulled out of a song (e.g., by using a sampler). One
technique involving the use of Phrase Loops is the excerpting of
a Phrase from a pre-existing song in a certain genre, for example
dance music, and then creating a new song with that Phrase
used as the basic motif. This is referred to as “Break Beats.”
Realtime Time Stretch
Selects the wave bank.
Value
When the wave group is EXP:
• If a sample is selected for a tone, you must first set the BPM
(tempo) parameter of the sample.
A–D
If the wave group is “SAMP” or “MSAM,” and the Wave
Tempo Sync parameter is turned “ON,” you can vary the
playback speed of the waveform without affecting the pitch.
When the wave group is SAMP: PRST, USER, CARD
When the wave group is MSAM: USER, CARD
Wave No. L (Mono) (Wave Number L (Mono))
Wave No. R (Wave Number R)
Selects the basic waveform for a tone. Along with the Wave number,
the Wave name appears at the lower part of the display.
When in monaural mode, only the left side (L) is specified. When in
stereo, the right side (R) is also specified.
* When using a multisample in stereo, you must specify the same
number for L and R.
Value: ----, 1–1228 (The upper limit will depend on the wave group.)
Wave Gain 1
Sets the gain (amplification) of the waveform. The value changes in 6
dB (decibel) steps—an increase of 6 dB doubles the waveform’s gain.
If you intend to use the Booster to distort the waveform’s sound, set
this parameter to its maximum value (p. 47).
Value: -6, 0, +6, +12
FXM Switch 2
This sets whether FXM will be used (ON) or not (OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
FXM
FXM (Frequency Cross Modulation) uses a specified waveform
to apply frequency modulation to the currently selected
waveform, creating complex overtones. This is useful for
creating dramatic sounds or sound effects.
FXM Color 3
Specifies how FXM will perform frequency modulation. Higher
settings result in a grainier sound, while lower settings result in a
more metallic sound.
Value: 1–4
FXM Depth ★ 4
Specifies the depth of the modulation produced by FXM.
Value: 0–16
45
Creating a Patch
Creating a Patch
Reference_e.book 46 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
Changing How a Tone Is Sounded
(TMT)
You can use the force with which keys are played, or MIDI messages
to control the way each Tone is played. This is referred to as the Tone
Mix Table (TMT).
fig.Struct-04
TYPE 4
TONE 1 (3)
WG
TVA
TVF
B
TONE 2 (4)
WG
TVF
TVA
fig.03-14_50
This type applies a booster to distort the waveform, and then
combines the two filters. The TVA for tone 1 (or 3) controls the
volume balance between the two tones and adjusts booster level.
fig.Struct-05
TYPE 5
TONE 1 (3)
WG
TVA
TVF
R
TONE 2 (4)
For details on the setting, refer to “How to Make the Patch
Settings” (p. 39).
Structure Type 1 & 2, 3 & 4
WG
TVF
This type uses a ring modulator to create new overtones, and
combines the two filters. The tone 1 (3) TVA will control the volume
balance of the two tones, adjusting the depth of ring modulator.
fig.Struct-06
TYPE 6
TONE 1 (3)
WG
TVA
Determines how tone 1 and 2, or tone 3 and 4 are connected.
Value: 1–10
TVA
TVF
R
TONE 2 (4)
WG
TVF
TVA
The following 10 different Types of combination are available.
fig.Struct-01
TYPE 1
TONE 1 (3)
WG
TVF
TVA
TONE 2 (4)
WG
TVF
TVA
This type uses a ring modulator to create new overtones, and in
addition mixes in the sound of tone 2 (4) and stacks the two filters.
Since the ring-modulated sound can be mixed with tone 2 (4), tone 1
(3) TVA can adjust the amount of the ring-modulated sound.
fig.Struct-07
With this type, tones 1 and 2 (or 3 and 4) are independent. Use this
type when you want to preserve PCM sounds or create and combine
sounds for each tone.
TYPE 7
TONE 1 (3)
WG
TONE 2 (4)
WG
TVF
TVA
R
TVF
TVA
fig.Struct-02
This type applies a filter to tone 1 (3) and ring-modulates it with tone
2 (4) to create new overtones.
TYPE 2
TONE 1 (3)
WG
TVA
fig.Struct-08
TVF
TYPE 8
TONE 2 (4)
WG
TVF
TVA
This type stacks the two filters together to intensify the
characteristics of the filters. The TVA for tone 1 (or 3) controls the
volume balance between the two tones.
fig.Struct-03
TYPE 3
TONE 1 (3)
WG
TONE 2 (4)
WG
TVF
TVA
R
TVF
TVA
This type sends the filtered tone 1 (3) and tone 2 (4) through a ring
modulator, and then mixes in the sound of tone 2 (4) and applies a
filter to the result.
fig.Struct-09
TONE 1 (3)
WG
TVA
TVF
TYPE 9
B
TONE 2 (4)
WG
TVF
TVA
TONE 1 (3)
WG
TVF
TONE 2 (4)
WG
TVF
TVA
R
This type mixes the sound of tone 1 (3) and tone 2 (4), applies a filter,
and then applies a booster to distort the waveform.
TVA
This type passes the filtered sound of each tone through a ring
modulator to create new overtones. The tone 1 (3) TVA will control
the volume balance of the two tones, adjusting the depth of ring
modulator.
46
Reference_e.book 47 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
fig.Struct-10
TYPE 10
WG
TVF
TVA
Creating a Patch
Booster
TONE 1 (3)
The Booster is used to distort the incoming signal.
R
fig.Booster-1.e
TONE 2 (4)
WG
TVF
TVA
This type passes the filtered sound of each tone through a ring
modulator to create new overtones, and also mixes in the sound of
tone 2 (4). Since the ring-modulated sound can be mixed with tone 2
(4), tone 1 (3) TVA can adjust the amount of the ring-modulated
sound.
• If you select a tone while on the Structure screen, the tone paired
with the selected tone will also be selected.
• When TYPE 2–10 is selected and one tone of a pair is turned off,
the other tone will be sounded as TYPE 1 regardless of the
displayed setting.
• If you limit the keyboard area in which a tone will sound
(Keyboard Range p. 48) or limit the range of velocities for which
it will sound (Velocity Range p. 48), the result in areas or ranges
where the tone does not sound is just as if the tone had been
turned off. This means that if TYPE 2–10 is selected and you
create a keyboard area or velocity range in which one tone of a
pair does not sound, notes played in that area or range will be
sounded by the other tone as TYPE 1 regardless of the displayed
setting.
Booster level
In addition to using this to create distortion, you can use the
waveform (WG1) of one of the tones as an LFO which shifts the
other waveform (WG2) upward or downward to create
modulation similar to PWM (pulse width modulation). This
parameter works best when you use it in conjunction with the
Wave Gain parameter (p. 45).
fig.Booster-2.e
Uses WG1 as LFO
WG1
Adjusts WG1 output
TVA
Booster
WG2
WG2
Booster 1&2, 3&4 (Booster Gain)
Adds to WG1
When a Structure Type of TYPE 3 or TYPE 4 is selected, you can
adjust the depth of the booster. The booster increases the input
signal in order to distort the sound. This creates the distortion effect
frequently used with electric guitars. Higher settings will produce
more distortion.
Distorted area of the
Waveform changes
Shift in waveform by WG1
Value: 0, +6, +12, +18
Ring Modulator
A ring modulator multiplies the waveforms of two tones with
each other, generating many new overtones (inharmonic
partials) which were not present in either waveform. (Unless
one of the waveforms is a sine wave, evenly-spaced frequency
components will not usually be generated.)
As the pitch difference between the two waveforms changes the
harmonic structure, the result will be an unpitched metallic
sound. This function is suitable for creating metallic sounds
such as bells.
fig.Ring Mod
47
Reference_e.book 48 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
Key Fade Lower (Keyboard Fade Width Lower)
Velo Fade Lower (Velocity Fade Width Lower)
This determines what will happen to the tone’s level when a note
that’s lower than the tone’s specified keyboard range is played.
Higher settings produce a more gradual change in volume. If you
don’t want the tone to sound at all when a note below the keyboard
range is played, set this parameter to “0.”
This Determines what will happen to the tone’s level when the tone
is played at a velocity lower than its specified velocity range. Higher
settings produce a more gradual change in volume. If you want
notes played outside the specified key velocity range to not be
sounded at all, set this to “0.”
Value: 0–127
Value: 0–127
Key Range Lower (Keyboard Range Lower) 1
Velo Range Lower (Velocity Range Lower) 3
Specifies the lowest note that the tone will sound for each tone.
Value: C-1–UPPER
This sets the lowest velocity at which the tone will sound. Make
these settings when you want different tones to sound in response to
notes played at different strengths.
Key Range Upper (Keyboard Range Upper) 2
Value: 1–UPPER
Specifies the highest note that the tone will sound for each tone.
Value: LOWER–G9
If you attempt to raise the lower key higher than the upper key,
or to lower the upper key below the lower key, the other value
will be automatically modified to the same setting.
Key Fade Upper (Keyboard Fade Width Upper)
This determines what will happen to the tone’s level when a note
that’s higher than the tone’s specified keyboard range is played.
Higher settings produce a more gradual change in volume. If you
don’t want the tone to sound at all when a note below the keyboard
range is played, set this parameter to “0.”
Value: 0–127
Velo Range Upper (Velocity Range Upper) 4
This sets the highest velocity at which the tone will sound. Make
these settings when you want different tones to sound in response to
notes played at different strengths.
Value: LOWER–127
If you attempt to set the Lower velocity limit above the Upper, or
the Upper below the Lower, the other value will automatically
be adjusted to the same setting.
When using the Matrix Control to have different tones played,
set the lowest value (Lower) and highest value (Upper) of the
value of the MIDI message used.
fig.Key Range.e
Level
Velo Fade Upper (Velocity Fade Width Upper)
Pitch
Fade Lower
Range Lower
Fade Upper
Range Upper
This determines what will happen to the tone’s level when the tone is
played at a velocity greater than its specified velocity range. Higher settings
produce a more gradual change in volume. If you want notes played outside
the specified key velocity range to not be sounded at all, set this to “0.”
Value: 0–127
fig.Vel Range.e
Level
TMT Velocity Control
(TMT Velocity Control Switch)
TMT Velocity Control determines whether a different tone is played
(ON) or not (OFF) depending on the force with which the key is
played (velocity).
Velocity
Fade Lower
Range Lower
Fade Upper
Range Upper
When set to “RANDOM,” the patch’s constituent tones will sound
randomly, regardless of any Velocity messages.
TMT Control Sw (TMT Control Switch)
When set to “CYCLE,” the patch’s constituent tones will sound
consecutively, regardless of any Velocity messages.
Use the Matrix Control to enable (ON), or disable (OFF) sounding of
different tones.
Value: OFF, ON, RANDOM, CYCLE
Value: OFF, ON
Instead of using Velocity, you can also have tones substituted
using the Matrix Control (p. 63). However, the keyboard velocity
and the Matrix Control cannot be used simultaneously to make
different tones to sound. When using the Matrix Control to
switch tones, set the Velocity Control parameter to “OFF.”
48
You can also cause different tones to sound in response to notes
played at different strengths (velocity) on the keyboard (p. 48).
However, the Matrix Control and the keyboard velocity cannot
be used simultaneously to make different tones to sound. When
you want to make the different tones to sound, set the Velocity
Control parameter (p. 48) to “OFF.”
Reference_e.book 49 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
fig.Pitch KF.e
Pitch
fig.03-16_50
+200
+100
Creating a Patch
Modifying Pitch (Pitch/Pitch Env)
+50
0
-50
C1
For details on the setting, refer to “How to Make the Patch
Settings” (p. 39).
Tone Coarse Tune ★ 1
Adjusts the pitch of the tone’s sound up or down in semitone steps
(+/-4 octaves).
C2
C3
C4
C5
-200
C6
-100
C7
Key
Bend Range Up (Pitch Bend Range Up)
Specifies the degree of pitch change in semitones when the Pitch
Bend lever is all the way right. For example, if this parameter is set to
“12,” the pitch will rise one octave when the pitch bend lever is
moved to the right-most position.
Value: 0– +48
Value: -48– +48
Bend Range Down (Pitch Bend Range Down)
Tone Fine Tune ★ 2
Adjusts the pitch of the tone’s sound up or down in 1-cent steps (+/50 cents).
Value: -50– +50
Specifies the degree of pitch change in semitones when the Pitch
Bend lever is all the way left. For example if this is set to “-48” and
you move the pitch bend lever all the way to the left, the pitch will
fall 4 octaves.
Value: -48–0
One cent is 1/100th of a semitone.
Random Pitch Depth 3
This specifies the width of random pitch deviation that will occur
each time a key is pressed. If you do not want the pitch to change
randomly, set this to “0.” These values are in units of cents (1/100th
of a semitone).
Value: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200,
300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100, 1200
Pitch Key follow 4
This specifies the amount of pitch change that will occur when you
play a key one octave higher (i.e., 12 keys upward on the keyboard).
If you want the pitch to rise one octave as on a conventional
keyboard, set this to “+100.” If you want the pitch to rise two
octaves, set this to “+200.” Conversely, set this to a negative value if
you want the pitch to fall. With a setting of “0,” all keys will produce
the same pitch.
Value: -200, -190, -180, -170, -160, -150, -140, -130, -120, -110, -100, -90,
-80, -70, -60, -50, -40, -30, -20, -10, 0, +10, +20, +30, +40, +50, +60, +70,
+80, +90, +100, +110, +120, +130, +140, +150, +160, +170, +180, +190,
+200
P-Env V-Sens (Pitch Envelope Velocity Sensitivity)
Keyboard playing dynamics can be used to control the depth of the
pitch envelope. If you want the pitch envelope to have more effect
for strongly played notes, set this parameter to a positive (+) value. If
you want the pitch envelope to have less effect for strongly played
notes, set this to a negative (-) value.
Value: -63– +63
P-Env T1 V-Sens
(Pitch Envelope Time 1 Velocity Sensitivity)
This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the Time 1 of the Pitch
envelope. If you want Time 1 to be speeded up for strongly played
notes, set this parameter to a positive (+) value. If you want it to be
slowed down, set this to a negative (-) value.
Value: -63– +63
P-Env T4 V-Sens
(Pitch Envelope Time 4 Velocity Sensitivity)
Use this parameter when you want key release speed to impact on
Time 4 value of the pitch envelope. If you want Time 4 to be speeded
up for quickly released notes, set this parameter to a positive (+) value.
If you want it to be slowed down, set this to a negative (-) value.
Value: -63– +63
P-Env Time KF (Pitch Envelope Time Key Follow)
Use this setting if you want the pitch envelope times (Time 2–Time
4) to be affected by the keyboard location. Based on the pitch
envelope times for the C4 key, positive (+) settings will cause notes
49
Reference_e.book 50 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
higher than C4 to have increasingly shorter times, and negative (-)
settings will cause them to have increasingly longer times. Larger
settings will produce greater change.
Value: -100, -90, -80, -70, -60, -50, -40, -30, -20, -10, 0, +10, +20, +30,
+40, +50, +60, +70, +80, +90, +100
Modifying the Brightness of a
Sound with a Filter (TVF/TVF Env)
fig.03-17_50
fig.Time KF.e
Time
-100
-50
0
+50
+100
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
For details on the setting, refer to “How to Make the Patch
Settings” (p. 39).
Key
C7
TVF
Pitch Env
Filter Type 3
P-Env Depth (Pitch Envelope Depth) 1 , 2 , 4
Adjusts the effect of the Pitch Envelope. Higher settings will cause
the pitch envelope to produce greater change. Negative (-) settings
will invert the shape of the envelope.
Selects the type of filter. A filter is a function that cuts off a specific
frequency band to change a sounds brightness, thickness, and other
qualities.
Value
OFF:
No filter is used.
LPF:
Specify the pitch envelope times (Time 1–Time 4). Higher settings
will result in a longer time until the next pitch is reached. (For
example, Time 2 is the time over which the pitch changes from Level
1 to Level 2.)
Low Pass Filter. This reduces the volume of all frequencies
above the cutoff frequency (Cutoff Freq). in order to round
off, or un-brighten, the sound. This is the most common filter
used in synthesizers.
BPF:
Band Pass Filter. This leaves only the frequencies in the
region of the cutoff frequency (Cutoff Freq), and cuts the
rest. This can be useful when creating distinctive sounds.
Value: 0–127
HPF:
High Pass Filter. This cuts the frequencies in the region
below the cutoff frequency (Cutoff Freq). This is suitable for
creating percussive sounds emphasizing their higher ones.
PKG:
Peaking Filter. This emphasizes the frequencies in the region
of the cutoff frequency (Cutoff Freq). You can use this to
create wah-wah effects by employing an LFO to change the
cutoff frequency cyclically.
Value: -12– +12
P-Env Time 1–4 (Pitch Envelope Time 1–4) ★ 3
fig.Pitch Env.e
T1
T2
T3
T4
Pitch L0
L1
Note off
Note on
L2
T: Time
Time
L3
L4
L: Level
P-Env Level 0–4 (Pitch Envelope Level 0–4)
Specify the pitch envelope levels (Level 0–Level 4). It determines
how much the pitch changes from the reference pitch (the value set
with Coarse Tune or Fine Tune on the Pitch screen) at each point.
Positive (+) settings will cause the pitch to be higher than the
standard pitch, and negative (-) settings will cause it to be lower.
LPF2: Low Pass Filter 2. Although frequency components above
the Cutoff frequency (Cutoff Freq) are cut, the sensitivity of
this filter is half that of the LPF. This makes it a
comparatively warmer low pass filter. This filter is good for
use with simulated instrument sounds such as the acoustic
piano.
LPF3: Low Pass Filter 3. Although frequency components above
the Cutoff frequency (Cutoff Freq) are cut, the sensitivity of
this filter changes according to the Cutoff frequency. While
this filter is also good for use with simulated acoustic
instrument sounds, the nuance it exhibits differs from that of
the LPF2, even with the same TVF Envelope settings.
Value: -63– +63
If you set “LPF2” or “LPF3,” the setting for the Resonance
parameter will be ignored (p. 51).
50
Reference_e.book 51 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Cutoff Frequency ★ 1
Cutoff Key follow 4
Selects the frequency at which the filter begins to have an effect on
the waveform’s frequency components.
Use this parameter if you want the cutoff frequency to change
according to the key that is pressed. Relative to the cutoff frequency
at the C4 key (center C), positive (+) settings will cause the cutoff
frequency to rise for notes higher than C4, and negative (-) settings
will cause the cutoff frequency to fall for notes higher than C4.
Larger settings will produce greater change.
* Cutoff Frequency: the frequency at which the filter begins to have an
effect on the waveform’s frequency components.
Value: 0–127
With “LPF/LPF2/LPF3” selected for the Filter Type parameter,
lower cutoff frequency settings reduce a tone’s upper harmonics for
a more rounded, warmer sound. Higher settings make it sound
brighter.
If “BPF” is selected, harmonic components will change depending
on the TVF Cutoff Frequency setting. This can be useful when
creating distinctive sounds.
With “HPF” selected, higher Cutoff Frequency settings will reduce
lower harmonics to emphasize just the brighter components of the
sound.
With “PKG” selected, the harmonics to be emphasized will vary
depending on Cutoff Frequency setting.
Value: -200, -190, -180, -170, -160, -150, -140, -130, -120, -110, -100, -90,
-80, -70, -60, -50, -40, -30, -20, -10, 0, +10, +20, +30, +40, +50, +60, +70,
+80, +90, +100, +110, +120, +130, +140, +150, +160, +170, +180, +190,
+200
fig.Cutoff KF.e
Cutoff frequency
(Octave)
+200
+50
+1
0
o
To edit the overall patch while preserving the relative
differences in the Cutoff Frequency values set for each tone, set
the Cutoff Offset parameter (p. 44).
+100
+2
-1
-50
-2
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
-200
C6
-100
C7
Key
Resonance ★ 2
Emphasizes the portion of the sound in the region of the cutoff
frequency, adding character to the sound. Excessively high settings
can produce oscillation, causing the sound to distort.
Value: 0–127
To edit the overall patch while preserving the relative
differences in the Resonance values set for each tone, set the
Resonance Offset parameter (p. 44).
Cutoff V-Curve (Cutoff Frequency Velocity Curve)
Selects one of the following seven curves that determine how
keyboard playing dynamics (velocity) influence the cutoff frequency.
Set this to “FIXED” when the Cutoff frequency is not to be changed
according to the force with which the keys are pressed.
Value: FIXED, 1–7
fig.Curve-7
fig.Resonance.e
LPF
BPF
Level
High
Frequency
parameter value
Cutoff frequency
Low
HPF
PKG
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Cutoff V-Sens (Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity)
Use this parameter when changing the cutoff frequency to be
applied as a result of changes in playing velocity. If you want
strongly played notes to raise the cutoff frequency, set this
parameter to positive (+) settings. If you want strongly played notes
to lower the cutoff frequency, use negative (-) settings.
Value: -63– +63
To edit the overall patch while preserving the relative
differences in the Cutoff Frequency Velocity Sensitivity values
set for each tone, set the Velocity Sens Offset parameter (p. 44).
However, this setting is shared by the Level V-Sens parameter
(p. 53).
51
Creating a Patch
Creating a Patch
Reference_e.book 52 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
TVF ENV
Resonance V-Sens
(Resonance Velocity Sensitivity)
F-Env Depth (TVF Envelope Depth)
This allows keyboard velocity to modify the amount of Resonance. If
you want strongly played notes to have a greater Resonance effect,
set this parameter to positive (+) settings. If you want strongly
played notes to have less Resonance, use negative (-) settings.
Specifies the depth of the TVF envelope. Higher settings will cause
the TVF envelope to produce greater change. Negative (-) settings
will invert the shape of the envelope.
Value: -63– +63
Value: -63– +63
F-Env V-Curve (TVF Envelope Velocity Curve)
F-Env Time KF (TVF Envelope Time Key Follow)
Selects one of the following 7 curves that will determine how
keyboard playing dynamics will affect the TVF envelope. Set this to
“FIXED” when the amount of TVF Envelope applied is not to be
changed according to the force with which the keys are pressed.
Use this setting if you want the TVA envelope times (Time 2–Time 4)
to be affected by the keyboard location. Based on the TVF envelope
times for the C4 key (center C), positive (+) settings will cause notes
higher than C4 to have increasingly shorter times, and negative (-)
settings will cause them to have increasingly longer times. Larger
settings will produce greater change.
Value: FIXED, 1–7
fig.Curve-7
Value: -100, -90, -80, -70, -60, -50, -40, -30, -20, -10, 0, +10, +20, +30,
+40, +50, +60, +70, +80, +90, +100
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
fig.Time KF.e
Time
F-Env V-Sens (TVF Envelope Velocity Sensitivity)
-100
Specifies how keyboard playing dynamics will affect the depth of the
TVF envelope. Positive (+) settings will cause the TVF envelope to
have a greater effect for strongly played notes, and negative (-)
settings will cause the effect to be less.
-50
0
Value: -63– +63
+50
F-Env T1 V-Sens
(TVF Envelope Time 1 Velocity Sensitivity)
+100
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
Key
C7
This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the Time 1 of the TVF
envelope. If you want Time 1 to be speeded up for strongly played
notes, set this parameter to a positive (+) value. If you want it to be
slowed down, set this to a negative (-) value.
F-Env Time 1–4
Value: -63– +63
(TVF Envelope Time 1–4) ★ 1 , 2 , 4
F-Env T4 V-Sens
(TVF Envelope Time 4 Velocity Sensitivity)
Specify the TVF envelope times (Time 1–Time 4). Higher settings
will lengthen the time until the next cutoff frequency level is
reached. (For example, Time 2 is the time over which Level 1 will
change to Level 2.)
The parameter to use when you want key release speed to control
the Time 4 value of the TVF envelope. If you want Time 4 to be
speeded up for quickly released notes, set this parameter to a
positive (+) value. If you want it to be slowed down, set this to a
negative (-) value.
Value: 0–127
fig.TVF Env.e
T1
T2
T3
T4
Value: -63– +63
Cutoff
Frequency
L0
L1
Note on
T: Time
L2
L3
L4
Time
Note off
L: Level
F-Env Level 0–4 (TVF Envelope Level 0–4) 3
Specify the TVF envelope levels (Level 0–Level 4). These settings
specify how the cutoff frequency will change at each point, relative
to the standard cutoff frequency (the cutoff frequency value
specified in the TVF screen).
Value: 0–127
52
Reference_e.book 53 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
fig.03-18_50
fig.Bias.e
LOWER
+
Level
UPPER
Level
+
0
0
–
C-1
For details on the setting, refer to “How to Make the Patch
Settings” (p. 39).
Bias Position
LO&UP
+
Level
+
0
0
–
–
C-1
–
Key
Bias Position
G9
C-1
ALL
Level
Bias Position
–
0
+
Key
G9
C-1
Key
G9
+
0
–
Bias Position
Key
G9
Bias Level
Adjusts the angle of the volume change that will occur in the
selected Bias Direction. Larger settings will produce greater change.
Negative (-) values will invert the change direction.
TVA
Tone Level ★ 1
Sets the volume of the tone. This setting is useful primarily for
adjusting the volume balance between tones.
Value: -100, -90, -80, -70, -60, -50, -40, -30, -20, -10, 0, +10, +20, +30,
+40, +50, +60, +70, +80, +90, +100
Bias Position
Value: 0–127
Specifies the key relative to which the volume will be modified.
Level V-Curve (TVA Level Velocity Curve)
Value: C-1–G9
You can select from seven curves that determine how keyboard
playing strength will affect the volume. If you do not want the
volume of the tone to be affected by the force with which you play
the key, set this to “FIXED.”
Selects the direction in which change will occur starting from the
Bias Position.
Value: FIXED, 1–7
Value
fig.Curve-7
1
Bias Direction
LOWER: The volume will be modified for the keyboard area below
the Bias Point.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Level V-Sens (TVA Level Velocity Sensitivity)
Set this when you want the volume of the tone to change depending
on the force with which you press the keys. Set this to a positive (+)
value to have the changes in tone volume increase the more
forcefully the keys are played; to make the tone play more softly as
you play harder, set this to a negative (-) value.
Value: -63– +63
If you wish to make adjustments to the entire patch while
maintaining the relative values of TVA Level Velocity Sensitivity
among tones, adjust the Velocity Sens Offset parameter (p. 44).
However, this setting is shared by the Cutoff V-Sens parameter
(p. 51).
Bias
Bias causes the volume to be affected by the keyboard position. This
is useful for changing volume through keyboard position (pitch)
when playing acoustic instruments.
UPPER: The volume will be modified for the keyboard area above
the Bias Point.
LO&UP: The volume will be modified symmetrically toward the left
and right of the Bias Point.
ALL:
The volume changes linearly with the bias point at the
center.
Tone Pan ★ 2
Sets the pan of the tone. “L64” is far left, “0” is center, and “63R” is
far right.
Value: L64–0–63R
Pan Key Follow 3
Use this parameter if you want key position to affect panning.
Positive (+) settings will cause notes higher than C4 key (center C) to
be panned increasingly further toward the right, and negative (-)
settings will cause notes higher than C4 key (center C) to be panned
toward the left. Larger settings will produce greater change.
Value: -100– +100
53
Creating a Patch
Adjusting the Volume (TVA/TVA Env)
Reference_e.book 54 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
A-Env Time KF (TVA Envelope Time Key Follow)
fig.Pan KF.e
Pan
0
Use this setting if you want the TVA envelope times (Time 2–Time 4)
to be affected by the keyboard location. Based on the TVA envelope
times for the C4 key (center C), positive (+) settings will cause notes
higher than C4 to have increasingly shorter times, and negative (-)
settings will cause them to have increasingly longer times. Larger
settings will produce greater change.
-50
Value: -100, -90, -80, -70, -60, -50, -40, -30, -20, -10, 0, +10, +20, +30,
+40, +50, +60, +70, +80, +90, +100
+100
R
+50
o
fig.Time KF.e
-100
L
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
Key
Time
-100
-50
Random Pan Depth 4
0
Use this parameter when you want the stereo location to change
randomly each time you press a key. Higher settings will produce a
greater amount of change.
+50
Value: 0–63
Alter Pan Depth (Alternate Pan Depth)
This setting causes panning to be alternated between left and right
each time a key is pressed. Higher settings will produce a greater
amount of change. “L” or “R” settings will reverse the order in
which the pan will alternate between left and right. For example if
two tones are set to “L” and “R” respectively, the panning of the two
tones will alternate each time they are played.
Value: L63–0–63R
When any value from Type “2”–”10” is selected for the Structure
parameter in the Pan KF, Rnd Pan Depth, Alter Pan Depth
parameter settings, the output of tones 1 and 2 are joined in tone
2, and the output of tones 3 and 4 are joined in tone 4. For this
reason, tone 1 will follow the settings of tone 2, and tone 3 will
follow the settings of tone 4 (p. 46).
TVA Env
+100
C1
C3
C7
Key
Value: 0–127
A-Env Level 1–3
(TVA Envelope Level 1–3) 3
Specify the TVA envelope levels (Level 1–Level 3). These settings
specify how the volume will change at each point, relative to the
standard volume (the Tone Level value specified in the TVA screen).
Value: 0–127
fig.TVA Env.e
T1 T2
T3
T4
Level
A-Env T4 V-Sens
(TVA Envelope Time 4 Velocity Sensitivity)
T: Time
54
C6
Specify the TVA envelope times (Time 1– Time 4). Higher settings
will lengthen the time until the next volume level is reached. (For
example, Time 2 is the time over which Level 1 will change to Level
2.)
L1 L2
Note on
Value: -63– +63
C5
(TVA Envelope Time 1–4) ★ 1 , 2 , 4
Value: -63– +63
The parameter to use when you want key release speed to control
the Time 4 value of the TVA envelope. If you want Time 4 to be
speeded up for quickly released notes, set this parameter to a
positive (+) value. If you want it to be slowed down, set this to a
negative (-) value.
C4
A-Env Time 1–4
A-Env T1 V-Sens
(TVA Envelope Time 1 Velocity Sensitivity)
This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the Time 1 of the TVA
envelope. If you want Time 1 to be speeded up for strongly played
notes, set this parameter to a positive (+) value. If you want it to be
slowed down, set this to a negative (-) value.
C2
L: Level
Time
L3
Note off
Reference_e.book 55 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
Specifies for each patch how the direct sound will be output.
• When setting the “MFX,” set the output destination with the
MFX Output Assign (p. 179) for the sound after it has passed
through the multi-effects.
Value:
• Chorus and reverb are output in mono at all times.
Patch Out Assign
MFX:
Output in stereo through multi-effects. You can also apply
chorus or reverb to the sound that passes through multieffects.
• The output destination of the signal after passing through the
chorus is set with the Chorus Output Select (p. 177) and the
Chorus Output Assign (p. 177).
A, B:
Output to the OUTPUT A (MIX) jack or OUTPUT B jack in
stereo without passing through multi-effects.
• The output destination of the signal after passing through the
reverb is set with the Reverb Output Assign (p. 177).
1–4:
Output to the INDIVIDUAL 1–4 jacks in mono without
passing through multi-effects.
TONE: Outputs according to the settings for each tone.
* When the settings are such that signals are split and output from the
INDIVIDUAL 1 jack and INDIVIDUAL 2 jack, and no plug is
inserted in the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack, the sounds from INDIVIDUAL 1
and INDIVIDUAL 2 are mixed together, then output from the
INDIVIDUAL 1 jack. This sound comprises the sounds from the
INDIVIDUAL 1 and 2 jacks.
* If the Mix/Parallel parameter ([MENU]/System/General) is set to
“MIX,” all sounds are output from the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks in
stereo (p. 193).
Tone Out Assign
Sets the direct sound’s output method for each tone.
Value:
MFX: Output in stereo through multi-effects. You can also apply
chorus or reverb to the sound that passes through multieffects.
Tone Out Level
Set the level of the signal that is sent to the output destination
specified by Tone Output Assign.
Value: 0–127
Tone Chorus Send
(Send Level (Output=MFX)) 1
Specifies the level of the signal sent to the chorus for each tone if the
tone is sent through MFX.
Value: 0–127
Tone Reverb Send
(Send Level (Output=MFX)) 2
Specifies the level of the signal sent to the reverb for each tone if the
tone is sent through MFX.
Value: 0–127
Tone Chorus Send
A, B: Output to the OUTPUT A (MIX) jack or OUTPUT B jack in
stereo without passing through multi-effects.
(Send Level (Output=non MFX)) 3
1–4: Output to the INDIVIDUAL 1–4 jacks in mono without
passing through multi-effects.
Sets the level of the signal sent to chorus for each tone if the tone is
not sent through MFX.
Value: 0–127
• If the Patch Output Assign is set to anything other than “TONE,”
these settings will be ignored.
• When the Structure Type parameter has a setting of Type “2”–
”10,” the outputs of tones 1 and 2 will be combined with tone 2,
and the outputs of tones 3 and 4 will be combined with tone 4.
For this reason, tone 1 will follow the settings of tone 2, and tone
3 will follow the settings of tone 4 (p. 46).
Tone Reverb Send
(Send Level (Output=non MFX)) 4
Sets the level of the signal sent to reverb for each tone if the tone is
not sent through MFX.
Value: 0–127
• When the settings are such that signals are split and output from
the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack and INDIVIDUAL 2 jack, and no plug is
inserted in the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack, the sounds from
INDIVIDUAL 1 and INDIVIDUAL 2 are mixed together, then
output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack. This sound comprises the
sounds from the INDIVIDUAL 1 and 2 jacks.
If the Mix/Parallel parameter is set to “MIX,” all sounds are
output from the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks in stereo (p. 193).
55
Creating a Patch
Output
Reference_e.book 56 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
Modulating Sounds (LFO)
(Example)
For a tempo of 120 (120 quarter notes occur in 1 minute (60 seconds))
fig.03-19_50
Setting
(half note)
LFO Rate
1 second (60 / 60 =1 (second))
(quarter note)
0.5 seconds (60 / 120= 0.5 (seconds))
(eighth note)
0.25 seconds (60 / 240= 0.25 (seconds))
This setting will be ignored if the Waveform parameter is set to
“CHAOS.”
Rate Detune (LFO1/LFO2 Rate Detune)
For details on the setting, refer to “How to Make the Patch
Settings” (p. 39).
An LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) causes change over a cycle
in a sound. Each tone has two LFOs (LFO1/LFO2), and these can
be used to cyclically change the pitch, cutoff frequency and
volume to create modulation-type effects such as vibrato, wah
and tremolo. Both LFOs have the same parameters so only one
explanation is needed.
LFO 1/2
Waveform (LFO1/LFO2 Waveform)
Selects the waveform of the LFO.
Value
SIN:
Sine wave
TRI:
Triangle wave
SAW-U: Sawtooth wave
LFO Rate Detune makes subtle changes in the LFO cycle rate (1:/
2:Rate parameter) each time a key is pressed. Higher settings will
cause greater change. This parameter is invalid when Rate is set to
“note.”
Value: 0–127
Offset (LFO1/LFO2 Offset)
Raises or lowers the LFO waveform relative to the central value
(pitch or cutoff frequency). Positive (+) settings will move the
waveform so that modulation will occur from the central value
upward. Negative (-) settings will move the waveform so that
modulation will occur from the central value downward.
Value: -100, -50, 0, +50, +100
Delay Time (LFO1/LFO2 Delay Time) 2
Delay Time (LFO Delay Time) specifies the time elapsed before the
LFO effect is applied (the effect continues) after the key is pressed (or
released).
Value: 0–127
SAW-D: Sawtooth wave (negative polarity)
SQR:
Square wave
RND:
Random wave
BND-U: Once the attack of the waveform output by the LFO is
allowed to develop in standard fashion, the waveform then
continues without further change.
BND-D: Once the decay of the waveform output by the LFO is
allowed to develop in standard fashion, the waveform then
continues without further change.
TRP:
Trapezoidal wave
S&H:
Sample & Hold wave (one time per cycle, LFO value is changed)
CHAOS: Chaos wave
If you set this to “BD-U” or “BD-D,” you must turn the 1:/2:Key
Trigger parameter to “ON.” If this is “OFF,” it will have no effect.
LFO Rate (LFO1/LFO2 Rate) ★ 1
Adjusts the modulation rate, or speed, of the LFO.
Value: 0–127, Note
LFO Rate sets the beat length for the synchronized tempo is
synchronized with the tempo set in a sequencer.
56
After referring to “How to Apply the LFO” (p. 57), change the
setting until the desired effect is achieved.
When using violin, wind, or certain other instrument sounds in a
performance, rather than having vibrato added immediately
after the sounds are played, it can be effective to add the vibrato
after the note is drawn out somewhat. If you set the Delay Time
in conjunction with the Pitch Depth parameter and Rate
parameter, the vibrato will be applied automatically following a
certain interval after the key is pressed. This effect is called
Delay Vibrato.
Reference_e.book 57 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
TVA Depth (LFO1/LFO2 TVA Depth) ★
Delay Time KF
(LFO1/LFO2 Delay Time Key Follow)
Value: -100, -90, -80, -70, -60, -50, -40, -30, -20, -10, 0, +10, +20, +30,
+40, +50, +60, +70, +80, +90, +100
fig.Time KF.e
Time
-100
-50
0
+50
+100
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
Key
Fade Mode (LFO1/LFO2 Fade Mode)
Value: -63– +63
Pan Depth (LFO1/LFO2 Pan Depth) ★
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect the pan.
Value: -63– +63
Positive (+) and negative (-) settings for the Depth parameter
result in differing kinds of change in pitch and volume. For
example, if you set the Depth parameter to a positive (+) value
for one tone, and set another tone to the same numerical value,
but make it negative (-), the modulation phase for the two tones
will be the reverse of each other. This allows you to shift back
and forth between two different tones, or combine it with the
Pan setting to cyclically change the location of the sound image.
When the Structure parameter is set to any value from “2”
through “10,” the output of tones 1 and 2 will be combined into
tone 2, and the output of tones 3 and 4 will be combined into
tone 4. This applies to the Pan Depth parameter settings. For this
reason, tone 1 will follow the settings of tone 2, and tone 3 will
follow the settings of tone 4 (p. 46).
Step LFO
Specifies how the LFO will be applied.
LFO Step Type (LFO Step Type)
Value: ON <, ON >, OFF <, OFF >
When generating an LFO waveform from the data specified in LFO
Step1–16, specify whether the level will change abruptly at each step
or will be connected linearly.
After referring to “How to Apply the LFO” (p. 57), change the
setting until the desired effect is achieved.
Fade Time (LFO1/LFO2 Fade Time) 3
Specifies the time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the
maximum (minimum).
Value: 0–127
After referring to “How to Apply the LFO” (p. 57), change the
setting until the desired effect is achieved.
Key Trigger (LFO1/LFO2 Key Trigger)
This specifies whether the LFO cycle will be synchronized to begin
when the key is pressed (ON) or not (OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
Pitch Depth (LFO1/LFO2 Pitch Depth) ★ 4
Value: TYPE1 (stair-step change), TYPE2 (linear change)
Step 1–16 (LFO Step 1–16)
Specifies the data for the Step LFO. If the LFO Pitch Depth is +63,
each +1 unit of the step data corresponds to a pitch of +50 cents.
Value: -36– +36
How to Apply the LFO
● Apply the LFO gradually after the key is pressed
fig.LFO-1.e
high (more)
Delay
Time
Pitch
Cutoff Frequency
Level
Pan Note on
Fade Time
Depth
low (less)
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect pitch.
Fade Mode: ON <
Value: -63– +63
Delay Time: The time from when the keyboard is played until the
LFO begins to be applied.
TVF Depth (LFO1/LFO2 TVF Depth) ★
Fade Time: The time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the
maximum after the Delay Time has elapsed.
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect the cutoff frequency.
Value: -63– +63
57
Creating a Patch
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect the volume.
Adjusts the value for the Delay Time parameter depending on the key
position, relative to the C4 key (center C). To decrease the time that
elapses before the LFO effect is applied (the effect is continuous) with
each higher key that is pressed in the upper registers, select a positive
value; to increase the elapsed time, select a negative value. Larger
settings will produce greater change. If you do not want the elapsed
time before the LFO effect is applied (the effect is continuous) to
change according to the key pressed, set this to “0.”
Reference_e.book 58 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
● Apply the LFO immediately when the key is
pressed, and then gradually begin to
decrease the effect
fig.LFO-2.e
high (more)
Delay Time
Apply Portamento or Legato to the
Sound (Solo Porta)
fig.03-20_50
Fade Time
Pitch
Cutoff Frequency
Level
Pan Note on
Depth
low (less)
Fade Mode: ON >
Delay Time: The time that the LFO will continue after the keyboard
is played.
Fade Time: The time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the
minimum after the Delay Time has elapsed.
● Apply the LFO gradually after the key is
released
fig.LFO-3.e
Pitch
Cutoff Frequency
Level
Pan
Mono/Poly
Delay
Time
high (more)
Fade Time
Depth
Note
on
For details on the setting, refer to “How to Make the Patch
Settings” (p. 39).
Specifies whether the patch will play polyphonically (POLY) or
monophonically (MONO). The “MONO” setting is effective when
playing a solo instrument patch such as sax or flute.
Value
Note
off
MONO: Only the last-played note will sound.
low (less)
Fade Mode: OFF <
POLY: Two or more notes can be played simultaneously.
Delay Time: The time from when the keyboard is released until the
LFO begins to be applied.
Legato Switch (Legato Switch)
Fade Time: The time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the
maximum after the Delay Time has elapsed.
● Apply the LFO from when the key is pressed
until it is released, and gradually begin to
decrease the effect when the key is released
fig.LFO-4.e
Delay
Time
high (more)
Pitch
Cutoff Frequency
Level
Pan
low (less)
Fade Time
Depth
Legato Switch is valid when the Mono/Poly parameter is set to
“MONO.” This setting specifies whether the Legato Switch will be
used (ON) or not (OFF).
With the Legato Switch parameter “ON,” pressing a key while
continuing to press a previous key causes the note to change pitch to
the pitch of the most recently pressed key, sounding all the while.
This creates a smooth transition between notes, which is effective
when you wish to simulate the hammering-on and pulling-off
techniques used by a guitarist.
Value: OFF, ON
Legato Retrigger (Legato Retrigger Switch)
Note on
Note off
Fade Mode: OFF >
Delay Time: The time that the LFO will continue after the keyboard
is released.
Fade Time: The time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the
minimum after the Delay Time has elapsed.
The Legato Retrigger is valid when the Mono/Poly parameter is set
to “MONO” and the Legato Switch parameter is set to “ON.” The
setting determines whether sounds are replayed (ON) or not (OFF)
when performing legato. Normally you will leave this parameter
“ON.” When “OFF,” when one key is held down and another key is
then pressed, only the pitch changes, without the attack of the latter
key being played. Set this to “OFF” when performing wind and
string phrases or when using modulation with the mono synth
keyboard sound.
Value: OFF, ON
58
Reference_e.book 59 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
Let's say you have the Legato Switch set to “ON,” and the
Legato Retrigger set to “OFF.” When you try to sound a legato
(by pressing a higher key while a lower key is held down), the
pitch may sometimes not be able to rise all the way to the
intended pitch (stopping instead at an intermediate pitch). This
can occur because the limit of pitch rise, as determined at the
wave level, has been exceeded. Additionally, if differing upper
pitch limits are used for the waves of a Patch that uses multiple
tones, it may stop being heard in MONO. When making large
pitch changes, set the Legato Retrigger to “ON.”
When another key is pressed during a pitch change produced by
portamento, a new pitch change will begin. This setting specifies the
pitch at which the change will begin.
Value
PITCH: Starts a new portamento when another key is pressed while
the pitch is changing.
fig.Potra-1.e
Pitch
C5
Portamento Switch
Specifies whether the portamento effect will be applied (ON) or not
(OFF).
D4
C4
Value: OFF, ON
Time
press D4 key
press C5 key
Portamento
Portamento is an effect which smoothly changes the pitch from
the first-played key to the next-played key. By applying
portamento when the Mono/Poly parameter is “MONO,” you
can simulate slide performance techniques on a violin or similar
instrument.
Portamento Mode
Specifies the performance conditions for which portamento will be
applied.
Value
press C4 key
NOTE: Portamento will begin anew from the pitch where the current
change would end.
fig.Potra-2.e
Pitch
C5
D4
C4
NORMAL: Portamento will always be applied.
LEGATO: Portamento will be applied only when you play legato
(i.e., when you press the next key before releasing the previous key).
Time
press D4 key
press C5 key
Portamento Type
Specifies the type of portamento effect.
Value
RATE: The time it takes will depend on the distance between the
two pitches.
TIME: The time it takes will be constant, regardless of how far apart
in pitch the notes are.
press C4 key
Portamento Time
When portamento is used, this specifies the time over which the
pitch will change. Higher settings will cause the pitch change to the
next note to take more time.
Value: 0–127
59
Creating a Patch
Portamento Start
Reference_e.book 60 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
Miscellaneous Settings (Misc)
fig.03-13a_50
OFF-D: Rather than being played while the key is pressed, the tone
begins to play once the period of time specified in the Delay Time
parameter has elapsed after release of the key. Here, however,
changes in the TVA Envelope begin while the key is pressed, which
in many cases means that only the sound from the release portion of
the envelope is heard.
fig.OFF-D.e
Delay time
Note off
Note on
Tone Delay Mode
Selects the type of tone delay.
Value
NORM: The tone begins to play after the time specified in the Delay
Time parameter has elapsed.
Tone Delay
fig.NORM.e
No Tone Delay
Delay time
Note on
Note off
fig.HOLD.e
No sound
played
Delay time
This produces a time delay between the moment a key is
pressed (or released), and the moment the tone actually begins
to sound. You can also make settings that shift the timing at
which each tone is sounded. This differs from the Delay in the
internal effects, in that by changing the sound qualities of the
delayed tones and changing the pitch for each tone, you can
also perform arpeggio-like passages just by pressing one key.
You can also synchronize the tone delay time to the tempo of
the sequencer.
HOLD: Although the tone begins to play after the time specified in the Delay
Time parameter has elapsed, if the key is released before the time specified
in the Delay Time parameter has elapsed, the tone is not played.
Note on
If you have selected a waveform that is a decay-type sound (i.e.,
a sound that fades away naturally even if the key is not
released), selecting “OFF-N” or “OFF-D” may result in no sound
being heard.
Note off
OFF-N: Rather than being played while the key is pressed, the tone begins
to play once the period of time specified in the Delay Time parameter has
elapsed after release of the key. This is effective in situations such as when
simulating noises from guitars and other instruments.
• If you are not going to use Tone Delay, set the Delay Mode
parameter to “NORM” and Delay Time parameter to “0.”
• If the Structure parameters set in the range of “2”–”10,” the
output of tones 1 and 2 will be combined into tone 2, and
the output of tones 3 and 4 will be combined into tone 4. For
this reason, tone 1 will follow the settings of tone 2, and
tone 3 will follow the settings of tone 4 (p. 46).
Tone Delay Time
Specifies the time from when the key is pressed (or if the Delay
Mode parameter is set to “OFF-N” or “OFF-D,” the time from when
the key is released) until when the tone will sound.
Value: 0–127, Note
Tone Delay Time specifies the beat length for the synchronized tempo
when the tempo that specifies the elapsed time until the tone is sounded
(Patch Tempo) is synchronized with the tempo set in a sequencer.
(Example)
For a tempo of 120 (120 quarter notes occur in 1 minute (60 seconds))
fig.OFF-N.e
Setting
Delay time
Note on
60
Note off
(half note)
Delay time
1 second (60 / 60 =1 (second))
(quarter note)
0.5 seconds (60 / 120= 0.5 (seconds))
(eighth note)
0.25 seconds (60 / 240= 0.25 (seconds))
Reference_e.book 61 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
Matrix Control Settings (Ctrl1–4)
When a loop waveform (p. 41) is selected, the sound will normally
continue as long as the key is pressed. If you want the sound to
decay naturally even if the key remains pressed, set this to “NO
SUS.”
fig.03-13_50
Creating a Patch
Tone Env Mode (Tone Envelope Mode)
Range: NO SUS, SUST
If a one-shot type Wave (p. 41) is selected, it will not sustain even
if this parameter is set to “SUST.”
Tone Rx Bender (Tone Receive Pitch Bend Switch)
For each tone, specify whether MIDI Pitch Bend messages will be
received (ON), or not (OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
Tone Rx Expression
(Tone Receive Expression Switch)
For each tone, specify whether MIDI Expression messages will be
received (ON), or not (OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
Tone Rx Hold-1 (Tone Receive Hold Switch)
For each tone, specify whether MIDI Hold-1 messages will be
received (ON), or not (OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
If “NO SUS” is selected for Env Mode parameter, this setting
will have no effect.
Tone Rx Pan Mode
For details on the setting, refer to “How to Make the Patch
Settings” (p. 39).
Matrix Control
Ordinarily, if you wanted to change tone parameters using an
external MIDI device, you would need to send System
Exclusive messages—MIDI messages designed exclusively for
the Fantom-S. However, System Exclusive messages tend to be
complicated, and the amount of data that needs to be
transmitted can get quite large.
For that reason, a number of the more typical of the Fantom-S’s
tone parameters have been designed so they accept the use of
Control Change (or other) MIDI messages for the purpose of
making changes in their values. This provides you with a
variety of means of changing the way patches are played. For
example, you can use the Pitch Bend lever to change the LFO
cycle rate, or use the keyboard’s touch to open and close a filter.
CONT: Whenever Pan messages are received, the stereo position of
the tone will be changed.
The function which allows you use MIDI messages to make
these changes in realtime to the tone parameters is called the
Matrix Control. Up to four Matrix Controls can be used in a
single patch.
K-ON: The pan of the tone will be changed only when the next note
is played. If a pan message is received while a note is
sounding, the panning will not change until the next key is
pressed.
To use the Matrix Control, specify which MIDI message (Source
parameter) will be used to control which parameter
(Destination parameter), and how greatly (Sns parameter), and
the tone to which the effect is applied (Tone parameter).
For each tone, specify how pan messages will be received.
Value
The channels cannot be set so as not to receive Pan messages.
Tone Redamper Sw (Tone Redamper Switch)
You can specify, on an individual tone basis, whether or not the sound
will be held when a Hold 1 message is received after a key is released,
but before the sound has decayed to silence. If you want to sustain the
sound, set this “ON.” When using this function, also set the Rx Hold-1
parameter “ON.” This function is effective for piano sounds.
Value: OFF, ON
61
Reference_e.book 62 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Patch
Matrix Control 1–4 Source
Sets the MIDI message used to change the tone parameter with the
Matrix Control.
Value
OFF: Matrix control will not be used.
CC01–31, 33–95: Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95
For more information about Control Change messages, please
refer to “MIDI Implementation” (Parameter List).
PITCH BEND: Pitch Bend
AFTERTOUCH:Aftertouch
SYS CTRL1–SYS CTRL4:
MIDI messages used as common matrix controls.
VELOCITY:
Velocity (pressure you press a key with)
KEY FOLLOW: Key follow (keyboard position with C4 as 0)
TEMPO:
The specified tempo (sequencer tempo) or the tempo
of an external MIDI sequencer.
LFO1:
LFO 1
LFO2:
PITCH ENV:
LFO 2
Pitch envelope
TVF ENV:
TVF envelope
TVA ENV:
TVA envelope
CTRL Destination 1–4
(Matrix Control Destination 1–4)
Matrix Control Destination selects the tone parameter that is to be
controlled when using the Matrix Control. The following parameters
can be controlled. When not controlling parameters with the Matrix
Control, set this to “OFF.” Up to four parameters can be specified for
each Matrix Control, and controlled simultaneously.
In this manual, Parameters that can be controlled using the
Matrix Control are marked with a “★.”
● Opening and Closing the Filter
CUTOFF:
Changes the cutoff frequency.
RESONANCE: Emphasizes the overtones in the region of the cutoff
frequency, adding character to the sound.
● Changing the Volume, Pan, and Pitch
LEVEL: Changes the volume level.
PAN:
Changes the pan.
PITCH: Changes the pitch.
● Changing How the Effects Are Applied
OUTPUT LEVEL: Changes the volume of output levels.
CHORUS SEND: Changes the amount of chorus.
Velocity and Key follow correspond to Note messages.
• Although there are no MIDI messages for LFO 1 through TVA
Envelope, they can be used as Matrix Control. In this case, you
can change the tone settings in realtime by playing patches.
• If you want to use common controllers for the entire Fantom-S,
select “SYS CTRL1”–”SYS CTRL4.” MIDI messages used as
System Control 1–4 are set with the System Ctrl 1–4 Source
parameters (p. 190).
• There are parameters that determine whether or not Pitch Bend,
Controller Number 11 (Expression) and Controller Number 64
(Hold 1) are received (p. 61). When these settings are “ON,” and
the MIDI messages are received, then when any change is made
in the settings of the desired parameter, the Pitch Bend,
Expression, and Hold 1 settings also change simultaneously. If
you want to change the targeted parameters only, then set these
to “OFF.”
• There are parameters that let you specify whether specific MIDI
messages will be received for each channel in a performance (p.
90). When a patch with Matrix Control settings is assigned to a
part, confirm that any MIDI messages used for the Matrix
Control will be received. If the Fantom-S is set up such that
reception of MIDI messages is disabled, then the Matrix Control
will not function.
REVERB SEND: Changes the amount of reverb.
● Applying LFO to Modulate Sounds
LFO1/LFO2 PCH DEPTH: Changes the vibrato depth.
LFO1/LFO2 TVF DEPTH: Changes the wah depth.
LFO1/LFO2 TVA DEPTH: Changes the tremolo depth.
LFO1/LFO2 PAN DEPTH: Changes the effect that the LFO will
have on pan.
LFO1/LFO2 RATE:
Changes the LFO cycle rate. Changes the
speed of the LFO cycles.
* The speed will not change if LFO Rate is set to “note.”
● Changing the Pitch Envelope
PIT ENV A-TIME: Changes the Env Time 1 parameter of the pitch
envelope.
PIT ENV D-TIME: Changes the Env Time 2 and Env Time 3
parameters of the pitch envelope.
PIT ENV R-TIME: Changes the Env Time 4 parameter of the pitch
envelope.
● Changing the TVF Envelope
TVF ENV A-TIME: Changes the Env Time 1 parameter of the TVF
envelope.
TVF ENV D-TIME: Changes the Env Time 2 and Env Time 3
parameters of the TVF envelope.
TVF ENV R-TIME: Changes the Env Time 4 parameter of the TVF
envelope.
62
Reference_e.book 63 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
● Changing the TVF Envelope
CTRL Tone 1–4 (Tone Control Switch 1–4)
TVA ENV A-TIME: Changes the Env Time 1 parameter of the TVA
envelope.
Matrix Control Tone selects the tone to which the effect is applied
when using the Matrix Control.
TVA ENV D-TIME: Changes the Env Time 2 and Env Time 3
parameters of the TVA envelope.
Value
OFF:
The effect will not be applied.
TVA ENV R-TIME: Changes the Env Time 4 parameter of the TVA
envelope.
ON:
The effect will be applied.
● Splitting Tones That Are Played
TMT
• If the Matrix Control is used to split tones, set the TMT Vel
Control parameter to “OFF,” and the TMT Control Switch
parameter to “ON” (p. 48).
• If the Matrix Control is used to split tones, we recommend
setting the Matrix Control Sens to “+63.” Selecting a lower value
may prevent switching of the tones. Furthermore, if you want to
reverse the effect, set the value to “-63.”
REVS: The effect will be applied in reverse.
Setting Effects for a Patch (Effects/
MFX/MFX Control/Chorus/Reverb)
For details regarding effect settings, refer to the pages shown
below.
• “Applying Effects in Patch Mode” (p. 175)
• “Making Multi-Effects Settings (MFX1–3)” (p. 180)
• “Making Chorus Settings (Chorus)” (p. 182)
• “Making Reverb Settings (Reverb)” (p. 182)
• If you want to use matrix control to switch smoothly between
tones, use the Velo Fade Lower and Velo Fade Upper parameters
(p. 48). The higher the values set, the smoother the switch is
between the tones.
● Changing the Depth of Frequency
Modulation for FXM
FXM DEPTH
● Controlling the amount of realtime stretch/
shrink
TIME
This will have no effect if Realtime Time Stretch (p. 45) is not
selected. If matrix control sensitivity is set to “+” the stretch/
shrink time will become shorter, and if set to “-” the time will
become longer.
● Changing Specific Multi-Effects Parameters
MFX CTRL1–4: Change the parameter that was specified by MFX
Control 1–4 Assign parameter.
No effects are available, even with the Matrix Control, when the
settings are such that no multi-effects are applied.
CTRL Sens 1–4 (Matrix Control Sens 1–4)
Sets the amount of the Matrix Control’s effect that is applied. If you
wish to modify the selected parameter in a positive (+) direction –
i.e., a higher value, toward the right, or faster etc. – from its current
setting, select a positive (+) value. If you wish to modify the selected
parameter in a negative (-) direction – i.e., a lower value, toward the
left, or slower etc. – from its current setting, select a negative (-)
value. When both positive and negative are selected, the changes are
greater as the value increases. Set it to “0” if you don’t want this
effect.
Value: -63– +63
63
Creating a Patch
Creating a Patch
Reference_e.book 64 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Rhythm Set
With the Fantom, you have total control over a wide variety of
settings. Each item that can be set is known as a parameter. When
you change the values of parameters, you are doing what is referred
to as Editing. This chapter explains the procedures used in creating
rhythm sets, and the functions of the rhythm set parameters.
fig.04-10b_50
How to Make the Rhythm Set
Settings
Start with an existing rhythm set and edit it to create a new rhythm
set. Rhythm sets are created from a collection of multiple rhythm
tones (percussion instruments). You can change the assignments of
the rhythm tones for each key with rhythm set edit.
The rhythm tone assigned to each key consists of up to four waves.
Rhythm tones and waves are related in the same way that patches
and tones are related.
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen,
and select the part (keyboard part or pad part) and rhythm
set whose settings you want to edit (p. 37).
Press any one of the [5 (Wave Select1)]–[8 (Wave Select4)]
buttons to select the wave that you want to edit.
• Simultaneously editing the same parameter of multiple
waves
Simultaneously press two or more of the [5 (Wave Select1)]–[8
(Wave Select4)] buttons to select the tones that you want to edit
at the same time. When a tone is on, a check mark (✔) will be
displayed.
• To switch a wave on/off
Press a [1 (Wave Sw1)]–[4 (Wave Sw4)] button to switch the
corresponding wave on/off.
You cannot edit the rhythm sets in the GM group.
If you want to create all your rhythm sets from the ground up,
rather than the rhythm sets that have already been prepared,
carry out the Initialize operation (p. 65).
* Press
or
, you can select the wave.
6. When you have made your selection, press [EXIT].
7. Turn the VALUE dial, or Press [INC]/[DEC] to set a value.
• To change the part that you want to edit
Press [7 (Part Select)].
2. Press [EDIT].
The Rhythm Edit screen appears.
fig.04-10a_50
8. Repeat steps 5–7 to complete a rhythm set.
9. If you wish to save the changes you’ve made, press [WRITE]
to perform the Save operation (p. 66). If you do not wish to
save changes, press [EXIT] to return to the Patch Play
screen.
If you return to the Patch Play screen without saving, an “*” will
be displayed at the left of the rhythm set number, indicating that
the rhythm set settings have been edited.
If you turn off the power or select a different sound while the
display indicates “*,” your edited rhythm set will be lost.
3. The parameters are organized into several editing groups.
Press [1 (⇑)] or [2 (⇓)] to select the tab for the editing group
that contains the parameter you wish to edit.
For details on how the parameters are grouped, refer to
“Parameter list” (Parameter List).
4. Use
or
wish to modify.
Editing in a Graphic Display
(Zoom Edit)
You can edit while viewing a graphic display of the most frequently
used important parameters.
Zoom Edit lets you edit the following parameters.
to move the cursor to the parameter you
5. Press [8 (Wave Sw/Sel)] to select the wave that you want to
edit.
The Wave Sw/Select window will appears.
Parameter
Pitch Envelope
TVF
TVF Envelope
TVA Envelope
page
p. 71
p. 72
p. 73
p. 74
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen,
and select the part (keyboard part or pad part) and patch
that you want to edit.
64
Reference_e.book 65 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Rhythm Set
The Zoom Edit screen will appear.
fig.04-10c_50
Copying Rhythm Tone Settings (Copy)
This operation copies the settings of any desired rhythm set to the
currently selected rhythm set. You can use this feature to make the
editing process faster and easier.
Basic Procedure for Rhythm Tone Copy
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen,
and select the part (keyboard part or pad part) that you want
to edit and the copy-destination Rhythm set (p. 37).
2. Press [EDIT].
3. Press [5 (Tone Copy)].
3. The parameters are organized into several edit groups.
Press [1]–[4] to select the tab for the parameters that you
want to edit.
The Rhythm Copy window appears.
fig.04-04_50
• To select a Wave for editing or switch a Wave on/off
Press [8 (Tone Sw/Sel)].
• To switch to a different part for editing
Press [7 (Part Select)].
4. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the parameter that you
want to edit.
4. Using [CURSOR] to move the cursor, select the “Source
(copy-source)” bank and number, and the rhythm tone.
You can use the realtime control knob to set the value.
5. Turn the VALUE dial or use [INC][DEC] to modify the value.
6. When you have finished editing, press [EXIT].
Initializing Rhythm Set Settings (Init)
5. Turn the VALUE dial or use [INC][DEC] to make the setting.
6. Using [CURSOR] to move the cursor, select the “Destination
(copy-destination)” rhythm tone number.
7. Turn the VALUE dial or use [INC][DEC] to make the setting.
8. Press [8 (Exec)].
“Initialize” means to return the settings of the currently selected
sound to a standard set of values or to the factory settings.
A message will ask for confirmation.
9.
Press [8 (Exec)] to return to the Rhythm Edit screen.
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
The Initialize operation will affect only the currently selected
sound; the sounds that are stored in user memory will not be
affected. If you wish to restore all of the Fantom’s settings to
their factory values, perform a Factory Reset (p. 196).
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen,
and select the part (keyboard part or pad part) and rhythm
set that you want to initialize (p. 37).
2. Press [EDIT], and then press [3 (Patch)].
The Compare Function
For the Rhythm Tone Copy operations, you can use the
Compare function.
If you want to play the copy-source patch, press [6 (Compare)]
to add a check mark (✔). Now you can play the copy-source
rhythm set from the keyboard or pad.
fig.04-07_50
3. Press [4 (Init)].
Select the type of initialization.
• ALL: All keys of the rhythm set will be initialized.
• KEY: One key will be initialized. When KEY is selected, you
need to specify the key (A0–C8) that is to be initialized.
4. Press [8 (Exec)].
A message will ask for confirmation.
5. Press [8 (Exec)].
The initialization will be carried out, and you’ll be returned to
the Rhythm Edit screen.
The rhythm set auditioned using the Compare function
may sound slightly different than when it is played
normally.
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
65
Creating a Rhythm Set
2. Press [EDIT], and then press [3 (Zoom Edit)].
Reference_e.book 66 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Rhythm Set
Saving Rhythm Sets You’ve
Created (Write)
Cautions When Selecting a
Waveform
The sounds of the Fantom are based on complex PCM waveforms,
and if you attempt to make settings that are contrary to the type of
the original waveform, the results will not be as you expect.
The internal waveforms of the Fantom fall into the following two
groups.
One-shot: These waveforms contain sounds that have short decays.
A one-shot waveform records the initial rise and fall of the sound.
Some of the Fantom’s one-shot waveforms are sounds that are
complete in themselves, such as percussive instrument sounds. The
Fantom also contains many other one-shot waveforms that are
elements of other sounds. These include attack components such as
piano-hammer sounds and guitar fret noises.
Looped: These waveforms include sounds with long decays as well
as sustained sounds. Loop waveforms repeatedly play back (loop)
the portion of the waveform after the sound has reached a relatively
steady state. The Fantom’s looped waveforms also include
components of other sounds, such as piano-string resonant
vibrations and the hollow sounds of brass instruments.
Changes you make to sound settings are temporary, and will be lost
if you turn off the power or select another sound. If you want to keep
the modified sound, you must save it in the internal user memory or
memory card.
When you edit the patch settings, an “*” will appear in the Patch
Play screen.
When you perform the save procedure, the data that previously
occupied the save destination will be lost.
1. Make sure that the Rhythm Set you wish to save is selected.
2. Press [WRITE].
The WRITE Menu screen appears.
fig.04-16_50
Cautions When Using a One-shot
Waveform
It is not possible to use the envelope to modify a one-shot waveform
to create a decay that is longer than the original waveform, or to turn
it into a sustaining sound. If you were to program such an envelope,
you would be attempting to shape a portion of the sound that simply
doesn’t exist, and the envelope would have no effect.
3. Press [2 (Patch/Rhythm)].
* Press
or
to select “Rhythm Edit,” and then press [ENTER].
The Rhythm Set Name screen appears.
Cautions When Using a Loop
Waveform
fig.04-08
With many acoustic instruments such as piano and sax, extreme
timbral changes occur during the first few moments of each note.
This initial attack is what defines much of the instrument’s character.
For such waveforms, it is best to use the complex tonal changes of
the attack portion of the waveform just as they are, and to use the
envelope only to modify the decay portion. If you attempt to use the
envelope to modify the attack portion as well, the characteristics of
the original waveform may prevent you from getting the sound that
you intend.
4. Assign a name to the rhythm set.
fig.03-08.e
Level
Looped portion
Tone change stored
with the wave
Time
• [1 (Change Type)]: Selects the type of character. Each time you press
this, you will alternately select the first character of a character set:
uppercase (A), lowercase (a), or numerals and symbols (0).
• [2 (Delete)]: Deletes the character at the cursor location, and
moves the subsequent characters one space forward.
• [3 (Insert)]: Inserts a space at the cursor location.
Envelope
for the TVF filter
•
,
: Move the cursor.
• [VALUE dial] [INC][DEC]: Selects a character.
* If you decide to discard your input, press [7 (Cancel)].
* You can use the pads to specify characters (p. 25).
Resulting
tone change
66
5. When you have finished inputting the name, press [8 (Write)].
A screen will appear, allowing you to select the write-destination
rhythm set.
Reference_e.book 67 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Rhythm Set
The write destination can be either the Fantom-S's internal user
area (User), or a memory card (Card).
fig.04-08a_50
Functions of Rhythm Set
Parameters
This section explains the functions the different rhythm set
parameters have, as well as the composition of these parameters.
If a number is displayed for the parameter name, (
1
,
2
,
3
,
4
),
you can use the realtime controller knob of the corresponding number
(the left most knob is number 1, the right most knob is number 4) to set
the value.
By pressing [6 (Compare)] you can check the save-destination
Rhythm set (Compare function).
7. Press [8 (Write)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
When you enter the Rhythm Edit screen, the indicator at the right of
the Realtime Control knobs will go out, and the Realtime Control
knobs can be used to edit the parameters of the patch or rhythm set.
If you once again press the button located at the right of the Realtime
Control knobs to make the indicator light, the knobs will control
their original functions. When you exit the Rhythm Edit screen, the
indicator will automatically return to its previous lit state.
fig.knob edit
Never switch off the Fantom-S while data is being saved.
8. Press [8 (Exec)] to execute the save operation. To cancel the
operation, press [7 (Cancel)].
1
2
3
4
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
Auditioning the Save-Destination
Rhythm Set (Compare)
Making Settings Common to the
Entire Rhythm Set (General)
fig.04-10a_50
Before you save a rhythm set, you can audition the rhythm set which
currently occupies the save destination to make sure that it is one
you don’t mind overwriting. This can help prevent important
rhythm sets from being accidentally overwritten and lost.
1. Follow the procedure in “Saving Rhythm Sets You’ve Created
(Write)” through step 5 to select the save destination.
2. Press [7 (Compare)] to add a check mark (✔).
The Rhythm Compare window appears, making it possible to
sound the currently selected save destination rhythm set.
fig.04-09.e
Save-destination rhythm set
For details on the setting, refer to “How to Make the Rhythm
Set Settings” (p. 64).
Rhythm Level applies to the entire rhythm set; the other
parameters are set individually for each rhythm tone.
3. Play the keyboard or pad to sound the save destination rhythm
set, then check whether you really want to overwrite it.
General
Rhythm Level (Rhythm Set Level) 1
Sets the volume of the rhythm set.
The rhythm set auditioned using the Compare function may
sound slightly different than when it is played normally.
4. If you wish to change the save destination, re-specify the
save-destination rhythm set by using
or
.
5. Press [7 (Write)].
6. Press [8 (Exec)] once again to execute the Save operation.
Value: 0–127
The volume levels of the tones from which the rhythm set is
composed is set with the Tone Level parameter (p. 74). The
volume levels of the Waves from which the rhythm tone is
composed is set with the Wave Level parameter (p. 70).
67
Creating a Rhythm Set
6. Turn the VALUE dial or use [INC][DEC] and [2 (⇑)] [3 (⇓)] to
select the write destination and rhythm set number.
Reference_e.book 68 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Rhythm Set
Tone Name (Rhythm Tone Name)
You can assign a name of up to 12 characters to the rhythm tone.
Tone Receive Hold-1
(Rhythm Tone Receive Hold-1 Switch)
Value: space, A-Z, a-z, 0-9, ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^
_`{|}
For each rhythm tone, specify whether MIDI Hold-1 messages will
be received (ON), or not (OFF).
For details on assigning names, refer to “Assigning a Name” (p.
25)
Assign Type
If “NO SUS” is selected for Env Mode parameter (p. 68), this
setting will have no effect.
Tone Receive Pan Mode
(Rhythm Tone Receive Pan Mode)
Assign Type sets the way sounds are played when the same key is
pressed a number of times.
For each rhythm tone, specify how pan messages will be received.
Value
Value
MULTI: Layer the sound of the same keys. Even with continuous
sounds where the sound plays for an extended time, such
as with crash cymbals, the sounds are layered, without
previously played sounds being eliminated.
CONTINUOUS: Whenever Pan messages are received, the stereo
position of the tone will be changed.
SINGLE: Only one sound can be played at a time when the same key
is pressed. With continuous sounds where the sound plays
for an extended time, the previous sound is stopped when
the following sound is played.
Mute Group
On an actual acoustic drum set, an open hi-hat and a closed hi-hat
sound can never occur simultaneously. To reproduce the reality of
this situation, you can set up a Mute Group.
The Mute Group function allows you to designate two or more
rhythm tones that are not allowed to sound simultaneously. Up to 31
Mute Groups can be used. rhythm tones that are not belong to any
such group should be set to “OFF.”
KEY-ON:
The pan of the tone will be changed only when the
next note is played. If a pan message is received
while a note is sounding, the panning will not
change until the next key is pressed.
The channels cannot be set so as not to receive Pan messages.
One Shot Mode
The sound will play back until the end of the waveform (or the end
of the envelope, whichever comes first). The result will be the same
as when the envelope's Tone Env Mode parameter (p. 68) is set to
NO-SUS. If you have set Wave Group (p. 69) to Sample, the loop
setting will be forced to ONE SHOT.
Value: OFF, ON
Value: OFF, 1–31
Aftertouch Time Ctrl Sens (Sensitivity)
Tone Env Mode (Rhythm Tone Envelope Mode)
If Wave Group is set to SAMPLE and Tempo Sync is ON, aftertouch
will control the amount of time stretching/shrinking caused by Time
Stretch. If Time Stretch is not being applied, nothing will happen. If
the stretch/shrink time will become shorter, and if set to “-” the time
will become longer.
When a loop waveform (p. 66) is selected, the sound will normally
continue as long as the key is pressed. If you want the sound to
decay naturally even if the key remains pressed, set this to “NO
SUS.”
Value: NO-SUS, SUSTTAIN
If a one-shot type Wave (p. 66) is selected, it will not sustain even
if this parameter is set to “SUST.”
Value: -63–+63
Modifying Waveforms (Wave)
fig.04-12_50
Tone Pitch Bend Range
(Rhythm Tone Pitch Bend Range)
Specifies the amount of pitch change in semitones (4 octaves) that
will occur when the Pitch Bend Lever is moved. The amount of
change when the lever is tilted is set to the same value for both left
and right sides.
Value: 0–48
Tone Receive Expression
(Rhythm Tone Receive Expression Switch)
For each rhythm tone, specify whether MIDI Expression messages
will be received (ON), or not (OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
68
For details on the setting, refer to “How to Make the Rhythm
Set Settings” (p. 64).
With rhythm tones, sounds are created by combining up to four
Waves (eight for stereo).
Reference_e.book 69 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Rhythm Set
The Waves for the bass drum, snare, hi-hat, toms, and other
percussion instruments are each assigned to one rhythm tone.
When adding 3D effects to the sound, make the Pan settings for
each rhythm tone individually.
Wave Group
Phrase Loop
Phrase loop refers to the repeated playback of a phrase that’s
been pulled out of a song (e.g., by using a sampler). One
technique involving the use of Phrase Loops is the excerpting of
a Phrase from a pre-existing song in a certain genre, for example
dance music, and then creating a new song with that Phrase
used as the basic motif. This is referred to as “Break Beats.”
Select the groups containing the Waves comprising the rhythm tone.
Value
INT:
Waveforms stored in internal memory
EXP:
Waveform stored in a Wave Expansion Board (SRX series)
installed in EXP slots.
SMAP: Sample waveforms
MSAM: Multisample waveforms
You cannot select a waveform group of a Wave Expansion Board
that is not installed.
Realtime Time Stretch
If the wave group is “SAMP” or “MSAM,” and the Wave
Tempo Sync parameter is turned “ON,” you can vary the
playback speed of the waveform without affecting the pitch.
Wave Gain 1
Wave Bank
Sets the gain (amplification) of the waveform. The value changes in 6
dB (decibel) steps—an increase of 6 dB doubles the waveform’s gain.
Select the wave bank.
Value: -6, 0, +6, +12
Value
When the wave group is EXP:
A-D
FXM Switch 2
When the wave group is SAMP: PRST, USER, CARD
This sets whether FXM will be used (ON) or not (OFF).
When the wave group is MSAM: USER, CARD
Value: OFF, ON
Wave No. L (Mono) (Wave Number L (Mono))
Wave No. R (Wave Number R)
This selects the Waves comprising the rhythm tone. Along with the
Wave number, the Wave name appears at the lower part of the
display.
When in monaural mode, only the left side (L) is specified. When in
stereo, the right side (R) is also specified.
FXM
FXM (Frequency Cross Modulation) uses a specified waveform
to apply frequency modulation to the currently selected
waveform, creating complex overtones. This is useful for
creating dramatic sounds or sound effects.
Value: ----, 1–1228 (The upper limit will depend on the wave group.)
* When using a multisample in stereo, you must specify the same
number for L and R.
Wave Tempo Sync 1
When you wish to synchronize a Phrase Loop to the clock (tempo),
set this to “ON.” This is valid only when a separately sold wave
expansion board is installed, and a waveform that indicates a tempo
(BPM) is selected as the sample for a wave.
Value: OFF, ON
• If a waveform from a wave expansion board is selected for the
tone, turning the Wave Tempo Sync parameter “ON” will cause
pitch-related settings (p. 71) and FXM-related settings (p. 69) to
be ignored.
FXM Color 3
Specifies how FXM will perform frequency modulation. Higher
settings result in a grainier sound, while lower settings result in a
more metallic sound.
Value: 1–4
FXM Depth 4
Specifies the depth of the modulation produced by FXM.
Value: 0–16
When the Tempo Sync parameter is set to “ON,” settings related
to Pitch (p. 71) and FXM (p. 69) are disabled.
• If a sample is selected for a tone, you must first set the BPM
(tempo) parameter of the sample.
• If a sample is selected for a tone, Wave Tempo Sync will require
twice the normal number of voices.
69
Creating a Rhythm Set
Tips on Creating a Rhythm Tone
Reference_e.book 70 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Rhythm Set
Changing How a Rhythm Tone Is
Sounded (WMT)
The WMT (Wave Mix Table) uses key velocity to control the four
waveforms assigned to the rhythm tone.
fig.04-12a_50
WMT Velocity Control (Velocity Control Switch)
WMT Velocity Control determines whether a different rhythm tone
is played (ON) or not (OFF) depending on the force with which the
key is played (velocity).
When set to “RND,” the rhythm set’s constituent rhythm tones will
sound randomly, regardless of any Velocity messages.
Value: OFF, ON, RANDOM
Wave Rnd Pan Sw (Wave Random Pan Switch)
Use this setting to cause the waveform’s panning to change
randomly each time a key is pressed (ON) or not (OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
The range of the panning change is set by the Rnd Pan Depth
parameter (p. 74).
Wave Alter Pan Sw (Wave Alternate Pan Switch)
For details on the setting, refer to “How to Make the Rhythm
Set Settings” (p. 64).
Wave Coarse Tune 1
Adjusts the pitch of the waveform’s sound up or down in semitone
steps (+/-4 octaves).
This setting causes panning of the waveform to be alternated
between left and right each time a key is pressed. Set Alternate Pan
Switch to “ON” to pan the Wave according to the Alter Pan Depth
parameter (p. 74) settings, or to “REV” when you want the panning
reversed. If you do not want the panning to change each time a key
is pressed, set this to “OFF.”
Range: OFF, ON, REV
Value: -48– +48
Velo Fade Lower (Velocity Fade Width Lower)
The Coarse Tune of the entire rhythm tone is set by the Tone
Coarse parameter (p. 71).
Wave Fine Tune 2
This Determines what will happen to the tone’s level when the tone
is played at a velocity lower than its specified velocity range. Higher
settings produce a more gradual change in volume. If you want
notes played outside the specified key velocity range to not be
sounded at all, set this to “0.”
Adjusts the pitch of the waveform’s sound up or down in 1-cent
steps (+/-50 cents).
Value: 0–127
Value: -50– +50
Velo Range Lower (Velocity Range Lower)
One cent is 1/100th of a semitone.
This sets the lowest velocity at which the waveform will sound.
Make these settings when you want different waveforms to sound in
response to notes played at different strengths.
Value: 1–UPPER
The Fine Tune of the entire rhythm tone is set by the Tone Fine
Tune parameter (p. 71).
Velo Range Upper (Velocity Range Upper)
You can set the volume of the waveform.
This sets the highest velocity at which the waveform will sound.
Make these settings when you want different waveforms to sound in
response to notes played at different strengths.
Value: 0–127
Value: LOWER–127
Wave Level 3
The volume level of each rhythm tone is set with the Tone Level
parameter; the volume levels of the entire rhythm set is set with
the Rhythm Level parameter (p. 67).
Wave Pan 4
This specifies the pan of the waveform. “L64” is far left, “0” is center,
and “63R” is far right.
Value: L63–0–63R
70
If you attempt to set the Lower velocity limit above the Upper, or
the Upper below the Lower, the other value will automatically
be adjusted to the same setting.
Reference_e.book 71 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Velo Fade Upper (Velocity Fade Width Upper)
Tone Random Pitch Depth 3
This determines what will happen to the tone’s level when the tone
is played at a velocity greater than its specified velocity range.
Higher settings produce a more gradual change in volume. If you
want notes played outside the specified key velocity range to not be
sounded at all, set this to “0.”
This specifies the width of random pitch deviation that will occur
each time a key is pressed. If you do not want the pitch to change
randomly, set this to “0.” These values are in units of cents (1/100th
of a semitone).
Value: 0–127
fig.Vel Range.e
Value: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200,
300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100, 1200
Level
Pitch Env
Velocity
Fade Lower
Range Lower
Fade Upper
Range Upper
P-Env Depth (Envelope Depth)
Adjusts the effect of the Pitch Envelope. Higher settings will cause
the pitch envelope to produce greater change. Negative (-) settings
will invert the shape of the envelope.
Modifying Pitch (Pitch/Pitch Env)
Value: -12– +12
fig.04-13_50
P-Env V-Sens (Pitch Envelope Velocity Sensitivity)
Keyboard playing dynamics can be used to control the depth of the
pitch envelope. If you want the pitch envelope to have more effect
for strongly played notes, set this parameter to a positive (+) value. If
you want the pitch envelope to have less effect for strongly played
notes, set this to a negative (-) value.
Value: -63– +63
P-Env T1 V-Sens
(Pitch Envelope Time 1 Velocity Sensitivity)
For details on the setting, refer to “How to Make the Rhythm
Set Settings” (p. 64).
Pitch
Tone Coarse Tune (Rhythm Tone Coarse Tune) 1
Selects the pitch at which a rhythm tone sounds.
Value: C-1– G9
Set the coarse tuning for Waves comprising the rhythm tones
with the Wave Coarse Tune parameter (p. 70).
This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the Time 1 of the Pitch
envelope. If you want Time 1 to be speeded up for strongly played
notes, set this parameter to a positive (+) value. If you want it to be
slowed down, set this to a negative (-) value.
Value: -63– +63
P-Env T4 V-Sens
(Pitch Envelope Time 4 Velocity Sensitivity)
Use this parameter when you want key release speed to impact on Time
4 value of the pitch envelope. If you want Time 4 to be speeded up for
quickly released notes, set this parameter to a positive (+) value. If you
want it to be slowed down, set this to a negative (-) value.
Value: -63– +63
P-Env Time 1–4
Tone Fine Tune (Rhythm Tone Fine Tune) 2
(Pitch Envelope Time 1–4) 1 , 2 , 4
Adjusts the pitch of the rhythm tone’s sound up or down in 1-cent
steps (+/-50 cents).
Specify the pitch envelope times (Time 1–Time 4). Higher settings will
result in a longer time until the next pitch is reached. (For example, Time
2 is the time over which the pitch changes from Level 1 to Level 2.)
Value: -50– +50
Value: 0–127
One cent is 1/100th of a semitone.
Set the fine tuning for Waves comprising the rhythm tones with
the Wave Fine Tune parameter (p. 70).
71
Creating a Rhythm Set
Creating a Rhythm Set
Reference_e.book 72 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Rhythm Set
P-Env Level 0–4 (Pitch Envelope Level 0–4) 3
Specify the pitch envelope levels (Level 0–Level 4). It determines
how much the pitch changes from the reference pitch (the value set
with Coarse Tune or Fine Tune on the Pitch screen) at each point.
Positive (+) settings will cause the pitch to be higher than the
standard pitch, and negative (-) settings will cause it to be lower.
Value: -63– +63
fig.Pitch Env.e
T1
T2
T3
T4
Pitch L0
L1
LPF2: Low Pass Filter 2. Although frequency components above the
Cutoff frequency (Cutoff Frequency) are cut, the sensitivity of
this filter is half that of the LPF. This makes it a comparatively
warmer low pass filter. This filter is good for use with
simulated instrument sounds such as the acoustic piano.
LPF3: Low Pass Filter 3. Although frequency components above the
Cutoff frequency (Cutoff Frequency) are cut, the sensitivity of
this filter changes according to the Cutoff frequency. While
this filter is also good for use with simulated acoustic
instrument sounds, the nuance it exhibits differs from that of
the LPF2, even with the same TVF Envelope settings.
Note off
Note on
L2
T: Time
Time
L3
PKG: Peaking Filter. This emphasizes the frequencies in the region
of the cutoff frequency (Cutoff Frequency). You can use this to
create wah-wah effects by employing an LFO to change the
cutoff frequency cyclically.
L4
If you set “LPF2” or “LPF3,” the setting for the Resonance
parameter will be ignored.
L: Level
Modifying the Brightness of a
Sound with a Filter (TVF/TVF Env)
fig.04-14_50
Cutoff Frequency 1
Selects the frequency at which the filter begins to have an effect on
the waveform’s frequency components.
Value: 0–127
With “LPF/LPF2/LPF3” selected for the Filter Type parameter,
lower cutoff frequency settings reduce a tone’s upper harmonics for
a more rounded, warmer sound. Higher settings make it sound
brighter.
If “BPF” is selected, harmonic components will change depending
on the TVF Cutoff Frequency setting. This can be useful when
creating distinctive sounds.
With “HPF” selected, higher Cutoff Frequency settings will reduce
lower harmonics to emphasize just the brighter components of the
sound.
TVF
Filter Type 3
Selects the type of filter. A filter is a function that cuts off a specific
frequency band to change a sounds brightness, thickness, and other
qualities.
Value
OFF: No filter is used.
LPF: Low Pass Filter. This reduces the volume of all frequencies
above the cutoff frequency (Cutoff Frequency). in order to
round off, or un-brighten, the sound. This is the most common
filter used in synthesizers.
BPF: Band Pass Filter. This leaves only the frequencies in the region
of the cutoff frequency (Cutoff Frequency), and cuts the rest.
This can be useful when creating distinctive sounds.
HPF: High Pass Filter. This cuts the frequencies in the region below
the cutoff frequency (Cutoff Frequency). This is suitable for
creating percussive sounds emphasizing their higher ones.
72
With “PKG” selected, the harmonics to be emphasized will vary
depending on Cutoff Frequency setting.
Resonance 2
Emphasizes the portion of the sound in the region of the cutoff
frequency, adding character to the sound. Excessively high settings
can produce oscillation, causing the sound to distort.
Value: 0–127
fig.Resonance.e
LPF
BPF
Level
High
Frequency
Cutoff frequency
parameter value
For details on the setting, refer to “How to Make the Rhythm
Set Settings” (p. 64).
Low
HPF
PKG
Reference_e.book 73 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Rhythm Set
Selects one of the following seven curves that determine how
keyboard playing dynamics (velocity) influence the cutoff frequency.
Set this to “FIXED” when the Cutoff frequency is not to be changed
according to the force with which the keys are pressed.
Value: FIXED, 1–7
This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the Time 1 of the TVF
envelope. If you want Time 1 to be speeded up for strongly played
notes, set this parameter to a positive (+) value. If you want it to be
slowed down, set this to a negative (-) value.
Value: -63– +63
fig.Curve-7
1
F-Env T1 V-Sens
(TVF Envelope Time 1 Velocity Sensitivity)
2
3
4
5
6
7
Cutoff V-Sens (Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity)
F-Env T4 V-Sens
(TVF Envelope Time 4 Velocity Sensitivity)
The parameter to use when you want key release speed to control the
Time 4 value of the TVF envelope. If you want Time 4 to be speeded up
for quickly released notes, set this parameter to a positive (+) value. If
you want it to be slowed down, set this to a negative (-) value.
Use this parameter when changing the cutoff frequency to be
applied as a result of changes in playing velocity. If you want
strongly played notes to raise the cutoff frequency, set this
parameter to positive (+) settings. If you want strongly played notes
to lower the cutoff frequency, use negative (-) settings.
Value: -63– +63
Value: -63– +63
(TVF Envelope Level 1–4) 1 , 2 , 4
Resonance V-Sens
(Resonance Velocity Sensitivity)
Specify the TVF envelope levels (Level 0–Level 4). These settings specify
how the cutoff frequency will change at each point, relative to the standard
cutoff frequency (the cutoff frequency value specified in the TVF screen).
This allows keyboard velocity to modify the amount of Resonance. If
you want strongly played notes to have a greater Resonance effect,
set this parameter to positive (+) settings. If you want strongly
played notes to have less Resonance, use negative (-) settings.
F-Env Level 1–4
Value: 0–127
F-Env Time 1–4 (TVF Envelope Time 1–4) 3
Specify the TVF envelope times (Time 1– Time 4). Higher settings will
lengthen the time until the next cutoff frequency level is reached. (For
example, Time 2 is the time over which Level 1 will change to Level 2.)
Value: -63– +63
TVF Env
Value: 0–127
F-Env Depth (TVF Envelope Depth)
fig.TVF Env.e
T1
Specifies the depth of the TVF envelope. Higher settings will cause
the TVF envelope to produce greater change. Negative (-) settings
will invert the shape of the envelope.
Value: -63– +63
Cutoff
Frequency
F-Env V-Curve (TVF Envelope Velocity Curve)
T3
T4
L0
L1
Note on
Selects one of the following 7 curves that will determine how
keyboard playing dynamics will affect the TVF envelope. Set this to
“FIXED” when the amount of TVF Envelope applied is not to be
changed according to the force with which the keys are pressed.
Value: FIX, 1–7
T2
T: Time
L2
L3
L4
Time
Note off
L: Level
Adjusting the Volume (TVA/TVA Env)
fig.Curve-7
fig.04-15_50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
F-Env V-Sens (TVF Envelope Velocity Sensitivity)
Specifies how keyboard playing dynamics will affect the depth of the
TVF envelope. Positive (+) settings will cause the TVF envelope to
have a greater effect for strongly played notes, and negative (-)
settings will cause the effect to be less.
Value: -63– +63
For details on the setting, refer to “How to Make the Rhythm
Set Settings” (p. 64).
73
Creating a Rhythm Set
Cutoff V-Curve (Cutoff Frequency Velocity Curve)
Reference_e.book 74 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Rhythm Set
TVA
Alternate Pan Depth 4
Tone Level (Rhythm Tone level) 1
This setting causes panning to be alternated between left and right
each time a key is pressed. Higher settings will produce a greater
amount of change. “L” or “R” settings will reverse the order in
which the pan will alternate between left and right. For example if
two rhythm tones are set to “L” and “R” respectively, the panning of
the two rhythm tones will alternate each time they are played.
Sets the volume of the rhythm tone. Use this parameter to adjust the
volume balance between rhythm tones.
Value: 0–127
The volume levels of the Waves from which the rhythm tone is
composed is set with the WMT1–4 Wave Level parameter (p. 70).
This will affect only waves whose Wave Alter Pan Sw parameter
(p. 70) is ON or REV.
Level V-Curve (Level Velocity Curve)
You can select from seven curves that determine how keyboard
playing strength will affect the volume. If you do not want the
volume of the rhythm tone to be affected by the force with which
you press the key, select “FIXED.”
Value: FIXED, 1–7
fig.Curve-7
1
2
3
4
5
6
Value: L63–0–63R
7
TVA Env
A-Env T1 V-Sens
(TVA Envelope Time 1 Velocity Sensitivity)
This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the Time 1 of the TVA
envelope. If you want Time 1 to be speeded up for strongly played
notes, set this parameter to a positive (+) value. If you want it to be
slowed down, set this to a negative (-) value.
Level V-Sens (Level Velocity Sensitivity)
Value: -63– +63
Set this when you want the volume of the rhythm tone to change
depending on the force with which you press the keys. Set this to a
positive (+) value to have the changes in rhythm tone volume
increase the more forcefully the keys are played; to make the tone
play more softly as you play harder, set this to a negative (-) value.
A-Env T4 V-Sens
(TVA Envelope Time 4 Velocity Sensitivity)
Value: -63– +63
Tone Pan (Rhythm Tone Pan) 2
The parameter to use when you want key release speed to control
the Time 4 value of the TVA envelope. If you want Time 4 to be
speeded up for quickly released notes, set this parameter to a
positive (+) value. If you want it to be slowed down, set this to a
negative (-) value.
Value: -63– +63
Sets the pan for the rhythm tone. “L64” is far left, “0” is center, and
“63R” is far right.
A-Env Time 1–4
Value: L64–0–63R
(TVA Envelope Time 1–4) 1 , 2 , 4
Set the Pan for Waves comprising the rhythm tones with the
Wave Pan parameter (p. 70).
Specify the TVA envelope times (Time 1– Time 4). Higher settings will
lengthen the time until the next volume level is reached. (For example,
Time 2 is the time over which Level 1 will change to Level 2.)
Value: 0–127
Random Pan Depth 3
Use this parameter when you want the stereo location to change
randomly each time you press a key. Higher settings will produce a
greater amount of change.
Value: 0–63
A-Env Level 1–3 (TVA Envelope Level 1–3) 3
Specify the TVA envelope levels (Level 1–Level 3). These settings specify
how the volume will change at each point, relative to the standard
volume (the Rhythm Tone Level value specified in the TVA screen).
Value: 0–127
fig.TVA Env.e
T1 T2
This will affect only waves whose Wave Rnd Pan Sw parameter
(p. 70) is ON.
T3
T4
Level
L1 L2
Note on
T: Time
74
L: Level
Time
L3
Note off
Reference_e.book 75 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Rhythm Set
Output Settings
If the Mix/Parallel parameter is set to “MIX,” all sounds are
output from the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks in stereo (p. 193).
• When setting the “MFX,” set the output destination with the
MFX Output Assign (p. 179) for the sound after it has passed
through the multi-effects.
• Chorus and reverb are output in mono at all times.
• The output destination of the signal after passing through the
chorus is set with the Chorus Output Select (p. 177) and the
Chorus Output Assign (p. 177).
• The output destination of the signal after passing through the
reverb is set with the Reverb Output Assign (p. 177).
For details on the setting, refer to “How to Make the Rhythm
Set Settings” (p. 64).
Tone Out Level
Rhythm Out Assign
Set the level of the signal that is sent to the output destination
specified by Patch/Tone Output Assign.
Specifies for each rhythm set how the direct sound will be output.
Value: 0–127
Value:
MFX: Output in stereo through multi-effects. You can also apply chorus
or reverb to the sound that passes through multi-effects.
A, B: Output to the OUTPUT A (MIX) jack or OUTPUT B jack in
stereo without passing through multi-effects.
1–4: Output to the INDIVIDUAL 1–4 jacks in mono without
passing through multi-effects.
Tone Chorus Send
(Send Level (Output=MFX)) 1
Specifies the level of the signal sent to the chorus for each tone if the
tone is sent through MFX.
Value: 0–127
Tone Reverb Send
When the settings are such that signals are split and output from
the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack and INDIVIDUAL 2 jack, and no plug is
inserted in the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack, the sounds from
INDIVIDUAL 1 and INDIVIDUAL 2 are mixed together, then
output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack. This sound comprises the
sounds from the INDIVIDUAL 1 and 2 jacks.
If the Mix/Parallel parameter is set to “MIX,” all sounds are
output from the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks in stereo (p. 193).
Tone Out Assign
Sets the direct sound’s output method for each tone.
Value:
MFX: Output in stereo through multi-effects. You can also apply chorus
or reverb to the sound that passes through multi-effects.
A, B: Output to the OUTPUT A (MIX) jack or OUTPUT B jack in
stereo without passing through multi-effects.
1–4: Output to the INDIVIDUAL 1–4 jacks in mono without
passing through multi-effects.
• If the Rhythm Output Assign is set to anything other than
“TONE,” these settings will be ignored.
• When the settings are such that signals are split and output from
the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack and INDIVIDUAL 2 jack, and no plug is
inserted in the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack, the sounds from
INDIVIDUAL 1 and INDIVIDUAL 2 are mixed together, then
output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack. This sound comprises the
sounds from the INDIVIDUAL 1 and 2 jacks.
(Send Level (Output=MFX)) 2
Specifies the level of the signal sent to the reverb for each tone if the
tone is sent through MFX.
Value: 0–127
Tone Chorus Send
(Send Level (Output=non MFX)) 3
Sets the level of the signal sent to chorus for each tone if the tone is
not sent through MFX.
Value: 0–127
Tone Reverb Send
(Send Level (Output=non MFX)) 4
Sets the level of the signal sent to reverb for each tone if the tone is
not sent through MFX.
Value: 0–127
Setting Effects for a Rhythm Set
(Effects/MFX/MFX Control/Chorus/
Reverb)
For details regarding effect settings, refer to the pages shown
below.
• “Applying Effects in Patch Mode” (p. 175)
• “Making Multi-Effects Settings (MFX1–3)” (p. 180)
• “Making Chorus Settings (Chorus)” (p. 182)
• “Making Reverb Settings (Reverb)” (p. 182)
75
Creating a Rhythm Set
fig.04-15a_50
Reference_e.book 76 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing in Performance Mode
A performance contains settings that apply to each individual part,
such as the patch (rhythm set) assigned to each part, and its volume
and pan.
Broadly speaking, Performance mode consists of two screens: Layer
screen and Mixer screen.
Use the Layer screen (p. 76) when you want to combine multiple
sounds (patches or rhythm sets) to create complex sounds. This lets
you play patches together (“layer”) or play different patches in
separate areas of the keyboard (“split”).
Displaying Performance Layer
Screen
To access the Performance Layer screen, use the following
procedure.
1. Press PERFORMANCE [LAYER/SPLIT].
You will enter Performance mode, and the Layer screen appears.
fig.LAYER_50
Use the Mixer screen (p. 76) when you want to mix the sounds by
adjusting the level and pan for each of 16 parts.
When you play the keyboard, you will hear the current part and the
parts that have a check mark.
In addition to the settings of each part, the following settings can
also be stored for each performance.
• Controller settings such as the D Beam, realtime control knobs,
assignable switches, and pads
• Arpeggio and chord memory settings
• Rhythm group number
Displaying Performance Mixer
Screen
To access the Performance Mixer screen, use the following
procedure.
1. Press PERFORMANCE [MIXER].
You will enter Performance mode, and the Mixer screen appears.
fig.MIXER_50
2. Press [6] to switch the page.
fig.MIXER2_50
76
Reference_e.book 77 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing in Performance Mode
Functions in the PERFORMANCE Layer/Mixer Screen
Playing in Performance Mode
fig.05-02.e
LAYER screen
MIXER screen
2
4
4
1
5
3
9
2
1
5
3
7
6
7
8
11
10
18
16
11
12
13
14
17
12
15
1
Indicates the current sound generating mode.
2
Indicates the name of the currently selected song, the measure location, the time signature, and the sequencer status.
3
Indicates the Octave Shift (Oct) and the Transpose (Trans).
4
Indicates multi-effects (MFX), chorus (CHO), reverb (REV) and mastering (MASTER) on and off.
5
Indicates the tempo at which the song, Arpeggio or rhythm pattern is played.
Indicates the Loop Play on/off (LOOP).
6
MIXER screen: Indicates the group, number, and name of the selected performance.
LAYER screen: Selects the group, number of the selected performance.
7
LAYER screen: Displays the patches assigned to the parts.
When you switch the current part, the part number will also change.
8
Indicates that this is the Pad part and Arpeggio part.
9
Current Indicates the part.
10
Set the pan (PAN), volume (LEVEL), reverb (REV), chorus (CHO), key shift (KEY), and output destination (OUT) of the part.
The setting screen is divided into two screens, and you can press function button [6] to switch between them.
11
Turns the keyboard switch on/off.
For the currently selected part, an "⇑" (MIXER screen) or "⇒" (LAYER screen) will be displayed.
12
Jumps to the setting screen of the displayed parameter.
13
Switches the setting screen.
14
Selects the part whose settings will be modified by the realtime control knobs.
The four knobs correspond to the four selected parts. Turn the knobs to adjust the values.
15
Scrolls the settings through parts 1-16.
16
Indicates the functions that are assigned to each realtime controller knob (●) and assignable switch (■).
17
This indicates the function that is assigned to the D Beam controller,
and the response status of the D Beam controller.
18
Indicates the key range in which you can play the keyboard or play rhythm sets.
77
Reference_e.book 78 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing in Performance Mode
Selecting a Performance
The Fantom-S has two performance groups, including the User
group and Preset groups, with each group storing 64 performances,
for a total of 128 performances.
Selecting Performances from the List
You can display a list of performances and select a performance from
that list.
1. Press [LAYER/SPLIT] or [MIXER].
2. Press [5 (Perf List)].
USER
The Performance List screen appears.
This is the group inside the Fantom-S which can be rewritten.
Performances you yourself create can be stored in this group. The
Fantom-S contains 64 preset performances.
fig.05-06_50
PRST (Preset)
This is the group inside the Fantom-S which cannot be rewritten.
However you may modify the settings of the currently selected
performance, and then store the modified performance in User
memory. The Fantom-S contains 64 preset performances.
CARD (Memory Card)
This group lets you use patches stored on a memory card inserted in
the rear panel card slot. Since the data in this group can be rewritten,
you can use this group to store patches that you create.
3. To switch the performance group, press [2 (⇑)] [3 (⇓)] to
move the cursor to the performance group tab, and
press
or
to select the performance.
4. Press [8 (Select)] to close the Performance List screen.
1. Press [LAYER/SPLIT].
2. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the performance group.
fig.05-03.e
Performance group
Performance number
3. Turn the VALUE dial, or press [INC]/[DEC] to select a
performance group.
USER: User
Selecting Favorite Performances
(Favorite Sound)
You can bring together your favorite and most frequently used
performances in one place by registering them in the Favorite sound.
By using this function you can quickly select your favorite
performances from internal memory.
For instructions on how to register to the Favorite Sounds, refer
to “Registering a Favorite Performance (Favorite Sound)” (p.
79).
PRST: Preset
1. Press [LAYER/SPLIT] or [MIXER].
CARD: Memory Card
2. Press [5 (Perf List)] and then press [3 (Favorite)].
4. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the performance
number.
The Favorite List screen appears.
fig.05-26_50
5. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to select the
performance number.
3. Press
or
to select a performance number.
To switch banks, press [1 (⇑)] [2 (⇓)].
4. Press [8 (Select)] to select the patch.
78
Reference_e.book 79 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Registering a Favorite Performance
(Favorite Sound)
Selecting the Part that You want to
Sound
You can bring together your favorite and most frequently used
Performances in one place by registering them in the Favorite sound.
By using this function you can rapidly select favorite Performances
from internal memory or a Wave Expansion Board. You can register
a total of 64 Performances (8 sounds x 8 banks) as favorite sounds.
Here’s how to select the part that you want to sound the assigned
patch or rhythm set.
For details on selecting a favorite sound, refer to “Selecting
Favorite Performances (Favorite Sound)” (p. 78).
1. From the Layer screen, Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to
“KBD,” and press [INC] to add a check mark (✔) to “KBD.”
When you play the keyboard, you will hear the current part and
the parts that have a check mark.
fig.05-20a
1. Select the Performance that you wish to register (p. 78).
2. Press [5 (Perf List)].
3. Press [3 (Favorite)].
The Favorite List screen appears.
fig.06-10_50
About the keyboard switch
4. Press [1 (⇑)] [2 (⇓)] to select the bank in which you wish to
register the Performance.
5. Press
or
to select the number to which you wish to
register. The number you select here corresponds to [1]–[8].
6. Press [5 (Regist)] to execute the registration.
* To cancel, press [EXIT].
Use the keyboard switch when you want to play multiple
sounds layered together (Layer) or assign different sounds to
different regions of the keyboard (Split). Conversely, you can
turn off all keyboard switches when you are creating data, etc.
Selecting the Sound for a Part
If you don’t like the patch that is assigned to a part, it’s easy to
switch the patch.
Selecting from a list display
By pressing [4 (Remove)] you can cancel the Performance
registration that is selected in the Favorite List screen.
1. Select the part whose sound you want to switch.
2. Press [1 (Patch List)].
The Patch List screen will appear.
Using the Layer Screen
fig.02-06_50
Selecting a Part
The currently selected part is called the “current part.”
1. From the Layer screen, Use
The selected part is indicated by “
or
to select the part.
”.
fig.05-20
* To cancel, press [EXIT].
3. Use
or
to select a patch.
If [6 (Categ)] has a check mark (✔), the list will show the
categories. If you press [6 (Categ)] to remove the check mark, the
list will show the patch groups.
79
Playing in Performance Mode
Playing in Performance Mode
Reference_e.book 80 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing in Performance Mode
Playing Different Sounds in Different
Areas of the Keyboard (Split)
fig.01-18_50
In Performance mode you can divide the keyboard and play a
different patch in each area (this is called “split”). As the note range
that plays each part can be specified individually, you can split the
keyboard into a maximum of 16 sections.
For instance, you can play strings in the lower range, piano in the
upper range, and both sounds in the middle range.
fig.05-09.e
To switch groups, press [1 (⇑)] [2 (⇓)].
By Pressing [7 (Preview)] you can audition the sound of the
patch, by means of a phrase preselected as being suitable for that
particular type (category) of patch (Phrase Preview).
4. Press [8 (Select)] to select the patch.
In Performance mode you can play the sounds of all parts whose
Internal Switch is on, and all connected parts. Combining the parts
will produce, thicker, fatter sounds.
fig.05-07.e
Part 2
(Rx ch.2)
Part 15
(Rx ch.15)
Part 1 + Part 2:
(Strings + Piano)
Part 2: Piano
A split performance is one application of a layer. Changing the
key range of each part in the layer results in a split.
Combining and Playing Sounds
Together (Layer)
Part 1
(Rx ch.1)
Part 1: Strings
Part 16
(Rx ch.16)
1. Press [LAYER/SPLIT] to access the Layer screen.
2. Press
or
to select the part you want to play.
3. Press [3 (Key Range)].
4. Press [3 (KBD)], move the cursor to the keyboard switch,
and press [INC] to turn on the keyboard switch that is
connected to the part you want to sound.
5. To set the lower limit of the range, use [4 (Lower)] to move
the cursor to “Key Range Lower.” To set the lower limit of
the range, use [5 (Upper)] to move the cursor to “Key Range
Upper.”
Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to specify the range.
The bar shown above the keyboard indicates the range of keys
that will sound.
KBD Switch:
On
1 (Tx ch.1)
2 (Tx ch.2)
15 (Tx ch.15)
16(Tx ch.16)
If you attempt to set the lower limit higher than the upper limit,
or attempt to set the upper limit below the lower limit, the other
setting will change with the same value.
fig.05-24_50
Rx ch.: Receive Channel
Tx ch.: Transmit Channel
1. Press [LAYER/SPLIT] to access the Layer screen.
2. Press
or
to select the part you want to play.
The Performance Edit screen appears.
3. Press [INC] to add a check mark to the part that you want to
sound.
Pressing [DEC] will remove the check mark.
The bar shown above the keyboard indicates the range of keys
that will sound.
Value: Key Range Lower: C-1–UPPER
Key Range Upper: LOWER–G9
When you play the keyboard, you will hear the current part and
the parts that have a check mark.
4. Repeat steps 2. 3. to turn the Internal Switch on for all parts
that are connected to the parts you want to play.
By specifying sections for different parts so that they overlap each
other, you can combine two or more parts only in a specific section.
6. When you are finished making settings, press [8 (Close)] to
return to the Performance Layer screen, and begin playing.
80
Reference_e.book 81 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing in Performance Mode
Using the Mixer Screen
Selecting the Sound for a Part
Selecting a Part
The currently selected part is called the “current part.”
Selecting from a list display
1. From the Mixer screen, Use
1. Select the part whose sound you want to switch.
or
to select the part.
fig.05-21
Playing in Performance Mode
If you don’t like the patch that is assigned to a part, it’s easy to
switch the patch.
2. Press [1 (Patch List)].
The Patch List screen will appear.
fig.02-06_50
* Use [CURSOR] to move the “Part”, and turn VALUE dial or press
[INC] [DEC] to select the part.
Here’s how to select the part that you want to sound the
assigned patch or rhythm set.
1. From the Mixer screen, Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to
the bottom of the screen.
* To cancel, press [EXIT].
3. Use
or
to select a patch.
If [6 (Categ)] has a check mark (✔), the list will show the
categories. If you press [6 (Categ)] to remove the check mark, the
list will show the patch groups.
fig.01-18_50
2. Press [INC] to display “KBD,” and select the part that you
want to sound.
When you play the keyboard, you will hear the current part and
the parts that have a check mark (KBD).
fig.05-21a
To switch groups, press [1 (⇑)] [2 (⇓)].
By Pressing [7 (Preview)] you can audition the sound of the
patch, by means of a phrase preselected as being suitable for that
particular type (category) of patch (Phrase Preview).
4. Press [8 (Select)] to select the patch.
Selecting in the Mixer Screen
About the keyboard switch
Use the keyboard switch when you want to play multiple
sounds layered together (Layer) or assign different sounds to
different regions of the keyboard (Split). Conversely, you can
turn off all keyboard switches when you are creating data, etc.
1. Press [MIXER] to access the MIXER screen, and use
[CURSOR] to move the cursor to the patch name.
fig.05-22
2. Turn the VALUE dial or use [INC] [DEC] to select a patch.
81
Reference_e.book 82 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing in Performance Mode
Selecting the Rhythm Set
1. Press [MIXER] to access the Mixer screen, and use
[CURSOR] to move the cursor to the following location.
fig.05-25
Selecting a Part to Play Individually
(Solo)
You can have only the performance of a specific part be played when
playing back a song.
1. Press [MIXER] to access the Mixer screen.
2. Press [3 (Mute/Solo)].
The Mute Solo window appears.
fig.07-07
2. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC] [DEC] to select “R.”
The rhythm set will be selected.
3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the “SOLO” area of the
part that you want to play by itself.
4. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to assign a check
mark (✔).
When a song is played back, only the parts with a check mark
will play back.
Editing the Part Settings
The following Part parameters can be edited from the Mixer screen:
• Level (p. 85)
5. Press [8 (Close)].
• Pan (p. 85)
This setting is linked with the Solo Part Select parameter (Part
View screen), and can be saved as a performance setting (p. 96).
• Chorus Send Level (p. 85)
• Reverb Send Level (p. 85)
• Chorus Tune (p. 86)
Silencing the Playback of a Specific
Part (Mute)
• Output Assign (p. 85)
1. Press [MIXER].
fig.MIXER_50
While you play along with the playback of a song, you can turn off
the specific part. This allows you to turn off the melody part for
karaoke applications or for practicing the muted part.
1. Press [MIXER] to access the Mixer screen.
2. Press [3 (Mute/Solo)].
The Mute Solo window appears.
fig.07-07
2. Use
to move the cursor to the pan (PAN) or level
(LEVEL) value.
3. Turn the VALUE dial or use [INC] [DEC] to set the value.
3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the “Mute” area of the
part that you want to mute.
4. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to assign a check
mark (✔).
4. Press [6] to switch the page.
5. Use
to move the cursor to the reverb send level
(REV), chorus send level (CHO), coarse tune (KEY), or
output assign (OUT) values.
When a song is played back, the parts with a check mark will not
play back.
5. Press [8 (Close)].
6. Turn the VALUE dial or use [INC] [DEC] to set the value.
7. By pressing [7 (⇐)] [8 (⇒)] or
frame within the screen.
you can move the
The frame corresponds to the four REALTIME CONTROL knobs
located at the left of the display. Turning the left most knob will
edit the left most value enclosed by the frame.
82
Part Mute does not turn off the MIDI receive switch; rather, it
sets the volume to the minimum setting to silence the sound.
Therefore, MIDI messages are still received.
Reference_e.book 83 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Viewing the Part Settings as a
List (Performance Part View)
Confirming MIDI Information
for Each Part (Part Information)
In Performance mode you can view the part settings as a list. This is
called the “Part View” screen. In this screen you can view a list that
shows settings for all parts at once, such as the patch assigned to
each part, and its volume and pan settings. You can also edit these
settings here, and make detailed settings that cannot be made in the
Layer screen or Mixer screen.
In Performance mode, the reception status of MIDI messages that
control various things can be viewed for each part. This is useful
when you want to check whether the sound generator is responding
correctly to the keyboard, or to operations from an external MIDI
controller.
1. Access the Performance Layer or Mixer screen.
2. Press [2 (Part View)].
The Part View screen will appear.
For detail on the setting, refer to “Viewing the Part Settings as
a List (Performance Part View)” (p. 84).
1. Access the Performance Layer or Mixer screen (p. 76).
2. Press [MENU] to open the Menu window.
3. Press
or
press [ENTER].
to select “Part Information,” and then
The Part Information window appears.
fig.05-14_50
fig.PARTVIEW_50
4. Turn VALUE dial or press [INC][DEC] to select the message
that you want to check.
3. Press [1 (Level/Pan)]–[8 (MIDI Filter)] to select the screen.
Modulation: Modulation Information
4. Press [EXIT] to return to the Layer or Mixer screen.
Breath:
Breath Information
Foot Type:
Foot type Information
Volume:
Volume Information
Panpot:
Panpot Information
Performing with the Arpeggio/
Rhythm function
For detail on the setting, refer to “Playing Arpeggios (ARPEGGIO/
RHYTHM Function)” (p. 104).
Expression: Expression Information
Hold 1:
Hold 1 Information
Pitch Bend: Pitch Bend Information
Aftertouch: Aftertouch Information
Performing with the Realtime
Controllers and D Beam Controller
Voices:
Voice Information (The number of voices used)
5. Press [8 (Close)] to close the window.
For detail on the setting, refer to “Make Settings for the Realtime
Controllers and D Beam Controller (Ctrl)” (p. 92).
83
Playing in Performance Mode
Playing in Performance Mode
Reference_e.book 84 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Performance
With the Fantom-S, you have total control over a wide variety of
settings. Each item that can be set is known as a parameter. When
you change the values of parameters, you are doing what is referred
to as Editing. This chapter explains the procedures used in creating
Performances, and the functions of the Performance parameters.
Adjusting the Parameters of
Each Part
1. Access the Part View screen (p. 95).
2. Press [1 (Level/Pan]–[8 (MIDI Filter)] to select the parameter.
fig.07-10
Viewing the Part Settings as a
List (Performance Part View)
In Performance mode you can view the part settings as a list. This is
called the “Part View” screen. In this screen you can view a list that
shows settings for all parts at once, such as the patch assigned to
each part, and its volume and pan settings. You can also edit these
settings here, and make detailed settings that cannot be made in the
Layer screen, or Mixer screen.
1. Access the Performance Layer or Mixer screen.
2. Press [2 (Part View)].
The Part View screen will appear.
3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the parameter you
want to change.
4. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC], set the value.
fig.PARTVIEW_50
* The name of the parameter at the cursor location is displayed in the
bottom line of the Part View screen.
[1 (Level/Pan)]
Patch Type
Sets the assignment of a patch (Patch) or rhythm set (Rhythm) to
each of the parts.
Patch Bank
3. When you have finished making settings, press [EXIT] to
return to the LAYER/SPLIT or Mixer screen.
When the cursor is at a patch group or patch number, you can
press [ENTER] to open the Patch List screen and choose a patch
from the list (p. 28).
Selects the group to which the desired patch or rhythm set belongs.
Value
USR:
User
PRA–E:
Preset A–E
GM:
GM (GM2)
XP-A–D:
Wave Expansion Boards installed in EXP-A–D Slots
Patch Number
Selects the desired patch or rhythm set by its number.
Value: 001–
Keyboard Switch
Specifies, for each part, whether or not the keyboard controller
section will be connected to the internal sound generator.
Value: OFF, ON (✔)
Solo Switch
Select one part whose sound you want to play. Turn it “✔” to the
part that you want to solo. Parts other than the part you select here
will not sound.
Value: OFF, ON (✔)
84
Reference_e.book 85 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Performance
Mute Switch
Use this setting when, for example, you want to use the instrument
for karaoke by muting the part playing the melody, or when you
want to play something using a separate sound module.
Value: OFF, ON (✔)
The Mute Switch parameter does not turn the part off, but sets
the volume to minimum so that no sound is heard. Therefore,
MIDI messages are still received.
Part Level
Adjust the volume of each part. This setting’s main purpose is to
adjust the volume balance between parts.
Value: 0–127
Part Pan
Adjust the pan of each part. “L64” is far left, “0” is center, and “63R”
is far right.
Value: L64–0–63R
[2 (Output Effect)]
fig.06-20_50
When the settings are such that signals are split and output from
the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack and INDIVIDUAL 2 jack, and no plug is
inserted in the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack, the sounds from
INDIVIDUAL 1 and INDIVIDUAL 2 are mixed together, then
output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack. This sound comprises the
sounds from the INDIVIDUAL 1 and 2 jacks.
If the Mix/Parallel parameter is set to “MIX,” all sounds are
output from the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks in stereo (p. 193).
• When setting the “MFX,” set the output destination with the
MFX Output Assign for the sound after it has passed through the
multi-effects.
• Chorus and reverb are output in mono at all times.
• The output destination of the signal after passing through the
chorus is set with the Chorus Output Select and the Chorus
Output Assign.
• The output destination of the signal after passing through the
reverb is set with the reverb Output Assign.
Part Output MFX Select
(Part Output Multi-Effects Select)
Of the three types of multi-effects that can be used simultaneously,
specify which multi-effects will be used.
Value: 1–3 (MFX-1–MFX-3)
Part Output Level
Set the level of the signal that is sent to the output destination
specified by Part Output Assign.
Value: 0–127
Part Chorus Send Level
Sets the level of the signal sent to chorus for each part.
Value: 0–127
For details on the setting, refer to “Adjusting the Parameters of
Each Part” (p. 84).
Part Output Assign
Specifies for each part how the direct sound will be output.
Value
MFX: Output in stereo through multi-effects. You can also apply chorus
or reverb to the sound that passes through multi-effects.
A, B: Output to the OUTPUT A (MIX) jack or OUTPUT B jack in
stereo without passing through multi-effects.
1–4: Output to the INDIVIDUAL 1–4 jacks in mono without
passing through multi-effects.
PAT: The part’s output destination is determined by the settings of
the patch or rhythm set assigned to the part.
Part Reverb Send Level
Sets the level of the signal sent to reverb for each part.
Value: 0–127
MFX1–3 Source
Chorus Source
Reverb Source
The settings of a specific patch can be used as the settings for MFX1
(1)–MFX3 (3), chorus (C), and reverb (R). This setting specifies the
part to which this patch has been assigned.
If no part is selected, the settings of the Performance will be used.
For the following parameters, settings can be made individually
for each multi-effects (MFX1–MFX3) selected in Part Output
MFX Select.
85
Creating a Performance
Temporarily mutes (✔) or releases the mute (OFF) for the
Performance of each part.
Reference_e.book 86 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Performance
[3 (Pitch)]
Part Mono/Poly
fig.06-21_50
Set this parameter to “MONO” when the patch assigned to the part
is to be played monophonically, or to “POLY” when the patch is to
be played polyphonically. When using the setting of the patch
assigned to each part (p. 49), set this to “PAT.”
Value: MONO, POLY, PAT
For the part to which the rhythm set is assigned, this setting is
ignored.
Part Legato Switch
For details on the setting, refer to “Adjusting the Parameters of
Each Part” (p. 84).
Part Octave Shift
Adjusts the pitch of the part’s sound up or down in units of an
octave (+/-3 octaves).
Value: -3– +3
Note that when a rhythm set is assigned to a part, if the Octave Shift
parameter is set, the rhythm tone that is played also changes.
Part Coarse Tune
Adjusts the pitch of the part’s sound up or down in semitone steps
(+/-4 octaves).
Value: -48– +48
Coarse Tune and Octave Shift
The Coarse Tune and Fine Tune parameters, along with the Octave
Shift parameter, can all be seen as doing the same thing to the
sound, i.e., changing the pitch of the sound. For example, if C4
(Middle C) is played with the Coarse Tune parameter set to “+12,”
the note produced is C5 (one octave above C4). For example, if C4
(Middle C) is played with the Octave Shift parameter set to “+1,”
the note produced is C5 (one octave above C4).
However, internally these function very differently. When the
Coarse Tune parameter is set to “+12,” the pitch itself is raised one
octave. On the other hand, when the Octave Shift parameter is set
to “+1,” it is the same as pressing the keys one octave up. In other
words, use the Coarse Tune parameter when changing the pitch,
and the Octave Shift parameter when you want to shift the entire
keyboard, for example, when the number of keys is insufficient.
You can add legato when performing monophonically. Legato is a
playing style in which the spaces between notes are smoothed, creating a
flowing feel with no borders between the notes. This creates a smooth
transition between notes, which is effective when you wish to simulate
the hammering-on and pulling-off techniques used by a guitarist.
Turn this parameter “ON” when you want to use the Legato feature
and “OFF” when you don’t. When using the setting of the patch
assigned to each part (p. 58), set this to “PAT.”
Value: OFF, ON, PAT
For the part to which the rhythm set is assigned, this setting is
ignored.
Part Pitch Bend Range
Specifies the amount of pitch change in semitones (2 octaves) that
will occur when the Pitch Bend Lever is moved. The amount of
change when the lever is tilted is set to the same value for both left
and right sides. When using the setting of the patch assigned to each
part (p. 49), set this to “PAT.”
Value: 0–24, PAT
Part Portamento Switch
Specify whether portamento will be applied. Turn this parameter
“ON” when you want to apply Portamento and “OFF” when you
don’t. When using the setting of the patch assigned to each part (p.
59), set this to “PAT.”
Value: OFF, ON, PAT
Part Portamento Time
When portamento is used, this specifies the time over which the
pitch will change. Higher settings will cause the pitch change to the
next note to take more time. When using the setting of the patch
assigned to each part (p. 59), set this to “PAT.”
Value: 0–127, PAT
Part Fine Tune
Adjusts the pitch of the part’s sound up or down in 1-cent steps (+/50 cents).
Value: -50– +50
One cent is 1/100th of a semitone.
86
For the part to which the rhythm set is assigned, this setting is
ignored.
Reference_e.book 87 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Performance
[4 (Offset)]
Part Release Time Offset
fig.06-22_50
Adjusts the TVA/TVF Envelope Release Time for the patch or
rhythm set assigned to a part.
Patches also contain a Release Time Offset setting (p. 44). The
final TVA Envelope release time value is therefore the sum of the
tone’s TVA Envelope Time 4 setting, the patch’s Release Time
Offset, and the part’s Release Time Offset. If the tone’s Time 4
parameter is set to “127” (maximum), there will be no change in
the Release Time Offset, even when this is set to a positive value.
The same applies to the TVF envelope.
For details on the setting, refer to “Adjusting the Parameters of
Each Part” (p. 84).
Part Cutoff Offset
Adjusts the cutoff frequency for the patch or rhythm set assigned to
a part.
Value: -64– +63
Part Decay Time Offset
Adjusts the TVA/TVF Envelope Decay Time for the patch or rhythm
set assigned to a part.
Value: -64– +63
[5 (Key Range)]
fig.06-23_50
Patches also have a Cutoff Offset setting (p. 44). The final Cutoff
frequency value is the sum of the tone Cutoff Frequency value
and the patch and part Cutoff Offset values. If the tone’s cutoff
frequency is already set to “127” (maximum), there will be no
change produced by setting the Cutoff Offset to a positive value.
Part Resonance Offset
Adjusts the Resonance for the patch or rhythm set assigned to a part.
Value: -64– +63
Patches also have a Resonance Offset setting (p. 44). The final
Resonance value is the sum of the tone Resonance value and the
patch and part Resonance Offset values. If the tone’s resonance is
already set to “127” (maximum), there will be no change
produced by setting the resonance offset to a positive value.
Part Attack Time Offset
Adjusts the TVA/TVF Envelope Attack Time for the patch or
rhythm set assigned to a part.
Value: -64– +63
Patches also contain the Attack Time Offset setting (p. 44). The final
TVA Envelope attack time value is therefore the sum of the tone’s
TVA Envelope Time 1 setting, the patch’s Attack Time Offset, and
the part’s Attack Time Offset. If the tone’s Time 1 parameter is
already set to “127” (maximum), there will be no change produced
by setting the Attack Time Offset to a positive value.
The same applies to the TVF envelope.
For details on the setting, refer to “Adjusting the Parameters of
Each Part” (p. 84).
Specifies whether the controller (keyboard) section will be connected
to the internal sound generator and MIDI OUT regardless of the
current part. Normally, you will leave this off, but you can turn it on
if you want to layer sounds.
Value: ON, OFF
Keyboard Switch
Specifies, for each part, whether or not the keyboard controller
section will be connected to the internal sound generator.
Value: On, OFF
Keyboard Range Lower
(Part Keyboard Range Lower)
Specifies the lowest note that the tone will sound for each part.
Value: C-1–UPPER
87
Creating a Performance
Value: -64– +63
Reference_e.book 88 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Performance
Keyboard Range Upper
(Part Keyboard Range Upper)
Specifies the highest note that the tone will sound for each part.
Value: LOWER–G9
Part Vibrato Delay
For each part, this adjusts the time delay until the vibrato (pitch
modulation) effect begins. Higher settings will produce a longer delay
time before vibrato begins, while lower settings produce a shorter time.
Value: -64– +63
When the Key Range (p. 48) is set for each individual tone in a
patch, sounds are produced in the range where the Key Range of
each tone and the Key Range for the part overlap.
fig.05-10.e
Key range specified for Performance
Key range specified for Patch
The range in which notes will play
If you attempt to raise the lower key higher than the upper key,
or to lower the upper key below the lower key, the other value
will be automatically modified to the same setting.
Part Velocity Sensitivity Offset
This changes the volume and cutoff frequency for each part
according to the velocity with which the keys are pressed. If you
want strongly played notes to raise the volume/cutoff frequency, set
this parameter to positive (+) settings. If you want strongly played
notes to lower the volume/cutoff frequency, use negative (-)
settings. Set Velocity Sensitivity to “0” when you want sounds
played at a fixed volume and cutoff frequency, regardless of the
force with which the keys are played.
Value: -63– +63
Voice Reserve
This setting specifies the number of voices that will be reserved for
each part when more than 64 voices are played simultaneously.
Value: 0–63, FUL
It is not possible for the settings of all parts to total an amount
greater than 64. The remaining number of available voices will
be displayed at (rest=). Pay attention to this readout as you make
set the Voice Reserve parameter.
Calculating the Number of Voices Being Used
The Fantom-S is able to play up to 64 notes simultaneously. The
polyphony, or the number of voices (sounds) does not refer
only to the number of sounds actually being played, but
changes according to the number of tones used in the patches,
and the number of Waves used in the tones. The following
method is used to calculate the number of sounds used for one
patch being played.
(Number of Sounds Being Played) x (Number of Tones Used by
Patches Being Played) x (Number of Waves Used in the Tones)
Realtime Stretch requires twice the normal polyphony.
[6 (Scale Tune)]
fig.06-14_50
Patches also contain a Velocity Sensitivity Offset setting (p. 44).
The ultimate Velocity Sensitivity Offset value is the sum of the
part’s and the patch’s Velocity Sensitivity Offsets. Accordingly,
if the patch’s Velocity Sensitivity Offset parameter is set to “127”
(maximum), there will be no change in the part’s Velocity
Sensitivity Offset, even when this is set to a positive value.
Part Vibrato Rate
For each part, adjust the vibrato speed (the rate at which the pitch is
modulated). The pitch will be modulated more rapidly for higher
settings, and more slowly with lower settings.
Value: -64– +63
Part Vibrato Depth
For each part, this adjusts the depth of the vibrato effect (the depth at
which the pitch is modulated). The pitch will be modulated more
greatly for higher settings, and less with lower settings.
Value: -64– +63
For details on the setting, refer to “Adjusting the Parameters of
Each Part” (p. 84).
Part Scale Tune C–B
Make scale tune settings for each part.
Value: -64– +63
Scale Tune is switched on/off by means of the Scale Tune Switch
parameter (p. 194).
88
Reference_e.book 89 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Performance
Receive Switch
Equal Temperament
This tuning divides the octave into 12 equal parts, and is the
most widely used method of temperament used in Western
music. The Fantom-S employs equal temperament when the
Scale Tune Switch is set to “OFF.”
For each part, specify whether MIDI messages will be received (ON),
or not (OFF).
If this is “OFF,” the part will not respond. Normally, you should
leave this “ON,” but you can turn it “OFF” when you do not want a
specific part to be playing during song playback.
Receive Channel
Compared with equal temperament, the principle triads sound
pure in this tuning. However, this effect is achieved only in one
key, and the triads will become ambiguous if you transpose.
Specifies the MIDI receive channel for each part
Arabian Scale
Ext Bank Select MSB (External Bank Select MSB)
In this scale, E and B are a quarter note lower and C#, F# and G#
are a quarter-note higher compared to equal temperament. The
intervals between G and B, C and E, F and G#, Bb and C#, and
Eb and F# have a natural third—the interval between a major
third and a minor third. On the Fantom-S, you can use Arabian
temperament in the three keys of G, C and F.
If you want a Bank Select number MSB (controller number 0) to also
be transmitted when you switch Performances, specify the value that
you want to transmit (0–127) for each part. If you do not want this
message to be transmitted, set this to “OFF.”
Value: 1–16
Value: 0–127, OFF
<Example>
Note
name
C
C#
D
Eb
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
Bb
B
Equal temperament
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Just Temperament (tonic C)
0
-8
+4
+16
-14
-2
-10
+2
+14
-16
+14
-12
Arabian Scale
-6
+45
-2
-12
-51
-8
+43
-4
+47
0
-10
-49
[7 (External)]
fig.06-24_50
The data of the part for which the Keyboard Switch is turned off
will not be transmitted.
Ext Bank Select LSB (External Bank Select LSB)
If you want a Bank Select number LSB (controller number 32) to also
be transmitted when you switch Performances, specify the value that
you want to transmit (0–127) for each part.
Value: 0–127
The data of the part for which the Keyboard Switch is turned off
will not be transmitted.
Ext Program Number
(External Program Change Number)
If you want a Program Change number to also be transmitted when
you switch Performances, specify the value that you want to
transmit (0–128) for each part. If you do not want this message to be
transmitted, set this to “OFF.”
Value: 1–128, OFF
The data of the part for which the Keyboard Switch is turned off
will not be transmitted.
Ext Level (External Level)
If you want Volume messages to also be transmitted when you select
a Performance, specify the desired value (0–127) for the part. If you
do not want this message to be transmitted, set this to “OFF.”
Value: 0–127, OFF
For details on the setting, refer to “Adjusting the Parameters of
Each Part” (p. 84).
The data of the part for which the Keyboard Switch is turned off
will not be transmitted.
89
Creating a Performance
Value: OFF, ON
Just Temperament (Tonic of C)
Reference_e.book 90 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Performance
Ext Pan (External Pan)
Modulation (Receive Modulation Switch)
If you want Pan messages to also be transmitted when you select a
Performance, specify the desired value (L64–0–63R) for the part. If
you do not want this message to be transmitted, set this to “OFF.”
For each MIDI channel, specify whether MIDI Modulation messages
will be received (ON), or not (OFF). Assigning a check mark (✔) will
turn it on, and removing the check mark will turn it off.
Value: L64–0–63R, OFF
The data of the part for which the Keyboard Switch is turned off
will not be transmitted.
[8 (MIDI Filter)]
fig.06-29_50
Volume (Receive Volume Switch)
For each MIDI channel, specify whether MIDI Volume messages will
be received (ON), or not (OFF). Assigning a check mark (✔) will turn
it on, and removing the check mark will turn it off.
Pan (Receive Pan Switch)
For each MIDI channel, specify whether MIDI Pan messages will be
received (ON), or not (OFF). Assigning a check mark (✔) will turn it
on, and removing the check mark will turn it off.
Expression (Receive Expression Switch)
For each MIDI channel, specify whether MIDI Expression messages
will be received (ON), or not (OFF). Assigning a check mark (✔) will
turn it on, and removing the check mark will turn it off.
Hold-1 (Receive Hold 1 Switch)
For details on the setting, refer to “Adjusting the Parameters of
Each Part” (p. 84).
MIDI Filter
Program Change
(Receive Program Change Switch)
For each MIDI channel, specify whether MIDI Program Change
messages will be received (ON), or not (OFF). Assigning a check
mark (✔) will turn it on, and removing the check mark will turn it
off.
Bank Select (Receive Bank Select Switch)
For each MIDI channel, specify whether MIDI Bank Select messages
will be received (ON), or not (OFF). Assigning a check mark (✔) will
turn it on, and removing the check mark will turn it off.
Pitch Bend (Receive Pitch Bend Switch)
For each MIDI channel, specify whether MIDI Pitch Bend messages
will be received (ON), or not (OFF). Assigning a check mark (✔) will
turn it on, and removing the check mark will turn it off.
Channel Pressure (Receive Channel Pressure Switch)
For each MIDI channel, specify whether MIDI Channel Pressure
messages will be received (ON), or not (OFF). Assigning a check mark
(✔) will turn it on, and removing the check mark will turn it off.
Polyphonic Key Pressure
(Receive Polyphonic Key Pressure Switch)
For each MIDI channel, specify whether MIDI polyphonic key pressure
messages will be received (ON), or not (OFF). Assigning a check mark
(✔) will turn it on, and removing the check mark will turn it off.
90
For each MIDI channel, specify whether MIDI Hold 1 messages will
be received (ON), or not (OFF). Assigning a check mark (✔) will turn
it on, and removing the check mark will turn it off.
Phase Lock (Phase Lock Switch)
Set Phase Lock to “✔” (ON) when you want to suppress
discrepancies in timing of parts played on the same MIDI channel.
When the Phase Lock parameter is set to “ON,” parts on the
same MIDI channel are put in a condition in which their timing
is matched, enabling them to be played at the same time.
Accordingly, a certain amount of time may elapse between
reception of the Note messages and playing of the sounds. Turn
this setting to “ON” only as needed.
Velocity Curve
Velocity Curve selects for each MIDI channel one of the four
following Velocity Curve types that best matches the touch of the
connected MIDI keyboard. Set this to “OFF” if you are using the
MIDI keyboard's own velocity curve.
Value: OFF, 1–4
fig.Curve-4
1
2
3
4
Reference_e.book 91 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Performance
The Fantom-S lets you assign the parameters that will be affected
when you operate the realtime control knobs, assignable switches, D
Beam, pitch bend, or modulation lever. This lets you modify the
sound in a variety of ways by operating the controllers.
the display will indicate “*,” reminding you that the
Performance settings have been modified.
If you turn off the power or select a different sound while the
display indicates “*,” your edited Performance will be lost.
Control Switch Settings (Ctrl Switch)
fig.06-19_50
Creating a Performance
Selecting the Parameter
Controlled by the Realtime
Controllers or D Beam Controller
(Control Setting)
1. Access the Performance Layer or Mixer screen, and select
the Performance whose settings you wish to modify (p. 78).
If you want to create all your Performances from the ground up,
rather than the Performances that have already been prepared,
carry out the Initialize operation (p. 96).
2. Press [4 (Ctrl Setting)].
The Control Setting (Performance) screen appears.
fig.06-02_50
For details on the setting, refer to “Selecting the Parameter
Controlled by the Realtime Controllers or D Beam Controller
(Control Setting)” (p. 91).
Control Bender (Control Pitch Bend Switch)
For each part, specify whether MIDI Pitch Bend messages will be
transmitted (ON), or not (OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
Control Aftertouch (Control Aftertouch Switch)
3. Press [5 (Ctrl Setting)] – [6 (Ctrl Switch)] to select the parameter.
[5(Ctrl Setting)]: Controller-related settings, Settings for the
entire performance
[6 (Ctrl Switch)]: Controller switch on/off settings
4. The parameters are organized into several editing groups.
Press [1 (⇑)] [2 (⇓)] to select the tab for the editing group that
contains the parameter you wish to edit.
For details on the parameter groupings, refer to “Parameter
list” (Parameter List).
5. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the parameter you
wish to modify.
6. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to get the value
you want.
7. Repeat steps 4–6 to set the parameter.
8. Setting for the Solo Synth are saved for system settings.
Press [8 (System Write)] to execute the write operation.
9. Setting for the Control Settings are saved independently for
each performance setting. If you wish to save the changes
you’ve made, press [WRITE] to perform the Save operation
(p. 96). If you do not wish to save changes, press [EXIT] to
return to the Performance Layer or Mixer screen.
For each part, specify whether MIDI Aftertouch messages will be
transmitted (ON), or not (OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
Control Modulation (Control Modulation Switch)
For each part, specify whether MIDI Modulation messages will be
transmitted (ON), or not (OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
Control Hold Pedal (Control Hold Pedal Switch)
For each part, you can specify whether control messages from a
pedal connected to the HOLD PEDAL jacks will be transmitted
(ON), or not (OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
Control Pedal (Control Pedal Switch)
For each part, you can specify whether control messages from a
pedal connected to the CONTROL PEDAL jacks will be transmitted
(ON), or not (OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
Control D Beam (Control D Beam Switch)
Specifies whether each part will be controlled by the D Beam.
Value: OFF, ON
If you return to the Performance PLAY screen without saving,
91
Reference_e.book 92 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Performance
Control Knob (Control Knob Switch)
D Beam (Solo Synth)
Specifies whether each part will be controlled by the control knob.
You can use the D Beam controller to perform in a way similar to on
a mono synth.
Value: OFF, ON
fig.06-12_50
Make Settings for the Realtime
Controllers and D Beam Controller
(Ctrl)
fig.06-11_50
For details on the setting, refer to “Selecting the Parameter
Controlled by the Realtime Controllers or D Beam Controller
(Control Setting)” (p. 91).
For details on the setting, refer to “Selecting the Parameter
Controlled by the Realtime Controllers or D Beam Controller
(Control Setting)” (p. 91).
D Beam (Pad Trigger)
Instead of striking the pads themselves, you can also use the D Beam
controller to control the sounding of the pads.
Settings for the PAD trigger are saved independently for each
performance as part of the performance settings. This lets you
create performances that make effective use of controller
settings.
When you press [7 (Panel View)], the Panel View screen will
appear, which displays the above parameters in graphical
fashion, simulating an analog synthesizer. From the Panel View
screen, you can press [2 (Image View)] to open the Image View
screen, where you can see a graphical indication of the D Beam
output value. Press [EXIT] to leave this screen.
To exit from this screen, press [EXIT].
Settings for the Solo Synth are saved for system settings.
OSC 1/2 Waveform
Select the waveform. SAW is a sawtooth wave, and SQR is a square
wave.
OSC 1/2 Pulse Width
Pad Number
Specifies the pad number affected by the D Beam.
Value: 1–16
Pad Velocity
Specifies the strength of the pad sound played by the D Beam
controller.
Value: 1–127
Pad Control Mode
This specifies how the D Beam will behave when it is obstructed. If
this is set to MOMENTARY, the parameter will be on only while the
D Beam is obstructed, and will turn off when you stop obstructing it.
If this is set to LATCH, the parameter will alternately be switched
on/off each time you obstruct the D Beam.
Specifies the pulse width of the waveform. By cyclically modifying
the pulse width you can create subtle changes in the tone.
* The Pulse Width is activated when “SQR” is selected with OSC1/2
waveform.
Value: 0–127
OSC 1/2 Coarse Tune
Adjusts the pitch of the tone’s sound up or down in semitone steps
(+/-4 octaves).
Value: -48–+48
OSC 1/2 Fine Tune
Adjusts the pitch of the tone’s sound up or down in 1-cent steps (+/50 cents).
Value: -50–+50
Value: MOMENTARY, LATCH
OSC2 Level
Adjust the level.
Value: 0–127
92
Reference_e.book 93 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Performance
OSC1 Sync Switch
LFO Osc 2 Pitch Depth
Turning this switch on produces a complex sound with many
harmonics. This is effective when the OSC1 pitch is higher than the
OSC2 pitch.
Specifies the depth to which the LFO will modulate the OSC2 pitch.
Value: OFF, ON
LFO Osc 1 Pulse Width Depth
Filter Type
Specifies the depth to which the LFO will modulate the pulse width
of the OSC1 waveform.
OFF: No filter is used.
LPF: Low Pass Filter. This reduces the volume of all frequencies
above the cutoff frequency. in order to round off, or unbrighten, the sound. This is the most common filter used in
synthesizers.
BPF: Band Pass Filter. This leaves only the frequencies in the region
of the cutoff frequency, and cuts the rest. This can be useful
when creating distinctive sounds.
HPF: High Pass Filter. This cuts the frequencies in the region below
the cutoff frequency. This is suitable for creating percussive
sounds emphasizing their higher ones.
PKG: Peaking Filter. This emphasizes the frequencies in the region
of the cutoff frequency. You can use this to create wah-wah
effects by employing an LFO to change the cutoff frequency
cyclically.
Cutoff
Selects the frequency at which the filter begins to have an effect on
the waveform’s frequency components.
* The Pulse Width is activated when “SQR” is selected with OSC1/2
waveform.
Value: -63–+63
LFO Osc 2 Pulse Width Depth
Specifies the depth to which the LFO will modulate the pulse width
of the OSC2 waveform.
* The Pulse Width is activated when “SQR” is selected with OSC1/2
waveform.
Value: -63–+63
Range (Solo synth range)
Specifies the range in which the pitch of the solo synth will vary.
Value: 2 OCTAVES, 4 OCTAVES, 8 OCTAVES
D Beam (Assignable)
By assigning a variety of functions to the D Beam controller you can
apply different effects to the sound in real time.
fig.06-13_50
Value: 0–127
Resonance
Emphasizes the portion of the sound in the region of the cutoff
frequency, adding character to the sound. Excessively high settings
can produce oscillation, causing the sound to distort.
Value: 0–127
Level
Sets the volume.
Value: 0–127
Chorus Send Level
Sets the level of the signal sent to chorus.
For details on the setting, refer to “Selecting the Parameter
Controlled by the Realtime Controllers or D Beam Controller
(Control Setting)” (p. 91).
Value: 0–127
Reverb Send Level
Sets the level of the signal sent to reverb.
Value: 0–127
Settings for the ASSIGNABLE are saved independently for each
performance as part of the performance settings. This lets you create
performances that make effective use of controller settings.
LFO Rate
Adjusts the modulation rate, or speed, of the LFO.
Value: 0–127
LFO Osc 1 Pitch Depth
Specifies the depth to which the LFO will modulate the OSC1 pitch.
Value: -63–+63
93
Creating a Performance
Selects the type of filter.
Value: -63–+63
Reference_e.book 94 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Performance
Type (Assignable Type)
Specifies the function controlled by the D Beam controller.
Knob Assign 1–4
(Realtime Control Knob Assign 1–4)
Value
Specify the functions that will be controlled by the [
CC01–31, 33–95: Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95
Value
] knobs.
CC01–31, 33–95: Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95
For more information about Control Change messages, please
refer to “MIDI Implementation” (Parameter List).
For more information about Control Change messages, please
refer to “MIDI Implementation” (Parameter List).
Bend Up:
Raises the pitch in semitone steps
(up to 4 octaves higher).
Bend Down:
Lowers the pitch in semitone steps
(up to 4 octaves lower).
Start/Stop:
Starts/Stops the sequencer.
TAP Tempo:
Tap tempo
(a tempo specified by the interval at which you
move your hand over the D Beam controller).
Arp Duration: Arpeggio Duration
Arp Motif:
Arpeggio Motif
Chord Form:
Chord Form
Arpeggio Grid
Master Level: The volume of the entire Fantom-S
Arp Grid:
Pitch Bend:
Pitch Bend
Aftertouch:
Aftertouch
Arp Style:
Arpeggio Style
Arp Grid:
Arpeggio Grid
Arp Duration: Arpeggio Duration
Arp Motif:
Arpeggio Motif
Arp Oct Up:
The range in which the arpeggio is sounded will
rise in steps of an octave (maximum 3 octaves).
Switch
fig.06-18_50
Arp Oct Down: The range in which the arpeggio is sounded will
lower in steps of an octave (maximum 3 octaves).
Range Min (D Beam Range Lower)
Specify the lower limit of the range of the D Beam controller.
Value: 0–127
Range Max (D Beam Range Upper)
Specify the upper limit of the range of the D Beam controller.
By setting Range Max below Range Min you can invert the range of
change.
Value: 0–127
For details on the setting, refer to “Selecting the Parameter
Controlled by the Realtime Controllers or D Beam Controller
(Control Setting)” (p. 91).
Knob
Switch 1/2 (Assignable Switch 1–2)
fig.06-17_50
Specify the functions that will be controlled by the [
buttons.
]/[
]
Value
Transpose Down: Lowers the key range in semitone steps
(up to 5 semitones lower).
For details on the setting, refer to “Selecting the Parameter
Controlled by the Realtime Controllers or D Beam Controller
(Control Setting)” (p. 91).
Knob parameters are valid only when the REALTIME
CONTROL button is set to “ASSIGNABLE.”
Transpose Up:
Raises the key range in semitone steps
(up to 6 semitones higher).
Tap Tempo:
Tap tempo (a tempo specified by the interval at
which you press the button).
Mono/poly:
Pressed to toggle between polyphonic (POLY)
and monophonic (MONO) play of a patch.
Portamento:
Portamento On/Off
Hold:
Hold play On/Off
MFX1–3 Sw:
Multi-effect 1–3 switch
Chorus Sw:
Chorus switch
Reverb Sw:
Reverb switch
Mastering Sw:
Mastering switch
Loop:
Loop play On/Off
Rhythm Start/Stop: Rhythm pattern playback On/Off
94
Reference_e.book 95 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Performance
Tempo
fig.06-28a_50
Setting Effects for a Performance
(Effects/MFX/MFX Control/Chorus/
Reverb)
For details regarding effect settings, refer to the pages shown below.
• “Applying Effects in Performance Mode” (p. 178)
• “Making Chorus Settings (Chorus)” (p. 182)
• “Making Reverb Settings (Reverb)” (p. 182)
For details on the setting, refer to “Selecting the Parameter
Controlled by the Realtime Controllers or D Beam Controller
(Control Setting)” (p. 91).
Recommended Tempo
Changing the Settings of the
Patch Assigned to a Part
When using patches in Performance mode, some settings such as
effects settings will be affected by Performance settings. If you wish
to edit a patch while hearing how it will sound in the Performance,
use this procedure:
If you want the sequencer tempo to change when you switch
Performances, specify the tempo that will follow this change. This
setting is valid when the Seq Tempo Override parameter is “ON.”
In order to enable this setting, turn on the Tempo Override
parameter (p. 190).
1. Make sure the Performance mode is selected.
Value: 20–250
2. Press [EDIT].
MFX Ctrl Ch
fig.06-28b_50
For details on the setting, refer to “Selecting the Parameter
Controlled by the Realtime Controllers or D Beam Controller
(Control Setting)” (p. 91).
* Here we explain how to change the setting of a patch assigned to a part.
The procedure for changing the settings of rhythm sets is the same.
Substitute “rhythm set” wherever “patch” appears in a sentence.
The patch assigned to the part is displayed in the Patch Edit
screen.
fig.06-15_50
3. The rest of the procedure is the same as when making
changes in Patch mode (p. 39).
MFX 1–3 Control Channel
Select the channel to which the multi-effect will be applied. Control
to modify multi-effects parameters in realtime, when MFX1–3 Source
parameter is set to “Prf.” Set to “OFF” when the Multi-effects
Control is not being used.
Value: 1–16, OFF
95
Creating a Performance
• “Making Multi-Effects Settings (MFX1–3)” (p. 180)
Reference_e.book 96 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Performance
Initializing Performance
Settings (Init)
Saving Performance You’ve
Created (Write)
“Initialize” means to return the settings of the currently selected
sound to a standard set of values.
Changes you make to sound settings are temporary, and will be lost
if you turn off the power or select another sound. If you want to keep
the modified sound, you must save it in the internal User memory.
The Initialize operation will affect only the currently selected
sound; the sounds that are stored in user memory will not be
affected. If you wish to restore all of the Fantom-S’s settings to
their factory values, perform a Factory Reset (p. 196).
When you modify the settings of a Performance, the Performance
Layer screen will indicate “*.” Once you save the Performance into
internal memory (user memory), the “*” indication goes away.
When you perform the save procedure, the data that previously
occupied the save destination will be lost.
1. Access the Performance Layer or Mixer screen, and select
the Performance that you wish to initialize (p. 78).
2. Press [MENU] to access the MENU window.
1. Make sure that Performance you wish to save is selected.
3. Press
[ENTER].
2. Press [WRITE].
or
to select “Initialize,” and then press
The Write Menu screen appears.
fig.06-26_50
4. Press
or
to select the initialization type.
• DEFAULT: Resets the currently selected performance in the
Temporary memory to the standard values. Use this setting
when you wish to create a sound from scratch.
• SOUND CONTROL: Initializes the values of the following part
parameters. Cutoff Offset, Resonance Offset, Attack Time Offset,
Release Time Offset, Decay Time Offset, Vibrato Rate, Vibrato,
Depth, Vibrato Delay
5. Press [8 (Exec)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
6. Press [8 (Exec)].
Return to the previous screen.
3. Press [1 (Perf)].
* Alternatively, you can use CURSOR
or
“Performance,” and then press [ENTER].
to select
The Performance Write screen appears.
fig.06-27_50
4. Assign a name to the performance.
• [1 (Change Type)]: Selects the type of character. Each time you
press this, you will alternately select the first character of a
character set: uppercase (A), lowercase (a), or numerals and
symbols (0).
• [2 (Delete)]: Deletes the character at the cursor location, and
moves the subsequent characters one space forward.
• [3 (Insert)]: Inserts a space at the cursor location.
•
,
: Move the cursor.
• [VALUE dial] [INC][DEC]: Selects a character.
* If you decide to discard your input, press [7 (Cancel)].
* You can use the pads to specify characters (p. 25).
96
Reference_e.book 97 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating a Performance
5. When you have finished inputting the name, press [8 (Write)].
A screen will appear, allowing you to select the write-destination
patch.
6. Turn the VALUE dial or use [INC][DEC] and
the write destination and patch number.
Creating a Performance
fig.06-07_50
to select
The write destination can be either the Fantom-S's internal user
area (User), or a memory card (Card).
7. Press [8 (Write)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
Never switch off the Fantom-S while data is being saved.
8. Press [8 (Exec)] to execute the save operation.
* To cancel the operation, press [7 (Cancel)].
When Changing the Settings for the
Patch or Rhythm Set Assigned to a
Part in a Performance
After changing the settings for the patch or rhythm set assigned to a
part in a Performance, if you then try to save the Performance
without first saving the changes in the settings, the following
message appears.
fig.06-08_50
In such cases, first save the patches and rhythm sets, and then save
the performance.
97
Reference_e.book 98 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Modifying the Sound in Real Time
You can use the D Beam controller, realtime controllers, assignable
switches or a pedal to modify the sound while you perform.
Here we will explain the procedures and settings for using these
functions in Patch mode. The operations are the same in
Performance mode.
If Performance mode is selected, the D Beam controller on/off
setting is saved for each performance as part of the performance
settings.
The usable range of the D Beam controller
fig.13-02
Waving Your Hand Over the D
Beam to Modify the Sound
(D Beam Controller)
The D Beam controller can be used simply by waving your hand
over it. It can be used to apply various effects, depending on the
function that is assigned to it. You can also create effects in which the
sound changes instantaneously, in a way that would not be possible
by operating a knob or the bender lever. On the Fantom-S, the D
Beam controller can be used not only to modify the sounds assigned
to the Keyboard part or Pad part, but also to control the pitch of a
monophonic (solo) synthesizer sound.
The following diagram shows the
usable range of the D Beam controller.
Waving your hand outside this range
will produce no effect.
The response of the D Beam Controller
can also be checked in the “D Beam” area of the display. This is
displayed graphically as a bar that lengthens as you move your
hand closer, and shortens as you move your hand away.
fig.13-02b
1. Access the Patch Play screen (p. 26).
The following area of the screen is the D Beam controller display
area.
fig.13-01
The usable range of the D Beam controller will become
extremely small when used under strong direct sunlight. Please
be aware of this when using the D Beam controller outside.
The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will change depending on
the amount of light in the vicinity of the unit. If it does not function
as you expect, adjust the sensitivity as appropriate for the brightness
of your location. Increase this value will raise the sensitivity (p. 189).
Making Settings for the D Beam
Controller
2. Press either the D BEAM [PAD TRIGGER], [SOLO SYNTH], or
[ASSIGNABLE] button to turn on the D Beam controller.
fig.13-02b
ASSIGNABLE
You can assign various functions to the D Beam controller and apply
a wide range of effects to the sound in real time.
1. Hold down [JUMP] and press D BEAM [ASSIGNABLE].
• ASSIGNABLE button: Operates the function assigned to the D
Beam controller.
The Assignable screen appears.
fig.13-02a_50
• PAD TRIGGER button:Use the D Beam controller to play
sounds instead of striking the pads.
• SOLO SYNTH button: Lets you use the D Beam as a
monophonic synthesizer.
3. While you play the keyboard or pads to produce sound,
place your hand above the D Beam controller and move it
slowly up and down.
An effect will be applied to the sound, depending on the
function that is assigned to the D Beam controller.
4. To turn off the D Beam controller, once again press the
button you pressed in step 2 so the indicator goes out.
2. Move the cursor to the parameter that you want to set, and turn
the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to make the setting.
3. Press [EXIT] the Assignable screen will close.
98
Reference_e.book 99 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Modifying the Sound in Real Time
Assignable Type
Specifies the function controlled by the D Beam controller.
Value
CC01–31, 33–95: Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95
PAD Trigger settings
(Pad-related settings)
You can use the D Beam controller to control the pads as an
alternative to striking the pads themselves.
1. Hold down [JUMP] and press D BEAM [PAD TRIGGER].
Bend Up:
Raises the pitch in semitone steps
(up to 4 octaves higher).
Bend Down:
Lowers the pitch in semitone steps
(up to 4 octaves lower).
Start/stop:
Starts/Stops the sequencer.
TAP Tempo:
Tap tempo
(a tempo specified by the interval at which you
move your hand over the D Beam controller).
Arp Grid:
Arpeggio Grid
The Pad Trigger Screen appears.
fig.13-02c_50
Arp Duration: Arpeggio Duration
Arp Motif:
Arpeggio Motif
Arp Oct Up:
The range in which the arpeggio is sounded will
rise in steps of an octave (maximum 3 octaves).
Arp Oct Down: The range in which the arpeggio is sounded will
lower in steps of an octave (maximum 3 octaves).
Range Min (D Beam Range Lower)
Specify the lower limit of the range of the D Beam controller.
2. Move the cursor to the parameter that you want to set, and turn
the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to make the setting.
3. Press [EXIT] the Pad Trigger screen will close.
Pad Number
Specifies the pad number affected by the D Beam.
Value: 0–16
Value: 0–127
Pad Velocity
Range Max (D Beam Range Upper)
Specifies the strength of the pad sound played by the D Beam
controller.
Specify the upper limit of the range of the D Beam controller.
By setting Range Max below Range Min you can invert the range of
change.
Value: 0–127
Settings for the ASSIGNABLE are saved independently for each
performance as part of the performance settings. This lets you create
performances that make effective use of controller settings.
Value: 1–127
Pad Control Mode
This specifies how the D Beam will behave when it is obstructed. If
this is set to MOMENTARY, the parameter will be on only while the
D Beam is obstructed, and will turn off when you stop obstructing it.
If this is set to LATCH, the parameter will alternately be switched
on/off each time you obstruct the D Beam.
Value: MOMENTARY, LATCH
If Patch mode is selected, this is saved as part of the system settings.
If you want to save the settings, press [8 (System Write)].
Settings for the PAD trigger are saved independently for each
performance as part of the performance settings. This lets you create
performances that make effective use of controller settings.
If Patch mode is selected, this is saved as part of the system settings.
If you want to save the settings, press [8 (System Write)].
99
Modifying the Sound in Real Time
For more information about Control Change messages, please
refer to “MIDI Implementation” (Parameter List).
Reference_e.book 100 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Modifying the Sound in Real Time
SOLO SYNTH
Value: 0–127
On the Fantom-S you can play a monophonic synthesizer whose
pitch is controlled by the D Beam.
OSC1 Sync Switch
1. Hold down [JUMP] and press D BEAM [SOLO SYNTH].
The Solo Synth screen appears.
fig.13-02d_50
Turning this switch on produces a complex sound with many
harmonics. This is effective when the OSC1 pitch is higher than the
OSC2 pitch.
Value: OFF, ON
Filter Type
Selects the type of filter.
OFF: No filter is used.
LPF: Low Pass Filter. This reduces the volume of all frequencies
above the cutoff frequency. in order to round off, or unbrighten, the sound. This is the most common filter used in
synthesizers.
2. Move the cursor to the parameter that you want to set, and turn
the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to make the setting.
3. If you want to save the settings, press [8 (System Write)].
If you press [EXIT] the Assignable screen will close.
Setting for the Solo Synth are saved for system settings.
When you press [7 (Panel View)], the Panel View screen will
appear, which displays the above parameters in graphical
fashion, simulating an analog synthesizer. From the Panel View
screen, you can press [2 (Image View)] to open the Image View
screen, where you can see a graphical indication of the D Beam
output value. Press [EXIT] to leave this screen. To exit from this
screen, press [EXIT].
OSC 1/2 Waveform
Select the waveform. SAW is a sawtooth wave, and SQR is a square
wave.
Value: SAW, SQR
BPF: Band Pass Filter. This leaves only the frequencies in the region
of the cutoff frequency, and cuts the rest. This can be useful
when creating distinctive sounds.
HPF: High Pass Filter. This cuts the frequencies in the region below
the cutoff frequency. This is suitable for creating percussive
sounds emphasizing their higher ones.
PKG: Peaking Filter. This emphasizes the frequencies in the region
of the cutoff frequency. You can use this to create wah-wah
effects by employing an LFO to change the cutoff frequency
cyclically.
Cutoff
Selects the frequency at which the filter begins to have an effect on
the waveform’s frequency components.
Value: 0–127
Resonance
Emphasizes the portion of the sound in the region of the cutoff
frequency, adding character to the sound. Excessively high settings
can produce oscillation, causing the sound to distort.
Value: 0–127
Level
OSC 1/2 Pulse Width
Sets the volume.
Specifies the pulse width of the waveform. By cyclically modifying
the pulse width you can create subtle changes in the tone.
Value: 0–127
* The Pulse Width is activated when “SQR” is selected with OSC1/2 waveform.
Value: 0–127
Chorus Send Level
Sets the level of the signal sent to chorus.
Value: 0–127
OSC 1/2 Coarse Tune
Reverb Send Level
Adjusts the pitch of the tone’s sound up or down in semitone steps
(+/-4 octaves).
Sets the level of the signal sent to reverb.
Value: -48–+48
Value: 0–127
OSC 1/2 Fine Tune
LFO Rate
Adjusts the pitch of the tone’s sound up or down in 1-cent steps (+/50 cents).
Adjusts the modulation rate, or speed, of the LFO.
Value: -50–+50
Value: 0–127
LFO Osc 1 Pitch Depth
OSC2 Level
Specifies the depth to which the LFO will modulate the OSC1 pitch.
Adjust the OSC2 level.
Value: -63–+63
100
Reference_e.book 101 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Modifying the Sound in Real Time
LFO Osc 2 Pitch Depth
Making Realtime Controller Settings
Value: -63–+63
Realtime Controller Knob Settings
LFO Osc 1 Pulse Width Depth
You can select the function of the realtime control knobs by pressing
the button located at the right of the knobs.
Specifies the depth to which the LFO will modulate the pulse width
of the OSC1 waveform.
* The Pulse Width is activated when “SQR” is selected with OSC1/2
waveform.
1. Hold down [JUMP] and press the button located at the right
of the REALTIME CONTROL knobs.
The Knob screen appears.
fig.13-04_50
Value: -63–+63
LFO Osc 2 Pulse Width Depth
Specifies the depth to which the LFO will modulate the pulse width
of the OSC2 waveform.
* The Pulse Width is activated when “SQR” is selected with OSC1/2
waveform.
Value: -63–+63
Range (Solo synth range)
Specifies the range in which the pitch of the solo synth will vary.
Value: 2 OCTAVES, 4 OCTAVES, 8 OCTAVES
2. Move the cursor to the parameter that you want to set, and
turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to set it.
3. Press [8 (Exit)] to close the Knob screen.
Using Knobs or Buttons to
Modify the Sound
(Realtime Controller)
You can use the REALTIME CONTROL knobs and ASSIGNABLE
SW buttons to modify the sound in real time.
1. Access the Patch Play screen (p. 26).
The “Realtime Control” area shows the function that is assigned
to each realtime controller knob and button. [
] indicate the
four knobs, and [
], [
] indicate the two buttons.
fig.13-03
Realtime controller settings are saved independently for each
performance as part of the performance settings. This lets you
create performances that make effective use of controller
settings.
Knob Assign 1–4
(Realtime Control Knob Assign 1–4)
Specify the functions that will be controlled by the [
] knobs.
Value
CC01–31, 33–95: Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95
For more information about Control Change messages, please
refer to “MIDI Implementation” (Parameter List).
PITCH BEND:
Pitch Bend
AFTERTOUCH:
Aftertouch
ARP STYLE:
Arpeggio Style
ARP GRID:
Arpeggio Grid
ARP DURATION: Arpeggio Duration
2. While playing the keyboard or pressing the pads to produce
sound, operate the REALTIME CONTROL knobs and
ASSIGNABLE SW buttons.
ARP MOTIF:
Arpeggio Motif
CHORD FORM:
Chord Form
MASTER LEVEL: The volume of the entire Fantom-S
The sound will change according to the function assigned to
each knob or button.
101
Modifying the Sound in Real Time
Specifies the depth to which the LFO will modulate the OSC2 pitch.
Reference_e.book 102 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Modifying the Sound in Real Time
Assignable Switch Settings
1. Hold down [JUMP] and press a ASSIGNABLE SW button.
Using a Pedal to Modify the
Sound (Control Pedal)
The Switch screen appears.
You can modify the sound by pressing a pedal that is connected to
the rear panel PEDAL HOLD jack or PEDAL CONTROL jack.
fig.13-05_50
Pedal such as expression pedals (DP-8; available separately), pedal
switches (DP series; available separately), or foot switches (BOSS FSU; available separately) can be connected to the Fantom-S.
1. Access the Patch Play screen (p. 26).
2. While playing the keyboard to produce sound, operate a
pedal.
The sound will change according to the function that is assigned
to the control pedal.
2. Move the cursor to the parameter that you want to set, and
turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to make the
setting.
1. Press [MENU].
3. Press [8 (Exit)] to close the Knob screen.
2. Use
Making Control Pedal Settings
or
to select “System,” and then press [ENTER].
The System Setup screen appears.
Realtime controller settings are saved independently for each
performance as part of the performance settings. This lets you
create performances that make effective use of controller
settings.
3. Press [1 (⇑)] or [2 (⇓)] to select “Pedal/D Beam.”
A screen like the following appears.
fig.15-06_50
Switch Assign
Specify the function that will be controlled by the assignable switch.
Value
TRANSPOSE DOWN: Lowers the key range in semitone steps
(up to 5 semitones lower).
TRANSPOSE UP:
Raises the key range in semitone steps
(up to 6 semitones higher).
TAP TEMPO:
Tap tempo (a tempo specified by the interval
at which you press the button).
MONO/POLY:
Pressed to toggle between polyphonic
(POLY) and monophonic (MONO) play of a
patch.
PORTAMENTO:
Portamento On/Off
HOLD:
Hold play On/Off
MFX1–3 SW:
Multi-effect 1–3 switch
CHORUS SW:
Chorus switch
REVERB SW:
Reverb switch
MASTERING SW:
Mastering switch
LOOP:
Loop play On/Off
RHY START/STOP:
Rhythm pattern playback On/Off
If Patch mode is selected, assignable switches are available when
the keyboard part is selected.
102
4. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to make the
setting.
5. If you want to save your settings, press [8 (System Write)].
Press [Exit] to return to the Patch Play screen.
Reference_e.book 103 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Modifying the Sound in Real Time
Control Pedal Assign
This specifies the function of each pedal connected to the PEDAL
CONTROL jacks.
Value
CC01–31, 33–95: Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95
Modifying the Sound in Real Time
For details on control change messages, refer to “MIDI
Implementation” (Parameter List).
BEND UP:The pitch will rise in semitone steps (maximum 4 octaves)
each time you press the pedal.
BEND DOWN:The pitch will fall in semitone steps (maximum 4
octaves) each time you press the pedal.
AFTERTOUCH:Aftertouch
OCT UP:Each pedal press raises the key range in octave steps (up to
3 octaves higher).
OCT DOWN:Each pedal press lowers the key range in octave steps
(up to 3 octaves lower).
START/STOP:The sequencer will start/stop.
PUNCH IN/OUT:Manual punch-in/out recording will start/stop.
TAP TEMPO:Tap tempo (a tempo specified by the interval at which
you press the pedal).
PROG UP: The next sound number will be selected.
PROG DOWN:The previous sound number will be selected.
FAVORITE UP:The favorite sound of the next number or bank will
be selected.
FAVORITE DOWN:The favorite sound of the previous number or
bank will be selected.
ARP/RHY SW:Switches the Arpeggio/Rhythm function on/off.
RHY START/STOP: Switch Rhythm pattern playback on/off.
CHORD SW:Chord function On/Off
Control Pedal Polarity
Selects the polarity of the pedal. On some pedals, the electrical signal
output by the pedal when it is pressed or released is the opposite of
other pedals. If your pedal has an effect opposite of what you expect,
set this parameter to “REVERSE.” If you are using a Roland pedal
(that has no polarity switch), set this parameter to “STANDARD.”
Value: STANDARD, REVERSE
Hold Pedal Polarity
Select the polarity of the Hold pedal. On some pedals, the electrical
signal output by the pedal when it is pressed or released is the
opposite of other pedals. If your pedal has an effect opposite of what
you expect, set this parameter to “REVERSE.” If you are using a
Roland pedal (that has no polarity switch), set this parameter to
“STANDARD.”
Range: STANDARD, REVERSE
Continuous Hold Pedal
This setting determines whether the HOLD PEDAL jack will provide
support for half-pedaling (ON), or not (OFF). When this is set to support
use of half-pedaling techniques, you can then connect an optional
expression pedal (DP-8, etc.), and employ pedal work to achieve even
finer control in performances in which piano tones are used.
Value: OFF, ON
103
Reference_e.book 104 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing Arpeggios
(ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM Function)
About Arpeggio
The Fantom-S’s Arpeggio function lets you perform arpeggios
(chords in which notes are played in succession, one note at a time)
just by playing the chords, using the notes in the chords you play.
Not only can you use the factory-set Arpeggio Styles, which
determine the way the arpeggio is played, but you can also freely
rewrite Styles and enjoy performing your own original arpeggios.
Determining the Tempo for
Arpeggio Performances
This sets the arpeggio tempo. You can save the arpeggio tempo
settings individually in each Patch, Rhythm Set, or Performance.
1. Press [TEMPO].
The current tempo value appears in the display.
fig.tempo
A Arpeggio Style is not part of any Performance, but rather independent
data; you can store up to 128 Arpeggio Styles. You can use a single
Arpeggio Style in different Patches and Performances at the same time.
A performance contains a number by which one of these arpeggio
styles are recalled; this number is saved individually for each
performance.
A patch cannot store the number by which an arpeggio style is recalled.
What’s more, you can perform in ensemble using these arpeggios
and rhythm patterns.
* You cannot play the arpeggio from the pads.
2. Press VALUE dial or [INC], [DEC] to set the tempo value (5–
300), or set the value by tapping [6 (Tap)] a number of times
with the same rhythm (Tap Tempo).
* If you press [7 (Click)] to assign a check mark (✔), the click will sound.
3. When you have made the setting, press [8 (Close)].
Playing Arpeggios
Using a controller to adjust the playback tempo
Turning Arpeggio On and Off
Since tempo control is assigned to one of the Fantom-S’s
realtime control knobs, it’s easy to adjust the tempo while
playing arpeggios.
You can save the Arpeggio On/Off settings individually in each
Patch, Rhythm Set, or Performance.
fig.09-04ab
1. Press ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM [ON/OFF], causing the indicator
to light.
The button will light.
fig.Arp button
Tempo
1. Press the REALTIME CONTROL button so the ARP/RHY
indicator lights.
2. Play an arpeggio, and turn the realtime control knob.
2. Play a chord on the keyboard.
The Fantom-S will play an arpeggio, according to the notes
forming the chord you have just voiced.
3. To finish playing arpeggios, press [ON/OFF] again so the
indicator turns off.
In arpeggio settings, the Style (Arpeggio Style) (p. 105) is
particularly important. The playback pattern of the arpeggio is
determined mainly by this selection.
For details regarding each parameter, refer to “Arpeggio
Settings” (p. 105).
Using in Combination with the Chord
Memory Function
When performing with the Arpeggio, you can also use it along
with the Chord Memory function (p. 110). After first storing
complex Chord Forms in memory, you can then call them up
when Arpeggio function is on, and you can easily create
complex arpeggio sounds just by pressing a single key.
104
Holding an Arpeggio
By using the following procedure, you can produce arpeggios even
without continuing to press the keyboard.
1. Press [ARPEGGIO HOLD].
The indicator will begin blinking.
2. Play a chord.
3. If you play a different chord or notes while the arpeggio is
being held, the arpeggio will change accordingly.
4. To cancel Arpeggio Hold, press [ARPEGGIO HOLD]
simultaneously once again.
Reference_e.book 105 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing Arpeggios (ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM Function)
If you play an arpeggio while pressing the hold pedal, the arpeggio
will continue to be played even if you release the chord.
1. Connect an optional pedal switch (DP series etc.) to the
HOLD PEDAL jack.
2. Press ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM [ON/OFF] to turn on the
arpeggio.
3. Play a chord while pressing the hold pedal.
4. If you play a different chord or notes while the arpeggio is
being held, the arpeggio will change accordingly.
Turning Arpeggio Switch On and Off
If you don’t want to play arpeggios, turn off the arpeggio switch.
If the arpeggio switch is turned off, no arpeggios will be played
even if ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM [ON/OFF] is lit.
1. Press [SELECT/EDIT].
Selecting Styles for Arpeggio
Performances (Arpeggio Style)
This selects the arpeggio’s basic performance Style. The arpeggio
styles are kept in preset memory and user memory.
Value: U001–128 (User), P001–128 (Preset)
For details on the settings, refer to “Arpeggio Settings” (p. 105)
For more on the prepared Arpeggio Styles already programmed
in the Fantom-S, refer to Sound List.
About Arpeggio Styles
An Arpeggio Style is a series of data for basic arpeggio patterns
and chord styles recorded in the form of a grid consisting of a
maximum of 32 steps x 16 pitches.
fig.GRID
Note 16
HIGH
2. Press [2 (Arp Sw)] to remove a check mark (✔).
The setting is toggled on/off each time you press [2 (Arp Sw)].
3. When you have made the setting, press [EXIT].
Note 06
Note 05
Note 04
Note 03
Note 02
Note 01
STEP
1
Arpeggio Settings
2 3 4 5
6
7 8
9 10 11 .... 32
Each grid contains one of the following kinds of data.
1. Press ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM [SELECT/EDIT].
• ON:
Note On (with Velocity data)
2. Press [3 (Arp)].
• TIE:
Tie (hold of the previous note)
A screen like the one below appears.
If Performance mode is selected, (Performance) will appear at
the right of “Arpeggiator.”
fig.Arp01_50
• REST: Rest (no sound played)
The keys that are pressed along with the sequence in which they
are pressed is referenced to the “lowest-pitched key during
input.” Thus, you can use a single Arpeggio Style in different
Patches and Performances at the same time.
A Arpeggio Style is not part of any patch or Performance, but
rather independent data; you can store up to 64 Arpeggio Styles.
3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to each parameter, and
either turn the VALUE dial or press [INC] or [DEC] to make
the setting.
4. When you have made the setting, press [EXIT].
105
Playing Arpeggios (ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM Function)
When Using a Hold Pedal
Reference_e.book 106 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing Arpeggios (ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM Function)
Changing the Beat and Shuffle (Grid)
UP (L&H):
This sets the particular note division and resolution in a “single
grid” used in creating the arpeggio in an Arpeggio Style, and how
much of a “shuffle” syncopation is to be to applied (none/weak/
strong) to it (grid type).
Notes from both the lowest and highest pressed
keys are sounded each time, and the notes play
in order from the lowest of the pressed keys.
UP (_):
The notes play in order from the lowest of the
pressed keys. No one note is played every time.
DOWN (L):
Only the lowest of the keys pressed is sounded
each time, and the notes play in order from the
highest of the pressed keys.
DOWN (L&H):
Notes from both the lowest and highest pressed
keys are sounded each time, and the notes play
in order from the highest of the pressed keys.
* Grid settings are shared with the arpeggio.
For details on the settings, refer to “Arpeggio Settings” (p. 105)
Quarter note (one grid section = one beat)
Value: 1/4:
1/8:
Eighth note (two grid sections = one beat)
1/8L:
Eighth note shuffle Light
(two grid sections = one beat, with a light shuffle)
DOWN (_):
The notes play in order from the highest of the
pressed keys. No note is played every time.
1/8H:
Eighth note shuffle Heavy
(two grid sections = one beat, with a heavy shuffle)
UP&DOWN (L):
Notes will be sounded from the lowest to the
highest key you press and then back down to the
lowest key, with only the lowest key sounded
each time.
1/12:
Eighth note triplet (three grid sections = one beat)
1/16:
Sixteenth note (four grid sections = one beat)
1/16L: Sixteenth note shuffle Light
(four grid sections = one beat, with a light shuffle)
1/16H: Sixteenth note shuffle Heavy
(four grid sections = one beat, with a heavy shuffle)
1/24:
Sixteenth note triplet (six grid sections = one beat)
Applying Staccato and Tenuto (Duration)
UP&DOWN (L&H): Notes from both the lowest and highest pressed
keys are sounded each time, and the notes play
in order from the lowest of the pressed keys and
then back again in the reverse order.
UP&DOWN (_):
The notes play in order from the lowest of the
pressed keys, and then back again in the reverse
order. No note is played every time.
RANDOM (L):
Notes will be sounded randomly for the keys
you press, with only the lowest key sounded
each time.
RANDOM (_):
Only the lowest of the keys pressed is sounded
each time, the notes you press will be sounded
randomly. No note will sound each time.
PHRASE:
Pressing just one key will play a phrase based on
the pitch of that key. If you press more than one
key, the key you press last will be used.
This setting (duration) determines whether the sounds are played
staccato (short and clipped), or tenuto (fully drawn out).
* Grid settings are shared with the arpeggio.
For details on the settings, refer to “Arpeggio Settings” (p. 105)
Value: 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120, Full
30–120:
For example, when set to “30,” the length of the note in a
grid (or when a series of grids is connected with ties, the
final grid) is 30% of the full length of the note set in the
grid type.
FUL (Full): Even if the linked grid is not connected with a tie, the
same note continues to sound until the point at which
the next new sound is specified.
<Example>
Action of a Style starting from the lowest note, “1-2-3-2” when the
keys “C-D-E-F-G” are played
When “UP (L)” is selected as the motif:
C-D-E-D → C-E-F-E → C-F-G-F ( → repeated)
When “UP (_)” is selected as the motif:
Selecting Ascending/Descending
Variations (Different Ways of
Playing the Sounds) (Motif)
This selects the method used to play sounds (motif) when you have a
greater number of notes than programmed for the Arpeggio Style.
For details on the settings, refer to “Arpeggio Settings” (p. 105)
When the number of keys played is less than the number of
notes in the Style, the highest-pitched of the pressed keys is
played by default.
Value:
UP (L):
106
C-D-E-D → D-E-F-E → E-F-G-F ( → repeated)
When “UP&DOWN (L&H)” is selected as the motif:
C-D-G-D → C-E-G-E → C-F-G-F → C-E-G-E ( → repeated)
Adjusting the Velocity of the
Arpeggio (Arpeggio Velocity)
Specifies the loudness of the notes that you play.
If you want the velocity value of each note to depend on how strongly
you play the keyboard, set this parameter to REAL. If you want each
note to have a fixed velocity regardless of how strongly you play the
keyboard, set this parameter to the desired value (1–127).
For details on the settings, refer to “Arpeggio Settings” (p. 105)
Only the lowest of the keys pressed is sounded
each time, and the notes play in order from the
lowest of the pressed keys.
Value: REAL, 1–127
Reference_e.book 107 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing Arpeggios (ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM Function)
Here’s how to specify the part that will use the arpeggio in Performance
mode. You can specify only one part for playing arpeggios.
If a rhythm set is assigned to a part in Performance mode, you can
play a rhythm pattern along with the arpeggios.
The part you select here functions for both the arpeggio and the
chord memory functions.
For details on the settings, refer to “Arpeggio Settings” (p. 105)
Value: Part1–16
Hanging the Range of the Arpeggio
(Octave Range)
This adds an effect that shifts arpeggios one cycle at a time in octave
units (octave range). You can set the shift range upwards or
downwards (up to three octaves up or down).
For details on the settings, refer to “Arpeggio Settings” (p. 105)
Value: -3–0–+3
fig.Arp knob
Octave Range
Accent Rate
Tempo
3. Turn the REALTIME CONTROL knobs.
While arpeggios are playing, you can use the knobs to control
the following parameters.
• “Hanging the Range of the Arpeggio (Octave Range)” (p.
107)
• “Changing the Accent Strength (Accent Rate)” (p. 107)
Creating Your Own Styles
Not only can you use the prepared internal Arpeggio Styles that
determine how arpeggios are played, but you can also create them as
well. This way, you can enjoy performing your own original arpeggios.
Arpeggio Style you create can be stored in internal user memory.
1. Press ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM [SELECT/EDIT].
2. Press [3 (Arp)].
3. Press [EDIT].
You can also use a REALTIME CONTROL knob to control this.
The Arpeggio Style Edit screen will appear.
fig.Arp02_50
Changing the Accent Strength
(Accent Rate)
When you play arpeggios, the velocity of each arpeggiated note is
determined by the velocity of the notes programmed within the
arpeggio style. You can adjust the amount (“spread”) of this
dynamic variation. With a setting of 100%, the arpeggiated notes will
have the velocities that are programmed by the arpeggio style. With
a setting of 0%, all arpeggiated notes will be sounded at a fixed
velocity.
4. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor.
For details on the settings, refer to “Arpeggio Settings” (p. 105)
Value: 0-100%
Use
,
to select the pitch (note number: 0 (C-1)–127 (G9)
that you want to input.
Use
You can also use a REALTIME CONTROL knob to control this.
,
to move to the step that you want to input.
If you hold down [SHIFT] and press
or
move to grid locations that contain data.
, the cursor will
Using the Realtime Control Knobs to
Edit the Arpeggio Settings
5. Turn the VALUE dial or use [INC] [DEC] to change the data at
the cursor location (velocity: OFF, 1–127, Tie).
You can use the realtime control knobs to change the arpeggio
settings by editing the parameters in real time.
6. When ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM [ON/OFF] is unlit, you can hold
down [SHIFT] and hit a pad to check the pitch of the note to
input.
1. Play arpeggios.
2. Press the REALTIME CONTROL button to select “ARP/RHY.”
The “ARP/RHY” indicator will light.
7. By pressing a pad you can enter the note number at the
cursor location, within a range of sixteen different velocities.
When you input the note, the cursor will move to the next step.
8. By pressing a function button you can perform the following
operations.
107
Playing Arpeggios (ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM Function)
Selecting the Part that Will Play
Arpeggios in Performance Mode (Part)
Reference_e.book 108 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing Arpeggios (ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM Function)
• Tie: [2 (Tie)]
Input a tie at the cursor location and proceed to the next step.
• Rest (Clear): [3 (Rest (Clear))]
Input a rest at the cursor location and proceed to the next step.
• Zoom In: [4 (Zoom In)]
Show the Arpeggio Style input screen at a higher magnification.
• Zoom Out: [5 (Zoom Out)]
Show the Arpeggio Style input screen at a lower magnification.
• Step Rec (Step Recording): [6 (Step Rec)]
By pressing [6 (Step Rec)] to add a check mark (✔), you can
input data from the keyboard or pads.
• Preview: [7 (Preview)]
By pressing [7 (Preview)] to add a check mark (✔), you can
audition the arpeggio that you are inputting. When you press it
once again to clear the check mark, the playback will stop.
• Clear Step: [8 (Clear Step)]
Clear all data at the step where the cursor is located.
Changing the Length of an Arpeggio
Style or the Velocity of the Notes You
Input
1. From the Arpeggio Edit screen, press [1 (Arp Setup)].
The Arp Setup window will appear.
2. Use
to select a parameter, and turn the VALUE
dial or use [INC] [DEC] to edit the value.
• End Step
Length of the arpeggio style
Value: 1–32
• Input Velocity
Specifies the velocity (volume) of the notes that will be input. If
this is set to REAL, you can add dynamics by varying the force
with which you press the pad or key.
Value: REAL, 1–127
3. When you have finished making settings, press [8 (Close)].
9. When you have finished editing, press [EXIT].
A maximum of sixteen different notes (pitches) can be used in
one style.
Initializing the Arpeggio Style that You
are Editing (Init)
1. Access the Arpeggio Edit screen.
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [1 (Init)].
If you want to erase all data that was input for the same note
number, hold down [SHIFT] and press [2 (Clear Note)]. A
message will ask you for confirmation. When you press [8
(Exec)] the data will be erased. If you decide to cancel the
operation, press [7 (Cancel)].
Inputting the Data from the Keyboards
or Pads
1. From the Arpeggio Edit screen, press [6 (Step Rec)] to add a
check mark (✔).
2. Press
or
to move the step.
3. Press the key o pad.
When all the keys or pads are released, the song advances by the
selected step time interval.
4. When you have finished making settings, press [6 (Step
Rec)] once again to clear the check mark.
108
A message will ask for confirmation.
3. Press [8 (Exec)] to execute the Initialize operation.
If you decide to cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
Reference_e.book 109 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing Arpeggios (ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM Function)
Playing Arpeggios (ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM Function)
Saving the Styles You Have
Created (WRITE)
The Styles you create are temporary; they are deleted as soon as you
turn off the power or select some other Style. You can store 128
arpeggio styles in the User memory.
Arpeggio style settings are saved as independent data, not
as part of the data for each patch. The settings in Patch mode,
it is not possible to save arpeggio parameters (e.g., arpeggio
style, grid type, motif, duration, octave range).
It can be saved to individual in Performance mode. If you
want to save your settings, press [WRITE] and save the
performance.
1. Confirm that the current Style is the one you want to save.
2. Press [3 (Arp)].
3. Press [8 (Write)].
The Arpeggio name entry screen will appear (p. 42).
4. When you have finished entering the name, press [8 (Write)].
A screen in which you can select the destination for the write
will appear.
fig.Arp04_50
5. Turn the VALUE dial or use [INC] [DEC] to select the write
destination.
6. Press [8 (Write)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
7. To write the data, press [8 (Exec)].
Never switch off the Fantom-S while data is being saved.
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
109
Reference_e.book 110 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Using the Chord Memory Function
(CHORD MEMORY)
About the Chord Memory
Function
Chord Memory is a function that allows you to play chords based on
pre-programmed Chord Forms, just by pressing a single key on the
keyboard. The Fantom-S can store 64 preset chord forms and 64 user
chord forms. If you wish, you can overwrite any of the 64 user
(factory set) chord forms.
The chord memory function operates on the arpeggio part in
Performance mode. If a rhythm set is selected for that part, you can
also use this to play rhythms.
* You cannot use the chord memory function with the pads.
Selecting Chord Forms
This selects the Chord Form to which the sounds making up the
chord being played are registered when the Chord Memory function
is used.
It can be saved to individual in Performance mode.
1. Press ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM [SELECT/EDIT].
2. Press [4 (Chord Memory)].
The following screen appears.
If Performance mode is selected, (Performance) will appear at
the right of “Chord Form.”
fig.Chord01_50
When you press the C4 key (Middle C), the chord is played
using the exact chord structure recorded in the Chord Form. This
is referenced to the C4 key; parallel chords are played by
pressing other keys.
Using in Combination with the Arpeggio
Function
When performing with the Chord Form function, you can also
use it along with the Arpeggio function (p. 104). After first
storing complex Chord Forms in memory, you can then call
them up when Arpeggio is on, and you can easily create
complex arpeggio sounds just by pressing a single key.
3. Either turn the VALUE dial or use [INC]/[DEC] to select a
Chord Form number.
The notes of the chord will be displayed.
For more on the Chord Forms pre-programmed at the factory,
refer to the “Sound Parameter List.”
Performing with the Chord
Memory Function
Turning Chord Memory Function On
and Off
1. Press ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM [CHORD MEMORY] to turn on
the Chord Memory function.
The button is lighted.
fig.Arp button
2. Play the keyboard.
A chord will sound according to the currently selected chord
form.
3. To finish playing arpeggios, press [CHORD MEMORY] again
so the indicator turns off.
you use the Chord Memory function with a tone for which the
Mono/Poly Parameters (p. 58) is Mono, only one sound in the
chord is played. When using the Chord Memory function to turn
Poly the Mono/Poly Parameters (p. 58).
110
4. When you have finished selecting a Chord Form, press
[Exit].
* A Chord form is not part of any Performance, but rather independent
data; you can store up to 64 Chord forms. You can use a single Chord
form in different Patches and Performances at the same time.
A performance contains a number by which these chord forms are
recalled; these numbers are saved individually for each performance (p.
96).
* To save the selected Chord Form number, press [WRITE] and carry out
the write procedure (p. 111).
* A patch cannot store the number by which an arpeggio style is recalled.
Reference_e.book 111 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Creating Your Own Chord
Forms
Saving the Chord Forms You
Have Created
Not only can you use the prepared internal Chord Forms, which
determine the constituent notes of chords played using the Chord
Memory function, but you can also freely create and rewrite them as
well.
The Chord Form you create are temporary; they are deleted as soon
as you turn off the power or select some other Style. If you want to
keep a Chord Form you have made, save it to the Fantom-S’s user
memory.
1. Press ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM [SELECT/EDIT].
2. Press [4 (Chord Memory)].
3. Turn the VALUE dial to select a chord form.
4. Press [EDIT].
The following screen appears.
The Chord Form are saved as independent data, not as part
of the data for each patch. The settings in Patch mode, it is not
possible to save chord form data. It can be saved to individual
in Performance mode. If you want to save your settings, press
[WRITE] and save the performance.
fig.Chord02_50
1. Press ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM [SELECT/EDIT].
2. Press [4 (Chord Memory)].
Confirm that the chord form the one you want to save.
3. Press [8 (Write)].
The Chord Form name entry screen will appear.
4. When you have finished entering the name, press [8 (Write)].
A screen will appear, allowing you to select the write
destination.
5. Use the keyboard to input the chord that you want to play.
fig.Chord04_50
When you press a key, the note will be added in the screen.
If you input a note by mistake, press [5 (Del Note)].
You can also erase a note you input by pressing the same key.
You can press [6 (Preview)] to hear the chord that you are
inputting.
6. If you want to save the chord form you created, proceed to
step 3 of “Saving the Chord Forms You Have Created.” If
you don't want to save it, press [7 (Exit)].
5. Use
or
to select the write destination.
6. Press [8 (Write)].
A message will ask you confirm.
7. To save the chord form, press [8 (Exec)].
Never switch off the Fantom-S while data is being saved.
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
111
Using the Chord Memory Function (CHORD MEMORY)
Using the Chord Memory Function (CHORD MEMORY)
Reference_e.book 112 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing Rhythms
About Rhythm Patterns
The Fantom-S contains 256 preset rhythm patterns. You can play a
variety of rhythm patterns simply by pressing the pads. In addition
to using these built-in rhythm patterns, you can also create your
own.
The 256 rhythm patterns are maintained as independent data; they
are not part of a performance’s data. This means that any one
rhythm pattern can be shared by various rhythm sets or
performances. In Performance mode, a number by which a rhythm
pattern is recalled can be stored as one of the performance
parameters. This number cannot be stored in Patch mode.
Playing Rhythm
Turning Rhythm On and Off
1. Press ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM [ON/OFF], causing the indicator
to light.
fig.Arp button
The button will light.
2. Play a pad (9-16).
According to the pad you pressed, the assigned rhythm pattern
will begin playing.
Rhythm Patterns and Rhythm Groups
fig.rhythm group.e
On the Fantom-S, a set of rhythm pattern numbers, percussion
instrument sounds and a rhythm set assigned to the sixteen
pads is stored as a Rhythm Group (p. 112).
Rhythm pattern number
Rhythm Tone
Using Rhythm Groups
A rhythm group is a set of rhythm pattern numbers, percussion
instrument sounds and a rhythm set assigned to the sixteen pads.
One rhythm group contains assignments for the sixteen pads.
A pattern will begin playing when you press any pad from 9–16
that isn’t illuminated. A rhythm tone will sound when you press
a pad that is blink. The pattern or rhythm tone that is sounded
by each pad can be specified in Rhythm Group Edit (p. 116).
3. To finish playing rhythm pattern, press [ON/OFF] again so
the indicator turns off.
fig.rhythm group.e
You can also stop playback by pressing the blinking pad.
Rhythm pattern number
Rhythm Tone
* You are free to change how rhythm pattern numbers and rhythm
sounds are assigned.
Rhythm group data is not part of a rhythm set or performance; the
32 rhythm groups are stored as independent data. This means that
any one rhythm group can be shared by various patches or
performances. In addition to using the built-in rhythm groups, you
can also create your own.
A rhythm group stores numbers by which rhythm patterns are
recalled. A performance can contain a number to recall one of these
rhythm groups. In Performance mode, a number by which a rhythm
group is recalled can be stored as one of the performance
parameters. This number cannot be stored in Patch mode.
Determining the Tempo for Rhythm
Pattern Performances
This sets the Rhythm Pattern tempo.
Specify the tempo of the rhythm pattern.
1. Press [TEMPO].
The current tempo value appears in the display.
fig.tempo
2. Press VALUE dial or [INC], [DEC] to set the tempo value (5–
300), or set the value by tapping [6 (Tap)] a number of times
with the same rhythm (Tap Tempo).
* When you press [7 (Click)] to assign a check mark (✔), the click will
sound.
3. When you have made the setting, press [8 (Close)].
112
Reference_e.book 113 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing Rhythms
Rhythm Pattern Settings
Using a controller to adjust the playback tempo
Since tempo control is assigned to one of the Fantom-S’s
realtime control knobs, it’s easy to adjust the tempo at which the
rhythm pattern will play back.
1. Press ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM [SELECT/EDIT].
2. Press [2 (Rhythm)].
A screen like the one below appears.
If Performance mode is selected, (PERFORMANCE) will appear
at the right of “Rhythm.”
fig.09-04ab
fig.RPTN01_50
Tempo
1. Press the REALTIME CONTROL button so the ARP/RHY
indicator lights.
2. Play an Rhythm Pattern, and turn the realtime control
knob.
1. Press ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM [SELECT/EDIT].
2. Press [1 (Rhythm Group)].
3. Press
or
to move the cursor to each parameter, and
either turn the VALUE dial or press [INC] or [DEC] to make
the setting.
A screen like the one below appears.
4. Press [6 (Start/Stop)].
If Performance mode is selected, (Performance) will appear at
the right of “Rhythm Group.”
5. When you have made the setting, press [EXIT].
Playing Rhythms
Select the Rhythm Group
The rhythm pattern will be sounded.
fig.RPTN05
Selecting Rhythm Patterns
Select the basic playing style of the rhythm.
This selects the rhythm’s basic performance Style.
Value: P001–256 (Preset), U001–256 (User)
For details on the settings, refer to “Rhythm Pattern Settings”
(p. 113)
For more on the prepared Rhythm Patterns already
programmed in the Fantom-S, refer to Sound List.
* When you select the Rhythm group, the most suitable rhythm set is
assigned to the Pad part. (In the screen, this is indicated by
“Recommended Rhy (Recommended Rhythm set).”)
3. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC] or [DEC] to make the
setting.
This selects the Rhythm group’s basic performance Style.
Value: P01–32 (Preset), U01–32 (User)
4. When you have made the setting, press [EXIT].
Changing the Beat and Shuffle (Grid)
This sets the particular note division and resolution in a “single
grid” used in creating the pattern in an Rhythm Pattern, and how
much of a “shuffle” syncopation is to be to applied (none/weak/
strong) to it (grid type).
* Grid settings are shared with the arpeggio.
For more on the prepared Rhythm Patterns already
programmed in the Fantom-S, refer to Sound List.
For details on the settings, refer to “Arpeggio Settings” (p. 105)
Value:
1/4:
Quarter note (one grid section = one beat)
1/8:
Eighth note (two grid sections = one beat)
1/8L:
Eighth note shuffle Light
(two grid sections = one beat, with a light shuffle)
1/8H:
Eighth note shuffle Heavy
(two grid sections = one beat, with a heavy shuffle)
1/12:
Eighth note triplet (three grid sections = one beat)
113
Reference_e.book 114 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing Rhythms
1/16:
Sixteenth note (four grid sections = one beat)
1/16L: Sixteenth note shuffle Light
(four grid sections = one beat, with a light shuffle)
1/16H: Sixteenth note shuffle Heavy
(four grid sections = one beat, with a heavy shuffle)
1/24:
Sixteenth note triplet (six grid sections = one beat)
Applying Staccato and Tenuity
(Duration)
This setting (duration) determines whether the sounds are played
staccato (short and clipped), or tenuity (fully drawn out).
* Grid settings are shared with the arpeggio.
You can also use a REALTIME CONTROL knob to control this.
Using the Realtime Control Knobs to
Control the Rhythm
Here’s how you can use the realtime control knobs to control the
rhythm in real time by adjusting the rhythm parameters.
1. Play rhythm.
2. Press the REALTIME CONTROL button to select “ARP/RHY.”
The “ARP/RHY” indicator will light.
fig.Rhy knob
For details on the settings, refer to “Rhythm Pattern Settings”
(p. 113)
Value: 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120, Full
30–120:
For example, when set to “30,” the length of the note in a
grid (or when a series of grids is connected with ties, the
final grid) is 30% of the full length of the note set in the
grid type.
FUL (Full): Even if the linked grid is not connected with a tie, the
same note continues to sound until the point at which
the next new sound is specified.
Tempo
Rhythm Accent
3. Turn the REALTIME CONTROL knobs.
While Rhythm Pattern are playing, you can use the knobs to
control the following parameters.
• Rhythm Accent Rate → p. 114
• TEMPO → p. 112
Turning Rhythm Switch On and Off
This has no effect if the Tone Env Mode parameter (p. 68) is set
to “No Sus.”
Changing the velocity of Rhythm
Pattern (Rhythm Pattern Velocity)
This specifies the strength with which the keys you press will be
sounded. If you want the velocity to change according to the force
with which you press the keys, set this to “REAL.” If you want the
velocity to be a fixed value regardless of the force with which you
press the keys, specify the desired value (1–127).
For details on the settings, refer to “Rhythm Pattern Settings”
(p. 113)
Value: REAL, 1–127
Changing the Accent Strength
(Accent Rate)
When you play rhythm patterns, the velocity of each note is
determined by the velocity of the notes programmed within the
arpeggio style. You can adjust the amount (“spread”) of this
dynamic variation. With a setting of 100%, the notes will have the
velocities that are programmed by the rhythm pattern. With a setting
of 0%, all notes will be sounded at a fixed velocity.
For details on the settings, refer to “Rhythm Pattern Settings”
(p. 113)
Value: 0–100%
114
If you do not want to perform rhythms, turn off the rhythm switch.
If the rhythm switch is turned off, it will not be possible to play
rhythms even if [ON/OFF] is on (lit).
1. Press [PATCH/RHYTHM] to access the Patch Play screen.
2. Press [SELECT/EDIT].
3. Press [7 (Rhythm Sw)] to add a check mark (✔).
The setting is toggled on/off each time you press [7 (Rhythm Sw)].
4. When you have made the setting, press [EXIT].
Reference_e.book 115 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing Rhythms
Creating Your Own Styles
(Rhythm Pattern Edit)
Not only can you use the prepared internal Rhythm Pattern that
determine how rhythm patterns are played, but you can also create
them as well. This way, you can enjoy performing your own original
rhythm pattern.
A rhythm pattern you create can be stored in internal user memory.
• Preview: [7 (Preview)]
By pressing [7 (Preview)] to add a check mark (✔), you can
audition the rhythm pattern that you are inputting. When you
press it once again to clear the check mark, the playback will
stop.
• Clear Step: [8 (Clear Step)]
Clear all data at the step where the cursor is located.
9. When you have finished editing, press [EXIT].
1. Press ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM [SELECT/EDIT].
2. Press [2 (Rhythm)].
A maximum of sixteen notes (specified pitches) can be used in
one style
3. Press [EDIT].
The Rhythm Pattern Edit screen will appear.
fig.RPTN02_50
If you want to erase all data that was input for the same note
number, hold down [SHIFT] and press [2 (Clear Note)]. A
message will ask you for confirmation. When you press [8
(Exec)] the data will be erased. If you decide to cancel the
operation, press [7 (Cancel)].
1. From the Arpeggio Edit screen, press [6 (Step Rec)] to add a
check mark (✔).
2. Press
4. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor.
Use
to select the pitch (note number: 0 (C-1)–127 (G9)
that you want to input.
Use
to move to the step that you want to input.
If you hold down [SHIFT] and press
or
move to grid locations that contain data.
, the cursor will
5. Turn the VALUE dial or use [INC] [DEC] to change the data at
the cursor location (velocity: OFF, 1–127, Tie).
6. When ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM [ON/OFF] is unlit, you can hold
down [SHIFT] and hit a pad to check the pitch of the note to
input.
7. By pressing a pad you can enter the note number at the
cursor location, within a range of sixteen different velocities.
When you input the note, the cursor will move to the next step.
8. By pressing a function button you can perform the following
operations.
• Tie: [2 (Tie)]
Input a tie at the cursor location and proceed to the next step.
• Rest (Clear): [3 (Rest (Clear))]
Input a rest at the cursor location and proceed to the next step.
• Zoom In: [4 (Zoom In)]
Show the Rhythm pattern input screen at a higher magnification.
• Zoom Out: [5 (Zoom Out)]
Show the Rhythm pattern input screen at a lower magnification.
• Step Rec (Step Recording): [6 (Step Rec)]
or
to move the step.
3. Press the key or pad.
When all the keys or pads are released, the song advances by the
selected step time interval.
4. When you have finished making settings, press [6 (Step
Rec)] once again to clear the check mark.
Changing the Length of a Rhythm
Pattern or the Velocity of the Notes
You Input
1. From the Rhythm Pattern Edit screen, press [1 (Rhythm
Setup)].
The Rhythm Setup window appears.
2. Press
or
to select the parameter, and then turn the
VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to set the value.
• End Step
Specifies the style length
Range:1–32
• Input Velocity
Specify the velocity (volume) of the note messages you will
input.
If this is set to REAL, your playing strength on the pads or
keyboards will vary the dynamics.
Range: REAL, 1-127
3. When you have finished making settings, press [8 (Close)].
By pressing [6 (Step Rec)] to add a check mark (✔), you can
input data from the keyboard or pads.
115
Playing Rhythms
Inputting the Data from the Keyboards
or Pads
Reference_e.book 116 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing Rhythms
Initializing the Rhythm Pattern that
You are Editing (Init)
Creating Your Own Styles
(Rhythm Group Edit)
1. Access the Rhythm Pattern Edit screen.
2. While holding down [SHIFT], press [1 (Init)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
3. Press [8 (Exec)] to execute the Initialize operation.
The initialization will be carried out. To cancel, press [7
(Cancel)].
Saving the Patterns You Have
Created (WRITE)
Not only can you use the prepared internal Rhythm Groups that
determine how rhythm are played, but you can also create them as
well. This way, you can enjoy performing your own original rhythm
group.
1. Press ARPEGGIO/RHYTHM [SELECT/EDIT].
2. Press [1 (Rhythm Group)].
3. Press [EDIT].
The Rhythm Group edit screen will appear.
fig.RPTN06
The rhythm patterns you create are temporary; they are deleted as
soon as you turn off the power or select some other rhythm patterns.
You can store 256 rhythm patterns in the User memory.
1. Confirm that the current Pattern is the one you want to save.
2. Press [2 (Rhythm)].
3. Press [WRITE].
The name entry screen will appear (p. 42).
4. When you have finished entering the name, press [8 (Write)].
A screen in which you can select the destination for the write
will appear.
fig.RPTN04_50
4. Use [CURSOR] to select a parameter, and turn the VALUE
dial or use [INC][DEC] to set the value.
You can also choose the pad that you want to set by pressing
that pad.
• Recommended Rhy (Recommended Rhythm Set)
Specifies which rhythm set will be used.
• Pad Mode
Specifies whether a rhythm tone or a rhythm pattern number
will be assigned to the pad.
Range: Pattern, Note, Off
• Rhy Ptn Number (Rhythm Pattern Number)
If Pad Mode is set to Pattern, specifies the pattern number that
will sound when you press the pad.
5. Turn the VALUE dial or use
destination.
,
to select the write
6. Press [8 (Write)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
7. To write the data, press [8 (Exec)].
Never switch off the Fantom-S while data is being saved.
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
Range: U001–256, P001–256
• Rhy Ptn Velocity (Rhythm Pattern Velocity)
Specifies the velocity of the rhythm pattern when the pad mode
is set to “Pattern.”
Range: REAL, 1–127
• Pad Note
If Pad Mode is set to Note, specifies the note number that will
sound when you press the pad.
Range: C-1 –G9
• Pad Velocity
Rhythm pattern settings are saved as independent data,
not as part of the data for each patch. The settings in Patch
mode, it is not possible to save rhythm pattern parameters (e.g.,
pattern, grid type).
It can be saved to individual in Performance mode. If you
want to save your settings, press [WRITE] and save the
performance.
116
Specifies the strength of the sound heard when you strike the
pad. If this is set to REAL, you can add dynamics by varying the
strength of your strike.
Range: REAL, 1–127
5. When you have made the setting, press [8 (Exit)].
Reference_e.book 117 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing Rhythms
Saving the Rhythm Group You
Have Created (WRITE)
The Rhythm Group you create are temporary; they are deleted as
soon as you turn off the power or select some other Style. You can
store 32 Rhythm Groups in the User memory.
1. Confirm that the current Style is the one you want to save.
2. Press [1 (Rhythm Group)].
3. Press [WRITE].
The name entry screen will appear (p. 42).
4. When you have finished entering the name, press [WRITE].
A screen in which you can select the destination for the write
will appear.
Playing Rhythms
fig.RPTN07_50
5. Turn the VALUE dial or use [INC] [DEC] to select the write
destination.
6. Press [8 (Write)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
7. To write the data, press [8 (Exec)].
Never switch off the Fantom-S while data is being saved.
* To cancel, press [CANCEL].
Rhythm group settings are saved as independent data, not
as part of the data for each patch. The settings in Patch mode,
it is not possible to save rhythm group settings.
It can be saved to individual in Performance mode. If you
want to save your settings, press [WRITE] and save the
performance.
117
Reference_e.book 118 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Sampling
The Fantom-S lets you sample audio sources, such as an audio
device, mic, or CD.
This section explains the sampling procedure and what the
parameters do.
Making Input Source Settings
(INPUT SETTING)
1. Connect the input device whose sound you will sample (e.g.,
CD player or mic) to the AUDIO INPUT jacks located on the
rear panel of the Fantom-S.
Cautions when using a microphone
Howling could be produced depending on the location of
microphones relative to speakers. This can be remedied by:
1. Changing the orientation of the microphone(s).
2. Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance from
speakers.
3. Lowering volume levels.
2. Press [INPUT SETTING].
• External Output Level
Volume level of the external input sound.
Value: 0–127
• External Chorus Send Level
Adjusts the depth of chorus that will be applied to the external
input source. Set this to “0” if you do not want to apply chorus.
Value: 0–127
• External Reverb Send Level
Depth of reverb applied to the external input sound. Set this to 0
if you don’t want to apply reverb.
Value: 0–127
• Input Effect SW
Specifies whether the external input sound will be sent through
the effects processor (Input Effect). You can also switch this on/
off by pressing [6 (In FX Sw)].
Value: ON–OFF
• Input Effect Type
Selects the type of effect that will be applied to the external input
source.
When you press [7 (In FX Setup)], the parameter setting screen
for the currently selected input effect will be displayed.
Value: EQ, ENHANCER, COMPRESSOR, LIMITER, NOISE
SUP, C CANCELLER
fig.SMPL02_50
5. Play back the external input source.
6. Turn the EXT SOURCE LEVEL knob to adjust the volume.
fig.LEVEL knob
3. Press
or
to select the parameter that you want to set.
4. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to set the value.
• Input Select
Specifies the input source of the sound to be sampled.
Value
LINE IN L/R:
INPUT jacks L/R (stereo)
LINE IN L:
jack L (mono)
MICROPHONE: INPUT jack L (mono, mic level)
• Mix-In
Specifies whether the external source will be input.
You can also switch this on/off by pressing [5 (Mix In)].
Value: ON–OFF
• External Output Assign
Output destination of the external input sound that is mixed in
Value
DRY: Output to OUTPUT (A) jacks without passing through effects
MFX: Output through multi-effects
When you select “MFX”, selects which of the three multi-effects
(1–3) will be used.
118
* If the volume of the external source is too high, the PEAK indicator will
light. If this occurs, turn down the LEVEL knob until the PEAK
indicator no longer lights.
7. Press [8 (Exit)].
Reference_e.book 119 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Sampling
Input Effect Setup Settings
Sampling Procedure
1. Press [INPUT SETTING], and then press [7 (In FX Setup)].
1. Press [SAMPLING/RESAMPLING] to access the Sampling
Menu screen.
The Input Effect Setup screen appears.
fig.SMPL03
2. Press
or
to move the cursor.
3. Turn the VALUE dial, or press [INC] /[DEC] to set the value.
• Type (Input Effect Type)
Selects the input effect type.
02: Enhancer
03: Compressor
04: Limiter
05: Noise Suppressor
06: Center Canceler
Explanation
Adjusts the tone of the low-frequency and high-frequency
ranges.
Modifies the harmonic content
of the high-frequency range to
add sparkle to the sound.
Restrains high levels and boosts
low levels to make the overall
volume more consistent.
Compresses the sound when it
exceeds a specified volume, to
keep distortion from occurring.
Suppresses noise during periods of silence.
Removes the sounds that are localized at the center of the stereo
input. This is a convenient way
to eliminate a vocal.
4. Press [EXIT] to return to the previous screen.
In this settings screen, you can edit parameters for the type of
input effect you selected. For details on the parameters that can
be edited, refer to the section “Input effect parameters” within
“Parameter List.”
fig.SMPL04
The upper part of the screen will show the amount of free
memory. If the free memory reaches 0%, no further sampling is
possible.
2. Press [1 (Sampling)]–[F5 (SOLO)] to select the sampling
mode. The sampling-standby screen will appear.
To cancel, press [8 (Exit)].
* You cannot sample the sound that is output from the OUTPUT B
jacks. You’ll need to set things up so that the sound you want to sample
is output from the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks.
Sampling mode
When you enter the Input Effect Setup screen, the indicator at
the right of the Realtime Control knobs will go out, and the
Realtime Control knobs can be used to edit the MFX parameters.
If you once again press the button located at the right of the
Realtime Control knobs so the indicator is lit, the knobs will
control their original functions. When you exit the Input Effect
Setup screen, the indicator will automatically return to its
previous lit state.
• Sampling:[1 (Sampling)]
Sample a sound from an external input source.
* Operating the keyboards, pads, sequencer will not play the internal
sound generator.
• Re-Sampling:[2 (Re-Sampl)]
Resample the sound of the internal sound generator. The sound
of the external input will not be heard.
* The volume of a phrase that you resample may be less than the volume
of the original phrase. If necessary, execute the Normalize command (p.
130) to raise the volume.
• Mix Sampling:[3 (Mix)]
Sample the combined sounds of the internal sound generator
and an external input source.
• Auto divide sampling:[4 (Auto Devide)]
Sample an extended source, and automatically divide it into
several samples at silent regions. If the sample contains silence, it
will be divided at that point, and the subsequent portion will be
assigned to the next sample number.
* Operating the keyboards, pads or D Beam controllers will not play the
internal sound generator.
119
Sampling
Parameter
01: Equalizer
Reference_e.book 120 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Sampling
• Solo sampling:[5 (Solo)]
While playing the internal sound generator as usual, sample
only the sound from the external input.
* Effects cannot be applied to the external input sound.
• Auto Trigger Level
Specifies the volume at which sampling will begin if you have
pressed [2 (Auto Trig)] to turn Auto Trig ON.
Value: 0–7 (A setting of 0 is the minimum.)
• Gap Time
fig.SMPL05_50
Specifies the length of the silences at which the sample will be
divided if the Sampling Mode is set to Auto Divide. Whenever
there is a silent region longer than the specified time, the sample
will be divided at that point, and the next sample number will be
assigned to the sound that follows.
Value: 500, 1000, 1500, 2000 ms
* This parameter is valid only when you are using Auto Divide
Sampling.
• Input Setting:[1(INPUT SETTING)]
Makes settings for the external input (p. 118).
3. Make the settings for things such as the input source of the
sound to be sampled, and triggering.
• Input Select
Specifies the input source of the sound that is to be sampled.
Value
LINE IN L/R: INPUT jacks L/R (stereo)
LINE IN L: INPUT jack L (mono)
MICROPHONE: INPUT jack L (mic level)
* This cannot be set when resampling.
• Stereo Switch
Specifies whether the sound will be sampled in stereo or in
monaural. Mono sampling uses half as much memory space.
• Auto Trigger:[2(AUTO TRIG)]
If this is on, sampling will begin automatically when the input
sound is detected.
• Trim Sw:[3(TRIM SW)]
If this is turned on, the Start point and End point settings (p. 125)
will be automatically adjusted after sampling is performed, so
any silent portions at the beginning or end of the sampled sound
are excluded.
4. In the EXT SOURCE section of the panel, use LEVEL knob to
adjust the input level of the external source.
fig.LEVEL knob
Value
MONO:
The sound will be sampled as one wave. If the sound
is stereo, the left and right signals will be mixed.
STEREO: The sound will be sampled as two waves, L and R.
• Pre Sample Time
The length of sound preceding the moment at which sampling
was manually or automatically initiated that will be captured in
the sample. This lets you prevent the attack portion of the sound
from being omitted from the sample.
Value: 0–1000 ms
• Stop Trigger
Specifies how sampling will end.
* If the volume of the external source is too high, the PEAK indicator will
light. If this occurs, turn down the LEVEL knob until the PEAK
indicator no longer lights.
* If the level of the sound to be sampled is too high, the word “CLIP” will
appear at the lower right of the level meter in the screen.
* Using a connection cable that contains a resistor can cause the sound
level to be low. Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor.
5. Press [8 (Start)] to begin sampling.
Value
MANUAL: Continue sampling until you press [STOP].
BEAT:
TIME:
Sample the specified number of beats at the current
tempo (BPM).
Sample the specified length of time.
• Sampling Length
You can specify this if Stop Trigger is “BEAT” or “TIME.”
Value
Sampling LengthWhen Stop Trigger is “BEAT”:1–20000:Number
of beats to continue sampling
When Stop Trigger is “TIME”:00’00”010–50’00”000:length of
time to continue sampling. The maximum value will depend on
the amount of memory.
120
6. If Stop Trigger is set to MANUAL, press [7 (Stop)] to stop
sampling.
The Sample Edit (p. 124) screen will appear.
* If you want to edit the sample, refer to p. 124.
fig.SMPL06_50
Reference_e.book 121 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Sampling
When you finish sampling, the sample will automatically be
added to the sample list. Press [SAMPLE LIST] to view the
sample list.
Samples you record will be lost when you turn off the
power. If you want to keep your sample, press [WRITE] to save
it (p. 134). Samples shown as “NEW” in the sample list have not
yet been saved.
fig.SMPL07_50
Sampling Earlier in Time
(Skip Back Sampling)
Sometimes you may want to preserve a nice phrase that you
happened to play a bit earlier. In such cases, you can use the Skip
Back Sampling function to sample sounds that were played earlier in
time.
When you execute skip-back sampling, several beats of your prior
performance are saved as a sample. You can assign this sample to a
pad and play it from the pad.
fig.SMPL08
Dividing a Sample During Sampling
1. During sampling, press [8 (Divide)].
The sample will be divided at the point where you pressed the
button, and the subsequent material will be sampled as a sample
of the next number.
* When sampling in mono, you can divide the material into a maximum
of 256 samples. When sampling in stereo, you can divide the material
into a maximum of 128 samples (L/R total 256 samples).
Button lit:
Skip-back sampling can be performed in this
state.
Button unlit:
Skip-back sampling cannot be performed.
Not operating. You cannot use skip-back
sampling if there is insufficient free memory.
Button blinking: The following screen will appear, and Skip
Back Sampling will be executed.
1. Press [SKIP BACK SAMPLING].
The following screen will appear, and Skip Back Sampling will
be executed.
fig.SMPL09_50
Sampling
7. Press [EXIT] to go back to where you were before you
entered the Sampling screen.
Sampling time
The Fantom-S contains 32 MB of memory, which allows about 6
minutes of mono or about 3 minutes of stereo sampling. If you
want to sample for a longer time than this, you must install
separately sold memory (DIMM) (p. 207).
Sampling will stop automatically, and the Sample Edit screen
will appear.
From the Sample Edit screen you can press [3 (Sample Modify)]
to edit the sample (p. 129 and following). In addition, you can
press [6 (Assign KB/Pad)] and assign the sample to a part as a
patch (p. 127), or assign it to a pad (p. 126).
You can specify how far back sampling will occur when you
perform skip-back sampling (5–40 seconds). With the factory
settings this is set to 10 seconds.
If you want to keep the sample, perform the Save procedure (p.
134).
121
Reference_e.book 122 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing a Sample
This section explains how you can edit a sample that you sampled/
imported
Editing is performed in sample memory—a memory area dedicated
to samples (p. 23).
The sample list shows the current state of
the samples.
fig.SMPL13
Selecting a Sample (Sample List)
Select a sample from the list.
Selecting a Sample
1. Press [SAMPLE LIST].
The Sample List display appears.
fig.SMPL07_50
NEW:
This is a sample that you sampled. It has not been
saved, and will be lost when you turn off the power.
The same is true for samples imported as WAV/AIFF.
UNLOAD: The sample has been saved, but not loaded into
sample memory.
EDIT:
2. Specify the group from which you want to select a sample.
• [1 (Preset)]: Select from preset samples.
• [2 (User)]: Select from user samples.
• [3 (Card)]: Select from samples stored on a memory card.
* You cannot edit preset (Preset) samples.
3. Use VALUE dial, [INC][DEC], or
to select a sample.
If you hold down [SHIFT] while you operate the above buttons,
the sample number will change in steps of ten.
You can press [8 (Preview)] to audition the selected sample.
4. Press [ENTER].
The Sample Edit Screen appears.
122
This is a sample that you loaded or sampled and are
editing. Your edits will be lost when you turn off the
power. If you want to keep them, you must Write the
sample.
The Fantom-S has a parameter (Sample Default Load, (p. 195))
that specifies whether the samples in user memory, the samples
in a memory card, or the preset samples will be automatically
loaded into sample memory when you turn on the power. If
Sample Default Load is turned off, samples will not be loaded
into memory when you turn on the power. In this case, you will
need to load samples into memory yourself. If you have unload
a sample from sample memory, you will also need to load it
Reference_e.book 123 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing a Sample
Loading a Sample
Unloading a Sample
Here’s how you can load a sample from the user area, a memory
card, or a preset into sample memory.
Here’s how you can unload a sample from sample memory. The
saved sample file itself will not be deleted.
1. Press [SAMPLE LIST].
1. With the Sample List screen shown, choose [1 (Preset)]–[3
(Card)] to select the group that contains the sample you
want to erase.
The Sample List display appears.
2. From [1 (Preset)]–[3 (Card)], select the bank that contains
the desired sample.
3. Use VALUE dial, [INC][DEC], or
to select a sample.
If you want to load two or more samples, press [5 (Mark Set)] to
add a check mark (✔) to the samples that you want to select.
To remove the check mark, press [4 (Mark Clear)].
If you hold down [SHIFT] and press [5 (Mark Set All)], a check
mark will be added to all samples of the selected bank. If you
hold down [SHIFT] and press [4 (Mark Clr All)], check marks
will be removed from all selected samples.
The edit screen for the selected sample will appear.
4. Press [7 (Load Utility)], and then press [7 (Load)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
5. Press [8 (Exec)] to load the sample.
To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
The Sample Edit screen appears.
* You can also perform this operation from the Sample Edit or Sample
List screen by pressing [MENU] and selecting Load Sample.
2. Use VALUE dial, [INC][DEC], or
to select a sample.
If you want to erase two or more samples, press [5 (Mark Set)] to
add a check mark (✔) to the samples that you want to select.
To remove the check mark, press [4 (Mark Clear)].
If you hold down [SHIFT] and press [5 (Mark Set All)], a check
mark will be added to all samples of the selected bank. If you
hold down [SHIFT] and press [4 (Mark Clr All)], check marks
will be removed from all selected samples.
The edit screen for the selected sample will appear.
You can press [8 (Preview)] to audition the selected sample.
3. Press [7 (Load Utility)], and the press [6 (Unload)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
4. Press [8 (Exec)] to unload the sample.
To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
* You can also perform this operation from the Sample Edit screen by
pressing [MENU] and selecting Unload Sample.
Loading all Samples
Here’s all samples in the user memory and memory card can be
loaded.
When you execute Load All Samples, all unsaved samples will
be erased.
If the total size of the data in the user bank and card bank
exceeds the size of memory, the samples of the user bank will be
loaded first. At this time, as many card bank samples as possible
will be loaded, starting from the lowest-numbered sample.
1. From the Sample List screen or Sample Edit Screen (p. 124),
Press [MENU].
2.
or
[ENTER].
to select “Load All Sample”, and then press
A message will ask you for confirmation.
3. Press [8 (Exec)] to execute.
To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
* You can also perform this operation from the Sample Edit or Sample
List screen by pressing [MENU] and selecting Load All Sample.
Here’s how to completely delete a sample file.
* You cannot delete the preset samples.
1. With the Sample List screen shown, choose [2 (User)]–[3
(Card)] to select the group that contains the sample you
want to delete.
2. Turn the VALUE dial, or press
sample.
or
to select the
If you want to delete two or more samples, press [5 (Mark Set)]
to add a check mark (✔) to the samples that you want to select.
To remove the check mark, press [4 (Mark Clear)].
If you hold down [SHIFT] and press [5 (Mark Set All)], a check
mark will be added to all samples of the selected bank. If you
hold down [SHIFT] and press [4 (Mark Clr All)], check marks
will be removed from all selected samples.
The edit screen for the selected sample will appear.
You can press [8 (Preview)] to audition the selected sample.
3. Press [7 (Load Utility)], and the press [5 (Delete Sample)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
4. Press [8 (Exec)] to delete the sample.
To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
* You can also perform this operation from the Sample Edit or Sample
List screen by pressing [MENU] and selecting Delete Sample File.
123
Editing a Sample
Deleting a Sample
Reference_e.book 124 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing a Sample
Importing a Audio File
fig.SMPL06_50
Here’s how an audio file (WAV/AIFF) can be loaded into memory
as a sample.
Place the audio files in the “TMP/AUDIO_IMPORT” folder on
the user memory or memory card. For details on how you can
use your computer to copy a file into the user area or memory
card, refer to p. 184.
1. From the Sample List screen or Sample Edit screen (p. 124),
press [MENU] to select “Import Audio”, and then press
[ENTER].
2. Press [1 (User)] or [2 (Card)] to select the import-source
area.
User: Select a file from the user area.
Card: Select a file from the memory card.
Samples that you edit will be lost when you turn off the power.
If you want to keep them, you must Save them (p. 134).
Magnifying/Shrinking the
Waveform Display (Zoom In/Out)
3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the “TMP/
AUDIO_IMPORT.”
Here’s how to change the magnification of the sample display.
4. Press
1. In the Sample Edit screen, press [7 (Zoom In/Out)].
or
, then select the file that you want to import.
If you want to select two or more samples, press [5 (Mark Set)] to
add a check mark (✔) to the files that you want to select. To
remove the check mark, press [4 (Mark Clear)].
The Zoom In/Out sub-window will appear.
fig.SMPL11_50
If you hold down [SHIFT] and press [5 (Mark Set All)], a check
mark will be added to all files of the selected bank. If you hold
down [SHIFT] and press [4 (Mark Clr All)], check marks will be
removed from all selected files.
5. Press [8 (Import)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
6. Press [8 (Exec)].
The file will be imported, and the Sample List screen will appear.
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
The imported file will be added to the sample list as a sample.
This sample is temporary, and will be lost when you turn off the
power. If you want to keep it, press [WRITE] to save the data.
2. Use [CURSOR] to change the magnification of the display.
• Horizontal axis (time axis): 1/1–1/65536
Press
to increase the display magnification.
Press
to decrease the display magnification.
* Either turn the VALUE dial or use [INC], [DEC] to adjust this
setting.
• Vertical axis (waveform amplitude axis): x1–x128
Displaying Sample Edit Screen
Press
to increase the display magnification.
Press
to decrease the display magnification.
3. Press [8 (Close)] to close the sub-window.
1. When you press [SAMPLE EDIT] in the sampling section.
The Sample Edit screen will appear.
Even without displaying the Zoom In/Out sub-window, you
can press CURSOR
to expand/shrink the horizontal
axis, or hold down [SHIFT] and press CURSOR
to
expand/shrink the vertical axis.
124
Reference_e.book 125 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing a Sample
Setting the Start/End Points of
the Sample
When you want to reset the beat
indication. (Reset Grid function)
You can specify the portion of the sample that will actually sound.
You can also specify the region that is to be looped.
You can have the sample grid (beat indication) be recalculated
based on a specified start point and BPM. To do this, go to the
Sample Edit screen, set the Sample Start Point, set the BPM in
the Sample Prm screen, press [5 (Reset Grid)], then press [8
(Exec)].
1. Press [SAMPLE LIST] and select the sample that you want to
edit (p. 122).
2. Press [SAMPLE EDIT].
fig.SMPL12_50
Sample modify operations (Chop, Normalize, etc.) apply to the
entire sample. Even if you specify a start point or end point, they
will be ignored. If you want to apply the operation only to the
region between the start point and end point, use Truncate to
delete unwanted portions of the sample, and then perform the
sample modifying operation.
3. Use
or
to select the point that you want to set.
• Start Point:
This is the point at which playback will start. Set this so that any
unwanted portion at the beginning of the sample will be
skipped, and the sound will begin at the desired moment.
• Loop Start:
This is the point at which loop playback (second and subsequent
times) will start. Set this if you want to loop the sound from a
point other than the start point.
Here you can make various settings for the sample.
1. Press [SAMPLE LIST] and select the sample that you want to
edit (p. 122).
2. Press [SAMPLE EDIT] to access the Sample Edit screen, and
press [2 (Sample Param)].
fig.SMPL14_50
Editing a Sample
* For details on how to select a sample, refer to Sample List (p. 122).
Making Settings for Sample
(Sample Parameters)
• End Point:
This is the point at which playback will end. Set this so that any
unwanted portion at the end of the sample will not be heard.
4. Either turn the VALUE dial or use [INC], [DEC] to move the
point so it’s where you want it to be.
You’ll probably find it convenient to zoom-in when making fine
adjustments, and zoom-out when making major adjustments (p.
124).
You can move the point in units of one beat by pressing [4 (⇒)]
or [5 (⇐)]. You can press [8 (Preview)] to audition the selected
sample.
The preset samples cannot be moved by beat.
3. Press
or
to select a parameter.
4. Use VALUE dial or [INC], [DEC] to edit the value.
• Loop Mode
Specifies how the sample will be played.
Value
FWD (Forward)
After specifying the start point and end point, you can execute
Truncate (p. 129) to delete unwanted portions at the beginning
and end of the sample.
After the Sample played back from the Start point to the End
point, it will then be repeatedly played back in the forward
direction, from the Loop Start point to the End point.
fig.loop1
About the beat
Start P.
Loop
Start P.
End P.
Samples contain beat data. Up to 100 beat locations are specified
for one sample. If the sample contains more than 100 beats, fifty
beat locations will be specified from the beginning and end of
the sample, respectively.
* The preset samples do not contain beat data.
125
Reference_e.book 126 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing a Sample
ONE-SHOT
The sample will be played back only once, from the Start point to
the End point.
Assigning Samples to a Pad
(Assign To Pad)
fig.loop2
Start P.
Loop
Start P.
End P.
* From the Sample List screen you can also press [7 (Load Utility)]→ [2
(Assign to Pad)] to execute Assign To Pad.
REV (Reverse)
When the sample has been played back from the End point to
the Start point, it will be repeatedly played back in the reverse
direction, from the Loop Start point to the Start point.
fig.loop3
Start P.
Here’s how to assign samples as the rhythm tones of a rhythm set.
For example, you can create an original rhythm set by replacing
certain tones of a preset rhythm set with different samples.
Loop
Start P.
End P.
* You cannot execute this with more than one sample selected.
From Patch Mode
1. Press [SAMPLE LIST] to select a sample, and then press
[SAMPLE EDIT] to access the Sample Edit screen.
2. Press [6 (Assign KB/Pad)].
The Assign to Kbd/Pad screen will appear.
fig.SMPL17_50
REV-ONE (Reverse One-shot)
The sample will be played back only once from the End point to
the Start point in the reverse direction.
fig.loop4
Start P.
Loop
Start P.
End P.
3. Press [7 (Assign to Pad)].
The Assign to Pad screen will appear.
• Loop Tune
fig.SMPL20_50
Specifies the pitch of the loop region.
Value:-50– +50
* Make fine adjustments in one-cent (1/100 semitone) increments.
• Original Key
Note number that will play the sample at the pitch at which it
was sampled.
Value:0 (C-1)–127 (G9)
• BPM (TEMPO)
Specifies the original tempo of the sample.
Value:5.00–300.00
* In order to synchronize the tempo, Wave Temp Sync (p. 45, p. 69)
must be turned on.
* When setting the BPM (tempo) value, you can hold down [SHIFT] and
turn the VALUE dial, or use [INC] [DEC] to adjust the value to the
right of the decimal point.
• Time Stretch Type
Specifies how the tempo will be synchronized. Decreasing this
value will optimize the sound for more rapid phrases, and
increasing this value will optimize the sound for slower phrases.
Value:TYPE01–TYPE10
• Start Fine
4. Select the desired pad by pressing it directly.
5. Press [8 (Exec)].
If you add a check mark to [1 (Tempo Sync)], the Wave Tempo
Sync parameter (p. 69) will be turned ON for the rhythm tone
that is assigned.
A message will ask your confirmation.
6. Press [8 (Exec)] to execute Assign to Pad.
The sample will be assigned (as a rhythm tone) to the specified pad.
To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
7. Press [EXIT] to return to the previous screen.
Fine adjustment of the Start point.
Value:0–255
• Loop Start Fine
Fine adjustment of the Loop Start point.
Value:0–255
• Loop End Fine
Fine adjustment of the End point.
Value:0–255
5. Press [EXIT] when you are finished.
126
From Performance Mode
1. Press [SAMPLE LIST] to select a sample, and then press
[SAMPLE EDIT] to access the Sample Edit screen.
2. Press [6 (Assign KB/Pad)].
The Assign to Kbd/Pad screen will appear.
3. Press [7 (Assign to Pad)].
The Assign to Pad screen will appear.
Reference_e.book 127 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing a Sample
From Patch Mode
fig.SMPL18_50
1. Press [SAMPLE LIST] to select a sample, and then press
[SAMPLE EDIT] to access the Sample Edit screen.
2. Press [6 (Assign KB/Pad)].
Assign to Kbd/Pad window appears.
fig.SMPL17_50
4. Press
(Select)].
or
to select the part, and then press [8
If a rhythm set is not assigned to the selected part, a message will
ask "Change into Rhythm and Initialize?", asking if you want to
assign an initialized rhythm set to the selected part.
The Assign to Pad screen will appear.
fig.SMPL20_50
3. Press [6 (Assign to Kbd)].
The Assign to Keyboard window will appear, and you can verify
the assignment for the keyboard part.
4. Press [8 (Exec)]
If you add a check mark to [2 (Tempo Sync)], the Wave Tempo
Sync parameter (p. 45) will be turned ON for the patch that is
assigned.
A message will ask you for confirmation.
5. Press [8 (Exec)].
The sample will be assigned (as a patch) to the specified
keyboard part.
To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
5. Select the desired pad by pressing it directly.
If you add a check mark to [1 (Tempo Sync)], the Wave Tempo
Sync parameter (p. 69) will be turned ON for the rhythm tone
that is assigned.
A message will ask your confirmation.
7. Press [8 (Exec)] to execute Assign to Pad.
From Performance Mode
1. Press [SAMPLE LIST] to select a sample, and then press
[SAMPLE EDIT] to access the Sample Edit screen.
2. Press [6 (Assign KB/Pad)].
Assign to Kbd/Pad window appears.
fig.SMPL17_50
The sample will be assigned (as a rhythm tone) to the specified pad.
To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
8. Press [EXIT] to return to the previous screen.
You cannot listen to a multisample unless you assign it to a part
as a patch.
3. Press [6 (Assign to Kbd)].
Assign to Keyboard window appears.
fig.SMPL18_50
If you select another rhythm set, the rhythm set you assigned
will be replaced by that patch. If you want to keep the patch you
created, press [WRITE] and save it.
Assigning a Sample as a Patch
to a Part (Assign to Keyboard)
Here’s how you can use the currently selected sample to create a
patch, and assign it to a keyboard part.
* From the Sample List screen you can also press [7 (Load Utility)]→ [2
(Assign to Pad)] to execute Assign To Pad.
* You cannot execute this with more than one sample selected.
4. Press
or
to specify the part to which the new patch
is to be assigned, and then press [8 (Select)].
The Assign to Keyboard window will appear, and you can verify
the assignment for the part.
5. Press [8 (Exec)]
If you add a check mark to [2 (Tempo Sync)], the Wave Tempo
Sync parameter (p. 45) will be turned ON for the patch that is
assigned.
127
Editing a Sample
6. Press [8 (Exec)].
Reference_e.book 128 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing a Sample
A message will ask you for confirmation.
6. Press [8 (Exec)].
The sample will be assigned (as a patch) to the specified part.
To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
7. Press [EXIT] to return to the previous screen.
If you select another patch, the patch you assigned will be
replaced by that patch. If you want to keep the patch you
created, press [WRITE] and save it.
Create a Rhythm Set
(Create Rhythm)
Here’s how you can use the sample(s) to create a rhythm set. This
operation is called Create Rhythm.
When you execute Create Rhythm, the sample(s) will become a
rhythm set and will be assigned to a part.
For example, you could record a sample, use the Chop function to
divide it, and then use this Create Rhythm operation to assign the
divided samples to a part as a rhythm set. Alternatively, you can
assign a mark to two or more samples in the sample list, and execute
Create Rhythm to assign the samples to a part as a rhythm set.
1. Press [SAMPLE LIST] to access the Sample List screen.
2. Select the samples.
in step 4, it will sound as a rhythm set. Since the samples will be
assigned consecutively from the C2 key, we recommend that
you set Pad Set to User, and set the pad bass note to C2 when
playing the part from the pads (p. 136).
* If you select another rhythm set, the rhythm set you assigned will be
replaced by that rhythm set. If you want to keep the rhythm set, press
[WRITE] and save it.
* The sounds will be assigned in order starting at the C2 key.
Creating a Multisample
(Create Multisample)
A set of two or more samples assigned to be played from the
keyboard is called a “multisample.” A multisample can contain up to
128 splits. The Fantom-S can hold 128 multisamples in user memory
and 128 multisamples in a memory card. You can also assign a
multisample to a part as a patch.
fig.01-05a.e
Multisample
Multisample
Multisample
sample
No.001
No.128
A multisample is
divided into 128
No.001
sample
No.002
sample
No.127
sample
No.003
sample
No.128
Number in the sample list
If you want to select two or more samples, press [5 (Mark Set)] to
add a check mark (✔) to the samples that you want to select.
To remove the check mark, press [4 (Mark Clear)].
You can press [8 (Preview)] to audition the selected sample.
3. Press [7 (Load Utility)], and then press [4 (Create Rhythm)].
The Create Rhythm window will appear.
fig.SMPL19_50
If, for example, only one note (e.g., the sound of the C4 key) is
sampled from a wide-ranging instrument such as a piano, and
assigned to the entire range of keys, it will sound unnatural
when played significantly below or above its original pitch. If
the instrument is sampled at several different pitches and
assigned to different ranges of the keyboard, this unnatural
effect can be minimized.
fig.SMPL22.e
Multisample
128 split
(128 key)
sample No.001
original key
C3
sample No.002
original key
C4
sampleNo.003
ogriginal key
C5
: original key
split point
4. Either turn the VALUE dial or use [INC] [DEC] to select the
part that you want to assign.
5. Press [8 (Select)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
6. Press [8 (Exec)]
split point
When you create a multisample, the split points are
automatically determined according to the original key of each
sample. Before you begin this process, you should set the
original key of each sample to the range where you want it to be
assigned.
A sample will not sound at a pitch higher than one octave above
the original key.
The sample will be assigned (as a patch) to the specified part.
To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
7. Press [EXIT] to return to the previous screen.
If, from Performance mode, you select and play the part selected
128
1. Press [SAMPLE LIST] to access the Sample List screen, and
select the sample(s) that you want to include in your new
multisample.
Reference_e.book 129 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing a Sample
If you want to select two or more samples from the sample list,
press [5 (Mark Set)] to add a check mark (✔) to each sample.
Pressing [4 (Mark Clear)] will clear the check mark.
You can press [8 (Preview)] to audition the selected sample.
If the total number of marks exceeds 128, the multisample will be
created from the 128 lowest-numbered samples.
You cannot create a multisample using samples from more than
one bank.
2. Press [7 (Load Utility)], and then press [3 (Create Multi Sample)].
The Create Multisample Name screen will appear.
3. Assign a name.
Removing Unwanted Portions
of a Sample (Truncate)
This operation cuts the portions of the sample that are earlier than
the Start Point and later than the Loop End Point.
* You cannot execute this with more than one sample selected.
1. Press [SAMPLE EDIT] to access the Sample Edit screen.
2. Press [3 (Sample Modify)] to access the Sample Modify window.
3. Press [1 (Truncate)].
fig.Truncate_50
• [1 (Change Type)]: Changes the type of character. Each time you
press this you will alternately select the first character of the
uppercase alphabet (A), lowercase alphabet (a), and numerals
and symbols (0).
• [2 (Delete)]: Deletes the character at the cursor, and moves
subsequent characters one space forward.
• [3 (Insert)]: Inserts a space (blank) at the cursor location.
•
•
,
: Move the cursor.
,
: Switch between uppercase and lowercase letters.
• VALUE dial, [INC][DEC]: Select characters.
* If you decide to stop inputting the name, press [7 (Cancel)].
4. If you want to replace the current sample with the truncated
sample, press [6 (Over Writer)] to display the “✔” symbol.
* You can use the pads to specify characters (p. 25).
5. Press [8 (Exec)].
A screen will appear, allowing you to select the destination for
the write.
A message will ask you for confirmation.
6. To execute the Truncate operation, press [8 (Exec)].
* If you want to cancel without executing, press [7 (Cancel)].
Editing a Sample
4. When you have finished inputting the name, press [8 (Write)].
5. Either turn the VALUE dial or use [INC] [DEC] to select the
write destination.
Multisamples consisting of user samples will be written to User, and
multisamples consisting of card samples will be written to Card.
6. Press [8 (Write)].
A message will ask you to confirm the operation.
7. If you are sure you want to write the multisample, press [8
(Exec)].
If you decide to cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
Never switch off the Fantom-S while data is being saved.
Unloading a Sample (Unload)
In the Sample Edit screen you can press [1 (Unload)] to unload the
currently selected sample and return to the previous screen.
129
Reference_e.book 130 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing a Sample
Boosting or Limiting the Highfrequency Range of the
Sample (Emphasis)
In some cases, the audio quality will be improved if you boost the highfrequency range of an imported sample. Also, the high-frequency range
of the sample may be emphasized when you use a sampler made by
another manufacturer. In this case, you can minimize the change in tonal
character by attenuating the high-frequency range.
* You cannot execute this with more than one sample selected.
1. Press [SAMPLE EDIT] to access the Sample Edit screen.
2. Press [3 (Sample Modify)] to access the Sample Modify window.
3. Press [2 (Emphasis)].
fig.Emphasis_50
4. Either turn the VALUE dial or use [INC], [DEC] to select the
emphasis type.
• PreEmphasis: Emphasizes the high-frequency range.
• DeEmphasis: Attenuates the high-frequency range.
5. If you want to replace the current sample with the
emphasized sample, press [6 (Over Writer)] to display the
“✔” symbol.
6. Press [8 (Exec)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
7. To execute, press [8 (Exec)].
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
130
Maximizing the Volume of a
Sample (Normalize)
This operation raises the level of the entire sample as much as
possible without exceeding the maximum level. In some cases, the
volume of a phrase you resampled (p. 119) will be lower than the
volume of the original phrase. In this case, it is a good idea to boost
the volume by executing the Normalize operation.
* You cannot execute this with more than one sample selected.
1. Press [SAMPLE EDIT] to access the Sample Edit screen.
2. Press [3 (Sample Modify)] to access the Sample Modify
window.
3. Press [3 (Normalize)].
fig.Normalize_50
4. If you want to replace the current sample with the
normalized sample, press [6 (Over Writer)] to display the
“✔” symbol.
5. Press [8 (Exec)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
6. To execute, press [8 (Exec)].
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
Reference_e.book 131 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing a Sample
Amp
This operation applies an envelope (time-variant change) to the
volume of the sample.
You can also adjust the volume of the entire sample.
* You cannot execute this with more than one sample selected.
1. Press [SAMPLE EDIT] to access the Sample Edit screen.
2. Press [3 (Sample Modify)] to access the Sample Modify
window.
3. Press [4 (Amp)].
fig.Amp_50
Stretching or Shrinking a
Sample (Time Stretch)
This operation stretches or shrinks the sample to modify the length
or tempo. You can stretch or shrink the sample by a factor of one half
to double the original length.
* You cannot execute this with more than one sample selected.
1. Press [SAMPLE EDIT] to access the Sample Edit screen.
2. Press [3 (Sample Modify)] to access the Sample Modify
window.
3. Press [5 (Time Strtch)].
fig.TimeStretch_50
4. Use VALUE dial or [INC], [DEC] to set the value.
This specifies how much boost will be applied relative to the
current volume. The entire sample you select will be boosted.
Value: 0–400%
5. If you want to specify a point, press [5 (Point)] to add a
check mark. Press
or
to select a parameter, and
then use VALUE dial or [INC], [DEC] to set the value.
• Current Point:Specifies the currently selected point. Beginning
near the start point, the points will be numbered 1, 2, 3, or 4.
• Point 1–4: Location of the current point
• Rate 1–4: Amplification ratio of the current point
Specifies how the volume of each point is to be boosted relative
to the current value.
Value: 0–400%
6. If you want the edited sample to replace the current sample,
press [6 (Over Writer)] to display the “✔” mark.
7. Press [8 (Exec)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
8. To execute, press [8 (Exec)].
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
4. Press
or
to select the parameter.
• Edit Time Stretch
BPM: Change the BPM (p. 116) of the sample to the BPM you
specify.
Time: Specify the length of the sample as a time value.
Rate: Specify the length relative to the current length of the
sample.
Value: 50.0–200.0%
• Type
Lower settings of this value will make the sound more suitable
for faster phrases, and higher settings will make the sound more
suitable for slower phrases.
Value: TYPE01–TYPE10
• Quality Adjust
Make fine adjustments to the tonal quality of the Time Stretch.
Value: 1–10
5. Use VALUE dial or [INC/DEC] to specify the tempo/length.
When setting the BPM (tempo) value, you can hold down
[SHIFT] and turn the VALUE dial, or use [INC] [DEC] to adjust
the value to the right of the decimal point.
6. Press [8 (Exec)].
The length of the sample will be changed as specified.
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
131
Editing a Sample
• Rate 1–4: Specifies the rate of volume boost.
Reference_e.book 132 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing a Sample
Dividing a Sample into Notes
(Chop)
Automatically Dividing a Sample
(Auto Chop)
The chop function divides a sample waveform into separate notes.
Here’s how you can automatically specify the points at which the
sample is to be divided, and then divide the sample.
* The Create Rhythm function (p. 128) makes it easy to create a rhythm
set from a chopped sample.
* You cannot execute this with more than one sample selected.
1. Press [SAMPLE EDIT] to access the Sample Edit screen.
2. Press [3 (Sample Modify)] to access the Sample Modify
window.
1. From step 3 of p. 132, press [6 (Auto Chop)].
The Auto Chop sub-window will appear.
2. Either turn the VALUE dial or use [INC], [DEC] to select the
method by which the sample is to be divided.
• Chop Type
Specify how the sample will be divided.
Value
3. Press [3 (Chop)].
Level: Divide according to volume.
fig.Chop_50
Beat:Divide at beats based on the BPM (p. 116) of the sample.
Divide x:Divide into ‘x’ number of equal lengths.
3. Press
.
4. Either turn the VALUE dial or use [INC], [DEC] to set the
value.
• Level (If Chop Type is Level)
Level at which the sample is to be divided. Lower settings of this
value will cause the sample to be divided more finely.
Value:1–10
• Beat (If Chop Type is Beat)
Procedure for Dividing a Sample
You can freely specify the point(s) at which the sample is to be
divided.
1. Press
or
to move the cursor to “Current Address.”
2. Either turn the VALUE dial or use [INC], [DEC] to move the
point.
3. At the location where you want to divide the sample, press
[4 (Add Point)].
The current location will be the dividing point.
4. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to specify other dividing points as desired.
You can specify up to 15 locations at which to divide the sample;
i.e., the sample will be divided into a maximum of 16 pieces.
5. Audition the sample as described in the section
“Auditioning the divided samples.”
If you want to re-make settings, press [7 (Cancel)], and move or
delete the point (p. 133).
6. Press [8 (Exec)].
Beat interval at which the sample is to be divided.
Value:1/32, 1/16T, 1/16, 1/8T, 1/8, 1/4T, 1/4, 1/2, 1/1, 2/1
• Times (If Chop Type is Divide x)
Number of samples into which the sample is to be divided
Value:2–16
5. Press [8 (Exec)].
The sample will be automatically divided according to your
settings, and the points will be specified. A maximum of 15
division points will be set (16 regions).
To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
6. Audition the sample as described in the section
“Auditioning the divided samples.”
If you want to re-make settings, press [7 (Cancel)], and move or
delete the point p. 133).
7. Press [8 (Exec)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
8. To execute the division, press [8 (Exec)].
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
7. To execute the division, press [8 (Exec)].
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
When you execute the Chop operation, a message will ask
whether you want to execute Create Rhythm.
* The divided samples will be added to the sample list.
8. If you want to execute Create Rhythm, press [8 (Exec)].
For the rest of the procedure, refer to “Create a Rhythm Set
(Create Rhythm)” (p. 128).
9. If you don’t want to execute Create Rhythm, press [7 (Cancel)].
132
When you execute Auto Chop, a message will ask you whether
you want to execute Create Rhythm.
9. If you want to execute Create Rhythm, press [8 (Exec)].
For the rest of the procedure, refer to “Create a Rhythm Set
(Create Rhythm)” (p. 128).
* The divided samples will be added to the sample list.
10. If you don’t want to execute Create Rhythm, press [7 (Cancel)].
You will return to the Sample Edit screen.
Reference_e.book 133 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing a Sample
Auditioning the Divided Samples
After dividing the sample, you can press the velocity pads to
audition each of the divided samples.
Joining Two or More Samples
(Combine)
From the sample nearest to the start point, the samples will be
played by pads [1], [2],...[16]
This operation combines multiple samples into a single sample. You
can combine as many as sixteen samples. You can also place silent
spaces between the samples.
Moving a Dividing Point
1. Press [SAMPLE EDIT] to access the Sample Edit screen.
1. Press
2. Press [3 (Sample Modify)] to access the Sample Modify
window.
or
to move the cursor to “Point No.”
2. Turn VALUE dial to select the point that you want to move.
In order from the start point, the points are numbered 1, 2,...15.
3. Press [7 (Combine)].
fig.Combine_50
3. Press
.
4. Turn VALUE dial to move the dividing point.
Deleting a Dividing Point
1. Press
or
to move the cursor to “Point No.”
2. Turn VALUE dial to select the point that you want to delete.
3. Press [5 (Clear Point)].
The dividing point will be deleted.
4. Either turn the VALUE dial or use [INC], [DEC] to set the
value.
• 1–16: The sample or silence to be combined
• TYPE
Sample: sample, Time: silent region (specified as time), Beat:
silent region (specified as a note value)
• BANK (Bank that contains the sample)
Value U: user, C: card
* This will be displayed only if TYPE is set to Sample.
• PRM (Sample number, or the duration/note value of the silent
region)
Value: 1–10000 ms (if TYPE is set to Time), note value: 1/32, 1/
16T, 1/16, 1/8T, 1/8, 1/4T, 1/4, 1/2, 1/1, 2/1 (if TYPE is set to
Beat)
The note value is based on the BPM of the sample immediately
before the silent region.
* If there is no sample immediately before the silent region, the current
BPM will be used.
5. Use [CURSOR] to select a parameter and repeat step 4.
You can press [6 (Preview)] to audition the selected sample.
6. Press [6 (Exec)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
7. To execute, press [8 (Exec)].
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
133
Editing a Sample
Value
Reference_e.book 134 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing a Sample
Saving a Sample
5. Assign a name to the sample.
• [1 (Change Type)]:Selects the type of character.
A newly loaded sample, as well as any changes you’ve made in the
settings for a sample will be lost as soon as you turn off the power. If
you want to keep such data, you must save it as follows.
1. Press [SAMPLE EDIT].
1. Press [1 (Sample List)].
Samples displayed as “NEW” or “EDIT” have not yet been
saved.
2. Select the sample that you want to save.
Each time you press this, you will alternately select the first
character of the uppercase alphabet (A), lowercase alphabet (a),
or numerals and symbols (0).
• [2 (Delete)]:Deletes the character at the cursor location, while
shifting the following characters to the left, closing the gap.
• [3 (Insert)]:Inserts a space at the cursor location.
•
•
,
:Moves the cursor (the location at which to enter/edit a
character).
,
:Switches letters between uppercase and lowercase.
If you want to select two or more samples, press [5 (Mark Set)] to
add a check mark (✔) to the samples that you want to select. To
remove the check mark, press [4 (Mark Clear)].
• VALUE dial, [INC][DEC]:Selects characters.
If you hold down [SHIFT] and press [5 (Mark Set All)], a check
mark will be added to all samples of the selected bank. If you
hold down [SHIFT] and press [4 (Mark Clr All)], check marks
will be removed from all selected samples.
* You can use the pads to specify characters (p. 25).
The edit screen for the selected sample will appear.
You can press [8 (Preview)] to audition the selected sample.
3. Press [WRITE].
The Write Menu screen will appear. Make sure that “Sample” is
highlighted.
* If you decide to discard your changes, press [7 (Cancel)].
6. When you have finished inputting the name, press [8
(Write)].
A screen will appear allowing you to select the write-destination
sample.
7. Turn the VALUE dial or use [INC][DEC] or
the write destination and sample number.
to select
The write destination can be either the Fantom-S’s internal user
memory (User), or a memory card (Card).
fig.SMPL15_50
8. Press [8 (Write)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
Never switch off the Fantom-S while data is being saved.
4. Press [3 (Sample)] or [ENTER].
fig.SMPL16_50
If you have selected more than one sample, a message will ask
you to confirm the writing operation. Samples will be written
into the identical number corresponding to each bank of the
sample list. Sample names will be assigned automatically. If
you want to write the samples, press [8 (Exec)]. If you decide to
cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
134
Reference_e.book 135 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Using the Pads
The pads of the Fantom-S function in the same way as the keyboard,
and can also be used to play RPS and rhythm patterns. You can add
dynamics to the sound by varying the force with which you strike
the pads.
Using the Roll Function to Play
Sounds
Using the Hold Function to
Sustain a Sound
1. Hold down [ROLL] and press a pad.
You can use the Hold function to make the sound continue even
after you take your finger off the pad. This is useful when you want
a sound such as a looped (repeating) phrase to play continuously.
You can use the Roll function to play a “roll” (repeated notes at brief
intervals) as long as you continue holding the pad.
* If you press only [ROLL], a roll will continue sounding on all 16 pads.
* If you press only [ROLL], the Roll function will be turned on for all
sixteen pads.
fig.ROLL
To play other sounds while holding one sound
1. Hold down a pad and press [HOLD].
fig.HOLD
In this state, a roll will be played as long as you hold down a
pad.
2. Take your hand off the pad, and the sound will stop.
Hold will be turned on, and the sample will continue sounding
even when you take your finger off the pad. In this state,
pressing another pad will cause its sample to sound only as long
as you continue pressing that pad.
2. When you once again press the blinking [PAD] or [HOLD],
the sound will stop.
The Roll function will not work in the following cases:
• When you have made settings so that a pattern is played when
you press a pad
• When RPS is on
Using the Pads
The [HOLD] and the pad will blink.
* The resolution of the roll is set by the Roll Resolution parameter (p.
137), which is displayed while you hold down [PAD SETTING].
• This cannot be used to switch images via V-Link.
To hold two or more samples
1. Press [HOLD] so the pad is lighted.
2. Press a pad.
The sample whose pad is blink will continue sounding. If you
press another pad in this state, its sample will also continue
sounding in the same way.
3. The sound will stop when you press a lit pad. When you
press [HOLD], all samples will stop pad sounding.
The Hold function will not work in the following cases:
• When RPS is on (p. 172)
• When the Multi Velocity parameter (p. 137) is on
• When the Tone Env Mode parameter (p. 68) is set to “NO-SUS”
• When the One Shot Mode parameter (p. 68) is on
135
Reference_e.book 136 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Using the Pads
Using the Clipboard to Copy
Pad Settings
Adjusting the Pad Settings
(PAD SETTING)
The “clipboard” temporarily stores pad velocity and note number
settings. This provides an easy way to copy settings from one pad to
another, and also lets you swap (exchange) the settings of two pads.
fig.Pad01_50
1. Press [PAD SETTING].
* The clipboard is available when the Pad Set parameter is set to
“USER.”
Copying one Pad Setting
1. Hold down the pad that you want to copy, and press
[CLIPBOARD].
The settings (velocity and note number) will be copied to the
clipboard, and [CLIPBOARD] will light.
The copied setting will sound if you press [CLIPBOARD].
2. Hold down [CLIPBOARD] and press the copy-destination
pad.
Copying Two or More Pad Setting
1. Hold down one of the pads that you want to copy, and press
[CLIPBOARD].
The settings (velocity and note number) will be copied to the
clipboard, and [CLIPBOARD].
2. Repeat step 1 several times as desired.
You can copy up to 16 settings to the clipboard.
* If more than one setting has been copied to the clipboard, pressing
[CLIPBOARD] will sound the setting that was copied last.
3. Hold down [CLIPBOARD] and press a copy-destination pad.
The copies will be executed consecutively, starting with the pad
you pressed last.
You can press [CLIPBOARD] to hear the content that will be
copied next.
2. Press
or
to move the cursor to the parameter.
3. Turn the VALUE dial or use [INC] [DEC] to make pad settings.
• Pad Part
Specifies the part that will be used as the pad part. When you
specify this, the word “PAD” will appear below the part number
in the Performance Layer and Mixer screens. You can set this
parameter when in Performance mode.
Value: 1–16
• Patch/Rhythm Set Type
Specifies whether a patch or a rhythm set will be assigned to the
pad part.
Value: Patch, Rhythm
• Patch/Rhythm Set Group
Specifies the group of the patch or rhythm set.
Value: USER, PR-A–E (Fantom-S88; F), GM , CARD, (XP A–D)
• Patch/Rhythm Set Number
Specifies the number of the patch or rhythm set.
• Pad Set
Specifies the pad set.
Value
(Example)
User:
You can specify the velocity and note number for each
of the sixteen pads. In Patch mode, one such setting
can be stored as a system parameter. In Performance
mode, these settings can be stored individually for
each performance as performance parameters.
Note:
Sixteen notes starting from the note number specified
as the bass note will be automatically assigned to the
pads.
Pad [1]+[CLIPBOARD] → copy the settings of pad [1]
Pad [2]+[CLIPBOARD] → copy the settings of pad [2]
Settings will be copied as follows
[CLIPBOARD]+ pad [12] → settings of pad [2] copied to pad [12]
[CLIPBOARD]+ pad [11] → settings of pad [1] copied to pad [11]
When all copy have been finished, the clipboard will be empty, and
the [CLIPBOARD] indicator will go out.
Rhythm: Note numbers will be assigned in the arrangement
most suitable for playing a rhythm set.
• Base (Pad Base Note)
Specifies the lowest note when Pad Set is set to “Note.”
Value: C-1–G9
• Pad Number
If the pad set is set to “User,” this specifies the pad for which you
will make settings. You can also specify a pad directly by
pressing it.
Value: Pad 1–Pad 16
136
Reference_e.book 137 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Using the Pads
Multi-Velocity
• Note (Pad Note)
Specifies the note number of the pad when Pad Set is set to
“User.”
Value: C-1–G9
• Velocity (Pad Velocity)
You can use the sixteen pads to play a specified note at sixteen
velocity levels. The same note number will be sounded by all sixteen
pads. This function can be useful when you are having difficulty
inputting the velocities you intend.
When Pad Set is set to “User,” specifies the loudness of the
sound produced by striking the pad.
1. From the Pad Setting screen, press [7 (Multi Velo)].
If you set this to REAL, you can vary the dynamics of the sound
by varying the strength with which you press the pad.
fig.Pad02_50
The Multi Velocity Setup window will appear.
Value: REAL, 1–127
• Pad Common Velo (Pad Common Velocity)
Specifies the loudness of the sound produced when you strike the
pad. If you set this to “REAL,” you can vary the loudness by varying
the striking force. This setting is common to all sixteen pads.
* If you have specified multi-velocity (p. 170), that setting will be used.
• Roll Resolution
Specifies the spacing of the notes when you use the pads to play
a roll.
,
,
,
,
,
,
• Pad Sens (Pad Sensitivity)
Specifies the touch sensitivity of the pad.
Value
Light:
If you want to turn off multi-velocity, press [7 (Multi Velo)] once
again to remove the check mark.
Specifies a light playing touch for the pads. Even light
strikes on the pad will produce loud sounds, compared
to the Medium setting.
Medium: Specifies the standard playing touch for the pads. This
provides the normal playing feel.
Heavy: Specifies a heavier playing touch for the pads. Since
loud sounds will be produced only when you strike the
pads more strongly than usual, this produces the
sensation that the playing touch is heavier.
• Aftertouch Sens (Aftertouch Sensitivity)
Specifies the Aftertouch sensitivity. Higher values will allow
Aftertouch to be applied more easily. Normally you will leave
this at “100.”
Assigning a Pattern to a Pad
(RPS Function)
The Fantom-S lets you assign a previously recorded phrase to a pad
as a pattern, and play it by pressing that pad. For details, refer to
“Playing a Phrase at the Touch of a Finger (RPS Function)” (p.
172).
Using the Pads to Play
Rhythms
The Fantom-S lets you assign rhythm patterns and/or rhythm
sounds to the pads and play them by pressing the pads. For details,
refer to “Playing Rhythms” (p. 112).
Value: 0-100
4. If you want to save your settings, perform the Write
procedure.
Mode
Performance
mode
Patch
mode
Parameter
Pad Common Velo
Pad Sens
Aftertouch Sens
Roll Resolution
Pad settings other
than the above
All pad settings
Write procedure
Press [8 (System Write)]
* Save as System parameters
Press [WRITE].
* Saved as performance parameters.
Press [8 (System Write)].
* Saved as System parameter.
* The Write procedure varies depending on the selected mode or
parameter.
5. When you have finished making settings, press [EXIT].
137
Using the Pads
,
3. Press [8 (Select)].
The window will close, and a check mark will be added to [7
(Multi Velo)].
Range: REAL, 1–127
Value:
2. Turn the VALUE dial or use [INC] [DEC] to specify the note
number.
Reference_e.book 138 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing Back a Song
This chapter explains how you can use the Fantom-S’s sequencer to
play back a song.
* The User/Card setting is shown below the song name when you return
to the Song Play screen.
• [3 (View Svq)]: View SVQ files.
When you play back a song, we recommend that you use the
sound generator in Performance mode (p. 76). In Performance
mode, up to sixteen different sounds can be played separately by
the sixteen parts, making this mode ideal for playing songs that
are multi-instrument ensembles of drums, bass, piano, etc.
• [4 (View Smf)]: View SMF files.
• [5 (View Mrc)]: An S-MRC format song file created on a device
such as the MC-50
4. Press [PLAY] to start playback.
When the song finishes playing, it will stop automatically. If you
want to stop playback midway through the song, press [STOP].
Precautions concerning use of memory cards
You must turn off the power of the Fantom-S before you insert
or remove a memory card.
Playing a Song Immediately
(Quick Play)
The Fantom-S is able to play a song from user memory and memory
card immediately, without first loading the song into internal
memory. This is called the Quick Play function.
Quick Play can be used with MRC Pro songs (extension:.SVQ) and
Standard MIDI Files (extension:.MID).
1. Press [SEQUNCER].
The Song Play screen appears.
2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “Song.”
fig.07-04
If you have interrupted song playback, “+” may be displayed at
the right of the measure number. This indicates that the song is
stopped in mid measure.
There will be no sound if samples have not been loaded for the
patches used in the song. You must load the necessary samples
beforehand (p. 170).
Playing Back Songs
Consecutively (Chain Play)
The Chain Play function lets you consecutively play back (Quick Play)
songs on user memory and memory card in the order you specify.
1. Press [MENU] to access the Menu window.
2. Use
or
[ENTER].
to select “Chain Play,” and then select
The Chain Play screen appears.
fig.09-01.eps
3. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to select the song
that you want to play.
Press [1 (Song List)] to access the Song List screen, and choose
from a list of songs.
fig.09-00
3. Press [1 (User)] if you want to choose from user memory, or
press [2 (Card)] if you want to choose from memory card.
You cannot combine USER songs and CARD songs.
• [1 (User)]: Songs in user memory
• [2 (Card)]: Songs on a memory card
138
Reference_e.book 139 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing Back a Song
By holding down [SHIFT] and pressing
or
jump to the beginning or end of the song list.
you can
If you want to perform Chain Play repeatedly, press [7 (Repeat
All)] and assign a check mark (✔).
If you press [6 (Auto Step)] to assign a check mark (✔), playback
will ends, and the next song will begin playing automatically.
4. Press [PLAY] to start Chain Play.
Starting from the song of step 1. If you want to stop playback
before it is finished, press [STOP].
If you want to begin playback from midway through the chain,
use
or
[PLAY].
Playing Back Correctly from the
Middle of the Song (MIDI Update)
When you play back from the middle of a song, for example after
fast-forward or rewind, the correct patch may not be selected, or the
pitch may be incorrect. This is because the MIDI messages in the area
that you skipped have not been transmitted to the sound generator.
In such cases, you can use the MIDI Update function. When you
perform MIDI Update, the MIDI messages (other than Note
messages) from the beginning of the song until the location to which
you moved will be transmitted to the sound generator, ensuring that
the sound generator will be in the correct state for the resumption of
playback.
1. Make sure that song playback is stopped.
to move to the desired step, and then press
5. When you are finished with Chain Play, press [STOP].
It is not possible to perform MIDI Update while the song is
playing.
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [PLAY].
Various Playback Methods
Fast-Forward and Rewind During
Playback
Fast-forward, rewind, and jump can be performed during playback,
as well as while stopped. Use the following procedures for each
operation.
Fast-forward:
Press [FWD].
Continuous fast-forward: Press and hold [FWD].
Rapid fast-forward:
Press [FWD] and then press [BWD].
Rewind:
Press [BWD].
Continuous rewind:
Press and hold [BWD].
Rapid rewind:
Press [BWD] and then press [FWD].
Jump to the previous locate position:
Hold down [SHIFT] and press [BWD].
Jump to the next locate position:
Hold down [SHIFT] and press [FWD].
Jump to the beginning of the song:
Press [RESET].
The display will indicate “MIDI Update...” while processing
takes place, and when finished, will indicate “Completed!”
Muting the Playback of a Specific
Instrument
If you want to silence the playback of a specific instrument, you can
mute the phrase track that contains the sequencer data for that
instrument.
For details on the procedure, refer to “Silencing the Playback
of a Track (Mute)” (p. 150).
Changing the Playback Tempo of a
Song
The tempo at which a song will play back is recorded on its tempo
track, but the tempo of the entire song can be adjusted during
playback. The tempo at which the song actually plays is called the
playback tempo.
The playback tempo is a temporary setting. It will be lost if you
switch to another song or turn off the power. If you want the
song to always play back at this tempo, you must re-save the
song to disk (p. 168).
1. Press [TEMPO].
• A certain amount of time may be required for fast-forward,
rewind, or jump during Quick Play.
The Tempo window appears.
fig.09-04a
• Song playback will be interrupted if you jump to the beginning
or end of the song while the song is playing.
139
Playing Back a Song
Chain Play cannot be started or stopped by a Start or Stop message
from an external MIDI device. Nor will MIDI Continue, Song
Position Pointer, Song Select, or Clock messages be received.
Reference_e.book 140 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing Back a Song
2. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to set the playback
tempo.
• If you press [7 (Click)] to display the check mark (✔), a click will
sound at the specified tempo. This will switch on/off each time
you press the button.
• By pressing [6 (Tap)] you can set the tempo to the timing at
which you press the button (Tap Tempo). Press the button three
or more times at quarter-note intervals of the desired tempo.
3. When you have finished making settings, press [8 (Close)].
Using a Controller to Change the Playback
Tempo
Since tempo control is assigned to the realtime control knob of
the Fantom-S, it's easy to change the playback tempo of the
song.
fig.09-04b
Playing Back a Song Repeatedly
(Loop Play)
Use the Loop function when you want to repeatedly play back an
entire song or just a specified portion of a song.
1. Press [SEQUNENCER].
2. Press [4 (Loop)].
The Loop window appears.
3. Press [7 (Loop)] to assign a check mark (✔).
The Loop switch will turn on. Now playback will loop according
to the region and the number of times specified in the Loop
window. To turn off the Loop switch, press [7 (Loop)] once
again.
For details on making settings in the Loop window, refer to
“Specifying the Area of a Song that will Repeat (Loop
Points)” (p. 151).
4. When you have finished making settings, press [8 (Close)]
to close the Loop window.
1. Press the REALTIME CONTROL button so the ARP/RHY
indicator lights.
Using the D Beam Controller to
Start/Stop Song Playback
2. Play back the song, and turn the realtime control knob.
You can start/stop song playback by passing your hand over the D
Beam controller.
You are also free to assign the Tempo Control function to the
following controllers. For details on this setting, refer to the
pages that discuss each controller.
• D Beam controller (p. 98)
1. Select the song that you want to play back (p. 138).
2. Hold down [JUMP] and press D BEAM [ASSIGNABLE].
The D Beam Assignable screen appears.
fig.09-06_50
Playing a Song Back at a Fixed
Tempo (Muting the Tempo Track)
If the tempo changes while a song is being played back, this is
because those tempo changes have been recorded in the Tempo
track. If you want to override these tempo changes and play back at
a fixed tempo, you can mute the Tempo track.
For details on this operation, refer to “Silencing the Playback
of a Track (Mute)” (p. 150).
Playing Back a S-MRC Format Song
The Fantom-S is able to play back S-MRC format songs created on
the MC-50 in the same way as MRC Pro songs or Standard MIDI
Files. However, S-MRC format songs cannot be Quick Played. You
must first load them into internal memory and convert them to MRC
Pro song format before playing them.
For details on the procedure, refer to “Loading a Song (Load)”
(p. 170).
140
3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “Type.”
4. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to set this to
“START/STOP.”
5. Press D BEAM [ASSIGNABLE] to turn on the D Beam
controller.
6. When you pass your hand across the D Beam controller,
song playback will start. When you pass your hand across it
once again, playback will stop.
You can also start/stop song playback by using a pedal
connected to the PEDAL CONTROL jack (p. 189).
Reference_e.book 141 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Recording Songs
This chapter explains the procedure for using the Fantom-S’s
sequencer to record a song.
Normally, when recording or playing back a song, you will put the
sound generator in Performance mode. The reason for this is that
in this mode, only the sound of the specified MIDI channel will be
heard when you record while playing the keyboard of the Fantom-S,
and that when the song is played back, the parts can independently
play up to 16 different sounds. Thus, Performance mode is suitable
for recording and playing back a song that uses an ensemble of
multiple instruments, such as drums, bass, and piano.
Two Recording Methods
You can use one of two methods of recording: realtime recording or
step recording. Select the method that is appropriate for your situation.
Realtime Recording (p. 142)
Realtime recording is the recording method in which your keyboard
playing and controller operations are recorded just as you perform them.
Step Recording (p. 146)
Step recording is the recording method in which you can input notes
and rests one by one. This method is suitable for inputting drums or
bass with precise timing. In addition to using notes, you can also
create a song by putting patterns together.
Before You Record a New Song
Patch/Rhythm set
Select a patch or rhythm set if you want to use a single patch or
rhythm set to record your playing.
Erasing the Song/Pattern from
Internal Memory (Song Clear)
When you record a song, the sequencer data is temporarily recorded
in internal memory. If you want to record a new song, you must
erase any existing sequencer data from internal memory.
If internal memory contains an important song that you want to
keep, you should first save that song to user memory/memory
card (p. 168).
1. Press [SEQUENCER] to access the Song Play screen.
2. Press [3 (Song Clear)].
The Song Clear window appears.
3. Press [8 (Exec)] to execute the operation.
When the operation has been completed, the display will briefly
indicate “Completed!”
To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
Specify the Time Signature
Before you record a new song, you must specify the time signature.
However, a time signature of 4/4 is automatically specified when
you perform the Song Initialize operation or when the power is
turned on, so you will need to make this setting only if you want to
record a new song in a different time signature.
1. Press [SEQUENCER] to access the Song Play screen.
1. Select a sound
2. Clear the internal memory
3. Specify the time signature of the song (p. 141)
2. Press [EDIT].
The Microscope screen appears.
3. Press [7 (Trk/Ch)], select “BEAT” (beat track), and press [8
(Close)].
The Microscope screen for the beat track appears.
4. Use realtime recording (p. 142) or step recording (p.
146) to record
fig.10-02_50
5. Use track edit (p. 151) or micro edit (p. 162) to edit the
song
6. Save the song to user memory or memory card (p. 168)
Select the Sound to be Used for
Recording
Before you record a song, select the sound that you want to use for
recording. Select the recording method that is appropriate for your
situation.
Performance
Select a Performance when you want to record an ensemble
performance using multiple instruments. When recording a song, we
recommend that you normally select a Performance.
4. Move the cursor to “Beat Change,” and specify the time
signature.
5. Press [EXIT] to return to the Song Play screen.
If you want to change time signatures midway through the song,
refer to “Changing the Time Signature Midway Through the
Song” (p. 167).
141
Recording Songs
Overview of the Recording Process
Reference_e.book 142 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Recording Songs
If you are recording to a phrase track, see “Recording Your
Performance as You Play It (Realtime Recording)” (p. 142).
Specifying the Time Signature of a
Pattern
Each pattern has a Pattern Beat setting that manages the time
signature of that pattern. The pattern beat acts as a guide when the
pattern is played or recorded, and is handled independently of the
time signature of the song (i.e., the time signature recorded in the
beat track).
The pattern beat is normally set to a time signature of 4/4, but you
can change this setting when the song has a time signature other
than 4/4, or when you want to record a pattern with a time signature
different than that of the song.
Only one pattern beat setting can be specified at the beginning of
each pattern. This means that it is not possible to change time
signatures midway through a pattern. Nor is it possible to delete the
pattern beat, or move or copy it.
1. Press [SEQUENCER] to access the Song Play screen.
2. Press [2 (Ptn)].
The Pattern Play screen appears.
3. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to select the
pattern.
Recording Your Performance
as You Play It
(Realtime Recording)
Realtime Recording is the recording method in which your keyboard
playing and controller operations are recorded just as you perform
them. Use this recording method when you want to capture the
nuances of your own performance.
Basic Operation for Realtime Recording
1. Make sure that the preparations for recording have been
completed as described in “Before You Record a New Song”
(p. 141).
If you want to record into an existing song, load the desired song
into internal memory (p. 149). Then press [FWD] or [BWD] to
specify the measure at which you want to begin recording. The
measure at which recording will begin is indicated by the “M=”
in the upper part of each PLAY screen.
2. Press [REC].
The [REC] indicator will blink, and the Recording Standby
window appears.
fig.07-11_50
4. Press [6 (Ptn Beat)].
fig.10-03_50
5. Move the cursor, and set the time signature.
This window lets you set various parameters for realtime recording.
If you want to record a pattern, access the Pattern Play screen
([SEQUENCER]→[2 (Ptn)] p. 151) and then press [REC].
3. As basic settings, specify the following three parameters.
Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to each parameter, and
turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to make the setting.
• Rec Track
Specify the phrase track or pattern on which you want to record.
In the Song Play screen, “TRK” will appear if you press [1 (Song
List)], and “PTN” will appear if you press [2 (PTN)].
If this is set to “AUTO,” the phrase track of the same number as
the part currently selected for the keyboard will be chosen
automatically.
Value:AUTO, TRK 1–TRK 16, PTN001–PTN100 (* when
recording on a pattern)
• Rec Mode (Recording Mode)
Select how recording is to take place.
142
Reference_e.book 143 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Recording Songs
Value
REPLACE: Replace-recording will be carried out. If a
performance has already been recorded on the recordingdestination track, it will be erased as you record your new
performance. Use this when you want to re-record.
• Count In
Select how recording is to begin.
Value
OFF:
Recording will begin immediately when you press
[PLAY].
1 MEAS:
When you press [PLAY], a count (playback) will
begin one measure before the recording-start
location, and recording will begin when you reach
the recording-start location.
2 MEAS:
When you press [PLAY], a count (playback) will
begin two measures before the recording-start
location, and recording will begin when you reach
the recording-start location.
WAIT NOTE: As an alternative to pressing [PLAY], you can play
the keyboard, strike a pad, or press the Hold
pedal to start recording.
4. When you are finished making settings in the Recording
Standby window, press [PLAY] or [8 (Start)].
If you are not satisfied with the realtime recording you just made,
you can press [MENU], and from the Menu window that appears,
select “Undo/Redo” to return to the state prior to recording (Undo/
Redo).
After executing Undo, you can use Redo to revert to the previous
state. After executing Undo, you can execute Redo by performing
the above procedure the above procedure once again.
Recording Tempo Changes in a
Song (Tempo Recording)
If you want the tempo to change during the song, you can record
those tempo changes in the Tempo track. If tempo changes have
already been recorded in the tempo track, they will be rewritten.
Set the following recording parameters in addition to the basic
settings described in step 3 of “Basic Operation for Realtime
Recording” (p. 142).
Tempo Rec Sw (Tempo Recording Switch)
Specify whether tempo changes will be recorded (ON), or not (OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
You will be able to use realtime control knob ([
control the tempo easily (p. 140).
]) movements to
Loop Recording and Punch-In
Recording
You can record repeatedly over a specified area (Loop recording), or
re-record just that area (Punch-in recording).
The Recording Standby window will close, the [REC] indicator
will change from blinking to lit, and recording will begin.
Set the following recording parameters in addition to the basic
settings described in step 3 of “Basic Operation for Realtime
Recording” (p. 142).
When recording begins, the Realtime Recording window will
appear.
Loop/Punch
fig.10-08_50
Specify how loop recording or punch-in recording is to take place.
Value
OFF: Loop recording or punch-in recording will not occur.
In this window you can perform the following operations.
• Specify the punch-in/out points (Punch In p. 144)
• Realtime Erase (Erase p. 145)
• Rehearsal function (Rehearsal p. 145)
LOOP (POINT):
Recording takes place repeatedly, according to
the loop point settings.
LOOP (1 MEAS):
The one-measure area starting at the recordstart measure will be recorded repeatedly.
For details on these operations, refer to the appropriate page.
LOOP (2 MEAS):
The two-measure area starting at the recordstart measure will be recorded repeatedly.
To close the Realtime Recording window, press [8 (Close)] or
[PLAY]. To open it once again, press [PLAY].
LOOP (4 MEAS):
The four-measure area starting at the recordstart measure will be recorded repeatedly.
5. When you are finished recording, press [STOP].
The [REC] indicator will go dark.
LOOP (8 MEAS):
The eight-measure area starting at the recordstart measure will be recorded repeatedly.
LOOP (16 MEAS): The sixteen-measure area starting at the recordstart measure will be recorded repeatedly.
LOOP SONG ALL: The entire song from beginning to end will be
recorded repeatedly.
143
Recording Songs
MIX: Mix-recording will be carried out. Normally, you will
record using this method. If a performance has already been
recorded on the recording-destination track, your newly
recorded performance will be added to the existing performance
without erasing it. By using this in conjunction with Looprecording, you can record repeatedly over a specified area
without erasing the previously recorded performance. For
example, this is a convenient way to record a drum performance
one instrument at a time; bass drum → snare drum → hi-hat, etc.
Reference_e.book 144 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Recording Songs
AUTO PUNCH:
Auto punch-in recording will be performed.
You must pre-specify the area (punch points) in which recording is
to take place. This is convenient when you want to re-record over a
mistake. The song will play back when you begin recording. When
you reach the punch-in point, playback will switch to record mode.
MANUAL PUNCH: Manual punch-in recording will be performed.
Recording takes place (erasing the existing data) in the area that you
specify by pressing a pedal or button. This is convenient when you
want to re-record more than one location in which you made a
mistake. The song will play back when you begin recording. When
you press a pedal or button, playback will switch to record mode,
and will switch back to play mode when you press the pedal or
button once again. By pressing the pedal or button, you can toggle
between record and play modes.
Start Point
Specify the measure and beat at which loop recording or auto punchin recording is to begin. It is not possible to specify the Clock.
End Point
Specify the measure and beat at which loop recording or auto punchin recording is to Stop. It is not possible to specify the Clock.
The minimum loop length is four quarter notes.
Playback will switch to record mode.
4. At the point where you want to stop recording, once again
press [5 (PUNCH OUT)] or step on the pedal.
You will return to playback mode.
5. Press [STOP] to stop playback.
Correct the Timing of Your Playing
as You Record (Recording Quantize)
The Quantize function automatically corrects inaccuracies in the
timing of your keyboard or pad performance, aligning the notes to
accurate timing intervals. During realtime recording, you can
quantize while you record.
Set the following recording parameters in addition to the basic
settings described in step 3 of “Basic Operation for Realtime
Recording” (p. 142).
Input Quantize
Specify whether to quantize while recording.
Value
OFF:
Quantize will not be applied while recording.
GRID: Grid Quantize will be applied while recording. Use this
when you want the timing to be accurate, such as when
recording drums or bass.
fig.10-05.e
Using Auto Punch-In Recording
1. In the Recording Standby window, set the Loop/Punch
parameter to “AUTO PUNCH.”
2. Set the Start Point/End Point parameters to the desired
punch points.
3. Move to a measure earlier than the specified Start Point, and
press [PLAY].
The song will begin playing. Recording will begin at the location
specified by the Start Point parameter. Playback will resume at
the location specified by the End Point parameter.
Grid quantize with Resolution = SHUFFLE: Shuffle Quantize will be applied while recording. Use
this when you want to give the rhythm a “shuffle” or
“swing” character.
fig.10-06.e
Shuffle quantize with Rate = 75%
4. Press [STOP] to stop playback.
Using Manual Punch-In Recording
If you want to use a pedal connected to the PEDAL CONTROL
jack to specify the area for recording, you must first set the Pedal
1 or 2 Assign parameter to “PUNCH I/O” (p. 189).
1. In the Recording Standby window, set the Loop/Punch
parameter to “MANUAL PUNCH.”
2. Press [PLAY].
Song playback will begin, and the Realtime Recording window
will appear.
fig.10-08_50
Grid Resolution
Make this setting when you are using Grid Quantize. Specify the
quantization interval in terms of a note value. Select the shortest note value
that will occur in the range to which Grid Quantize will be applied.
Value:
,
144
,
,
,
,
Strength (Grid Quantize Strength)
Make this setting when you are using Grid Quantize. It specifies the
degree to which notes will be adjusted toward the timing intervals
specified by the Grid Resolution parameter. With a setting of
“100%,” the notes will be corrected precisely to the timing of the
Grid Resolution parameter. As you lower this setting, the note
timing will be corrected to a lesser extent, and with a setting of “0%”
the timing will not be adjusted at all.
Value: 0–100
3. At the point where you want to begin recording, press [5
(Punch In)] or step on the pedal.
,
Reference_e.book 145 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Recording Songs
Shuffle Resolution
When you are using Shuffle Quantize, make this setting to specify
the note value used for quantization.
Value:
,
Rate (Shuffle Quantize Rate)
Make this setting when using Shuffle Quantize. It specifies the degree to
which the backbeat will be separated from the downbeat specified by the
Shuffle Resolution parameter. With a setting of “50%,” the backbeat will
be exactly between adjacent downbeats. With a setting of “0%,” the
backbeat will be moved to the same timing as the preceding downbeat.
With a setting of “100%,” the backbeat will be moved to the same timing
as the following downbeat.
Erasing Unwanted Data While You
Record (Realtime Erase)
Realtime Erase is a function that erases unwanted data during
realtime recording. This is particularly convenient during loop
recording, since it lets you erase data without stopping recording.
Realtime Erase can be executed only if the Recording Mode is set
to “MIX.”
1. Begin realtime recording (p. 142).
The Realtime Recording window appears.
fig.10-08_50
Value: 0–100
Selecting the Sequencer Data that
will Be Recorded (Recording Select)
When you use realtime recording, all of your sequencer data will
normally be recorded. If you want to avoid recording a specific type
of data, you can turn its Recording Select setting “OFF.”
2. Press [6 (Erase)].
The Realtime Erase window appears.
fig.10-09_50
1. Access the Recording Standby window (p. 142).
2. Press [7 (Rec Select)].
The Recording Select window appears.
fig.10-07_50
3. Erase unwanted data.
To erase all data (except for Pattern Call messages), press [7 (Erase
All)]. Data will be erased for as long as you hold down the button.
To erase notes of a specific key, hold down that key. Data for
that note will be erased for as long as you hold down that key.
To erase notes of a specific key range, hold down the top and
bottom keys of that range. Data for that range will be erased for
as long as you hold down those keys.
Note: Note messages. These MIDI messages represent notes.
PAF (Poly Aftertouch):
Polyphonic aftertouch. These MIDI
messages apply aftertouch to
individual keys.
Control change messages. These
CC (Control Change):
MIDI messages apply various effects
such as modulation or expression.
Program change messages. These
MIDI messages select sounds.
CAF (Channel Aftertouch): Channel aftertouch messages. These
MIDI messages apply aftertouch to
an entire MIDI channel.
PC (Program Change):
Pitch bend messages. These MIDI
messages change the pitch.
SysEx (System Exclusive): System exclusive messages. These
MIDI messages are used to make
settings unique to the Fantom-S,
such as sound parameters.
4. Press [8 (Close)] to close the Realtime Erase window.
You will return to the normal recording state.
Auditioning Sounds or Phrases While
Recording (Rehearsal Function)
The Rehearsal function lets you temporarily suspend recording
during realtime recording. This is convenient when you want to
audition the sound that you will use next, or to practice the phrase
that you will record next.
1. Begin realtime recording (p. 142).
The Realtime Recording window appears.
fig.10-08_50
Bend (Pitch Bend):
4. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to add a check mark.
The message will be recorded if you assign a check mark (✔),
and will not be recorded if you remove the check mark.
If you press [5 (All Off)], no sequencer data will be recorded.
If you press [6 (All On)], all of the sequencer data will be recorded.
2. Press [7 (Rehearsal)] or [REC].
The [REC] indicator will blink, indicating that you are in
rehearsal mode. In this state, nothing will be recorded when you
play the keyboard.
3. To return to record mode, press [7 (Rehearsal)] or [REC]
once again.
5. Press [EXIT] to close the Recording Select window.
145
Recording Songs
3. Use
or
to select the sequencer data (MIDI
messages) that will be recorded.
Reference_e.book 146 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Recording Songs
Inputting Data One Step at a
Time (Step Recording)
fig.10-11_50
Step Recording is the method of inputting notes and rests
individually, as if you were writing them onto a musical staff. In
addition to inputting notes, this method can also be used to create a
song by joining patterns.
Inputting Notes and Rests
1. Make sure that the preparations for recording have been
performed as described in “Before You Record a New Song”
(p. 141).
5. Specify the note that you want to input. Use the function
buttons ([6][7][8]) to select the desired parameter.
• Note Type
If you will be recording into an existing song, load the desired song
into internal memory (p. 149). Then use [FWD] or [BWD] to specify
the measure at which you want to start recording. The recordingstart measure is indicated by “M=” at the top of each PLAY screen.
2. Press [REC], and then [6 (Step Rec)].
The [REC] indicator will blink, and the Step Recording Standby
window appears.
fig.10-10_50
Specify the length of the notes that you want to input, in terms of
a note value. The length of the note value indicates the length
from one note-on to the next note-on.
,
Value:
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
• Gate Time
Specify the proportion of the gate time relative to the Note Type.
The gate time is the length between note-on and note-off. Specify
a lower value if you want the notes to be played staccato, or a
higher value if you want the notes to be played tenuto, or as a
slur. Normally, you will set this to about “80%.”
Value: 1–100%
• Input Velo
3. Make settings for step recording. Use [CURSOR] to move
the cursor to the desired parameter, and turn the VALUE dial
or press [INC]/[DEC] to set it.
• Rec Track
Specify the phrase track or pattern on which you want to record.
“TRK” will appear if you press [1 (Song List)], and “PTN” will
appear if you press [2 (PTN)].
Value: AUTO, TRK 1–TRK 16
PTN001–PTN100 (* when recording on a pattern)
• Rec Mode (Recording Mode)
Select how recording is to take place.
Value
MIX:
Mix-recording will be carried out. Normally, you will
record using this method. If a performance has already
been recorded on the recording-destination track, your
newly recorded performance will be added to the
existing performance without erasing it.
Specify the strength with which the note will be played. If you
want this to be the strength with which you actually pressed the
key, select “REAL.” Otherwise, use settings of p (piano)=60, mf
(mezzo forte)=90, or f (forte)=120 as general guidelines.
Value: 1–127
6. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to make the
setting.
7. Press
or
to move to the desired input location, and
press a note on the keyboard or a pad.
When you press a key or a pad, the input position will advance
by the value of the Note Type you specified. The velocities are
displayed as a bar graph.
fig.10-11a_50
REPLACE: Replace-recording will be carried out. If a performance
has already been recorded on the recording-destination
track, it will be erased as you record your new
performance. Use this when you want to re-record.
• Start Point
Specify the location (measure-beat-clock) at which recording will
begin.
4. Press [8 (Note)] or [PLAY].
The [REC] indicator will light, and the Step Recording screen
appears.
146
You can use the function buttons ([1][2][3][4][5]) to perform the
following operations.
Reference_e.book 147 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Recording Songs
Moving the display region
• Step Back
Cancel the previously input note.
Pressing
or
will move the displayed region of notes
upward or downward.
• Tie
Extend the length of the previously input note by the current
setting.
• Rest
Inputs a rest. First set the Note Type parameter to a length that is
the same as the rest you want to input, and then press [3 (Rest)].
• Zoom In
Narrow the range of keys shown in the display. Use this when
you want to view certain notes at greater magnification.
The Relation between Note Value Length
and Gate Time
The relation between the length of the note value and the gate
time is shown below. Since the Fantom-S’s sequencer uses a
TPQN (Ticks Per Quarter Note; i.e., resolution) of 480, a quarter
note gate time is 480 clocks.
• Zoom Out
Expand the range of notes shown in the display. Use this when
you want to see which notes have been input.
8. Repeat the above steps to continue inputting.
Note
Gate time
30
40
45
60
The previous value of each parameter is remembered. This means
that if you want to use the same settings as the previously input
note, there is no need to change the settings. Once you have set the
Gate Time parameter and Input Velocity parameter, it is not
normally necessary to change them, so all you have to do is set the
Step Time parameter and specify the pitch (note) of each note.
80
90
120
160
180
240
320
360
The note will not be finalized as long as you hold down the key.
This means that you will be able to modify the various
parameters of the note (Step Time, Gate Ratio, Velocity).
9. When you are finished step recording, press [STOP].
480
640
720
960
1920
The [REC] indicator will go dark.
If you are not happy with the results of the previous step
recording, you can press [MENU], and from the Menu window
that appears, select “Undo/Redo” to return to the state prior to
recording (Undo/Redo).
After executing Undo, you can use Redo to revert to the
previous state. After executing Undo, you can execute Redo by
performing the above procedure the above procedure once
again.
The gate time that is recorded in step recording will be the
original gate time value multiplied by the value of the Gate
Ratio parameter. For example, if the Gate Ratio parameter is
set to “80%,” inputting a quarter note will mean that the
gate time is 480 x 0.8=384.
Inputting a Chord
Press the chord. The cursor will move to the next step when you
release all keys or pads simultaneously.
Moving the input location
• Pressing
will move the input location forward by the
current Note Type value.
• Pressing
will move the input location backward by the
current Note Type value.
• Hold down [SHIFT] and press
will advance the input
location by one measure.
• Hold down [SHIFT] and press
will return the input location
by one measure.
147
Recording Songs
3840
Reference_e.book 148 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Recording Songs
Assigning a Pattern to a Phrase Track
You can create a song by combining previously recorded patterns.
This is done using step recording to assign patterns to a phrase track.
However, please be aware that the patterns themselves are not
placed in the phrase track. Rather, Pattern Call messages are
placed in the phrase track to specify which pattern should be played
back. This means that if you later modify the contents of a pattern,
the song playback will also be affected.
begin.
4. Press [7 (Ptn Call)].
5. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to select the
pattern number (1–100) that you want to assign to the
phrase track.
The pattern name of the selected pattern is displayed in
“Pattern.” “Length” shows the number of measures in the
pattern.
6. Press [8 (Put Ptn)].
When you assign a pattern to a phrase track, its pattern beat will
be ignored, and the pattern will use the time signature of the
beat track. If the pattern beat and the beat track have different
settings, the length of the measures will not match, and the
playback may become incorrectly aligned. If this occurs, respecify the time signature of the beat track (p. 141).
1. Make sure that the preparations for recording have been
performed as described in “Before You Record a New Song”
(p. 141).
If you will be recording into an existing song, load the desired song
into internal memory (p. 149). Then use [FWD] or [BWD] to specify
the measure at which you want to start recording. The recordingstart measure is indicated by “M=” at the top of each PLAY screen.
2. Press [REC], and then [6 (Step Rec)].
The [REC] indicator will blink, and the Step Recording Standby
window appears.
fig.10-10_50
3. Make settings for step recording. Use [CURSOR] to move
the cursor to the desired parameter, and turn the VALUE dial
or press [INC]/[DEC] to set it.
• Rec Track
Specify the phrase track or pattern on which you want to record.
“TRK” will appear if you press [1 (Song List)], and “PTN” will
appear if you press [2 (PTN)].
Value: AUTO, TRK 1–TRK 16
PTN001–PTN100 (* when recording on a pattern)
• Rec Mode (Recording Mode)
Select how recording is to take place.
Value
MIX:
Mix-recording will be carried out. Normally, you will
record using this method. If a performance has already
been recorded on the recording-destination track, your
newly recorded performance will be added to the
existing performance without erasing it.
REPLACE: Replace-recording will be carried out. If a performance
has already been recorded on the recording-destination
track, it will be erased as you record your new
performance. Use this when you want to re-record.
• Start Point
Specify the location (measure-beat-clock) at which recording will
148
A Pattern Call message for the pattern selected by the Pattern
parameter will be recorded. You will advance by the length of
the measures in that pattern, and will be ready to input the next
pattern.
If you input the wrong pattern, you can press [BWD] or [1 (Step
Back)] to delete the previously input Pattern Call message.
7. Repeat the above steps to assign additional patterns.
8. When you are finished with step recording, press [EXIT] or
[STOP].
The [REC] indicator will go dark.
If you are not satisfied with the step recording that you just
performed, press [MENU], and from the Menu window that
appears, select “Undo/Redo” to return to the state prior to
recording (Undo/Redo).
After executing Undo, you can use Redo to revert to the
previous state. After executing Undo, you can execute Redo by
performing the above procedure the above procedure once
again.
Reference_e.book 149 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing Songs
This chapter explains the procedure for editing songs.
fig.11-02.e
Indicates the name of the currently
selected song, the measure location,
the time signature, and the sequencer status.
Output destination
of each track
Track number
Loading the Song You Want to
Edit
Status of each track
When you edit a song, you’re modifying a song that’s already
recorded into internal memory. When you’re going to edit a song
saved to user memory or memory card, you have to first load it into
the internal memory.
Indicates Loop Play and
Loop Recording
on/off (LOOP).
Indicates the song’s
playback tempo.
Measure number
Measures
containing
sequencer data
Measures
containing no
sequencer data
The internal song will be lost if you turn power off or load
another song into internal memory. If internal memory contains
a song you wish to keep, you must save that song to user
memory or memory card (p. 168).
1. Press [SEQUENCER].
The Song Play screen appears.
fig.07-04.eps_50
If you play back the song while the Song Play screen is
displayed, the screen will scroll in keeping with the song
playback location.
Loading Individual Tracks/Patterns
of Song Data
If you have selected a song file (extension “.SVQ”) or Standard MIDI
File (extension “.MID”), you can load individual phrase tracks or
patterns.
2. Press [1 (Song List)].
The Song List screen appears.
1. After step 4 of “Loading the Song You Want to Edit,” press
[7 (Load Track)].
The Load Song File (Track) window appears.
2. Move the cursor to the left of “Source” (load source), and
select the track (TRK 1–16) or pattern (PTN001–100) that you
want to load.
fig.11-01_50
3. Move the cursor to the right of “Destination” (load
destination), and select the load-destination track (TRK 1–
16) or pattern (PTN001–100).
3. Press [1 (User)] or [2 (Card)] to select the loading
destination.
4. Use
or
4. Press [8 (Exec)] to execute the operation.
to select the song that you want to edit.
5. Press [8 (Load)].
A Message will ask you for confirmation.
6. Press [8 (Exec)].
When the song has finished loading, the performance data of the
loaded song will be displayed in the Song Play screen.
149
Editing Songs
* If you are loading from a Standard MIDI File, it is not possible to select
patterns (PTN001–100). Also, if you are loading from a Format 0
Standard MIDI File, this will be fixed at “TRK ALL,” and individual
tracks cannot be selected.
Reference_e.book 150 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing Songs
Using Different Sound Generators
for Each Track
By specifying the output destination for each track, you can use a
variety of sound generators when playing back a song.
1. Press [SEQUENCER] to access the Song Play screen.
2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor for the track whose
output destination you want to specify.
fig.11-03
Note that if you save a song with a Phrase track muted in the
Standard MIDI File format, that Phrase track’s data will not be
saved. If you save a song that has a muted Phrase track in the
MRC Pro song format, the mute status of the track will also be
saved.
If you set the tempo track (Tempo) “Status” to “MUTE,” the
tempo track will be muted. If tempo changes have been recorded
in a song, but you want to play the song at a fixed tempo, you
can mute the tempo track.
Assigning Markers (Locate
Positions) to a Song
Markers can be assigned to any location in a song. These are called
Locate Positions. Normally, locations in a song are indicated as
“measure-beat-clock,” but a locate position is also displayed as an
absolute time of “hours:minutes:seconds:frames.”
3. By turning the VALUE dial or by pressing [INC]/[DEC], set
the value.
OFF:
The track will not be sounded.
INT:
The track will be sounded by the Fantom-S’s internal
sound generator.
MIDI:
The track will be sounded by an external sound
generator connected to the MIDI OUT connector.
BOTH: The track will be sounded by both the internal and
external sound generators.
Assigning a Locate Position
Up to four locate positions can be assigned in each song.
It is not possible to assign a locate position to a pattern.
1. Load the song in which you want to specify a locate position
(p. 149).
2. Press [SEQUENCER].
Silencing the Playback of a Track
(Mute)
3. Press [6 (Locate)].
The Locate window appears.
fig.11-08_50
If you wish to silence specific instruments during playback, you can
mute the appropriate Phrase track containing that sequencer data.
1. Press [SEQUENCER] to access the Song Play screen.
2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor for the track that you
want to silence.
fig.11-04
4. Move the cursor to the “measure” or “beat” value of the
locate number that you want to set.
5. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to set each value.
6. Hold down [5 (Set)] and press [1 (Set1)]–[4 (Set4)], the locate
position will be stored as the current location of the song.
You can also set this by pressing [5 (SET)] while you listen
during song playback.
Tracks in which no sequencer data has been recorded are
displayed as “----.”
3. Turn the VALUE dial or press [DEC] to select “MUTE.”
150
Reference_e.book 151 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing Songs
Moving to a Locate Position
Use the following procedure to change the song location to a Locate
Position.
Editing Sequencer Data Over
the Specified Range
(Track Edit)
1. Access the Locate window.
2. Press [1 (Jump1)] – [4 (Jump4)].
You will move to the specified locate position.
You can hold down [SHIFT] and press [BWD] to jump to the
preceding location position, or hold down [SHIFT] and press
[FWD] to jump to the next locate position.
Track Edit lets you edit areas of sequencer data that you specify.
Basic Operation for Track Editing
1. Access the Song Edit screen, and then load the song you
want to edit (p. 149).
While editing a pattern, press [SEQUENCER] and then press [2
(PTN)] to access the Pattern Edit screen.
Specifying the Area of a Song that
will Repeat (Loop Points)
fig.11-10.e
Song number
Indicates the name of the currently
selected song, the measure location,
the time signature, and the sequencer status.
Song name
When using Loop Play or Loop Recording, you can use the loop
points you specify here to specify the repeated area, as an alternative
to repeating the specified number of measures.
Indicates Loop Play and
Loop Recording
on/off (LOOP).
Indicates the song’s
playback tempo.
Measure number
It is not possible to assign a loop point to a pattern.
Measures
containing
sequencer data
1. Load the song for which you want to set loop points (p. 149).
2. Press [SEQUENCER].
Measures
containing no
sequencer data
3. Press [4 (Loop)].
The Loop window appears.
fig.11-09_50
Current location
• Repeat
Select the number of repeats (1–99). If you want repetition to
continue until you press [STOP], set this to “INFINIT.”
• Start Point
Specify the location at which repetition is to begin.
If you press [5 (Set Start)], the current location of the song will be
set as the starting location.
If you select a song that has not been loaded into internal
memory, the display will ask you for confirmation as follows:
The Song “****” is not Internal Song. Load anyway for Song
Edit? If you want to erase the song from the internal memory
and load the new song, press [8 (OK)]. If you decide not to erase
the song from the internal memory, press [EXIT].
2. Press [SEQUENCER] and then press [8 (Track Edit)].
The Track Edit window appears.
Editing Songs
4. Move the cursor to the desired parameter, and turn the
VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to make the setting.
fig.11-10a_50
• End Point
Specify the location at which repetition will end. The location
you specify here will not be included in the repeated area.
If you press [6 (Set End)], the current location of the song will be
set as the ending location.
5. If you press [7 (Loop)] to assign a check mark (✔), looping
will be turned on.
151
Reference_e.book 152 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing Songs
3. Press
or
, and then press [8 (Exec)] to select the
desired function.
Quantize➝p. 152
Erase➝p. 154
Delete➝p. 155
Copy➝p. 155
Insert Measure➝p. 156
Transpose➝p. 156
Change Velocity➝p. 157
Aligning a Song’s Timing (Quantize)
In the chapter “Recording Songs” (p. 141), we explained
Recording Quantize, which lets you quantize during realtime
recording. Alternatively, it is also possible to quantize a song that
has already been recorded.
The Fantom-S has a Preview function that allows playing back the
results of a Quantize operation while you are still setting parameters
(before actual execution). This helps to make optimal Quantize
settings.
Change Channel➝p. 158
Change Duration➝p. 158
Merge➝p. 159
Extract➝p. 159
Shift Clock➝p. 160
Data Thin➝p. 161
Exchange➝p. 161
Time Fit➝p. 162
Truncate➝p. 162
The Quantize operation will correct only the timing at which notes
were pressed (note-on) and released (note-off), and will not correct
any other sequencer data. This means that if you record MIDI
messages such as bend range or modulation along with notes,
quantization can cause the notes to go out of sync with the MIDI
messages, skewing timing. To avoid such problems it is better to
record non-keyboard data afterward, using mix recording, etc.
fig.11-13_50
For details on the setting windows of each track editing function,
refer to the following explanations of each function.
4. Set the parameters for each function. Use [CURSOR] to
move the cursor to the desired parameter, and turn the
VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to set the value. First check
the region that is to be affected by the editing operation, and
then make corrections if you want to change it.
5. Press [8 (Exec)] to execute the operation.
When the operation is completed, the display will briefly
indicate “Completed!”
For details on the settings, refer to “Basic Operation for Track
Editing” (p. 151)
Track / Pattern
Sets the phrase track(s) or pattern that is to be quantized.
Value
• If you decide not to execute the operation, press [7 (Cancel)].
TRK ALL: Phrase tracks 1–16
• If you are not satisfied with the results of executing the function,
you can press [MENU], and from the Menu window that
appears, select “Undo Track Edit” to return to the state prior to
executing the operation (Undo/Redo).
After executing Undo, you can use Redo to revert to the
previous state. After executing Undo, you can execute Redo by
performing the above procedure the above procedure once
again.
TRK 1–TRK 16: The specified phrase track
PTN001–PTN100: The specified pattern
Measure, For (Edit Range)
Sets the range of measures that are to be quantized. If you set “For”
to “ALL,” all measures will be specified.
Quantize Type
Specifies the Quantize range.
Value
GRID: Grid Quantize will be applied to recording. Since the notes
will be adjusted to the timing of the specified note value, you can use
this when you want drums or bass (for example) to play in an
accurate rhythm.
fig.10-05.e
Grid quantize with Resolution = 152
Reference_e.book 153 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing Songs
SHUFFLE: Shuffle Quantize will be applied to recording. Use this
when you want to produce a “shuffle” or “swing” rhythmic feel.
fig.10-06.e
Quantize Template (Quantize Template)
Specifies the template you wish to use.
Here is a list of preset groove templates.
TEMPLATE: The Fantom-S provides 71 quantize templates. These
templates contain various quantize settings for applying rhythmic
‘feels’ of many different musical categories. Select the template you
want for quantization.
* If your sequencer data notes are too far off from accurate time, Template
Quantize may not work that efficiently so you won’t achieve the desired
results. If this is the case, apply Grid Quantize to your sequencer data
first to lose timing mistakes.
Resolution (Grid Quantize Resolution)
This parameter is used when Grid Quantize is selected. Specifies
quantization time interval as a note value. Choose a Resolution that
matches the smallest note in the area you’re quantizing.
Value:
,
,
,
,
,
,
Strength (Grid Quantize Strength)
This parameter is used when Grid Quantize is selected. This
parameter specifies a percentage of how note timing will be
corrected toward the timing interval that is specified by the
Resolution parameter. With a setting of “100%,” the note will move
all the way to the nearest timing interval of the Grid Resolution
setting. A setting of “0%” will not change note timing at all.
Resolution (Shuffle Quantize Resolution)
This parameter is used when Shuffle Quantize is selected. Specifies
quantization time interval as a note value.
Value:
,
Rate (Shuffle Quantize Rate)
This parameter is used when Shuffle Quantize is selected. Specifies
how far apart you want a down-beat specified by the Shuffle
Resolution parameter to be from the up-beat that immediately
follows. By shifting the timing of an up-beat, you can create a
“swing” feel. A setting of “50%” will place the timing of the up-beat
note at the exact mid point between the down-beat and the next
down-beat. A setting of “0%” will move the up-beat note to the same
timing as the previous down-beat. A setting of “100%” will move it
to the same timing as the following down-beat.
VALUE:0–100%
Original performance data
Rate= 25%
Rate= 50%
Rate= 75%
Rate=100%
Up
beat
Up
beat
Up
beat
Up
beat
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
Dance (small dynamics)
Dance (large dynamics)
Dance (light swing)
Dance (heavy swing)
Dance (dragging beats, small dynamics)
Dance (dragging beats, large dynamics)
Dance (dragging beats, light swing)
Dance (dragging beats, heavy swing)
Dance (pushing beats, small dynamics)
Dance (pushing beats, large dynamics)
Dance (pushing beats, light swing)
Dance (pushing beats, heavy swing)
Fusion (small dynamics)
Fusion (large dynamics)
Fusion (light swing)
Fusion (heavy swing)
Fusion (dragging beats, small dynamics)
Fusion (dragging beats, large dynamics)
Fusion (dragging beats, light swing)
Fusion (dragging beats, heavy swing)
Fusion (pushing beats, small dynamics)
Fusion (pushing beats, large dynamics)
Fusion (pushing beats, light swing)
Fusion (pushing beats, heavy swing)
Reggae (small dynamics)
Reggae (large dynamics)
Reggae (light swing)
Reggae (heavy swing)
Reggae (dragging beats, small dynamics)
Reggae (dragging beats, large dynamics)
Reggae (dragging beats, light swing)
Reggae (dragging beats, heavy swing)
Reggae (pushing beats, small dynamics)
Reggae (pushing beats, large dynamics)
Reggae (pushing beats, light swing)
Reggae (pushing beats, heavy swing)
Pops (small dynamics)
Pops (large dynamics)
Pops (light swing)
Pops (heavy swing)
Pops (dragging beats, small dynamics)
Pops (dragging beats, large dynamics)
Pops (dragging beats, light swing)
Pops (dragging beats, heavy swing)
Pops (pushing beats, small dynamics)
Pops (pushing beats, large dynamics)
Pops (pushing beats, light swing)
Pops (pushing beats, heavy swing)
Rhumba (small dynamics)
Rhumba (large dynamics)
Rhumba (light swing)
Rhumba (heavy swing)
Rhumba (dragging beats, small dynamics)
Rhumba (dragging beats, large dynamics)
Rhumba (dragging beats, light swing)
Rhumba (dragging beats, heavy swing)
Rhumba (pushing beats, small dynamics)
Rhumba (pushing beats, large dynamics)
Rhumba (pushing beats, light swing)
Rhumba (pushing beats, heavy swing)
Samba (for Pandeiro, etc.)
Samba (for Surdo, Timbale)
Axe (for Caixa)
Axe (for Surdo)
Salsa (for Cascala)
Salsa (for Conga)
Triplets
Quintuplets
Sextuplets
Septuplets over two beats
Lagging triplets
Editing Songs
Shuffle quantize with Rate = 75%
153
Reference_e.book 154 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing Songs
Timing (Quantize Timing)
This specifies how much a note will move toward the timing
interval of the template you pick. At a setting of 100%, the
note will be perfectly timed with the template. At a setting of
0%, the note will not move at all.
Erasing Unwanted Performance
Data (Erase)
This function erases all the sequencer data inside the specified area.
As the erased data is replaced by rests, the original measures will
remain.
fig.11-15_50
Range Min, Range Max
Specifies the range of note numbers to be quantized.
For example, if you want to quantize the range between C3 and C4,
set “Note Min” to “C3,” and set “Note Max” to “C4.”
You can also specify the key range by pressing keys on the
keyboard.
MIDI Channel
Specifies the MIDI channel(s) of the notes to be quantized.
If you wish to quantize all notes, set this parameter to “ALL.” When
quantizing only the notes of a specific MIDI channel, select that channel.
Value: ALL, 1–16
Preview Function
The Preview function allows you to hear how quantizing will
work while you are still setting Quantize parameters (before
you execute operation). This is called the Preview function. If
you modify parameter values during preview playback, the
next preview playback will include those latest value changes.
Try various parameter settings to find the one that works best.
Pattern Call events assigned to a phrase track or muted
phrase tracks cannot be previewed.
For details on the settings, refer to “Basic Operation for Track
Editing” (p. 151)
Track / Pattern
Specifies the track(s) or pattern that is to be erased.
Value
ALL: Phrase tracks 1–16, the beat track, and the tempo track
TRK 1–TRK 16:
The specified phrase track
TEMPO:
Tempo track
PTN001–PTN100: The specified pattern
Measure, For (Edit Range)
Specifies the range of measures that are to be erased. If you set “For”
to “ALL,” all measures will be specified.
Status
Selects the type of data to be erased.
Value
Pressing [PLAY] when the Track Edit (Quantize) window is
displayed selects Preview mode. The two measures from the
current location of the song will play back repeatedly. The preview
start location can also be specified by pressing [FWD] or [BWD]. To
exit Preview mode, press [STOP].
ALL:
All types of sequencer data
NOTE: Note
P.AFT: Polyphonic Aftertouch
C.C:
Controller numbers
PROG: Program numbers
C.AFT: Channel Aftertouch
BEND: Pitch Bend
EXC:
System Exclusive messages
Tune: Tune Request
PTN:
Pattern Call Message data
If the Track parameter is set to “TEMPO,” the Status parameter
will not be available.
154
Reference_e.book 155 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing Songs
Range Min, Range Max
Copying Phrases (Copy)
If you have set the Status parameter to “NOTE,” “P.AFT,” “C.C,” or
“PROG,” specify the range. Set “Range Min” to the lowest value of
the range, and “Range Max” to the highest value of the range.
This function copies a specified area of sequencer data. It is convenient
for repeating the same phrase several times. You can copy patterns to a
phrase track, or copy data from a phrase track to a pattern.
fig.11-17_50
• To erase all notes or polyphonic aftertouch data, set “Range
Min” to “C -1” and “Range Max” to “G9.” To erase C4, set
“Range Min” and “Range Max” to “C4.” To erase C3 through
C4, set “Range Min” to “C 3” and “Range Max” to “C4.”
• To erase all controller numbers, set “Range Min” to “0” and
“Range Max” to “127.” To erase all program numbers, set
“Range Min” to “1” and “Range Max” to “128.” To erase number
4, set “Range Min” and “Range Max” to “4.” To erase numbers 3
through 14, set “Range Min” to “3” and “Range Max” to “14.”
MIDI Channel
For details on the settings, refer to “Basic Operation for Track
Editing” (p. 151)
Selects the MIDI channel of the data to be erased.
Src Track / Pattern (Source Track / Pattern)
When you want to erase all sequencer data, set this parameter to
“ALL.” To erase sequencer data of one specific MIDI channel only,
select that MIDI channel.
Specifies the copy-source track(s) or pattern.
Value: ALL, 1–16
Value
ALL:
Phrase tracks 1–16, the beat track, and the tempo track
TRK 1–TRK 16:
TEMPO:
If you set the Track parameter to “TEMPO,” or if the Status
parameter is set to “EXC,” “TUNE” or “PTN,” the Channel
parameter will not be available.
Deleting Unwanted Measures (Delete)
This function deletes a specified area of sequencer data, and moves
the subsequent data to fill the gap. As a result, the measure length
will be shortened by the number of deleted measures.
fig.11-16_50
The specified phrase track
Tempo track
PTN001–PTN100: The specified pattern
Src Measure, For (Edit Range)
Specifies the range of copy-source measures. If you set “For” to
“ALL,” all measures will be specified.
Dst Track/ Pattern (Destination Track/Pattern)
Check/modify the copy-destination track or pattern.
Value
ALL:
Phrase tracks 1–16, the beat track, and the tempo track
TRK 1–TRK 16:
TEMPO:
The specified phrase track
Tempo track
For details on the settings, refer to “Basic Operation for Track
Editing” (p. 151)
Track / Pattern
Specifies the track(s) or pattern that is to be deleted.
Value
ALL:
Phrase tracks 1–16, the beat track, and the tempo track
TRK 1–TRK 16:
TEMPO:
The specified phrase track
Tempo track
PTN001–PTN100: The specified pattern
Measure, For (Edit Range)
Specifies the range of measures that are to be deleted. If you set
“For” to “ALL,” all measures will be specified.
• If you set the source track to “ALL,” the destination track can be
set to either “ALL” or “PTN001–PTN100.” If you select
“PTN001–PTN100,” the data from the 16 phrase tracks will be
merged as it is copied.
• If “TEMPO” is selected as the source track, then only “Tempo”
can be selected for the destination track.
Dst Measure (Destination Measure)
Specifies the copy-destination measure.
If you want the copy destination to be right after the last measure of
a song, set this parameter to “END.”
Copy Mode
Specifies whether you want to preserve the existing data in the copy
destination when copying.
Value
MIX:
Combines the data from the copy source with the
existing data in the copy destination.
155
Editing Songs
PTN001–PTN100: The specified pattern
Reference_e.book 156 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing Songs
REPLACE: Musical data in the copy destination will be erased (i.e.,
overwritten) when the copy takes place. Only the
sequencer data of the MIDI channels specified by the
Channel parameter will be overwritten, and data of
other MIDI channels will remain.
Copy Times
Specifies the number of times that the data will be copied to the copy
destination.
Inserting a Blank Measure
(Insert)
This function inserts blank measures into a specified song position.
As you can set the time signature of the blank measures, this is
convenient when inserting a phrase having a different time signature
in the middle of a song.
fig.11-18_50
Status
Selects the type of data to be copied.
Value
ALL:
All types of sequencer data
NOTE: Note
For details on the settings, refer to “Basic Operation for Track
Editing” (p. 151)
P.AFT: Polyphonic Aftertouch
C.C:
Controller numbers
PROG: Program numbers
Track / Pattern (Source Track)
C.AFT: Channel Aftertouch
Specifies the track(s) or pattern into which blank measures will be
inserted.
BEND: Pitch Bend
Value
EXC:
System Exclusive messages
Tune: Tune Request
PTN:
Pattern Call Message data
ALL:
Phrase tracks 1–16, the beat track, and the tempo track
TRK 1–TRK 16:
TEMPO:
The specified phrase track
Tempo track
PTN001–PTN100: The specified pattern
If the source track is set to “TEMPO,” the Status parameter will
not be available.
Range Min, Range Max
If you have selected “NOTE,” “P.AFT,” “C.C,” or “PROG” for the
Status parameter, specify the range. Set “Range Min” to the lowest
value of the range, and “Range Max” to the highest value of the
range.
• To copy all notes or polyphonic aftertouch data, set “Range Min”
to “C-1” and “Range Max” to“G9.” To copy C4, set “Range Min”
and “Range Max” to “C4.” To copy C3 through C4, set “Range
Min” to “C3” and “Range Max” to “C4.”
• To copy all controller numbers, set “Range Min” to “0” and
“Range Max” to “127.” To copy all program numbers, set
“Range Min” to “1” and “Range Max” to “128.” To copy number
4, set “Range Min” and “Range Max” to “4.” To copy numbers 3
through 14, set “Range Min” to “3” and “Range Max” to “14.”
MIDI Channel
Measure, For (Edit Range)
Specifies the measure location at which the blank measures are to be
inserted, and the number of blank measures to be inserted.
Beat
In general, the time signature of the measure immediately before
insertion will be used for the blank measures. To change the time
signature of the blank measures to be inserted, use the Beat
parameter.
Beat can be specified only when you have set the Track
parameter to “ALL.”
Transpose the Key (Transpose)
This transposes the pitch of notes within a specified area, over a +/127 semitone range. Use this function to modulate from one key to
another in a song, or to transpose the entire song.
fig.11-19_50
Selects the MIDI channel of the data to be copied.
When you want to copy all the sequencer data, set this parameter to
“ALL.” To copy only the sequencer data of a specific MIDI channel,
select the MIDI channel.
Value: ALL, 1–16
If you set the source track to “TEMPO,” or if the Status
parameter is set to “EXC,” “TUNE” or “PTN,” the Channel
parameter will not be available.
156
For details on the settings, refer to “Basic Operation for Track
Editing” (p. 151)
Reference_e.book 157 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing Songs
Track / Pattern (Source Track)
Sets the phrase track(s) or pattern that is to be transposed.
Value
Changing the Velocity (Volume)
(Change Velocity)
ALL:
Phrase Tracks 1–16
This function modifies the keyboard playing dynamics (velocity) of a
specified note area.
TRK 1–TRK 16:
The specified phrase track
fig.11-20_50
PTN001–PTN100: The specified pattern
Measure, For (Edit Range)
Sets the range of measures that are to be transposed. If you set “For”
to “ALL,” all measures will be specified.
Range Min, Range Max
Bias
Specifies the transpose amount in semitone steps. Set a “+” (positive)
value to raise the pitch, or a “-” (negative) value to lower the pitch. If
you do not want to transpose, set this to “0.”
Value: -127– +127
MIDI Channel
Specifies the MIDI channel(s) of the notes to be transposed.
Set this parameter to “ALL” for transposing all notes. When
transposing only the notes of specific MIDI channel(s), select the
MIDI channel(s) using this parameter.
Value: ALL, 1–16
If You Want to Lower the Bass Sound One
Octave...
If your bass is played one octave higher than the staff notation,
use the Transpose function to lower it one octave.
To lower the bass sound one octave, set the Range parameter to
“Lowest–Highest” for the bass part, and set the Bias parameter
to “-12.”
When You Want to Change Percussion
Sounds...
You can also use the Transpose function to change percussion
sounds.
Suppose you want to change conga to tom. If the conga sound is
assigned to the D4 key, and the tom sound is assigned to the C3
key, set the Range parameter to “D4–D4” and the Bias
parameter to “-14.”
For details on the settings, refer to “Basic Operation for Track
Editing” (p. 151)
Track / Pattern (Source Track)
Specifies the phrase track(s) or pattern whose velocity will be
changed.
Value
ALL:
Phrase Tracks 1–16
TRK 1–TRK 16:
The specified phrase track
PTN001–PTN100: The specified pattern
Measure, For (Edit Range)
Specifies the range of measures whose velocity will be changed. If
you set “For” to “ALL,” all measures will be specified.
Bias
Use this parameter to add a fixed bias amount to all velocities. If you
want to increase the velocity values by 10, set this to “+10.”
Value: -99– +99
Magnify
Set this parameter if increases or decreases in velocity variations are
desired. For less velocity variation, use settings of “99%” or less. For
more velocity variation, set it to “101%” or greater. With a setting of
“100%,” velocity values do not change.
Value: 0–200%
Range Min, Range Max
Specifies the range of note numbers for which velocity will be
modified. For example, if you want to modify the velocity of notes in
the range of C3 through C4, set “Range Min” to “C3” and “Range
Max” to “C4.” You can also specify the key range by pressing keys
on the keyboard.
MIDI Channel
Specifies the MIDI channel(s) of notes for which velocity will be
modified.
To modify velocity for all notes, set this parameter to “ALL.” When
modifying the velocity for only the notes of a specific MIDI channel,
select that MIDI channel using this parameter.
Value: ALL, 1–16
157
Editing Songs
Specifies the range of note numbers to be transposed. For example, if
you want to transpose notes in the range of C3 through C4, set
“Range Min” to “C3” and “Range Max” to “C4.” You can also
specify the key range by pressing keys on the keyboard.
Reference_e.book 158 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing Songs
Changing the MIDI Channel
(Change Channel)
This function transfers the MIDI channel of a specified area of
sequencer data into a different MIDI channel.
fig.11-21_50
Min” and “Range Max” to “4.” To change numbers 3 through 14,
set “Range Min” to “3” and “Range Max” to “14.”
Src Channel, Dst Channel (MIDI Channel)
Set Src Channel to the MIDI channel that you want to change, and
set Dst Channel to the MIDI channel to which it will be changed.
If you have selected ALL for the source MIDI channel, the sequencer
data of all MIDI channels will be combined into the destination MIDI
channel.
Value: ALL, 1–16
For details on the settings, refer to “Basic Operation for Track
Editing” (p. 151)
Track / Pattern (Source Track)
Specifies the phrase track(s) or pattern in which the MIDI channel
will be changed.
Value
ALL:
Phrase Tracks 1–16
TRK 1–TRK 16:
The specified phrase track
It is not possible to select “ALL” for the destination MIDI
channel.
Modifying the Length of Notes
(Change Duration)
This function modifies the duration (time from note-on to note-off)
of notes within a specified area. Depending on the setting, you can
also create staccato or tenuto.
fig.11-22_50
PTN001–PTN100: The specified pattern
Measure, For (Edit Range)
Specifies the range of measures in which the MIDI channel will be
changed. If you set “For” to “ALL,” all measures will be specified.
Status
Selects the type of data for which you wish to change the MIDI
channel.
For details on the settings, refer to “Basic Operation for Track
Editing” (p. 151)
Value
ALL:
All following sequencer data types
NOTE: Note
P.AFT: Polyphonic Aftertouch
C.C:
Controller numbers
Track / Pattern (Source Track)
Specifies the phrase track(s) or pattern whose durations will be
changed.
Value
PROG: Program numbers
ALL:
Phrase Tracks 1–16
C.AFT: Channel Aftertouch
TRK 1–TRK 16:
The specified phrase track
BEND: Pitch Bend
PTN001–PTN100: The specified pattern
Range Min, Range Max
Measure, For (Edit Range)
If you have set the Status parameter to “NOTE,” “P.AFT,” “C.C,” or
“PROG,” you can specify the range of data. Set “Range Min” to the
lowest value of the range, and “Range Max” to the highest value of
the range.
Specifies the range of measures whose durations will be changed. If
you set “For” to “ALL,” all measures will be specified.
• To change the MIDI channel of all notes or polyphonic
aftertouch data, set “Range Min” to “C -1” and “Range Max” to
“G9.” To change the MIDI channel of C4, set “Range Min” and
“Range Max” to “C4.” To change C3 through C4,” set “Range
Min” to “C3” and “Range Max” to “C4.”
• To change the MIDI channel of all controller numbers, set
“Range Min” to “0” and “Range Max” to “127.” To change the
MIDI channel of all program numbers, set “Range Min” to “1”
and “Range Max” to “128.” To change number 4, set “Range
158
Bias
Set this parameter if you wish to increase or decrease all durations
by a fixed amount. If you want to extend all duration by 10, set this
to “+10.”
Value: -4800– +4800
Reference_e.book 159 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing Songs
Magnify
Set this parameter if you wish to increase or decrease durations by a
specified ratio. When set to “100%,” no change is made. A value of
“101%” or higher increases the duration; values of “99%” or lower
decrease the duration. For example, to halve duration, set this
parameter to “50%.” To double durations, set this parameter to
“200%.”
Value: 0–200%
Range Min, Range Max
Extracting and Moving a Part of
Sequencer Data (Extract)
This function extracts a specified sequencer data area from a phrase
track or pattern and moves it to the same Song position of another
phrase track or pattern. Additionally, just as with Standard MIDI
File Format 0, when sequencer data from multiple MIDI channels is
recorded on one track, you can also assign one MIDI channel to a
single phrase track.
fig.11-24_50
Specifies the range of note numbers for which duration will be
modified. For example, if you want to change the duration of notes
in the range of C3 to C4, set “Range Min” to “C3” and “Range Min”
to “C4.” You can also specify the key range by pressing keys on the
keyboard.
MIDI Channel
Specifies the MIDI channel(s) of notes for which duration will be
modified.
If you wish to modify the duration for notes of all MIDI channels, set
this parameter to ALL. When changing the duration for notes of a
specific MIDI channel only, select that MIDI channel using this
parameter.
Value: ALL, 1–16
For details on the settings, refer to “Basic Operation for Track
Editing” (p. 151)
Src Track / Src Pattern (Source Track)
Specifies the phrase track or pattern from which the sequencer data
will be extracted. After Extract is executed, the selected sequencer
data no longer remains on this phrase track or pattern.
Value
Combining Two Phrase Tracks or
Patterns into One (Merge)
The sequencer data of two phrase tracks or patterns will be
combined into one.
fig.11-23_50
TRK 1–TRK 16:
The specified phrase track
PTN001–PTN100: The specified pattern
Measure, For (Edit Range)
Specifies the range of measures from which sequencer data will be
extracted. If you set “for” to “ALL,” all measures will be specified.
Dst Track / Pattern (Destination Track/Pattern)
Specifies the move-destination track or pattern.
Value
Src Track / Src Pattern (Source Track)
Specifies the phrase track or pattern that is to be merged. After the
Merge operation has been executed, no sequencer data will remain
in this track.
Value
TRK 1–TRK 16:
The specified phrase track
PTN001–PTN100: The specified pattern
Dst Track / Pattern (Destination Track/Pattern)
Specifies the merge-destination phrase track or pattern. After the
Merge operation has been executed, the sequencer data will be
combined into this track.
Value
TRK 1–TRK 16:
The specified phrase track
PTN001–PTN100: The specified pattern
ALL:
According to its MIDI channel, the sequencer
data will be divided among phrase tracks 1–16.
TRK 1–TRK 16:
The specified phrase track
PTN001–PTN100: The specified pattern
Extract Mode
Editing Songs
For details on the settings, refer to “Basic Operation for Track
Editing” (p. 151)
Specifies whether you want to keep the sequencer data at the
destination.
Value
MIX:
The data at the destination will combine with the
extracted data.
REPLACE: The data at the destination will be erased and replaced
by the extracted data.
If you select “REPLACE,” only the sequencer data on the MIDI
channel specified by the Channel parameter will be the object of
the operation. Sequencer data of all other MIDI channels will be
unaffected.
159
Reference_e.book 160 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing Songs
Status
fig.11-25_50
Selects the type of data to be extracted.
Value
ALL:
All types of sequencer data
NOTE: Note
P.AFT: Polyphonic Aftertouch
C.C:
Controller numbers
PROG: Program numbers
C.AFT: Channel Aftertouch
For details on the settings, refer to “Basic Operation for Track
Editing” (p. 151)
BEND: Pitch Bend
EXC:
System Exclusive messages
Tune: Tune Request
PTN:
Pattern Call Message data
Range Min, Range Max
If you set the Status parameter to “NOTE,” “P.AFT,” “C.C,” or “PROG,”
specify the range of data. Set “Range Min” to the lowest value of the
range, and “Range Max” to the highest value of the range.
• To extract all notes or polyphonic aftertouch data, set “Range
Min” to “C -1,” and “Range Max” to “G9.” To extract C4, set
“Range Min” and “Range Max” to “C4.” To extract C3 through
C4, set “Range Min” to “C3” and “Range Max” to “C4.”
• To extract all controller numbers, set “Range Min” to “0” and
“Range Max” to “127.” To extract all program numbers, set
“Range Min” to “1” and “Range Max” to “128.” To extract
number 4, set “Range Min” and “Range Max” to “4.” To extract
numbers 3 through 14, set “Range Min” to “3” and “Range Max”
to “14.”
Track / Pattern (Source Track)
Specifies the track(s) or pattern whose sequencer data will be moved
in units of one clock.
Value
Phrase tracks 1–16, the beat track, and the tempo track
ALL:
TRK 1–TRK 16:
TEMPO:
The specified phrase track
Tempo clock
PTN001–PTN100: The specified pattern
Measure, For (Edit Range)
Specifies the range of measures in which the sequencer data will be
moved in units of one clock. If you set “For” to “ALL,” all measures
will be specified.
Bias
Specify the amount (number of clocks) by which the sequencer data
will be moved.
Value: -4800– +4800
Status
MIDI Channel
Selects the type of data to be shifted in time.
Selects the MIDI channel(s) of the data to be extracted.
Value
To extract all sequencer data, set this parameter to ALL. To extract
just the sequencer data of a specific MIDI channel, select that MIDI
channel.
ALL:
Value: ALL, 1–16
C.C:
All types of sequencer data
NOTE: Note
P.AFT: Polyphonic Aftertouch
Controller numbers
PROG: Program numbers
If you set the Status parameter to “EXC,” “TUNE” or “PTN,” the
Channel parameter will not be available.
C.AFT: Channel Aftertouch
BEND: Pitch Bend
EXC:
Shifting Performance Data Forward
and Back (Shift Clock)
This function shifts the timing of sequencer data backward or
forward in time within a specified area in steps of 1 clock. Slight
shifts of timing can speed up or drag performance.
System Exclusive messages
Tune: Tune Request
PTN:
Pattern Call Message data
If the Track parameter is set to “TEMPO,” the Status parameter
will not be available.
Range Min, Range Max
When this function is executed, data that would be moved to a
point before the beginning of the song will automatically shift to
the beginning of the song. If data would be moved to a point
past the end of the song, additional new measures will be
created automatically as needed. The time signature of the newly
created measures will be the same as that of the measure
immediately preceding.
160
If you set the Status parameter to “NOTE,” “P.AFT,” “C.C,” or
“PROG,” specify the range of data. Set “Range Min” to the lowest
value of the range, and “Range Max” to the highest value of the
range.
Reference_e.book 161 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing Songs
Data Thin Time
• To shift all notes or polyphonic aftertouch data, set “Range Min”
to “C -1” and “Range Max” to “G9.” To shift C4, set “Range
Min” and “Range Max” to “C4.” To shift C3 through C4, set
“Range Min” to “C3” and “Range Max” to “C4.”
• To shift all controller numbers, set “Range Min” to “0” and
“Range Max” to “127.” To shift all program numbers, set “Range
Min” to “1” and “Range Max” to “128.” To shift number 4, set
“Range Min” and “Range Max” to “4.” To shift numbers 3
through 14, set “Range Min” to “3” and “Range Max” to “14.”
MIDI Channel
Selects the MIDI channel of the data to be shifted in time.
To shift clocks of all sequencer data, set this parameter to ALL. To
shift the sequencer data clock of just one specific MIDI channel,
select that MIDI channel.
Value: ALL, 1–16
If you set the Track parameter to “TEMPO,” or if the Status
parameter is set to “EXC,” “TUNE” or “PTN,” the Channel
parameter will not be available.
Thinning Out the Sequencer Data
(Data Thin)
Continuously variable controllers such as aftertouch, pitch bend, and
expression tend to create unexpectedly large amounts of data when
operated. Data Thin will strip out redundant data to increase the
amount of memory available for the sequencer.
fig.11-26_50
If you are thinning data that changes gradually over time, use higher
settings. If you don’t want to thin that much data even though the
changes are gradual, use lower settings.
Status
Selects the type of data to be thinned.
Value
ALL:
All following sequencer data types
P.AFT: Polyphonic Aftertouch
C.C:
Controller numbers
C.AFT: Channel Aftertouch
BEND: Pitch Bend
Range Min, Range Max
If you set the Status parameter to “P.AFT” or “C.C,” specify the
range of data. Set “Range Min” to the lowest value of the range, and
“Range Max” to the highest value of the range.
• To thin out all polyphonic aftertouch data, set “Range Min” to
“C -1” and “Range Max” to “G9.” To thin out C4, set “Range
Min” and “Range Max” to “C4.” To thin out C3 through C4, set
“Range Min” to “C3” and “Range Max” to “C4.”
• To thin out all controller numbers, set “Range Min” to “0” and
“Range Max” to “127.” To thin out number 4, set “Range Min”
and “Range Max” to “4.” To thin out numbers 3 through 14, set
“Range Min” to “3” and “Range Max” to “14.”
MIDI Channel
Selects MIDI channel of the data to be thinned.
To thin all sequencer data, set this parameter to ALL. To thin
sequencer data of just one specific MIDI channel, select that MIDI
channel.
Value: ALL, 1–16
For details on the settings, refer to “Basic Operation for Track
Editing” (p. 151)
Swapping Two Phrase Tracks or
Patterns (Exchange)
The phrase tracks or patterns will be exchanged in their entirety.
TRK 1–TRK 16:
Specifies the track(s) or pattern whose sequencer data will be thinned.
PTN001–PTN100: The specified pattern
Value
fig.11-27_50
Editing Songs
Value
Track / Pattern (Source Track)
The specified phrase track
ALL: Phrase tracks 1–16, the beat track, and the tempo track
TRK 1–TRK 16:
The specified phrase track
PTN001–PTN100: The specified pattern
Measure, For (Edit Range)
Specifies the range of measures whose sequencer data will be
thinned. If you set “For” to “ALL,” all measures will be specified.
For details on the settings, refer to “Basic Operation for Track
Editing” (p. 151)
Data Thin Value
For thinning data which incorporates rapid changes, use higher
settings. If you don’t want to thin that much data even though it is
subject to rapid change, use lower settings.
161
Reference_e.book 162 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing Songs
Adjusting the Song’s Playback Time
(Time Fit)
This function calculates the playback time of a song or allows you to modify
the tempo track data so that the song will play back in a specified time.
fig.11-28_50
Editing Individual Items of
Sequencer Data (Micro Edit)
Micro Edit lets you edit individual items of sequencer data recorded
in a song, such as MIDI messages and tempo data.
Editing Sequencer Data
(Basic Procedure in the Microscope)
For details on the settings, refer to “Basic Operation for Track
Editing” (p. 151)
Measure, For (Edit Range)
Measure the playback time, or check/modify the range of measures
that are to be adjusted. If you set “For” to “ALL,” all measures will
be specified.
Access the Microscope screen when you want to view the sequencer
data recorded in a song. Each line indicates the location (measurebeat-clock) at which the sequencer data is recorded, and the data
recorded at that location.
1. Load the song that contains the sequencer data you want to
view/edit (p. 149).
2. Press [EDIT].
The Microscope screen appears.
Press
or
to view sequencer data.
fig.11-30.e
Select the track or pattern
Displays the parameter data at the cursor location
MIDI channel
Time H/M/S
The playback time will be displayed. From left to right, the time
display indicates “hours: minutes: seconds.”
Time Original H/M/S
The current playback time will be displayed.
Deleting Blank Measures (Truncate)
Copying or merging may sometimes create blank measures at the
beginning of a phrase track or pattern. Truncate deletes silent portions
from the beginning of the specified phrase track to the first note-on.
Sequencer data
If other sequencer data (such as program changes or control
changes) is recorded between the beginning and the first note-on
of the specified phrase track, only the last data event of each type
will be placed before the note-on.
fig.11-29_50
Location of the sequencer data (measure-beat-tick)
3.
Press [6] to switch the screen.
Each time you press [6] you will switch between the two screens.
4. Press [7 (Trk/Ch Select)] to move the cursor to “Track,” and
select the track or pattern whose sequencer data you want
to view/edit.
TRK 1–TRK 16:
The specified phrase track
TEMPO:
Tempo track
BEAT:
Beat track
PTN001–PTN100: The specified pattern (pattern mode only)
For details on the settings, refer to “Basic Operation for Track
Editing” (p. 151)
Track / Pattern (Source Track)
Specifies the phrase track or pattern from which blank measures will
be deleted.
Value
TRK 1–TRK 16:
The specified phrase track
PTN001–PTN100: The specified pattern
Below the Track parameter is displayed the location of the beginning
of the specified track, and the position of the first note-on.
162
In order to make efficient use of screen space, display is
normally omitted for locations in which no sequencer data is
recorded.
For an explanation of each type of sequencer data, refer to
“Sequencer Data Handled by a Phrase Track/Pattern,”
below.
5. Move to the cursor to “MIDI Channel,” and select the MIDI
channel of the sequencer data that you want to view.
6. Press [8 (Close)] to close the screen.
Reference_e.book 163 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing Songs
7. Press
or
want to edit.
8. Press
or
to select the performance data that you
to select the parameter that you want to edit.
9. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to set the value.
When editing the Note Number of note or polyphonic aftertouch
data, or the On Velocity or Off Velocity of a note, you can also
specify the value by playing a key on the keyboard.
• When you press [ENTER], the sequencer data currently shown
at the “
” will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector.
In the case of a note message, the note will sound when you
press [ENTER].
If you want to edit a system exclusive message, refer to “Editing
a System Exclusive Message,” below.
10. Repeat steps 3.–6. to continue editing.
Sequencer Data Handled by a
Phrase Track/Pattern
Phrase tracks or patterns can record the following nine types of
sequencer data. The recorded location (measure-beat-clock) is
displayed at the far left of each data item, and the MIDI channel
number is displayed beside it.
Note
These MIDI messages represent notes. From the left, the parameters
are Note Number, which indicates the name of the note; On Velocity,
which specifies the force with which the key is pressed; Duration,
which specifies the duration of the note; and Off Velocity, which
determines the speed with which the key is released.
Program Change
This MIDI message switches sounds. The program number (PC#)
selects the sound.
11. To close the Microscope screen, press [EXIT].
Control Change
Editing a System Exclusive Message
This MIDI message applies various effects such as modulation or
expression. The controller number (CC#) selects the function, and
Value specifies the depth of the effect.
1. Use
or
to move the cursor to the location of the
system exclusive message that you want to edit.
2. Press
.
The System Exclusive Edit window appears.
For the function corresponding to each controller number, refer
to “MIDI Implementation” (Parameter List).
Pitch Bend
fig.11-32_50
This MIDI message changes the pitch. The value specifies the
amount of pitch change.
Polyphonic Aftertouch
or
to move the cursor to the data that you want
4. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to edit the value.
Channel Aftertouch
If you want to add data between “F0:” and “:F7,” move the
cursor to that location and press [3 (Insert)]. A value of “00” will
be inserted. Change this to the desired value.
This MIDI message applies aftertouch to an entire MIDI channel.
Value specifies the depth of the aftertouch.
To delete data, move the cursor to the relevant location and
press [2 (Delete)].
System Exclusive messages
5. When you are finished editing, press [8 (Exec)] to finalize the
values of the system exclusive message.
These are MIDI messages used to make settings unique to the
Fantom-S, such as sound settings. Input the data between “F0” and
“F7.”
To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
For details on system exclusive messages, refer to “MIDI
Implementation” (Parameter List).
• If you decide to discard the changes you made to the system
exclusive message and return to the Microscope screen, press
[EXIT].
• In the case of a Roland type IV system exclusive message, the
checksum can be calculated automatically when you finalize the
values. If you do not want to calculate the checksum
automatically, press [1 (Auto Sum)] to remove the check mark
(✔).
• When you press [4 (Test)], the system exclusive message you are
editing will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector.
Tune Request
This MIDI message causes an analog synthesizer to tune itself.
Ptn (Pattern Call message)
This is data that causes a pattern to play back. Use the Number
parameter to select the pattern number. The pattern name is shown
in parentheses ( ), and the location at which the pattern will finish
playing is shown at the right of the “→” symbol.
163
Editing Songs
3. Press
to edit.
This MIDI messages applies aftertouch to an individual note. From
the left, the parameters are Note Number which specifies the key,
and Value which specifies the depth of the aftertouch.
Reference_e.book 164 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing Songs
Viewing Sequencer Data (View)
• If the pattern called by the Pattern Call message extends beyond
the last measure of the song, the pattern playback will be
interrupted at that point.
• Only one pattern can be played at a time by Pattern Call
messages in a given phrase track. This means that if a Pattern
Call message is recorded at a location before the previous
pattern has finished playing, the pattern that was playing will be
interrupted, and the next pattern will begin playing. If more than
one Pattern Call message is recorded at the same location, the
message that is displayed last in the Microscope screen will be
played.
Since a phrase track or pattern contains a large amount of sequencer
data, the display may be cluttered and difficult to read. For this
reason, the Fantom-S lets you specify the type(s) of sequencer data
that will be displayed in the screen. This is convenient when you
want to check or edit only a specific type of sequencer data.
1. Access the Microscope screen.
2. Press [8 (View)].
The View Select window appears.
fig.11-31_50
• Although it is possible to record Pattern Call messages in a
pattern, they will not be played. If you want to place the data of
another pattern into a pattern, use Track Edit to copy the data.
Data Handled by the Tempo Track
The Tempo track records tempo data for the song.
Tempo Change
3. Use
or
displayed.
to select the sequencer data that will be
This data specifies the tempo. The song will play back according to
the “Value” of the tempo change.
Note:
Note messages. These MIDI messages
represent notes.
The value displayed in “ =**” is the tempo at which the song will
actually play (the playback tempo), and can be changed only in the
PLAY screen of each mode.
Poly Aftertouch:
Polyphonic aftertouch. These MIDI
messages apply aftertouch to individual
keys.
If the tempo change value differs from the playback tempo, this
means that the playback tempo has been changed temporarily. In
other words, since the tempo change value has not been rewritten,
this setting will be lost if you select another song or turn off the
power. If you want to play back at this tempo the next time as well,
you must re-save the song to disk. This will rewrite the tempo
change value so that it matches the playback tempo.
Control Change:
Control change messages. These MIDI
messages apply various effects such as
modulation or expression.
Program Change:
Program change messages. These MIDI
messages select sounds.
Data Handled by the Beat Track
Pitch Bend:
Pitch bend messages. These MIDI
messages change the pitch.
System Exclusive:
System exclusive messages. These MIDI
messages are used to make settings
unique to the Fantom-S, such as those for
the sound parameters.
Pattern Call:
Pattern Call messages. This data causes a
pattern to play back.
Tune Request:
This MIDI Message cause an analog
synthesizer to tune it self.
The Beat track records time signature data.
Channel Aftertouch: Channel aftertouch messages. These MIDI
messages apply aftertouch to an entire
MIDI channel.
Beat Change
This specifies the time signature (Beat).
4. Press [INC] or [DEC] to switch.
The message will be displayed if the check mark (✔) is assigned,
and will not be displayed if the check mark is removed.
If you press [7 (ALL OFF)], none of the sequencer data will be
displayed.
If you press [8 (ALL ON)], all of the sequencer data will be
displayed.
5. Press [8 (Close)] to close the View Select window.
164
Reference_e.book 165 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing Songs
Inserting Sequencer Data (Create)
You can insert new sequencer data into a desired location of a phrase
track or pattern.
For details on the sequencer data that can be inserted, refer to
“Sequencer Data Handled by a Phrase Track/Pattern” (p.
163).
1. Access the Microscope screen for the track or pattern into
which you want to insert sequencer data (p. 162).
3. Press [2 (Erase)] to erase the sequencer data.
If you are not satisfied with the results of executing this
operation, from the Song Play screen, press [MENU], and from
the Menu window that appears, select “Undo/Redo” to return
to the state prior to execution (Undo/Redo).
After executing Undo, you can use Redo to revert to the
previous state. After executing Undo, you can execute Redo by
performing the above procedure the above procedure once
again.
2. Press [1 (CREATE)].
The Create Event window appears.
fig.11-33_50
Moving Sequencer Data (Move)
You can move an individual item of sequencer data to a different
location. Data recorded in the tempo track or beat track can also be
moved in the same way.
It is not possible to move the tempo change located at the
beginning of the tempo track, the beat change and key signature
located at the beginning of the beat track, or the pattern beat.
3. Press
or
inserted.
to select the sequencer data that will be
4. Press [8 (Exec)] to insert the performance data.
5. The sequencer data that was inserted will have the default
parameter values, so edit them as necessary.
1. Access the Microscope screen for the track or pattern
whose data you want to move (p. 162).
2. Press
or
to move the cursor to the sequencer data
that you want to move.
To move a multiple consecutive data, hold down [SHIFT] and
press
or
to select the sequencer data.
3. Press [3 (Move)].
The Move Event window appears.
fig.11-34_50
Erasing Sequencer Data (Erase)
4. Press
or
to move the cursor to the “measure,”
“beat,” and “clock” fields.
If desired, you can erase just an individual event of sequencer data.
You can also use the same operation to erase individual items of data
from the tempo track or beat track.
5. Turn the VALUE dial or Press [INC]/[DEC] to specify the
location to which the data will be moved.
6. Press [8 (Exec)] to move the sequencer data.
It is not possible to erase the tempo change located at the
beginning of the tempo track, the beat change located at the
beginning of the beat track, or the pattern beat.
1. Access the Microscope screen for the track or pattern from
which you want to erase sequencer data (p. 162).
2. Press
or
to move the cursor to the sequencer data
that you want to erase.
If you are not satisfied with the results of executing this
operation, from the Song Play screen, press [MENU], and from
the Menu window that appears, select “Undo/Redo” to return
to the state prior to execution (Undo).
After executing Undo, you can use Redo to revert to the
previous state. After executing Undo, you can execute Redo by
performing the above procedure the above procedure once
again.
To erase a multiple consecutive data, hold down [SHIFT] and
press
or
to select the sequencer data.
165
Editing Songs
If you are not satisfied with the results of executing this
operation, from the Song Play screen, press [MENU], and from
the Menu window that appears, select “Undo/Redo” to return
to the state prior to execution (Undo/Redo).
After executing Undo, you can use Redo to revert to the
previous state. After executing Undo, you can execute Redo by
performing the above procedure the above procedure once
again.
Reference_e.book 166 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing Songs
Copying Sequencer Data (Copy)
Sequencer data can be copied to the desired location. This is
convenient when you want to use the same sequencer data at
multiple locations. Data recorded in the tempo track or beat track
can also be copied in this way.
1. Access the Microscope screen for the track or pattern
whose sequencer data you want to copy (p. 162).
2. Press
or
to move the cursor to the sequencer data
that you want to copy
3. Press [3 (COPY)].
4. Press [4 (PLACE)].
The Place Event window appears.
fig.11-34a_50
Changing the Tempo Midway
Through the Song
If you want to change the tempo midway through the song, insert a
new Tempo Change into the tempo track. The song will play back at
that tempo following the location at which the tempo change was
inserted. However, if you want to create gradual tempo changes
such as ritardando or accelerando, it is more convenient to use
Tempo Recording (p. 143).
If you want to make the entire song faster or slower, modify the
playback tempo in one of the PLAY screens.
1. Access the Microscope screen (p. 162).
Press [7 (Trk/Ch Select)], select “TEMPO” to “Track.”
2. Press [1 (Create)].
The Create Event window appears.
fig.11-35_50
5. Press
or
to move the cursor to the “measure,”
“beat,” and “clock” fields.
6. Turn the VALUE dial or Press [INC]/[DEC] to specify the
location to which the data will be copied.
7. Press [8 (Exec)] to paste the data.
3. Press [8 (Exec)].
If you are not satisfied with the results of executing this
operation, from the Song Play screen, press [MENU], and from
the Menu window that appears, select “Undo/Redo” to return
to the state prior to execution (Undo/Redo).
After executing Undo, you can use Redo to revert to the previous
state. After executing Undo, you can execute Redo by performing
the above procedure the above procedure once again.
The Create Position window will appear.
4. Use
or
to move the cursor to the “measure,”
“beat,” and “clock” fields,
5. Turn the VALUE dial or Press [INC]/[DEC] to specify the
location at which the data will be inserted.
6. Press [8 (Exec)] to insert the tempo change data.
7. The inserted tempo change will have the default value, so
modify it as necessary.
If you are not satisfied with the results of executing this
operation, from the Song Play screen, press [MENU], and from
the Menu window that appears, select “Undo/Redo” to return
to the state prior to execution (Undo/Redo).
After executing Undo, you can use Redo to revert to the previous
state. After executing Undo, you can execute Redo by performing
the above procedure the above procedure once again.
166
Reference_e.book 167 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Editing Songs
Changing the Time Signature
Midway Through the Song
If you want to change the time signature midway through the song,
insert a new Beat Change. The song will play back using that time
signature for measures following the inserted beat change.
• It is not possible to change the time signature in the middle of a
measure. You must change the time signature at the beginning of
a measure.
• If the time signature of the beat track differs from the pattern
beat (p. 142) setting, the setting of the beat track will be used. For
example, if a pattern with a 3/4 time signature is assigned in the
middle of a 4/4 song, the pattern will not be aligned correctly
with the other phrase tracks. To make this play back correctly,
insert a 3/4 beat change into the beat track. To return the time
signature to 4/4, insert a 4/4 beat change into the measure that
follows the last measure of the pattern.
Assigning a Name to a Song
(Song Name)
You can assign a song name to a song, or edit the song name. This
song name is independent of the file name assigned when saving a
song to user memory or memory card. Although you are not
required to assign a song name, you can assign one using up to 15
characters, and you may find it a convenient way to store a title or
memo that will help you organize your songs.
Some commercially available Standard MIDI Files contain
copyright data. It is not possible to assign or modify the song
name for such songs.
1. Access the Song Edit screen, and then load the song whose
song name you want to assign (p. 170).
2. Press [7 (Song Name)].
The Song Name screen appears.
fig.11-06_50
If you want to change the time signature from a measure that is
later than the end of the song, or if it is ok to change the length of
the song, you will find it more convenient to use the track edit
Insert Measure function (p. 156).
1. Access the Microscope screen (p. 162).
Press [7 (Trk/Ch Select)], select “BEAT” to “Track.”
2. Press [1 (Create)].
The Create Event window appears.
fig.11-36_50
3. Assign a song name to the song. (up to 15 characters).
• [1 (Change Type)]: Selects the type of character. Each time you
press this, you will alternately select the first character of the
uppercase letters (A), lowercase letters (a), numerals and
symbols (0).
• [2 (Delete)]: Deletes the character at the cursor, and shifts the
subsequent characters forward by one.
The Create Position window will appear.
4. Use
or
to move the cursor to the “measure,”
“beat,” and “clock” fields,
5. Turn the VALUE dial or Press [INC]/[DEC] to specify the
location at which the data will be inserted.
• [3 (Insert)]: Inserts a space (blank) at the cursor location.
•
,
: Move the cursor.
• VALUE dial, [INC][DEC]: Select characters.
Editing Songs
3. Press [8 (Exec)].
4. After you have assigned a name, press [Write].
If you decide to cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
* You can use the pads to specify characters (p. 25).
6. Press [8 (OK)] to insert the beat change data.
7. The inserted beat change will have the default values, so
edit it as necessary.
If you are not satisfied with the results of executing this
operation, from the Song Play screen, press [MENU], and from
the Menu window that appears, select “Undo/Redo” to return
to the state prior to execution (Undo/Redo).
After executing Undo, you can use Redo to revert to the
previous state. After executing Undo, you can execute Redo by
performing the above procedure the above procedure once
again.
167
Reference_e.book 168 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Saving/Loading a song (SAVE/LOAD)
Songs you record are initially held in internal memory. A song in
internal memory will be lost when you turn off the power or when
you load a different song. If you want to keep the song, you must
save it to user memory or a memory card.
Conversely in order to edit a song (p. 149), you must first load it into
internal memory.
Saving a Song with Samples
(Save Song+Samples)
Here’s how to save the internal song along with all samples in
sample memory and the current sound generator settings.
1. From the Save/Load Menu screen, press [1 (Save S+S)].
The Song File Name screen will appear.
fig.SL02_50
Saving a Song (Save)
Basic Procedure
1. Press [SAVE/LOAD].
The Save/Load Menu screen will appear.
fig.SL01_50
2. Assign a file name to the song (up to 8 characters). A file
name extension of “.SVQ” will automatically be added to the
song.
• [2 (Delete)]: Deletes the character at the cursor, and shifts the
subsequent characters forward by one.
• [3 (Insert)]: Inserts a space (blank) at the cursor location.
•
2. Press [1 (Save S+S)]–[3 (Save AllSmpl)] to select the format
in which you want to save the song.
Save Song+Samples: The internal song will be saved in MRC
Pro song format. A file name extension of “.SVQ” will
automatically be added to the song. The song will include the
data of the temporary area. All samples in sample memory will
be saved.
: Move the cursor.
• VALUE dial, [INC][DEC]: Select characters.
* You can use the pads to specify characters (p. 25).
3. After you have assigned a name, press [8 (Write)].
fig.SL03_50
Save Song: The internal song will be saved in MRC Pro song
format. A filename extension of “.SVQ” will automatically be
added. The song will include the data of the temporary area.
Save all Samples: All samples in sample memory will be saved.
Parameter
Save Song+Samples
Save Song
Save all Samples
✔: Saving is possible
Function key
[1]
[2]
[3]
Song
✔
✔
–
Samples
✔
–
✔
4. Press [1 (User)] (User memory) or [2 (Card)] (Memory card)
to select the location where you want to save the song.
If you decide to cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
5. Press [8 (Save)].
A screen will ask you for confirmation.
6. Press [8 (Exec)] to execute.
* When samples are saved, they will automatically be overwritten onto
the same numbers of the same bank in the sample list. The samples will
be saved with a file name of “smpl****.wav (aif)” in the “Roland/Smpl
folder” of user memory or memory card. The number of the file name
will correspond to the number in the sample list.
168
Reference_e.book 169 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Saving/Loading a song (SAVE/LOAD)
File Name and Song Name
MRC Pro songs and Standard MIDI Files have a song name in
addition to a file name. The file name is used to distinguish
between files, and must be assigned when you save a file. It will
help you manage songs if you use the file name to distinguish
between types of song, and use the song name to assign a title.
Use the Song Name screen to assign a song name (p. 167).
If you assign a file name that is identical to a file name already
existing in the user area or memory card, and attempt to save, a
message of “File “****” Already Exists! Over Write OK?” will
appear, asking you for confirmation. If it is OK to overwrite the
existing file, press [8 (OK)]. If you decide to cancel the Save
operation, press [7 (Cancel)].
If you attempt to save data on a memory that was not formatted
by the Fantom-S, a message of “Unformatted!” (memory card
has not been formatted) will appear. Please format the memory
card on the Fantom-S (p. 187).
Even if you save your song using “Save,” it cannot be played
back by a sequencer other than the Fantom-S’s own sequencer.
If you want to play back your song on a sequencer other than
the Fantom-S’s sequencer, you must save the song as an SMF
file. Also at this time, you must record the appropriate bank
selects and program numbers so that the correct sounds will be
played.
The performance settings will be saved in the state they were in
when you executed Save. This means that if the performance
changed during the song, and you saved the song in that state
when you finished recording, the state in which recording
began will not be saved. In other words when you play back the
song from the beginning, it will begin with the performance
sounds that were being used at the point where you saved. If
you change the performance during the song, you must use the
Microscope screen etc. to insert the appropriate bank select and
program number at the beginning of the song to specify the
performance with which you began recording it (p. 162).
Saving Samples (Save All Samples)
Saving a Song (Save Song)
Here’s how to save all samples from sample memory into user
memory or a memory card.
Here’s how to save the internal song with the current sound
generator settings.
1. From the Save/Load Menu screen, press [3 (Save AllSmpl)].
The Song File Name screen will appear.
2. Assign a file name to the song (up to 8 characters). A file
name extension of “.SVQ” will automatically be added to the
song.
A screen will ask you for confirmation.
If you decide to cancel, press [7(Cancel)].
2. Press [8 (Exec)] to execute.
* When samples are saved, they will automatically be overwritten onto
the same number of the same bank in the sample list.
3. After you have assigned a name, press [Write].
fig.SL04_50
4. Press [1 (User)] (User memory) or [2 (Card)] (Memory card)
to select the location where you want to save the song.
If you decide to cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
5. Press [8 (Save)].
A screen will ask you for confirmation.
If you decide to cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
6. Press [8 (Exec)] to execute.
169
Saving/Loading a song (SAVE/LOAD)
1. From the Save/Load Menu screen, press [2 (Save Song)].
Reference_e.book 170 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Saving/Loading a song (SAVE/LOAD)
Saving a Song as an SMF File
(Save as SMF)
Here’s how to convert and save an internal song as an SMF file.
1. From the Save/Load Menu screen, press [4 (Save as SMF)].
The Song File Name screen will appear.
If you assign a file name that is identical to one already existing
in the user area or the memory card, a message of “File “****”
Already Exists! Over Write OK?” will ask you for confirmation
when you attempt to save the file. If it is OK to overwrite the
existing file, press [8(OK)]. If you decide not to save the file,
press [7(Cancel)].
2. Assign a file name to the song.
3. After you have assigned a name, press [Write].
4. Press either [1 (User)] (user memory) or [2 (Card)] (memory
card) to select the save-destination.
If you attempt to save data to a memory card that was not
formatted on the Fantom-S, a message of “Unformatted!” (the
memory card has not been formatted) will appear. Please
format the memory card on the Fantom-S (p. 187).
fig.SL05_50
Loading a Song (Load)
Basic Procedure
1. Press [SAVE/LOAD].
The Save/Load Menu screen will appear.
fig.SL01_50
5. Press either [5 (Format 0)] or [6 (Format 1)] to select the
format for saving.
Format 0: Convert the song to a Format 0 Standard MIDI File
(all performance data is saved in one phrase track) and save it to
disk. An extension of “.MID” will be added automatically.
Format 1: Convert the song to a Format 1 Standard MIDI File
(performance data is saved in more than one phrase track) and
save it to disk. An extension of “.MID” will be added
automatically.
6. Press [8 (Save As SMF)].
A screen will ask for confirmation.
7. Press [8 (Exec)] to execute.
* The filename extension will be “.MID” whether you select “Save SMF
(Format 0)” or “Save SMF (Format 1).” The two cannot be
distinguished in this way.
When you save data in SMF format, the sound setup data will
not be saved. In order to ensure that the correct sounds are
played, you must record the appropriate bank select and
program numbers (p. 162).
2. Press [5 (Load S+S)]–[7 (Load AllSmpl)] to select the format
in which you want to load the song.
Load Song+Samples: Loads a song into internal memory. All
samples will be loaded into sample memory.
Load Song: Loads a song into internal memory.
Load all Samples: Loads all samples into sample memory.
Parameter
Load Song+Samples
Load Song
Load all Samples
Function key
[5]
[6]
[7]
Song
✔
✔
–
Samples
✔
–
✔
✔: Loading is possible
* A song saved on the Fantom-S (.SVQ) also includes the data for the
sound generator’s temporary area.
170
Reference_e.book 171 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Saving/Loading a song (SAVE/LOAD)
Loading a Song with Samples
(Load Song+Samples)
Here’s how you can load a song into internal memory and all
samples into sample memory.
1. From the Save /Load Menu screen, press [5 (Load S+S)].
Importing a WAV/AIFF File
(Import Audio)
Here’s how you can load an audio file (WAV/AIFF) into sample
memory as a sample.
fig.SL06_50
In order to import a file, it must be located in the following
folder on your computer.
• Windows Me/2000/XP users
Removable disk/TMP/AUDIO_IMPORT folder
• Macintosh users
FANS USER/TMP/AUDIO_IMPORT folder
* “/” indicates a directory level.
1. Press [Save/Load].
2. Press either [1 (User)] or [2 (Card)] to select the loaddestination, and use
to select a song.
If you decide to cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
3. Press [8 (Load)].
A screen will ask you for confirmation.
4. Press [8 (Exec)] to execute.
Loading a song (Load Song)
Here’s how you can load a song into internal memory.
1. From the Save/Load Menu screen, press [6 (Load Song)].
fig.SL07_50
2. Press [8 (Import Audio)].
3. Press [1 (User)] or [2 (Card)] to select the import-destination
area.
[1 (User)]: Import from user memory.
[2 (CARD)]: Import from a memory card.
4. Press
or
, then select the file that you want to import.
If you want to select two or more samples, press [5 (Mark Set)] to
add a check mark (✔) to the files that you want to select. To
remove the check mark, press [4 (Mark Clear)].
If you hold down [SHIFT] and press [5 (Mark Set All)], a check
mark will be added to all files of the selected bank. If you hold
down [SHIFT] and press [4 (Mark Clr All)], check marks will be
removed from all selected files.
5. Press [8 (Import)].
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
6. Press [8 (Exec)].
The file will be imported, and the Sample List screen will appear.
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
2. Press either [1(User)] or [2(Card)] to select the loaddestination, and use
to select a song.
If you decide to cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
The imported file will be added to the sample list as a sample.
This sample is temporary, and will be lost when you turn off the
power. If you want to keep it, press [WRITE] to save the data.
3. Press [8 (Load)].
A screen will ask you for confirmation.
4. Press [8 (Exec)] to execute.
Loading Samples (Load All
Samples)
Here’s how you can load all samples from user memory or memory
card into sample memory.
1. From the Save/Load Menu screen, press [7 (Load AllSmpl)].
A screen will ask you for confirmation.
If you decide to cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
2. Press [8 (Exec)] to execute.
171
Saving/Loading a song (SAVE/LOAD)
A message will ask you for confirmation.
Reference_e.book 172 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing a Phrase at the Touch of a Finger (RPS Function)
The RPS (Realtime Phrase Sequence) function lets you assign
patterns to the keyboard, and play a pattern by pressing a single note.
For example, a complex phrase that would be difficult to play live
can be assigned to a note of the keyboard, and played with one
finger at the appropriate moment.
Since up to eight patterns can be playing at once, you can create
patterns for separate instruments such as drums, bass, and
keyboard, and combine them to create a new song. This performance
can also be recorded, allowing you to use it in a way similar to
phrase sampling.
fig.12-01.e
You can assign a pattern to each note of the keyboard, and specify
how the pattern will be played. These settings are made
independently for each song, and will be saved when you save the
song in MRC Pro song format.
In order to make RPS settings, you must first load a song into
internal memory.
1. Press [SEQUENCER].
The Song Play screen appears.
Phrase track 16
Phrase track 15
Song
Settings for the RPS Function
2. Press [5 (RPS)].
The RPS Setup screen appears.
Phrase track 2
Phrase track 1
fig.12-02_50
Pattern track
Pattern
1
Pattern
2
Pattern
99
Pattern
100
In this screen you can set various parameters related to the RPS
function.
Before You Use the RPS
Function
Record a Pattern
Before you use the RPS function, you must record the desired phrase
in a pattern. For details on recording, refer to “Recording Your
Performance as You Play It (Realtime Recording)” (p. 142) or
“Inputting Data One Step at a Time (Step Recording)” (p. 146).
3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to each parameter, and
turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to make the
setting.
Pattern parameter, Playback Mode parameter, and Mute Group
parameter are set for each key. Although the Fantom has a 61note keyboard, you can also make settings for all keys in the
range of E0 to G9. Settings for the Trigger Quantize parameter
and Velocity Sens parameter are for the entire song.
• Trigger Quantize
Only note messages should be recorded in a pattern. If a large
amount of MIDI data is recorded in a pattern, using RPS to play
back the pattern can cause notes to be delayed. MIDI messages
other than note messages should be recorded in a phrase track.
This parameter specifies how pattern playback is to begin when
a key is pressed during song playback or recording.
Value
REAL:
The pattern will begin playing at the moment you
press the key.
BEAT:
If the song is being played or recorded, the pattern
will begin playing at the beginning of the next beat
if you press the key in the middle of the beat.
MEASURE: If the song is being played or recorded, the pattern
will begin playing at the beginning of the next
measure if you press the key in the middle of the
measure.
172
Reference_e.book 173 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing a Phrase at the Touch of a Finger (RPS Function)
• Velocity Sens (Velocity Sensitivity)
Turn this “OFF” if you want the pattern to play back at the
volume at which it was recorded.
If you want to vary the pattern playback volume according to
the strength with which you pressed the key, select either
“LOW,” “MID,” or “HIGH.”
Value: OFF, LOW, MID, HIGH
• Keyboard Note
Specify the key to which the pattern will be assigned. You can
also specify this by pressing a key on the keyboard.
• PAD Number
Specify the pad number to which the pattern is to be assigned.
• KBD/PAD Pattern
Select the pattern number that will be assigned to the key/pad.
The name of the selected pattern will be displayed below the
pattern number.
Using the RPS Function While
You Perform
Normally, when playing patterns individually, the song containing
the patterns must be loaded into internal memory. However, when
using the RPS function to play back patterns, you can use Quick
Play.
1. Make sure that the preparations for using the RPS function
have been made correctly.
2. Access the PLAY screen for the mode in which you want to
perform.
3. Press [RPS] so the button is lit.
The RPS function will be turned on, and you will be able to
perform using RPS.
fig.12-02a
Select “OFF” for keys to which you do not want to assign a
pattern. If you select “STOP,” that key will be a Stop Trigger
key/pad that stops the currently playing patterns.
Valid Settings: STOP, OFF, PTN001–PTN100
The state of settings is shown graphically in the display. The key
being set is indicated by “■,” keys to which a pattern is assigned
are indicated by “❚”, and keys set to “STOP” are indicated by “✚”.
Keys for which nothing is displayed are turned “OFF.”
• KBD/PAD Playback Mode
Specify how the pattern will be played.
Value
LOOP1: The pattern will play back repeatedly as long as the
key is held down.
LOOP2: The pattern will play back repeatedly. To stop
playback, press a Stop Trigger key or press the same
key once again.
ONCE:
The pattern will play back once.
• KBD/PAD Mute Group
This function lets you prevent patterns of the same group from
sounding together. For example, a fill-in and bridge should
never be played at the same time, and to ensure that this does
not occur, you can set the fill-in and bridge to the same mute
group number.
Thirty-one mute groups can be specified. Select “OFF” if you do
not want to use a mute group for a pattern.
Value: OFF, 1–31
4. When you press [7 (RPS SW)] to assign a check mark (✔),
the RPS function will be turned on.
If you save the song in MRC Pro song format when the RPS
function is turned on, this state will also be saved. This means
that you will always be able to perform using RPS simply by
selecting that song.
4. Press [PLAY] to play back the song.
• You must play back the song if you want patterns to play back in
synchronization with the song, or if you want multiple patterns
to play in synchronization.
• If the song is not playing, the pattern will begin playing the
instant you press the key, regardless of the Trigger Quantize
parameter setting.
• The pattern will be played back according to the time signature
of the song (beat track). This means that if the phrase track
contains no sequencer data, the song will not play, and it will not
be possible to play back patterns in synchronization. In such
cases, you can insert several blank measures into a phrase track,
and play them as a loop.
5. Press a key or pad to which a pattern is assigned, making
the pattern play.
If you want to stop playback midway through the pattern, press
the Stop Trigger key. Alternatively if the Playback Mode
parameter is set to “LOOP2,” you can stop the pattern playback
by pressing the same key once again.
Up to eight patterns can play back simultaneously.
5. When you are finished making settings, press [8 (Exit)] to
return to the Song Edit screen.
173
Playing a Phrase at the Touch of a Finger (RPS Function)
When assigning a number to a pad, simply press PAD and the
cursor will move to “Pattern.”
Reference_e.book 174 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing a Phrase at the Touch of a Finger (RPS Function)
Recording a Performance Using the
RPS Function
A performance that uses the RPS function can be recorded in real
time in the same way as a conventional performance. This provides
an easy way to remix patterns and create a song.
If you use the RPS function during realtime recording, the
pattern performance will be recorded just as it occurs.
1. Make sure that preparations for the RPS function have been
made correctly.
2. Access the PLAY screen for the mode in which you want to
perform.
3. Press [RPS] to turn on the RPS function (p. 173).
4. Press [REC].
The [REC] indicator will blink, and the Realtime Rec Standby
window appears. In this window you can make various settings
for realtime recording.
fig.07-11_50
5. Specify how recording is to take place.
For details on these settings, refer to “Recording Your
Performance as You Play It (Realtime Recording)” (p. 142).
6. Press [PLAY].
The Recording Standby window will close, the [REC] indicator
will change from blinking to lit, and recording will begin.
7. Press a key or pad to which a pattern is assigned.
The assigned patterns will be played back according to the keys
or pads you press, and their performances will be recorded.
If the Count In parameter is set to “WAIT NOTE” in the
Recording Standby window, recording will not begin even if you
press a key that is assigned to a pattern, or a key that is assigned
as a Stop Trigger key.
8. When you are finished recording, press [STOP].
The [REC] indicator will go dark.
174
Reference_e.book 175 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
This section explains the procedures and settings for applying effects
in each mode.
For details of the Fantom-S’s onboard effects, refer to “About
the Onboard Effects” (p. 20).
Turning Effects On and Off
Making Effect Settings
1. In the appropriate mode, select the sound to which you want
to apply effects.
2. Press [EFFECTS] to access the Effects screen.
3. Press one of the [1 (Routing)]–-[7 (Mastering)] tabs to select
the effect that you want to edit.
* You can also do this by pressing [MENU] from the Effect screen.
fig.14-01a
The Fantom-S’s onboard effects can be turned on/off as a whole.
Turn these settings OFF when you wish to listen to the unprocessed
sound as you create a sound, or when you wish to use external
effects processors instead of the built-in effects.
Effect ON/OFF settings are global Fantom-S settings. These settings
cannot be made for each Patch or Performance individually.
The PLAY screen for each mode provides effect switches that allow you
to turn the three effects on/off. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the
effect switches located in the upper part of the screen, and turn the
VALUE dial or press [INC] or [DEC] to turn the switch on/off.
1. Press [EFFECTS] to access the Effects screen.
fig.14-01a
In Performance mode, each time you press the [3 (MFX1/2/3)]
button, it will alternate between 1, 2, and 3. In Patch mode, each
time you press the [3 (MFX1/2)] button, it will alternate between
1 and 2.
4. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the parameter you
wish to modify.
5. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to get the value
you want.
6. Press [EXIT] to return to the previous screen.
* You cannot edit the effect settings for patches of the GM group.
Applying Effects in Patch Mode
2. Press [8 (Effect Sw)].
The Effect Sw window appears.
fig.14-00
In Patch mode you can use two multi-effects (MFX1, MFX2), one chorus,
and one reverb. Multi-effect 1 (MFX1) will operate according to the effect
settings of the patch or rhythm set assigned to the Keyboard part. Multieffect 2 (MFX2) will operate according to the effect settings of the patch
or rhythm set assigned to the Pad part. Chorus and reverb will both
operate according to the settings of the patch or rhythm set assigned to
either the Keyboard part or the Pad part.
Specifying How the Sound Will Be
Output (Routing)
Here you can make overall settings for effects, and the output
destination and level of each signal.
fig.14-02_50
3. Use [1 (MFX1)]–[6 (MASTER)] to turn each effect switch on/off.
The switch will turn on/off each time you press the button.
4. Press [8 (Close)] to return to the previous screen.
When you return to the Play screen, the settings will be
displayed in the following area.
fig.14-01
For details on the setting, refer to “Making Effect Settings” (p. 175).
175
Adding Effects
Adding Effects
Reference_e.book 176 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Adding Effects
Signal Flow Diagram and Parameters
Value:
fig.14-04
MFX: Output in stereo through multi-effects. You can also apply chorus
or reverb to the sound that passes through multi-effects.
1
A, B: Output to the OUTPUT A (MIX) jack or OUTPUT B jack in
stereo without passing through multi-effects.
19
20
2
7
3
8
1–4: Output to the INDIVIDUAL 1–4 jacks in mono without
passing through multi-effects.
11
9
10
4
13
12
14
15
5
16
17
18
6
1 Part Select
Select the part for which you want to make settings.
Value: KBD, PAD
1 Tone Select
• If the Patch Output Assign ( 2 ) is set to anything other than
“TONE,” these settings will be ignored.
• When the Structure Type parameter has a setting of Type “2”–
”10,” the outputs of tones 1 and 2 will be combined with tone 2,
and the outputs of tones 3 and 4 will be combined with tone 4.
For this reason, tone 1 will follow the settings of tone 2, and tone
3 will follow the settings of tone 4 (p. 46).
• When the settings are such that signals are split and output from
the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack and INDIVIDUAL 2 jack, and no plug is
inserted in the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack, the sounds from
INDIVIDUAL 1 and INDIVIDUAL 2 are mixed together, then
output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack. This sound comprises the
sounds from the INDIVIDUAL 1 and 2 jacks.
Select the tone for which you want to make settings.
Value: 1–4
* This parameter is Rhythm Key Select when a rhythm set is being
selected. You can select the rhythm tone (A0–C8) for which you want
to make settings.
2 Patch Output Assign
Specifies for each patch how the direct sound will be output.
Value:
MFX:
Output in stereo through multi-effects. You can also apply
chorus or reverb to the sound that passes through multieffects.
A, B:
Output to the OUTPUT A (MIX) jack or OUTPUT B jack in
stereo without passing through multi-effects.
1–4:
Output to the INDIVIDUAL 1–4 jacks in mono without
passing through multi-effects.
TONE: Outputs according to the settings for each tone.
If the Mix/Parallel parameter is set to “MIX,” all sounds are
output from the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks in stereo (p. 193).
• When setting the “MFX,” set the output destination with the
MFX Output Assign ( 11 ) for the sound after it has passed
through the multi-effects.
• Chorus and reverb are output in mono at all times.
• The output destination of the signal after passing through the
chorus is set with the Chorus Output Select ( 13 ) and the Chorus
Output Assign ( 15 ).
• The output destination of the signal after passing through the
reverb is set with the Reverb Output Assign ( 18 ).
4 Tone Output Level
Set the level of the signal that is sent to the output destination
specified by Output Assign ( 2 , 3 ).
Value: 0–127
• When the settings are such that signals are split and output from
the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack and INDIVIDUAL 2 jack, and no plug is
inserted in the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack, the sounds from
INDIVIDUAL 1 and INDIVIDUAL 2 are mixed together, then
output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack. This sound comprises the
sounds from the INDIVIDUAL 1 and 2 jacks.
Sets the level of the signal sent to chorus for each tone.
• This parameter is Rhythm Output Assign when a rhythm set is
being selected. You can specifies for each rhythm set how the
direct sound will be output.
Sets the level of the signal sent to reverb for each tone.
If the Mix/Parallel parameter is set to “MIX,” all sounds are
output from the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks in stereo (p. 193).
3 Tone Output Assign
Sets the direct sound’s output method for each tone.
176
5 Tone Chorus Send Level
Value: 0–127
6 Tone Reverb Send Level
Value: 0–127
7 MFX Type (Multi-Effects Type)
Use this parameter to select from among the 77 (Fantom-S88; 78)
available multi-effects. For details on multi-effects parameters, refer
to “Multi-Effects Parameters” (Parameter List).
Value: 0 (Through)–77 (Fantom-S88; 78)
Reference_e.book 177 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
8 MFX Output Level
(Multi-Effects Output Level)
Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through the multieffects.
Value: 0–127
15 Chorus Output Assign
Selects the pair of OUTPUT jacks to which the chorus sound is
routed when Chorus Output Select ( 13 ) is set to “MAIN” or “M+R.”
Value
A: Output to the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks in stereo.
B: Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo.
9 MFX Chorus Send Level
(Multi-Effects Chorus Send Level)
Adjusts the amount of chorus for the sound that passes through
multi-effects. If you don’t want to add the Chorus effect, set it to “0.”
Value: 0–127
When Chorus Output Select ( 13 ) is set to “REV,” this setting
will have no effect.
16 Reverb Type
10 MFX Reverb Send Level
(Multi-Effects Reverb Send Level)
Adjusts the amount of reverb for the sound that passes through
multi-effects. If you don’t want to add the Reverb effect, set it to “0.”
Selects the type of reverb.
Value
0 (Off):
Reverb is not used.
1 (Reverb):
Normal reverb
Value: 0–127
2 (SRV Room): This reverb simulates typical room acoustic
reflections.
11 MFX Output Assign
3 (SRV Hall):
This reverb simulates typical concert hall acoustic
reflections.
4 (SRV Plate):
This reverb simulates a reverb plate, a popular
type of artificial reverb unit that derives its sound
from the vibration of a metallic plate. You can also
achieve unusual metallic-sounding reverbs using
“SRV Plate.”
(Multi-Effects Output Assign)
Adjusts the output destination of the sound that has passed through
the multi-effects.
Value
A: Output to the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks in stereo.
B: Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo.
If the Mix/Parallel parameter is set to “MIX,” all sounds are
output from the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks in stereo (p. 193).
12 Chorus Type
5 (GM2 Reverb): General MIDI 2 reverb
17 Reverb Level
Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through reverb.
Value: 0–127
Selects either chorus or delay.
18 Reverb Output Assign
Value
Specifies how the sound routed through reverb will be output.
0 (Off):
Neither chorus or delay is used.
Value
1 (Chorus):
Chorus is used.
A: Output to the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks in stereo.
2 (Delay):
Delay is used.
B: Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo.
3 (GM2 Chorus): General MIDI 2 chorus
13 Chorus Output Select
If the Mix/Parallel parameter is set to “MIX,” all sounds are
output from the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks in stereo (p. 193).
Specifies how the sound routed through chorus will be output.
Value
MAIN:Output to the OUTPUT jacks in stereo.
REV: Output to reverb in mono.
M+R: Output to the OUTPUT jacks in stereo, and to reverb in mono.
When set to “MAIN” or “M+R,” the OUTPUT jack from which
the sound is output is set in Chorus Output Assign ( 15 ).
14 Chorus Level
Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through chorus.
Value: 0–127
19 Chorus Source
Selects chorus parameter settings. If you want to use the settings of
the patch or rhythm set assigned to the Keyboard part, select “KBD.”
If you want to use the settings of the patch or rhythm set assigned to
the Pad part, select “PAD.”
Value: KBD, PAD
20 Reverb Source
Selects reverb parameter settings. If you want to use the settings of
the patch or rhythm set assigned to the Keyboard part, select “KBD.”
If you want to use the settings of the patch or rhythm set assigned to
the Pad part, select “PAD.”
Value: KBD, PAD
177
Adding Effects
Adding Effects
Reference_e.book 178 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Adding Effects
Applying Effects in
Performance Mode
MFX: Output in stereo through multi-effects. You can also apply
chorus or reverb to the sound that passes through multieffects.
In Performance mode you can use three multi-effects (MFX1, MFX2,
MFX3), one chorus, and one reverb. For each of the three multieffects, the chorus, and the reverb, you can specify whether it will
operate according to the effect settings of the performance, or
according to the effect settings of the patch or rhythm set assigned to
the part you specify. The three multi-effects can be used
independently, or you can connect two or three of them in series.
Specifying How the Sound Will Be
Output (Routing)
Here you can make overall settings for effects, and the output
destination and level of each signal.
fig.14-06.eps_50
A, B: Output to the OUTPUT A (MIX) jack or OUTPUT B jack in
stereo without passing through multi-effects.
1–4: Output to the INDIVIDUAL 1–4 jacks in mono without
passing through multi-effects.
PAT: The part’s output destination is determined by the settings of
the patch or rhythm set assigned to the part.
When the settings are such that signals are split and output from
the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack and INDIVIDUAL 2 jack, and no plug is
inserted in the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack, the sounds from
INDIVIDUAL 1 and INDIVIDUAL 2 are mixed together, then
output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack. This sound comprises the
sounds from the INDIVIDUAL 1 and 2 jacks.
If the Mix/Parallel parameter is set to “MIX,” all sounds are
output from the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks in stereo (p. 193).
• When setting the “MFX,” set the output destination with the
MFX Output Assign ( 11 ) for the sound after it has passed
through the multi-effects.
• Chorus and reverb are output in mono at all times.
For details on the setting, refer to “Making Effect Settings” (p. 175).
Signal Flow Diagram and Parameters
• The output destination of the signal after passing through the
chorus is set with the Chorus Output Select ( 13 ) and the Chorus
Output Assign ( 15 ).
• The output destination of the signal after passing through the
reverb is set with the reverb Output Assign ( 18 ).
3 Part Output MFX Select
fig.14-06
(Part Output Multi-Effects Select)
19
1
8
2
3
11
21
20
Value: 1–3(MFX-1–MFX-3)
9
10
7
8
11
9
10
7
8
4
Of the three systems of multi-effects that can be used
simultaneously, specify which multi-effects will be used.
11
9
10
7
14
15
17
18
13
4 Part Output Level
Set the level of the signal that is sent to the output destination
specified by Part Output Assign ( 2 ).
Value: 0–127
12
5
16
6
5 Part Chorus Send Level
Sets the level of the signal sent to chorus for each part.
Value: 0–127
1 Part Select
Select the part for which you want to make settings.
6 Part Reverb Send Level
Sets the level of the signal sent to reverb for each part.
Value: 0–127
Value: 1–16
2 Part Output Assign
Specifies for each part how the direct sound will be output.
Value
178
For the following parameters 7 – 11 , settings can be made
individually for three systems multi-effects (MFX1–MFX3).
Reference_e.book 179 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
7 MFX Type (Multi-Effects Type)
Use this parameter to select from among the 77 (Fantom-S88; 78)
available multi-effects. For details on multi-effects parameters, refer
to “Multi-Effects Parameters” (Parameter List).
Value: 0 (Through)–77 (Fantom-S88; 78)
When set to “MAIN” or “M+R,” the OUTPUT jack from which
the sound is output is set in Chorus Output Assign ( 15 ).
14 Chorus Level
Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through chorus.
8 MFX Output Level
Value: 0–127
(Multi-Effects Output Level)
Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through the multi-effects.
15 Chorus Output Assign
Selects the pair of OUTPUT jacks to which the chorus sound is
routed when Chorus Output Select ( 13 ) is set to “MAIN” or “M+R.”
Value: 0–127
9 MFX Chorus Send Level
(Multi-Effects Chorus Send Level)
Adjusts the amount of chorus for the sound that passes through
multi-effects. If you don’t want to add the Chorus effect, set it to “0.”
Value: 0–127
10 MFX Reverb Send Level
Value
A: Output to the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks in stereo.
B: Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo.
When Chorus Output Select ( 13 ) is set to “REV,” this setting
will have no effect.
(Multi-Effects Reverb Send Level)
Adjusts the amount of reverb for the sound that passes through
multi-effects. If you don’t want to add the Reverb effect, set it to “0.”
Value: 0–127
If the Mix/Parallel parameter is set to “MIX,” all sounds are
output from the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks in stereo (p. 193).
16 Reverb Type
11 MFX Output Assign
(Multi-Effects Output Assign)
Adjusts the output destination of the sound that has passed through
the multi-effects.
Value
Selects the type of reverb.
Value
0 (Off):
Reverb is not used.
1 (Reverb):
Normal reverb
2 (SRV Room):
This reverb simulates typical room acoustic
reflections.
3 (SRV Hall):
This reverb simulates typical concert hall acoustic
reflections.
4 (SRV Plate):
This reverb simulates a reverb plate, a popular
type of artificial reverb unit that derives its sound
from the vibration of a metallic plate. You can also
achieve unusual metallic-sounding reverbs using
“SRV Plate.”
A: Output to the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks in stereo.
B: Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo.
If the Mix/Parallel parameter is set to “MIX,” all sounds are
output from the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks in stereo (p. 193).
For some settings of MFX Structure, the sound that passes
through the multi-effect will be sent to a different multi-effect,
and the MFX Output Assign setting will be ignored.
5 (GM2 Reverb): General MIDI 2 reverb
17 Reverb Level
12 Chorus Type
Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through reverb.
Selects either chorus or delay.
Value: 0–127
Value
Neither chorus or delay is used.
18 Reverb Output Assign
1 (Chorus):
Chorus is used.
Specifies how the sound routed through reverb will be output.
2 (Delay):
Delay is used.
Value
0 (Off):
3 (GM2 Chorus): General MIDI 2 chorus
A: Output to the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks in stereo.
B: Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo.
13 Chorus Output Select
Specifies how the sound routed through chorus will be output.
19 MFX-1–3 Source (Multi-Effects 1 Source)
Value
● When a performance is selected
MAIN: Output to the OUTPUT jacks in stereo.
Selects the multi-effects parameter settings that will be used by the
performance. If you wish to use the performance settings, select
“PRF.” If you wish to use the settings of the patch/rhythm set
REV: Output to reverb in mono.
M+R: Output to the OUTPUT jacks in stereo, and to reverb in mono.
179
Adding Effects
Adding Effects
Reference_e.book 180 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Adding Effects
assigned to one of the parts, select the part number.
Value: PRF, P1–P16
When Patch or Rhythm Set Settings Are
Selected
Making Multi-Effects Settings
(MFX1–3)
Here we will explain how to make multi-effects settings in
Performance mode.
fig.14-07_50
When the patch or rhythm set’s multi-effects settings are
selected, those settings are shown in each of the performance’s
multi-effects setting screens, and the settings can be then be
changed as well. Changes to patch or rhythm set multi-effects
parameter settings are lost when another patch or rhythm set is
selected. To keep the modified settings, save the patch/rhythm
set settings (p. 42, p. 66).
20 Chorus Source
Selects the chorus parameter settings that will be used by the
performance. If you wish to use the performance settings, select
“PRF.” If you wish to use the settings of the patch/rhythm set
assigned to one of the parts, select the part number.
Value: PRF, P1–P16
When Patch or Rhythm Set Settings Are Selected
When the patch or rhythm set’s chorus settings are selected, those
settings are shown in each of the performance’s chorus setting
screens, and the settings can be then be changed as well. Changes to
patch or rhythm set chorus parameter settings are lost when
another patch or rhythm set is selected. To keep the modified
settings, save the patch/rhythm set settings (p. 42, p. 66).
Each time you press the [3 (MFX1/2/3)] button, it will alternate
between 1, 2, and 3.
For details on the setting, refer to “Making Effect Settings” (p. 175)
Type (Multi-Effects Type)
Use this parameter to select from among the 77 (Fantom-S88; 78)
available multi-effects. For details on multi-effects parameters, refer
to “Multi-Effects Parameters” (Parameter List).
Value: 00 THROUGH–77 CHORUS →FLANGER (Fantom-S), 78
SYNPATHETHIC RESONANCE (Fantom-S88)
In this setting screen, you can edit the parameters of the multi-effects
that is selected by the Multi-effects Type setting. For details on the
parameters that can be edited, refer to “Multi-Effects Parameters”
(Parameter List).
21 Reverb Source
Selects the reverb parameter settings that will be used by the
performance. If you wish to use the performance settings, select
“PRF.” If you wish to use the settings of the patch/rhythm set
assigned to one of the parts, select the part number.
Value: PRF, P1–P16
When Patch or Rhythm Set Settings Are Selected
When the patch or rhythm set’s reverb settings are selected, those
settings are shown in each of the performance’s reverb setting
screens, and the settings can be then be changed as well. Changes to
patch or rhythm set reverb parameter settings are lost when
another patch or rhythm set is selected. To keep the modified
settings, save the patch/rhythm set settings (p. 42, p. 66).
180
You can use the REALTIME CONTROL knobs to edit up to four of
the most important parameters, which have been pre-selected for
each type of multi-effect. When you enter the MFX 1–3 screen, the
indicator at the right of the Realtime Control knobs will go out, and
the Realtime Control knobs can be used to edit the MFX parameters.
If you once again press the button located at the right of the
Realtime Control knobs so the indicator is lit, the knobs will control
their original functions. When you exit the MFX 1–3 screen, the
indicator will automatically return to its previous lit state.
In Patch mode, the Keyboard part can use MFX1 and the Pad
part can use MFX2.
Reference_e.book 181 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Making Multi-Effects Settings
(MFX Control)
fig.14-07a_50
Destination 1–4 (Multi-Effects Control Destination 1–4)
Sets the multi-effects parameters to be controlled with the multieffects control. The multi-effects parameters available for control will
depend on the multi-effects type. For details, refer to “Multi-Effects
Parameters” (Parameter List).
Sens 1–4 (Multi-Effects Control Sensitivity 1–4)
Sets the amount of the multi-effects control’s effect that is applied. To
make an increase in the currently selected value (to get higher values,
move to the right, increase rates, and so on), select a positive value; to
make a decrease in the currently selected value (to get lower values,
move to the left, decrease rates, and so on), select a negative value. When
both positive and negative are selected, the changes are greater as the
value increases. To have no effect applied, select “0.”
Value: -63–+63
For details on the setting, refer to “Making Effect Settings” (p. 175)
Source 1–4 (Multi-Effects Control Source 1–4)
Sets the MIDI message used to change the multi-effects parameter
with the multi-effects control.
Value
OFF: Multi-effects control will not be used.
CC01–31, 33–95: Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95
For more information about Control Change messages, please
refer to “MIDI Implementation” (Parameter List).
PITCH BEND:
Pitch Bend
AFTERTOUCH:
Aftertouch
SYS CTRL1–SYS CTRL4: MIDI messages used as common multieffects controls.
If you want to use common controllers for the entire Fantom-S,
select “SYS CTRL 1”–”SYS CTRL 4.” MIDI messages used as
System Control 1–4 are set with the Sys Ctrl 1–4 Source
parameters (p. 190).
• In patch/rhythm set mode, there are parameters that determine, for
each tone/rhythm tone, whether or not Pitch Bend, Controller
Number 11 (Expression) and Controller Number 64 (Hold 1) are
received (p. 61). When these settings are “ON,” and the MIDI
messages are received, then when any change is made in the settings
of the desired parameter, the Pitch Bend, Expression, and Hold1
settings also change simultaneously. If you want to change the
targeted parameters only, then set these to “OFF.”
• There are parameters that determine whether or not specific MIDI
messages are received for each MIDI channel (p. 90). When using the
multi-effects control, confirm that any MIDI messages used for the
multi-effects control will be received. If the Fantom-S is set up such
that reception of MIDI messages is disabled, then the multi-effects
control will not function.
MFX Control Channel (Multi-Effects Control Channel)
This determines the channel that will be used for reception when using
the Multi-effects Control to modify multi-effects parameters in real time,
when the MFX1–3 Source parameter (p. 179) is set to “PRF.” Set this to
“OFF” when the Multi-effects Control is not being used.
Value: 1–16, OFF
* This parameter is not found in Patch mode.
Multi-Effects Control
If you wanted to change the volume of multi-effects sounds, the
delay time of Delay, and the like, using an external MIDI device,
you would need to send System Exclusive messages-MIDI
messages designed exclusively for the Fantom-S. However,
System Exclusive messages tend to be complicated, and the
amount of data that needs to be transmitted can get quite large.
For that reason, a number of the more typical of the Fantom-S’s
multi-effects parameters have been designed so they accept the use
of Control Change (or other) MIDI messages for the purpose of
making changes in their values. For example, you can use the Pitch
Bend lever to change the amount of distortion, or use the
keyboard’s touch to change the delay time of Delay. The
parameters that can be changed are predetermined for each type of
multi-effect; among the parameters described in “Multi-Effects
Parameters” (Parameter List), these are indicated by a “#.”
In the multi-effect setting screen, a “c” symbol will be shown at
the left of the parameter.
The function that allows you use MIDI messages to make these
changes in realtime to the multi-effects parameters is called the
Multi-effects Control. Up to four multi-effects controls can be
used in a single patch/rhythm set/performance.
When the multi-effects control is used, you can select the
amount of control (Sens parameter) applied, the parameter
selected (Destination parameter), and the MIDI message used
(Source parameter).
By using the Matrix Control instead of the Multi-effects
Control, you can also change the parameters of some
popular multi-effects in realtime (p. 63).
181
Adding Effects
Adding Effects
Reference_e.book 182 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Adding Effects
Specifying the multi-effect
structure (MFX Structure)
Here's how to specify how MFX 1–3 will be connected.
* This parameter is not found in Patch mode.
fig.14-07b_50
You can use the REALTIME CONTROL knobs to edit up to four
of the most important parameters, which have been pre-selected
for each type of chorus. When you enter the MFX 1–3 screen, the
indicator at the right of the Realtime Control knobs will go out,
and the Realtime Control knobs can be used to edit the MFX
parameters. If you once again press the button located at the
right of the Realtime Control knobs so the indicator is lit, the
knobs will control their original functions. When you exit the
MFX 1–3 screen, the indicator will automatically return to its
previous lit state.
Making Reverb Settings (Reverb)
Here we will explain how to make reverb settings in Performance mode.
The procedure is the same when making settings in Patch mode.
fig.14-10_50
For details on the setting, refer to “Making Effect Settings” (p. 175)
Structure Type
Specify how MFX1–3 will be connected.
Value: Type 01–Type 16
MFX1–3 TYPE
Selects the multi-effect type of MFX1–3.
Value: 0 (Through)–77 (Fantom-S88; 78)
Making Chorus Settings (Chorus)
For details on the setting, refer to “Making Effect Settings” (p. 175)
Here we will explain how to make chorus settings in Performance mode.
The procedure is the same when making settings in Patch mode.
Type (Reverb Type)
fig.14-09_50
Selects the type of Reverb.
Value
For details on the setting, refer to “Making Effect Settings” (p. 175)
0 OFF:
Reverb is not used.
1 REVERB:
Normal Reverb
2 SRV ROOM:
This reverb simulates typical room acoustic
reflections.
3 SRV HALL:
This reverb simulates typical concert hall acoustic
reflections.
4 SRV PLATE:
This reverb simulates a reverb plate, a popular
type of artificial reverb unit that derives its sound
from the vibration of a metallic plate. You can
also achieve unusual metallic-sounding reverbs
using “SRV PLATE.”
5 GM2 REVERB: General MIDI 2 reverb
Type (Chorus Type)
Selects either chorus or delay.
Value
0 OFF:
Neither chorus or delay is used.
1 CHORUS:
Chorus is used.
2 DELAY:
Delay is used.
3 GM2 CHORUS: General MIDI 2 chorus
* In this setting screen, you can edit the parameters of the chorus/delay that
is selected by the Chorus Type setting. For details on the parameters that
can be edited, refer to “Chorus Parameters” (Parameter List).
182
In this setting screen, you can edit the parameters of the reverb that
is selected by the Reverb Type setting. For details on the parameters
that can be edited, refer to “Reverb Parameters” (Parameter List).
* In this setting screen, you can edit the parameters of the reverb that is
selected by the Reverb Type setting. For details on the parameters that can
be edited, refer to “REVERB Parameters” (Parameter List).
Reference_e.book 183 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
ATTACK
You can use the REALTIME CONTROL knobs to edit up to four
of the most important parameters, which have been pre-selected
for each type of Reverb. When you enter the MFX 1–3 screen, the
indicator at the right of the Realtime Control knobs will go out,
and the Realtime Control knobs can be used to edit the MFX
parameters. If you once again press the button located at the
right of the Realtime Control knobs so the indicator is lit, the
knobs will control their original functions. When you exit the
MFX 1–3 screen, the indicator will automatically return to its
previous lit state.
Time from when the volume goes up the threshold level until the
compressor effect applies
Value: 0-100 ms
RELEASE
Time from when the volume falls below the threshold level until the
compressor effect no longer applies
Value: 50-5000 ms
THRESHOLD
Volume level at which compression begins
Mastering Effect
This is a stereo compressor (limiter) that is applied to the final
output of the Fantom-S. It has independent high, mid, and low
ranges. Independently for the high-frequency, mid-frequency, and
low-frequency regions, this compresses any sounds that exceed the
specified level, making the volume more consistent. When mixing
down to MD, or DAT, or when you procedure your own original
audio CD, this lets you master at an optimized level.
* Mastering effect settings apply to the entire Fantom-S. These settings
are not for individual patches or performances.
* The mastering effect is applied to the sound that is output from the
OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks. It will not be applied to the sound that is
output from the OUTPUT B jacks.
fig.14-11_50
Value: -36-0 dB
RATIO
Compression ratio
Value: 1.00:1-INF:1 (INF: infinity)
LEVEL
Output volume
Value: 0-24 dB
Split Frequency High
Frequency at which the high-frequency (HI) and mid-frequency
(MID) bands are split
Value: 2000-8000 Hz
Split Frequency Low
Frequency at which the low-frequency (LO) and mid-frequency
(MID) bands are split
Value: 200-800 Hz
About THRESHOLD and RATIO
As shown in the diagram below, these parameters determine
how the volume is to be compressed.
.fig.Comp.e
1:1
For details on the setting, refer to “Making Effect Settings” (p. 175)
[8 (Effect Sw]
Explanation
Recall preset settings for each type.
Recall saved user settings.
Save the current settings as user settings.
Only one set of user settings can be saved.
You can press this to open the Effect Sw window and turn each effect on/off. Turn [6
(Mastering Sw)] on/off to hear the result of
the mastering effect.
Output Level
Function Button
[1]–[5]
[6 (User)]
[7 (System Write)]
RATIO
2:1
4:1
INF:1
THRESHOLD
Input Level
183
Adding Effects
Adding Effects
Reference_e.book 184 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Transferring Data to/from Your
Computer via USB
The Fantom-S allows a USB-connected computer to handle files
stored in the internal user memory or a memory card. Conversely,
WAV/AIFF files can be imported into the Fantom-S and used as
samples. Bitmap data can also be loaded into the Fantom-S.
USB communication with the Fantom-S is possible only for
Windows Me/2000/XP or later (Windows users), or Mac OS
9.04 or later (Macintosh users). Also, this may not work correctly
with some types of computer.
• Windows Me/2000/XP users
A drive named “Removable disk” will be displayed within My
Computer.
Below that drive there will be folders named “ROLAND” and
“TMP.”
• Macintosh users
A drive icon named “FANS USER” will appear on the desktop.
If a memory card is connected, the volume name of the memory
card will be displayed.
Below it will be folders named “ROLAND” and “TMP.”
Connect or disconnect the USB cable only when the Fantom-S is
powered-off. Never connect or disconnect the USB cable or turn
off the power while in USB mode or while data is being
transferred.
Before You Use USB
Connection
Connections
1. With the Fantom-S not connected, start up your computer.
Cautions Regarding Folders and Files
• Do not move or delete any folders on the computer that is
connected via USB to the Fantom-S.
• On the USB-connected computer, do not perform operations
such as Format, Optimize, or Scan Disk on the user memory or
memory card.
• The Fantom-S can only handle filenames consisting of singlebyte alphanumeric characters.
• Only the following types of files can be transferred between the
Fantom-S and your computer.
Song files (.SVQ) (MRC PRO songs)
Standard MIDI Files
2. Use a USB cable to connect the Fantom-S to your computer.
Audio files (.WAV/AIFF)
3. Turn on the power (POWER switch) of the Fantom-S.
Bitmap files (.BMP) (320 x 240 pixels)
Specify the Connection-Destination
Area (USB)
When the Fantom-S is connected to your computer, you can select
the area on the Fantom-S to which a connection is to be made; either
the internal user memory or the memory card.
1. Press [MENU].
2.
or
to select “USB”, and then press [ENTER].
The USB screen will appear.
• To handle these files, use the appropriate method described
below.
<Song files, Standard MIDI Files>
ROLAND/SEQ/SNG Perform operations inside the folder.
<Audio files>
When placing these files from your computer, place them in the
following location.
TMP/AUDIO_IMPORT folder
Then import the audio files.
fig.USB01_50
If you want your computer to read samples that were written by
the Fantom-S, perform operations within the ROLAND/SMPL
folder.
<BMP files>
When placing these files from your computer, place them in the
following location.
TMP/BMP folder
• Do not use your USB-connected computer to delete or rewrite
any files placed in the ROLAND/SND/FANS.SVD folder.
3. Press [3 (Internal)] or [6 (Memory Card)] to establish the
connection with your computer.
[4 (Internal)]: Connect to the user memory
[5 (Memory Card)]: Connect to the memory card
* To cancel the connection, press [7 (Exit)].
184
Transferring Data to/from Your Computer via USB
Importing Audio file
(Import Audio)
Using a Bitmap File as a
Background in the Display
Here’s how to import an audio file (WAV/AIFF).
For example, you can import a favorite bitmap file into the FantomS, and use it as a background in the display screen.
In order to import a file, it must be located in the following
folder on your computer.
* The only files that can be transferred between the Fantom-S and your
computer are bitmaps (320 x 240 pixels).
• Windows Me/2000/XP users
Removable disk/TMP/AUDIO_IMPORT folder
In order to import a file, it must be located in the following
folder on your computer.
• Macintosh users
FANS USER/TMP/AUDIO_IMPORT folder
* “/” indicates a directory level.
• Windows Me/2000/XP users
Removable disk/TMP/BMP folder
• Macintosh users
1. Press [Save/Load].
2. Press [8 (Import Audio)].
3. Press [1 (User)] or [2 (Card)] to select the import-destination
area.
[1 (User)]: Import from user memory.
[2 (CARD)]: Import from a memory card.
4. Press
import.
or
, then select the file that you want to
If you want to select two or more samples, press [5 (Mark Set)] to
add a check mark (✔) to the files that you want to select. To
remove the check mark, press [4 (Mark Clear)].
If you hold down [SHIFT] and press [5 (Mark Set All)], a check
mark will be added to all files of the selected bank. If you hold
down [SHIFT] and press [4 (Mark Clr All)], check marks will be
removed from all selected files.
FANS USER/TMP/BMP folder
* “/” indicates a directory level.
Importing a Bitmap File (Import BMP)
Here’s how to import a copied file and use it as the background in
the Fantom-S’s display.
1. Press [MENU].
2. Press
or
to select “System”, and then press [ENTER].
3. Press [1 (⇑)] or [2 (⇓)] to select “Background.”
fig.USB03_50
5. Press [8 (Import)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
6. Press [8 (Exec)].
The file will be imported, and the Sample List screen will appear.
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
The imported file will be added to the sample list as a sample.
This sample is temporary, and will be lost when you turn off the
power. If you want to keep it, press [WRITE] to save the data.
The Fantom-S has ten screens in which a background is
displayed. The imported file will be overwritten onto the
currently selected screen.
4. Press [7 (Import BMP)].
5. Press [1 (User)] or [2 (Card)] to select the import-destination
area (user memory or card).
6. Press
or
, then select the file that you want to import.
7. Press [8 (Import BMP)].
The file you want to import will be displayed.
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
8. Press [8 (Exec)].
The file will be imported.
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
9. Press [EXIT].
* The imported file is temporary, and will be lost when you turn off the
power. If you want to keep it, press [8 (System Write)] to save the data.
185
Transferring Data to/from Your Computer via USB
Reference_e.book 185 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Reference_e.book 186 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Transferring Data to/from Your Computer via USB
Canceling USB Communication
Windows Me/2000/XP Users
1. Use the device eject button shown in the taskbar at the
lower right of the screen to cancel the connection with the
Fantom-S.
2. Then press [8 (Exit)] on the Fantom-S.
Macintosh Users
1. Drag the Fantom-S drive icon into the trash.
2. Then press [8 (Exit)] on the Fantom-S.
186
File-Related Functions (File Utility)
Here you can perform a variety of operations related to the files
stored in the Fantom-S’s user memory, and on memory cards. You
can copy, delete, or move files, as well as format memory cards.
Basic Procedure
or
Here’s how you can delete an unwanted file from a folder.
1. As described in the basic procedure, select the file that you
want to delete.
[1 (User)] [2 (Card)]: Select the memory
1. Press [MENU].
2. Press
Deleting a File (DELETE)
,
to select “File Utility”, and then press [ENTER].
The File Utility screen will appear.
,
: Select the folder
: Move between folder levels
2. Press [6 (Delete)].
fig.FileUtil01_50
A message will ask you for confirmation.
3. To delete the file, press [8 (Exec)].
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
Moving a File (MOVE)
Here’s how you can move a file to a different folder.
3. Press the function buttons to select the operation you want
to carry out.
[1 (User)]:
Select a file in user memory.
[2 (Card)]:
Select a file on the memory card.
[3 (Card Format)]: Format (initialize) a memory card.
[4 (Mark Clear)]:
[5 (Mark Set)]:
[6 (Delete)]:
Remove a check mark to the files. If you hold
down [SHIFT] and press [4 (Mark Clr All)],
check marks will be removed from all
selected files.
Add a check mark (✔) to the files. If you hold
down [SHIFT] and press [4 (Mark Clr All)],
check marks will be removed from all
selected files.
Delete a file.
[7 (Move)]:
Move a file to a different folder.
[8 (Copy)]:
Copy a file to a different folder.
,
,
:
:
Select the folder.
Move between folder levels.
Copying a File (COPY)
Here’s how you can copy a file to a different folder.
1. As described in the basic procedure, select the file that you
want to move.
[1 (User)] [2 (Card)]: Select the memory
,
,
: Select the folder
: Move between folder levels
2. Press [7 (Move)].
A screen will appear, allowing you to select the folder to which
the file is to be moved.
3. View the contents of the move-destination folder.
[1 (User)] [2 (Card)]: Select the copy destination
,
,
: Select the folder
: Move between folder levels
4. To move the file, press [8 (Exec)].
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
Initializing a Memory Card
(Format)
Here’s how to initialize a memory card. When you execute the
Format operation, the contents of the memory card will be
completely erased.
1. As described in the basic procedure, select the file that you
want to copy.
1. From the file Utility screen, press [3 (Card Format)].
2. Press [8 (Copy)].
2. To format the card, press [8 (Exec)].
A screen will appear, allowing you to select the folder to which
the file is to be copied.
A message will ask you for confirmation.
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
3. View the contents of the copy-destination folder.
[1 (User)] [2 (Card)]: Select the memory
,
,
: Select the folder
: Move between folder levels
4. To copy the file, press [8 (Exec)].
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
187
File-Related Functions (File Utility)
Reference_e.book 187 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Reference_e.book 188 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Settings Common to All Modes (System Function)
Settings that affect the entire operating environment of the FantomS, such as tuning and MIDI message reception, are referred to as
system functions. This section explains how to make settings for
the System functions and describes the functions of the different
System parameters.
How to Make the System
Function Settings
1. Press [MENU] to open the Menu window.
2. Press
or
to select “System,” and then press [ENTER].
The System Setup screen appears.
fig.15-00_50
Saving the System Settings
(Write)
Changes you make to the System function settings are only
temporary—they will be discarded as soon as the power is turned
off. If you want to keep any changes you’ve made in the system
settings, you must save them in internal system memory.
When you perform the save procedure, the data that previously
occupied the save destination will be lost. However, the factory
setting data can be recovered by performing the Factory Reset
procedure.
1. Change the system function settings, and press [8 (System
Write)].
fig.15-10_50
3. Press Function button [3], [4] to select the tab of the edit
group that contains the parameter you want to set.
• [3 (System Setup)]
Set system parameters (p. 189).
• [4 (System Info)]
View system information (p. 195).
4. The parameters are organized into several edit groups.
Use [1 (⇑)][2 (⇓)] to switch tabs.
5. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the parameter you
wish to modify.
• When the cursor is located at a parameter value, you can press
[ENTER] to access a window for setting the value.
• When all the parameters cannot be shown within a single settings
screen, a scroll bar will be displayed at the right side of the screen. In
such cases, press
to scroll the screen downward.
6. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to get the value
you want.
7. Repeat steps 4–6 to make the settings for the System function.
8. To save the settings you modified, press [8 (System Write)]
and perform the Write operation. If you do not want to save,
press [EXIT] to return to the previous screen.
188
The display will indicate “System Write Completed!” The data
will be saved, and you're returned to the System Setup screen.
Settings Common to All Modes (System Function)
Functions of System Parameters
This section explains what the different System parameters do, and
also how these parameters are organized.
For details on the setting, refer to “How to Make the System
Function Settings” (p. 188).
Hold Pedal Polarity
Select the polarity of the Hold pedal. On some pedals, the electrical
signal output by the pedal when it is pressed or released is the
opposite of other pedals. If your pedal has an effect opposite of what
you expect, set this parameter to “REVERSE.” If you are using a
Roland pedal (that has no polarity switch), set this parameter to
“STANDARD.”
Range: STANDARD, REVERSE
Pedal/D Beam
D Beam Sens (D Beam Sensitivity)
This sets the D Beam controller's sensitivity. The higher the value set,
the more readily the D Beam Controller goes to into errect.
Value: 0–127
Control Pedal Assign
This specifies the function of each pedal connected to the PEDAL
CONTROL jacks.
Value
CC01–31, 33–95: Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95
For details on control change messages, refer to “MIDI
Implementation” (Parameter List).
BEND UP:The pitch will rise in semitone steps (maximum 4 octaves)
each time you press the pedal.
Continuous Hold Pedal
This setting determines whether the HOLD PEDAL jack will provide
support for half-pedaling (ON), or not (OFF). When this is set to support
use of half-pedaling techniques, you can then connect an optional
expression pedal (DP-8, etc.), and employ pedal work to achieve even
finer control in performances in which piano tones are used.
Value: OFF, ON
Keyboard
Keyboard Velocity
Specifies the velocity value that will be transmitted when you play
the keyboard. If you want actual keyboard velocity to be
transmitted, set this to “REAL.” If you want a fixed velocity value to
be transmitted regardless of how you play, specify the desired value
(1–127).
Value: REAL, 1–127
BEND DOWN:The pitch will fall in semitone steps (maximum 4
octaves) each time you press the pedal.
Keyboard Sens (Keyboard Sensitivity)
AFTERTOUCH:Aftertouch
Adjusts the keyboard’s touch.
OCT UP:Each pedal press raises the key range in octave steps (up to
3 octaves higher).
Value
OCT DOWN:Each pedal press lowers the key range in octave steps
(up to 3 octaves lower).
MEDIUM: Standard
START/STOP:The sequencer will start/stop.
PUNCH IN/OUT:Manual punch-in/out recording will start/stop.
LIGHT:
Light weight synthesizer keyboard like
HEAVY: Acoustic piano simulation
Aftertouch Sens (Aftertouch Sensitivity)
TAP TEMPO:Tap tempo (a tempo specified by the interval at which
you press the pedal).
Specifies the Aftertouch sensitivity. Higher values will allow
Aftertouch to be applied more easily. Normally you will leave this at
“100.”
PROG UP: The next sound number will be selected.
Value: 0–100%
PROG DOWN:The previous sound number will be selected.
FAVORITE UP:The favorite sound of the next number or bank will
be selected.
FAVORITE DOWN:The favorite sound of the previous number or
bank will be selected.
ARP/RHY SW:Switches the Arpeggio/Rhythm function on/off.
RHY START/STOP: Switch Rhythm pattern playback on/off.
CHORD SW:Chord function on/off.
Control Pedal Polarity
Selects the polarity of the pedal. On some pedals, the electrical signal
output by the pedal when it is pressed or released is the opposite of
other pedals. If your pedal has an effect opposite of what you expect,
set this parameter to “REVERSE.” If you are using a Roland pedal
(that has no polarity switch), set this parameter to “STANDARD.”
Value: STANDARD, REVERSE
189
Settings Common to All Modes (System Function)
Reference_e.book 189 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Reference_e.book 190 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Settings Common to All Modes (System Function)
System Ctrl
Sync/Temp
Sys Ctrl 1–4 Source
Sync Mode
System Control Assign selects the MIDI message used as the System
Control.
Specify the synchronization message that the Fantom-S’s sequencer
will use for operation.
Value
MASTER:
System Control
This function, which departs from previously used methods,
and instead allows you to use MIDI messages to change tone
settings in realtime, is called the Matrix Control (p. 61).
Similarly, the function allowing you to use MIDI messages to
change multi-effects settings in realtime is called the Multieffects Control (p. 181).
Normally, the Matrix Control is used for making patch settings,
and the Multi-effects Control for making settings to patches,
rhythm sets, and performances. However, if you do not need to
change the MIDI messages used for matrix control or multieffects control by each patch/rhythm set/performance, or if
you want to use a specific MIDI message for matrix control or
multi-effects control, you will want to make use of System
Control. In other words, you could call the System Controls
global Matrix Control/Multi-effects Control for the entire
Fantom-S.
You can use up to four System Controls.
Value
OFF: The system control knob will not be used.
CC01–31, 33–95: Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95
For details on control change messages, refer to “MIDI
Implementation” (Parameter List).
PITCH BEND:
Pitch Bend
AFTERTOUCH: Aftertouch
Screen Saver
Screen Saver Type
Select the type of screen saver.
Value: 1–10
The Fantom-S will be the master. Choose this setting
when using the Fantom-S by itself without
synchronizing to another device, or when you want
other MIDI devices to synchronize to the Fantom-S.
SLAVE-MIDI: The Fantom-S will be the slave. Choose this setting
when you want the Fantom-S to synchronize to MIDI
Clock messages received from another MIDI device.
SLAVE-MTC: The Fantom-S will be the slave. Choose this setting
when you want the Fantom-S to synchronize to MTC
(MIDI Time Code) received from an external device.
REMOTE:
Use this setting when you wish an external MIDI
device to have remote start/stop control. The tempo
will be in accord with what has been set on the
Fantom-S.
MIDI Clock and MTC
MIDI Clock and MTC (MIDI Time Code) are both messages
used for synchronization. Select either of them depending on
the application.
MIDI Clock transmits and synchronizes operations to a
sequencer’s performance tempo, whereas MTC synchronizes
operations between devices based on an absolute time. Since
Roland VS Series workstations are hard disk recorders, they
cannot send MIDI Clock. Therefore, using a MTC is convenient
for synchronization of the hard disk recorder and the Fantom-S.
However, VS Series devices also feature specialized tracks for
recording MIDI Clock, so with the Fantom-S’s MIDI Clock
recorded in this manner, we have another synchronizing
technique in which the VS device appears to be sending MIDI
Clock (although it is actually playing back tracks to which MIDI
Clock has been recorded). However, since the tempo must be
recorded to the VS sync track beforehand, MTC is only
convenient in synchronizing with songs that do not contain
great amounts of tempo data.
Screen Saver Time
Set the time (minutes) until the screen saver begins working.
Sync Output (Sync Output Switch)
If this is OFF, the screen saver will not appear.
Set this parameter ON when you want synchronization related MIDI
messages (MIDI Clock, Start, Continue, Stop, Song Position Pointer
and Song Select) to be transmitted to an external MIDI device. If not,
set it OFF.
Value: OFF, 5–60 min.
Background
Background Picture
Select the file that is to be displayed as the screen background.
Value:1–10
Value: OFF, ON
Tempo Override
Specify whether the sequencer tempo will change (ON), or will not
change (OFF) when you switch performance.
Value: ON, OFF
190
Settings Common to All Modes (System Function)
Arpeggio/Rhythm Sync Switch
Specifies whether the arpeggio or rhythm pattern will start/stop in
synchronization with the sequencer. This parameter does nothing if
the sequencer is stopped.
Value
OFF: Start/stop will not synchronize to the synthesizer.
While the sequencer is running, the arpeggiator will start at
the beginning of the next measure. When you stop the
sequencer, the arpeggios will also stop.
ON:
Types of MTC
The types of MTC that can be selected by the Fantom-S are
shown below. Select the same frame rate as that set for the
external device. When not using a video device, then any frame
rate may be selected as long as the rates are the same on both
devices being synchronized.
30:
MMC Mode
When synchronizing the Fantom-S with a hard disk recorder, such
as one from the Roland VS series, specify which synchronization
signal the Fantom-S’s sequencer will use for operation.
Value
MASTER: The Fantom-S will be the master. Use this setting when
you want other devices to follow the operation of the
Fantom-S.
SLAVE:
The Fantom-S will be the slave. Use this setting when
you want the Fantom-S to receive MMC (MIDI Machine
Control) from an external device and operate
accordingly.
MMC (MIDI Machine Control) is a specification that allows
MIDI messages to be used to control devices such as tape
recorders, VTR’s, and digital recording systems. Thirty-seven
MMC commands are available, including Stop and Play.
MMC Output (MMC Output Switch)
Turn this “ON” if you want to synchronize with a hard disk
recorder, such as one from the Roland VS series. When set “ON,”
MMC (MIDI Machine Control) related commands (Play, Stop and
Locate) will be transmitted.
This is 30 frames per second, non-drop format. This is
used by audio devices such as analog tape recorders, and
for NTSC format black and white video (used in Japan
and the U.S.).
29N: This is 29.97 frames per second, non-drop format. This is
used for NTSC format color video (used in Japan and the
U.S.).
29D: 29.97 frames per second drop format. This is used for
NTSC format color video (used in Japan and the U.S.).
25:
25 frame per second frame rate. This is used for SECAM or
PAL format video, audio equipment, and film (used in
Europe and elsewhere).
24:
24 frame per second frame rate. This is used for video,
audio devices, and film in the US.
Non-Drop Format and Drop Format
There are two types of format used by NTSC video cassette
recorders, non-drop and drop. Non-drop format features
continuous time code, whereas in drop format, which is used
for NTSC color video format, the first two frames of every
minute are dropped, except for those at ten-minute intervals. In
most video and audio production, since formats with
continuous frames are easier to deal with, non-drop is generally
used. In contrast, in situations such as in broadcast, where the
time code must match actual clock time, drop is used.
Value: OFF, ON
MTC Sync Output (MTC Sync Output Switch)
MTC Offset Time Hour
Set this parameter ON when you want MTC (MIDI Time Code) to be
transmitted to an external MIDI device. If not, set it OFF.
Coordinates the playback timing of the Fantom-S and the external
device in an hour units.
Value: OFF, ON
Value: 00–23 hours
MTC Frame Rate
MTC Offset Time Minute
Specify the MTC frame rate. Make sure that the same mode is set in
both master and slave devices.
Coordinates the playback timing of the Fantom-S and the external
device in a minute units.
Value
Value: 00–59 minutes
24:
24 frames per second
MTC Offset Time Second
25:
25 frames per second
29N: 29 frames per second
Coordinates the playback timing of the Fantom-S and the external
device in a second units.
29D: 29 frames per second
Value: 00–59 seconds
30:
30 frames per second
When synchronizing with a hard disk recorder such as the
Roland VS series, any frame rate is all right—as long as the
setting matches that of the Fantom-S. However, when
synchronizing operation with video devices such as video decks,
the video device’s frame rate is fixed, so the Fantom-S’s setting
must correspond to that frame rate.
MTC Offset Time Frame
Coordinates the playback timing of the Fantom-S and the external
device in a frame units.
Value: 00–29 frames
191
Settings Common to All Modes (System Function)
Reference_e.book 191 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Reference_e.book 192 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Settings Common to All Modes (System Function)
MTC Error Level
Determines how often the reception status is checked when MTC is
being received from an external device. Stop synchronization if a
problem becomes apparent with the check.
Value: 0–10 (the checking interval will be longer for larger values)
MIDI
Device ID (Device ID Number)
When you want to transmit or receive System Exclusive messages,
set this parameter to match the Device ID number of the other MIDI
device.
Value: 17–32
In strict terms, the lower the numerical value set, the more
accurate the check is. However, playback may be stopped overly
frequently if too rigorous a check is made, and this soon becomes
inconvenient. By raising the Error Level setting, then even if
problems with the reception of MTC do occur, synchronization
can then continue as long as such problems remain at a level that
does not cause undue problems.
Metronome
Metronome Mode
Specifies when you want the metronome to sound.
* If there is a check mark next to [7 (Click)] in the Tempo window, which
appears when you press [TEMPO], the metronome will always sound.
Value
OFF:
Will not sound.
PLAY ONLY: Will sound only during playback.
REC ONLY: Metronome will sound only for recording.
PLAY&REC: Metronome will sound for playback and recording.
ALWAYS:
Metronome will always sound.
Metronome Level
You can adjust the volume of the metronome.
Value: 0–10
Metronome Sound
Performance Control Channel
Performance Ctrl Ch selects the MIDI receive channel used during
switching of performances when MIDI messages (Program Change/
Bank Select) are sent from an external MIDI device. Set this to “OFF”
if performances are not to be switched from an external MIDI device.
Value: 1–16, OFF
If only a program change is received, and if the Performance Ctrl
Ch parameter setting coincides with the MIDI receive channel of
a part, priority will be given to switching the performance.
Kbd Patch Rx/Tx Ch
(Keyboard Patch Receive/Transmit Channel)
Specifies the channel used to transmit and receive MIDI messages
for the Keyboard part in Patch mode.
Value: 1–16
Pad Patch Rx/Tx Ch
(Pad Patch Receive/Transmit Channel)
Specifies the channel used to transmit and receive MIDI messages
for the Pad part in Patch mode.
Value: 1–16
Transmit Program Change
(Transmit Program Change Switch)
Selects the metronome sound.
Specifies whether Program Change messages will be transmitted
(ON) or not (OFF).
Value
Value: OFF, ON
TYPE 1: A conventional metronome sound will be heard. A bell will
sound on the first beat.
Transmit Bank Select (Transmit Bank Select Switch)
TYPE 2: Clicks will sound.
TYPE 3: Beeps will sound.
TYPE 4: Cowbell will sound.
Specifies whether Bank Select messages will be transmitted (ON) or
not (OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
Transmit Active Sensing
(Transmit Active Sensing Switch)
Specifies whether Active Sensing messages will be transmitted (ON)
or not (OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
Transmit Edit Data (Transmit Edit Data Switch)
Specify whether changes you make in the settings of a patch,
performance will be transmitted as system exclusive messages (ON),
or will not be transmitted (OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
Soft Through (Soft Through Switch)
Thru function re-transmits all messages received at the MIDI IN
connector to the MIDI OUT connector without modifying them in
any way. Normally you’ll leave this “OFF,” but when using an
external sequencer, you should set it “ON.”
Value: OFF, ON
192
Settings Common to All Modes (System Function)
Remote Keyboard Sw (Remote Keyboard Switch)
Master Level
Set this parameter “ON” when you want to use an external MIDI
keyboard instead of the Fantom-S’s keyboard. In this case, the MIDI
transmit channel of the external MIDI keyboard can be set to any
channel. Normally you will leave this parameter “OFF.”
Adjusts the volume of the entire Fantom-S.
Value: 0–127
* You can also perform this operation by pressing [MENU].
Press [MENU] to select “Digital Level.”
Value: OFF, ON
Output Gain
Turn this “ON” when you want to control the Fantom-S from an
external MIDI device when performing with the Arpeggio or
RPS function (p. 104, p. 172).
This adjusts the output gain from the Fantom-S’s Analog Out and
Digital Out. When, for example, there are relatively few voices being
sounded, boosting the output gain can let you attain the most
suitable output level for recording and other purposes.
Receive Program Change
(Receive Program Change Switch)
Value: -12–+12
Specifies whether Program Change messages will be received (ON)
or not (OFF).
Specifies how the sound of the entire Fantom-S will be output.
Value: OFF, ON
Receive Bank Select (Receive Bank Select Switch)
Specifies whether Bank Select messages will be received (ON) or not
(OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
Receive Exclusive (Receive System Exclusive Switch)
Specifies whether System Exclusive messages will be received (ON)
or not (OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
Receive GM System On
(Receive GM System On Switch)
Specifies whether General MIDI System On messages will be
received (ON) or not (OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
Mix/Parallel
Value
MIX: Set this to have the collective output of all sounds output from
the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks. When you want to check the final
overall sound being output, set to MIX.
Sounds which are set in the respective Output Assign to be
output from the INDIVIDUAL 3 jack are output from the left
OUTPUT A (MIX) jack; sounds which are set to be output from
the INDIVIDUAL 4 jack are output from the right OUTPUT A
(MIX) jack.
Sounds output from the PHONES jack are the same as those
output from the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks. Therefore, any sounds
set with Output Assign to be output from the OUTPUT B jacks is
not output from the PHONES jack. Be sure to have any sound
you want to hear through the headphones set to “MIX.”
Receive GM2 System On
(Receive GM2 System On Switch)
PARALLEL: Output according to each Output Assign settings.
Specifies whether General MIDI 2 System On messages will be
received (ON) or not (OFF).
Shifts the overall pitch of the Fantom-S in semitone steps.
Value: OFF, ON
Value: -24– +24
Master Key Shift
Receive GS Reset (Receive GS Reset Switch)
Patch Remain (Patch Remain Switch)
Specifies whether GS Reset messages will be received (ON) or not
(OFF).
Specifies whether currently sounding notes will continue sounding
when another patch or rhythm set is selected (ON), or not (OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
Sound
Also, when this is “ON,” changes produced by incoming MIDI
messages such as Volume or Pan (CC 5, 7, 10, 65, 68, 71–74, RPN 0, 1,
2, MONO ON, POLY ON), as well as tonal quality and volume
changes produced by the various controllers will be inherited.
Local Switch
Value: OFF, ON
The Local Switch determines whether the internal sound generator is
disconnected (OFF) from the controller section (keyboard, Pad, pitch
bend/modulation lever, knobs, buttons, D Beam controller, pedal,
and so on); or not disconnected (ON). Normally this is left “ON,” but
if you wish to use the Fantom-S’s keyboard and controllers to control
only external sound modules, set it to “OFF.”
Value: OFF, ON
Effects settings change as soon as you switch to a new patch or
rhythm set, without being influenced by the Patch Remain
setting. Because of this, certain effects settings can cause notes
that were until then sounding to no longer be heard, even
though Patch Remain has been set to on.
Master Tune
Adjusts the overall tuning of the Fantom-S. The display shows the
frequency of the A4 note (center A).
Value: 415.3–466.2 Hz
193
Settings Common to All Modes (System Function)
Reference_e.book 193 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Reference_e.book 194 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Settings Common to All Modes (System Function)
Preview
Scale Tune
Preview Mode
Scale Tune Switch
SINGLE: The notes specified by Note Number 1–4 parameter will
sound successively one by one.
Turn this on when you wish to use a tuning scale other than equal
temperament.
CHORD: The notes specified by Note Number 1–4 parameter will
sound simultaneously.
Value: OFF, ON
PHRASE: The Phrase associated with the patch’s type/category is
played.
Preview 1–4 Note Number
Specify the pitch of the four notes that will sound when the Preview
Mode parameter is set to “SINGLE” or “CHORD.”
Value: C-1–G9
One set of Scale Tune settings can be created in Patch mode. In
Performance mode, this can be set for each part of the performance
(p. 88).
In Patch mode, this is valid only for the keyboard part.
The Fantom-S allows you to play the keyboard using temperaments
other than equal temperament. The pitch is specified in one-cent
units relative to the equal tempered pitch.
• One-cent is 1/100th of a semitone.
If “PHRASE” is selected for the Preview Mode parameter, these
settings will have no effect.
• The selected scale applies to MIDI messages received from an
external MIDI device.
Preview 1–4 Velocity
Specify the velocity of the four notes that will sound when the
Preview Mode parameter is set to “SINGLE” or “CHORD.”
Value: 0–127
If “PHRASE” is selected for the Preview Mode parameter, these
settings will have no effect.
Equal Temperament
This tuning divides the octave into 12 equal parts, and is the
most widely used method of temperament used in Western
music. The Fantom-S employs equal temperament when the
Scale Tune Switch is set to “OFF.”
Just Temperament (Tonic of C)
Compared with equal temperament, the principle triads sound
pure in this tuning. However, this effect is achieved only in one
key, and the triads will become ambiguous if you transpose.
Arabian Scale
In this scale, E and B are a quarter note lower and C#, F# and G#
are a quarter-note higher compared to equal temperament. The
intervals between G and B, C and E, F and G#, Bb and C#, and
Eb and F# have a natural third—the interval between a major
third and a minor third. On the Fantom-S, you can use Arabian
temperament in the three keys of G, C and F.
<Example>
Note
name
Equal temperament
Just Temperament (tonic C)
Arabian Scale
C
C#
D
Eb
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
Bb
B
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-8
+4
+16
-14
-2
-10
+2
+14
-16
+14
-12
-6
+45
-2
-12
-51
-8
+43
-4
+47
0
-10
-49
Patch Scale Tune for C–B
Make scale tune settings for Patch mode.
Value: -64– +63
For details on the setting, refer to “How to Make the System
Function Settings” (p. 188).
194
Settings Common to All Modes (System Function)
Sampling
Sample Default Load
Default File Type
Specifies whether the samples of the user area and memory card will
be loaded into memory at power-on (ON) or not (OFF).
Specifies the file format used when saving a sample.
Value: OFF, ON
Value: WAV, AIFF
Pre Sample Time
Power Up Mode
0–1000 ms
This setting allows you to choose the mode that you want the
Fantom-S to be in when it is powered up.
Value: OFF, ON
Value
The length of sound preceding the moment at which sampling was
manually or automatically initiated that will be captured in the
sample. This lets you prevent the attack portion of the sound from
being omitted from the sample.
PATCH:
Trigger Level
Volume level at which sampling will begin when Auto Trig is ON
A setting of 0 is the minimum.
Value: 0–7
Gap Time
Length of silence at which the sample will be divided
The Fantom-S will be in Patch mode when you
turn on the power.
PERFORMANCE: The Fantom-S will be in Performance mode when
you turn on the power.
SRX/RAM Mode
The Fantom-S provides four slots (A–D) for SRX series expansion
boards. This setting specifies whether all of these slots will be
available (x4) or only slots A and B will be available (x2). If you have
installed a 256 MB DIMM module, setting this to “2 SRX/288MB
Max” will change the amount of memory that will be available as
sample memory.
Whenever there is a silent region longer than the specified time, the
sample will be divided at that point, and the next sample number
will be assigned to the sound that follows. This parameter is valid
only when you are using Auto Divide Sampling.
Range
Value: 500, 1000, 1500, 2000 ms
2 SRX/288MB Max: Only EXP slots A and B will be available.
External Source Select
* If a 512 MB DIMM is installed, the result will be the same as if a 256
MB DIMM were installed.
Installed DIMM
Amount of available
sample memory
512 MB
256 MB
128 MB
64 MB
0 MB
288 MB
288 MB
160 MB
96 MB
32 MB
Input source of the external input sound
Value
LINE-L-R: INPUT jacks L/R (stereo)
LINE-L:
INPUT jack L (mono)
MIC:
INPUT jack (mono, mic level)
4 SRX/192MB Max: EXP slots A–D will all be available.
Trimming Switch
If this is turned on, the Start point and End point settings will be
automatically adjusted after sampling is performed, so any silent
portions at the beginning or end of the sampled sound are excluded.
Value: OFF, ON
Skip Back Time
Specifies how much earlier in time that you want sampling to take
place when you use Skip Back Sampling. If “OFF” selected, skipback sampling cannot be performed.
Value: OFF, 5s–40s
Start up
Preset Default Load
Specifies whether the preset samples will be loaded into memory at
power-on (ON) or not (OFF).
Value: OFF, ON
Installed DIMM
Amount of available
sample memory
512 MB
256 MB
128 MB
64 MB
0 MB
192 MB
192 MB
160 MB
96 MB
32 MB
* The settings of this switch takes effect when the power is turned on.
System Information
For details on the indicating, refer to “How to Make the System
Function Settings” (p. 188).
Features
Displays the main features of the Fantom-S.
Memory Info (Memory Information)
Displays the amount of memory installed.
SRX Info (SRX Information)
Displays the name of the wave expansion board that is installed.
Version Info (Version Information)
Displays the version of the Fantom-S.
195
Settings Common to All Modes (System Function)
Reference_e.book 195 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Reference_e.book 196 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Data Management Functions
Reset to Default Factory Settings (Factory Reset)
Basic Procedure
1. Press [MENU].
2. Press
or
to select “Utility.”
3. Press [ENTER].
The Utility menu screen will appear.
ffig.17-04_50
Restoring User Data that You
Backed Up (User Restore)
Here’s how user data saved on a memory card by the User Backup
operation can be reloaded back into the user memory of the Fantoms.
When you execute User Restore, the current contents of the user area
will be completely erased.
1. Into the slot, insert the memory card on which user data has
been saved.
2. In the Utility screen, press [2 (User Restre)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
3. To proceed with the restoration, press [8 (Exec)].
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
4. When the display indicates “Please Power Off,” turn the
power off, then on again.
4. Press [1]–[3] to select the operation that you want to
execute.
• [1 (User Backup)] Save user data to a memory card.
• [2 (User Restre)] Load user data from a memory card.
• [3 (Factry Reset)] Restore the factory settings.
Backing Up User Data
(User Backup)
Here’s how all user data in the user area can be saved on a memory
card.
The following user data will be saved.
Factory Reset
This restores all data in the Fantom-S to the factory-set condition
(Factory Reset).
If there is important data you’ve created that’s stored in the
Fantom-As’s internal memory, all such data is discarded when a
Factory Reset is performed (the data of the internal user
memory will be lost). If you want to keep the existing data, save
it on a SmartMedia (p. 168) or save it on via USB to your
computer (p. 184).
• Performances
1. Press [MENU] to open the Menu window.
• Patches
2. Press
• Rhythm sets
• Rhythm Patterns
• Rhythm Groups
• Multisamples
• Songs
• Samples
• Pattern sets
• RPS sets
• Arpeggio styles
• Chord forms
• System settings
* In order to execute User Backup, the memory card must have
approximately 16 MB or more free area.
1. Insert a memory card into the slot.
2. In the Utility screen, press [1 (User Backup)].
A message will ask you for confirmation.
3. To execute the backup, press [8 (Exec)].
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
196
or
to select “Utility,” and then press [ENTER].
3. Press [3 (Factry Reset)].
A message will ask confirmation.
4. Press [8 (Exec)] to execute the Factory Reset.
* To cancel, press [7 (Cancel)].
5. When the display indicates “Please Power Off,” turn the
power off, then on again.
Reference_e.book 197 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing in Piano Mode
The Fantom-S88 has a Piano mode that use the instrument as a
dedicated piano. This chapter explains the procedures used in piano
mode, and the functions of the parameters.
Selecting from the Patch List Screen
You can display a list of piano patches and select a patch from that
list.
1. In the Piano Mode screen, press [1 (List)].
Cautions for Piano mode
fig.PM03_50
• When you select Piano mode, the multi-effect setting will be
“78:SYMPATHETIC RESONANCE.”
Playing in Piano Mode
• Patch editing will not be possible.
• If you use a Hold pedal, we recommend that you use a Roland
DP-8. If the DP-8 is used, you can control the amount of
resonance by the depth to which you press the pedal.
• If no operation is performed for a certain length of time (2–3
seconds) the window will close automatically.
2. Press
or
to select the patch.
Selecting Piano Mode
3. Press [1 (⇑)] or [2 (⇓)] to select the desired category.
1. Press [PIANO MODE].
4. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] , and then press [8
(Select)] to select the patch.
The Piano Mode screen appears.
fig.PM01_50
By Pressing [7 (Preview)] you can audition the sound of the
patch, by means of a phrase preselected as being suitable for that
particular type (category) of patch (Phrase Preview).
By pressing [5 (System Write)] you can register the currently
selected patch as the one that will be first selected the next time
you press [PIANO MODE] to enter Piano mode.
Selecting a Patch
In Piano mode you can select piano-type sounds.
1. Press
or
Changing the Piano Sound
(Open/Close)
1. In the Piano Mode screen, press [2 (Open/Close)].
fig.PM04_50
to move the cursor to the patch name.
2. Turn the VALUE dial or press [INC]/[DEC] to select the patch.
In Piano mode you cannot select patches from the GM group.
Selecting Patches by Category
The Fantom-S provides a “Patch Search function” (Patch Finder)
which allows you to specify a type (category) of patch so that you
can quickly find the desired patch.
1. Press
or
to move the cursor to the patch category.
2. Turn VALUE dial of press [INC]/[DEC] to select the patch
category.
2. The window will open when you press [2 (Open/Close)], and
the value will change each time you press [2 (Open/Close)].
This simulates the actual changes in sound that occur when the
lid of a grand piano is set at different heights.
Value: 1–6
You can choose from two categories: “PNO” (acoustic piano)
and “EP” (electric piano).
197
Reference_e.book 198 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Playing in Piano Mode
Adjusting the Keyboard Touch
(Key Touch)
Adjusting the Depth of
Resonance (Resonance)
You can vary the touch of the keyboard when you play the
When you hold down the damper pedal on an acoustic piano, the
strings (notes) you play will cause the other strings to resonate
sympathetically, creating a rich and spacious resonance. You can
adjust the depth of this resonance.
keys.
1. In the Piano Mode screen press [3 (Key Touch)].
fig.PM05_50
1. From the Piano Mode screen, press [4 (Resonance)].
fig.PM06_50
2. The window will open when you press [3 (Key Touch)], and
the value will change each time you press [3 (Key Touch)].
• Light: This sets the keyboard to a light touch. You can achieve
fortissimo (ff) play with a less forceful touch than usual, so the
keyboard feels lighter. This setting makes it easier for children,
whose hands have less strength.
• Medium: This sets the keyboard to the standard touch. You can
play with the most natural touch. This setting is closest to the
response of an acoustic piano.
• Heavy: This sets the keyboard to a heavy touch. You have to
play the keyboard more forcefully than usual in order to play
fortissimo (ff), so the keyboard touch feels heavier. This setting
allows you to add more expression when playing dynamically.
198
2. Either turn the VALUE dial or use [INC] [DEC] to set the
value.
Adjusts the depth of resonance (0–127). Set this to 0 if you do not
want to apply resonance.
Saving a Sound (Patch)
Changes you make to sound settings are temporary, and will be lost
if you turn off the power or select another sound. If you want to keep
the modified sound, you must save it in the internal USER group
(user memory). Refer to “Saving Patches You’ve Created (Write)”
(p. 42).
Reference_e.book 199 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Using Fantom-S Editor
Installing Fantom-S Editor into
Your Computer
Detailed instructions on installing the software can be found in the
online manual contained on the Fantom-S Editor CD-ROM.
• Windows users
In the Fantom-S Editor CD-ROM, open the Readme_E.txt.
Using Fantom-S Librarian
Fantom-S Librarian is software that lets you manage libraries of
Fantom-S parameter data on your computer. It provides an efficient
way to manage patch, rhythm set, and performance data.
In order to use the librarian included on the “Fantom-S Editor CDROM,” you will need to put the Fantom-S in Librarian mode.
* The same is true when you want to use a separately sold librarian.
1. Press [MENU].
2. Use
or
[ENTER].
to select “Librarian” and then press
Using Fantom-S Editor
To help you take even greater advantage of its functionality, the
Fantom-S comes with Fantom-S Editor software. Fantom-S Editor
assigns parameters to sliders and knobs in the computer screen,
allowing you to work efficiently in a graphical editing environment.
fig.Editor02_50
• Macintosh users
In the Fantom-S Editor CD-ROM, open the Readme(English).txt.
Making Connections
In order to use Fantom-S Editor, you will need a separately sold
MIDI interface.
fig.Editor01
Fantom-S
Librarian mode will be selected. In Librarian mode, system
exclusive messages sent from an external MIDI device can
overwrite the settings in user memory. You will be unable to
operate the panel of the Fantom-S.
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
USB MIDI Interface
3. Press [EXIT] to exit Librarian mode and return to the normal
state.
Fantom-S Editor System
Requirements
Edirol UM-1
System Requirements (Windows)
Windows
Macintosh
• Operating System:
Microsoft® Windows® XP
Microsoft® Windows® Me
Microsoft® Windows® 2000Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 98/98SE
• CPU/Clock:
Pentium®/Celeron™ processor 400MHz or higher
Pentium® III 500 MHz or higher (recommended)
• Memory (RAM):
128 M bytes or more
256 M bytes or more (recommended)
• Display/Colors:
800 x 600 or higher/65,536 colors (16 bit High Color) or more
1024 x 768 or higher (recommended)
• Hard Disk: 80 M bytes or more
204
* Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
* Windows® is known officially as: “Microsoft® Windows® operating
system.”
* Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
199
Reference_e.book 200 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Using Fantom-S Editor
System Requirements (Mac OS)
• Operating System:
Mac OS 8.6 and 9.x
• CPU/Clock:
PowerPC G3 / 233 MHz or higher
• Memory (RAM):
128 M bytes or more
256 M bytes or more (recommended)
• Display/Colors:
800 x 600 or higher/32,000 colors or more
1024 x 768 or higher (recommended)
• Hard Disk:
80 M bytes or more
• Others
OMS 2.0 or more
*207
* Apple and Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
209
* MacOS is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
* OMS is a registered trademark of Opcode Systems, Inc.
200
Reference_e.book 201 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
About V-LINK
Turning the V-LINK ON/OFF
V-LINK (
) is a function that provides for the play of
music and visual material. By using V-LINK-compatible video
equipment, visual effects can be easily linked to, and made part of
the expressive elements of a performance.
1.
The V-LINK button will light, and the V-LINK setting will be
on.
In this state, you can operate the velocity pads and turntable
emulation slider to manipulate images in sync with the
playback of the Fantom-S.
(Examples)
By using the Fantom-S and Edirol DV-7PR together, you can:
• Make Edirol DV-7PR playback settings remotely from the
Fantom-S.
If you press [EXIT], you will return to the previous screen while
leaving the V-LINK setting on.
• Use the Fantom-S’s sequencer to enjoy synchronized music and
video.
• Use the Fantom-S’s velocity pads to switch the Edirol DV-7PR’s
images (clips/palettes).
Each mode will function as usual even if V-LINK is on.
2.
• Use the Fantom-S’s knobs to adjust the brightness or color of the
image.
*
In order to use V-LINK with the Fantom-S and Edirol DV-7PR, you
will need to make connections using an Edirol UM1/UM-1S (sold
separately).
Connection Examples
Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the power
to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/or damage
to speakers or other devices.
In the left of the panel, press [V-LINK] so the indicator is
lighted.
Press [V-LINK] again.
The V-LINK button will go out, and the V-LINK setting will be
off.
V-LINK Settings
1.
Holding down [SHIFT] and pressing [V-LINK] to access the
V-LINK SETUP screen.
2.
Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to a parameter, and
turn the VALUE dial or use [INC][DEC] to set the value.
fig.V-LINK01
Use a UM-1 to connect the Fantom-S’s MIDI OUT connector to the
DV-7PR’s remote jack.
fig.V-LINK-Connect.e
Fantom-S
*
MIDI OUT
Specify the Pad Mode by pressing [1 (Clip)] or [2 (Palett)].
3.
If you want to keep your settings, press [8 (System Write)].
4.
Press [7 (Exit)] or [EXIT].
You’re returned to the previous screen.
Edirol UM-1
REMOTE
Edirol DV-7PR
Projector
Display
201
About V-LINK
What is V-LINK?
Reference_e.book 202 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
About V-LINK
V-LINK Parameters
Clip filter
Note Tx Ch
Clips that are checked can be switched. Enable/disable switching for
each clip
Value: 1-16
MIDI channel that will switch Edirol DV-7PR clips/palettes and will
control dissolve time.
(check boxes 1-32)
Value: OFF, ON
Clip 1 Note No.
Using the Clip Filter
Pads 1–16 correspond to Edirol DV-7PR clips (or palettes). We
recommend that you press [PAD SETTING] to access the Pad setting
screen, and set “Pad Set” to “Note,” and set Clip1 Note No. to the
same value as the “Pad Base Note” setting.
For example, suppose that of the rhythm set you input in the
part used for V-LINK (i.e., the part of the same number as the
Note Tx Channel), you want only the kick and snare to switch
clips. In this case, check only the clips that correspond to the
note numbers of the kick and snare. The clips will switch when
the kick or snare plays.
Value: 0(C-1)-127(G9)
Play Speed Ctrl
Range of video playback speed The three values are the playback
speeds (multiples of normal speed) at the left, center, and right
positions of the pitch bend.
Value: 0.0-1.0-2.0, 0.5-1.0-2.0, 0.0-1.0-4.0, 0.5-1.0-4.0, 0.0-1.0-8.0,
0.5-1.0-8.0, 0.0-1.0-16.0, 0.5-1.0-16.0, 0.0-1.0-32.0,
0.5-1.0-32.0,0.0-2.0-4.0, 0.0-4.0-8.0, 0.0-8.0-16.0,
0.0-16.0-32.0, -2.0-1.0-4.0, -6.0-1.0-8.0
Dissolve Time
Control change number that controls the dissolve time (time over
which the image switches)
Value: OFF, CC1, CC5, CC7, CC10, CC11, CC71-74, CC91-93,
Channel Aftertouch
Resetting the Image
Clip Reset
Turn off the image (solid black).
Procedure: [3 (Clip Reset)]
All Reset
The effect applied to the image will be reset, and brightness, color
difference, etc. will all return to the default value.
Procedure: [F4 (All Reset)]
*
For details on clips/palettes, dissolve time, color difference signals (Cb/
Cr), refer to the Edirol DV-7PR manual.
Ctrl Tx Ch
MIDI channel that will control the Edirol DV-7PR color Cb/Cr,
brightness, and video effect switching
Value: 1-16
Color Cb Ctrl
Control change number that controls the Cb color of the image
Color Cr Ctrl
Control change number that controls the Cr color of the image
Brightness Ctrl
Control change number that controls the brightness of the image
VFX Ctrl
Control change number that controls the video effect
Value: OFF, CC1, CC5, CC7,CC10, CC11, CC71-74, CC91-93,
Channel Aftertouch
PAD MODE
Selects whether the pads will switch clips or palettes.
Value: CLIP, PALETT
Press [1 (Clip)]: switch clips
Press [2 (Palett)]: switch palettes
Local Sw
Specifies whether the internal sound generator is disconnected (OFF)
from the pads, or not (OFF).
Procedure: Press [5 (Local Sw)].
Value: OFF, ON
202
The Fantom-S does not support the Edirol DV-7PR’s dual stream
mode.
Reference_e.book 203 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Installing the Wave Expansion Board
Wave Expansion Boards store Wave data, patches, and rhythm sets,
and by equipping the Fantom-S/Fantom-S88 with these boards, you
can greatly expand your sound palette.
Cautions When Installing an
Wave Expansion Board
● To avoid the risk of damage to internal components that can be
caused by static electricity, please carefully observe the following
whenever you handle the board.
• Before you touch the board, always first grasp a metal object
(such as a water pipe), so you are sure that any static electricity
you might have been carrying has been discharged.
• When handling the board, grasp it only by its edges. Avoid
touching any of the electronic components or connectors.
How to Install a Wave
Expansion Board
Install the Wave Expansion Boards after removing the panel cover.
Boards can be installed in the EXP A–EXP D slots. These slots
correspond with the Wave Expansion Board groups (XP-A–XP-D)
when the expansion Wave, patches, and rhythm sets are used.
1. Before installing the Wave Expansion Board, turn off the
power of the Fantom-S/S88 and all connected devices, and
disconnect all cables, including the Power cable, from the
Fantom-S/S88.
2. From the Fantom-S/Fantom-S88, remove only the screws
shown in the following diagram, and detach the cover. On
the Fantom-S, the cover is located on the bottom panel. On
the Fantom-S88, it is located on the front panel.
fig.18-02, 02a.e
Fantom-S : bottom
Screws to be removed
• Save the bag in which the board was originally shipped, and put
the board back into it whenever you need to store or transport it.
● Use a Philips screwdriver that is suitable for the size of the screw
(a number 2 screwdriver, Fantom-s only). If an unsuitable
screwdriver is used, the head of the screw may be stripped.
● To remove a screw, rotate the screwdriver counter-clockwise. To
tighten the screws, rotate the screwdriver clockwise.
fig.18-01.e
loosen
tighten
Fantom-S88 : Panneau avant
Vis à enlever
● When installing Wave Expansion Boards, remove only the
specified screws.
● Be careful that the screws you remove do not drop into the interior
of the Fantom-S/S88.
Clé hexagonale 5 mm
● Do not leave the bottom cover removed. After installation of the
Wave Expansion Boards is complete, be sure to replace the cover.
● Be careful not to cut your hand on the opening for installing the
board.
● Do not touch any of the printed circuit pathways or connection
terminals.
● Never use excessive force when installing a circuit board. If it
doesn’t fit properly on the first attempt, remove the board and try
again.
● When circuit board installation is complete, double-check your
work.
● Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord before
attempting installation of the circuit board (SRX series).
● Install only the specified circuit board(s) (SRX series). Remove
only the specified screws (p. 203).
When turning the unit upside-down, get a bunch of newspapers
or magazines, and place them under the four corners or at both
ends to prevent damage to the buttons and controls. Also, you
should try to orient the unit so no buttons or controls get
damaged.
When turning the unit upside-down, handle with care to avoid
dropping it, or allowing it to fall or tip over.
fig.18-03
A hex wrench is included with the Fantom-S88. When removing
screws, you must use this hex wrench.
203
Installing the Wave Expansion Board
Up to three optional Wave Expansion Boards (one SR-JV80 series,
two SRX series) can be installed in the Fantom.
Reference_e.book 204 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Installing the Wave Expansion Board
3. There are four slots inside. As shown in the following
illustration, plug the connector of the Wave Expansion
Board into the connector of the relevant slot, and at the
same time insert the board holder through the hole of the
Wave Expansion Board.
fig.18-04.e
Wave Expansion Board (SRX series)
Checking the Installed Wave
Expansion Boards
After installation of the Wave Expansion Boards has been
completed, check to confirm that the installed boards are being
recognized correctly.
1. Turn on the power, as described in “Turning On the Power”
(Quick Start; p. 4).
2. Press [MENU] to open the Menu window.
3. Press
or
[ENTER].
to select “System,” and then press
4. Press [4 (System Info)].
5. Press [1(⇑)] or [2(⇓)] to select “SRX Info.”
Board holder
The System screen appears. Verify that the name of the installed
Wave Expansion Board is displayed.
fig.18-06
Position them as shown
before you install the board.
Connector
If you install expansion boards of the same type, only one board
will be detected.
4. Use the Installation Tool supplied with the Wave Expansion
Board to turn the holders in the LOCK direction, so the
board will be fastened in place.
fig.18-05.e
LOCK
Installation tool
If “----------------” appears next to the installed slot name, it’s
possible that the installed Wave Expansion Board is not being
recognized correctly. Re-install the Wave Expansion Board
correctly.
6. Press [EXIT] to exit the System Menu screen
If the model number of the board does not appear, it is possible
that the wave expansion board is not being recognized properly.
Turn off the power as described in “Turning On/Off the Power”
(Quick Start), and re-install the wave expansion board correctly.
5. Use the screws that you removed in step 2 to fasten the
cover back in place.
204
If the SRX/RAM Mode parameter (p. 195) is set to “2 SRX/
288MB Max,” only the two slots EXP-A and B can be used.
Reference_e.book 205 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Installation de la carte d’expansion Wave
(French language for Canadian Safety Standard)
Les cartes d’expansion Wave emmagasinent des données Wave,
correctifs et rythmes, et en ajoutant ces cartes au Fantom-S/FantomS88, il est possible d’élargir considérablement la palette de sons.
Précautions à prendre lors de
l’installation d’une carte
d’expansion Wave
● Veuillez suivre attentivement les instructions suivantes quand
vous manipulez la carte afin d’éviter tout risque
d’endommagement des pièces internes par l’électricité statique.
• Toujours toucher un objet métallique relié à la terre (comme un
tuyau par exemple) avant de manipuler la carte pour vous
décharger de l’électricité statique que vous auriez pu accumuler.
• Lorsque vous manipulez la carte, la tenir par les côtés. Évitez de
toucher aux composants ou aux connecteurs.
• Conservez le sachet d’origine dans lequel était la carte lors de
l’envoi et remettez la carte dedans si vous devez la ranger ou la
transporter.
Installation d’une carte
d’expansion Wave
Avant d’installer la carte d’expansion Wave, retirez le panneau
inférieur. Les cartes peuvent être installées dans les emplacements
SRX-A– SRX-D. Ces fentes correspondent aux groupes de cartes
d’expansion Wave (XP-A– XP-D) lorsque l’expansion Wave, les
correctifs et rythmes sont utilisés.
1. Avant d’installer la carte d’expansion Wave, coupez
l’alimentation du Fantom-S/S88 et de tous les appareils
branchés, et débranchez tous les câbles du Fantom-S/S88, y
compris le câble d’alimentation.
2. Sur les modèles Fantom-S/S88, retirer uniquement les vis
illustrées dans le schéma ci-dessous et retirer le couvercle.
Sur le modèle Fantom-S, le couvercle est situé sur le
panneau inférieur. Sur le modèle Fantom-S88, il est placé
sur le panneau avant. Une clé hexagonale est fournie avec le
Fantom-S88. Il faut utiliser cette clé pour retirer les vis.
fig.18-02.f
Fantom-S : Panneau inférieur
Vis à enlever
● Utilisez un tournevis de type Philips de la taille adaptée à celle
des vis (tournevis numéro 2, Fantom-s only). Un tournevis
inadéquat peut endommager la tête de la vis.
● Pour retirer une vis, tourner le tournevis dans le sens contraire
des aiguilles d’une montre. Pour serrer les vis, tourner le tournevis
dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre.
fig.18-01.f
desserrer
resserrer
Fantom-S88 : Panneau avant
Vis à enlever
● Pour installer les cartes d’expansion Wave, retirer uniquement les
vis mentionnées.
● Assurez-vous que les vis retirées ne tombent pas dans le FantomS/S88.
Clé hexagonale 5 mm
● Ne pas laisser le panneau de protection avant detache. S’assurer
de l’avoir rattacher apres avoir installe le disque dur.
● Faites attention de ne pas vous couper sur l’ouverture
d’installation de la carte.
● Ne pas toucher aux circuits imprimés ou aux connecteurs.
● Ne jamais forcer lors de l’installation de la carte de circuits
imprimés. Si la carte s’ajuste mal au premier essai, enlevez la carte
et recommencez l’installation.
● Quand l’installation de la carte de circuits imprimés est terminée,
revérifiez si tout est bien installé.
● Toujours éteindre et débrancher l’appareil avant de commencer
l’installation de la carte. (SRX series).
● N’installez que les cartes de circuits imprimes spécifiées (SRX
series). Enlevez seulement les vis indiquées.
Lorsque vous déposez le Fantom-S face vers le bas, placez des
piles de journaux ou de magazines sous les quatre coins (ou des
deux côtés) pour le soutenir. Ainsi, les boutons, manettes et
autres pièces ne seront pas endommagés.
En plaçant l’appareil sens dessus dessous, manipulez-le avec
soin pour éviter de l’échapper, de le laisser tomber ou de se
renverser.
fig.18-03
205
Installation de la carte d’expansion Wave
Un maximum de trois cartes d’expansion Wave (quatre cartes SRX)
peuvent être installées dans le Fantom-S/Fantom-S88.
Reference_e.book 206 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Installation de la carte d’expansion Wave
3. Il y a quatre emplacements à l'intérieur. Comme le montre
l’illustration ci-dessous, branchez le connecteur de la carte
d’expansion Wave dans la fente appropriée et, en même
temps, insérez le support de carte de circuits imprimés dans
l’ouverture de la carte d’expansion Wave.
fig.18-04.f
Carte d’extension Wave (serie SRX)
Vérification des cartes
d’extension audio aprés
installation
Lorsque l’installation des cartes d’extension audio est terminée,
procéder à une vérification pour s’assurer que l’ordinateur les
identifie correctement.
1. Mettre sous tension de la façon décrite sous “Turning On
the Power” (Quick Start; p. 4).
2. Appuyez sur la touche [MENU] pour ouvrir la fenêtre Menu.
3. Press
or
[ENTER].
to select “System, ” and then press
4. Appuyer sur [ENTER].
Support à carte
5. Appuyer sur [4 (System Info)].
6. Press [1(⇑)] or [2(⇓)] to select “SRX Info.”
Avant l’installation,
orienter les supports à carte
tel qu’indiqué sur le schéma.
L’écran System Edit s’affiche. Vérifiez que le nom de la carte
d’expansion Wave installeé s’est affiché.
Connecteur
fig.18-06
Si plusieurs cartes d'expansion du même type sont installées,
une seule sera détectée.
4. Utilisez l’outil d’installation fourni avec la carte d’expansion
Wave pour tourner les supports en position LOCK
(verrouillé) afin de retenir la carte en place.
fig.18-05.f
LOCK
Outil d’installation
Si “----------------“ est affiché à côté du nom de la fente dans
laquelle la carte est installée, il est possible que la carte
d’extension audio installée ne soit pas reconnue correctement.
Réinstaller correctement la carte d’extension audio.
7. Appuyer sur [EXIT] pour quitter la fenêtre du menu du système.
5. Remettez le couvercle en place à l’aide des vis retirées à
l’étape 2.
206
Reference_e.book 207 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Expanding the Memory
The Fantom-S/Fantom-S88 comes with 32 MB of memory into which
audio samples can be loaded. However, in some cases, 32 MB of
memory will be insufficient for loading large amounts of data. In
such a case, you will have to add separately sold memory (DIMM).
Memory can be expanded up to 64/128/256/512 MB.
How to Expand the Memory
Install the memory module after removing the bottom panel cover.
1.
Before expanding the memory, turn off the power of the
Fantom-S/S88 and all connected devices, and disconnect
all cables, including the Power cable, from the Fantom-S/
S88.
2.
From the Fantom-S/S88, remove only the screws shown in
the following diagram, and detach the cover. On the
Fantom-S, the cover is located on the bottom panel. On the
Fantom-S88, it is located on the front panel. From the
Fantom-S/S88, remove only the screws shown in the
following diagram, and detach the cover.
Before expanding the memory, consult with your retailer, the nearest
Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor.
* If a 512 MB DIMM is installed, the result will be the same as if a 256
MB DIMM were installed (p. 195 SRX/RAM Mode).
Precautions for Expanding
Memory
901
• To avoid the risk of damage to internal components that can be
caused by static electricity, please carefully observe the following
whenever you handle the board.
fig.18-02.e
Fantom-S : bottom
1
Screws to be removed
• Before you touch the board, always first grasp a metal object
(such as a water pipe), so you are sure that any static
electricity you might have been carrying has been discharged.
Expanding the Memory
2
• When handling the board, grasp it only by its edges. Avoid
touching any of the electronic components or connectors.
5
• Save the bag in which the board was originally shipped, and
put the board back into it whenever you need to store or
transport it.
• Use a Philips screwdriver that is suitable for the size of the screw
(a number 2 screwdriver, Fantom-S only). If an unsuitable screwdriver is used, the head of the screw may be stripped.
Fantom-S88 : Panneau avant
Vis à enlever
• To remove a screw, rotate the screwdriver counter-clockwise. To
tighten the screws, rotate the screwdriver clockwise.
fig.Screw.e
loosen
tighten
Clé hexagonale 5 mm
• Be careful that the screws you remove do not drop into the
interior of the Fantom-S/S88.
• Be careful not to cut your hand on the edge of the cover or the
opening edge while removing the cover.
911
• Do not touch any of the printed circuit pathways or connection
terminals.
912
* A hex wrench is included with the Fantom-S88. When
removing screws, you must use this hex wrench.
fig.Dimm-05
• Never use excessive force when installing a circuit board. If it
doesn’t fit properly on the first attempt, remove the board and try
again.
913
• When circuit board installation is complete, double-check your
work.
914 (Modified)
• Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord before
attempting installation of the memory DIMM board.
915 (Modified)
• Install only the specified memory DIMM board. Remove only the
specified screws (p. 207).
928
• When turning the unit upside-down, get a bunch of newspapers
or magazines, and place them under the four corners or at both
ends to prevent damage to the buttons and controls. Also, you
should try to orient the unit so no buttons or controls get
damaged.
3.
Press outward the white clips at either end of the socket
should be in the downward position.
fig.DIMM-01
929
• When turning the unit upside-down, handle with care to avoid
dropping it, or allowing it to fall or tip over.
• Do not leave the bottom cover removed. After installation of the
memory module is complete, be sure to replace the cover.
207
Reference_e.book 208 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Expanding the Memory
4.
Paying attention to the location of the notch on the memory
module and the orientation, insert it vertically within the
guides at either side of the socket.
Checking that memory is
installed correctly
fig.DIMM-02
1. Turn on the power, as described in “Turning On the Power”
(Quick Start; p. 4).
2. Press [MENU] to open the Menu window.
3. Press
or
[ENTER].
to select “System,” and then press
4. Press [ENTER].
5. Press [4 (System Info)].
6. Press [1(⇑)] or [2(⇓)] to select “SRX Info.”
Verify that the screen correctly shows the amount of
memory you installed.
fig.18-06b_50
If you have difficulty inserting the memory module, try tilting it a bit
and inserting one end at a time.
5.
Move the white clips upward, and press them until the
memory module is locked in place.
fig.DIMM-03
7. Press [EXIT] to exit the System screen.
6.
Use the screws that you removed in step 2 to fasten the
cover back in place.
Removing the Memory
* If the correct amount of memory is not shown, it is possible
that the memory is not being recognized properly. Turn off the
power as described in “Turning On/Off the Power” (Quick
Start), and re-install the memory correctly.
Specifications of the expansion memory
(DIMM) that can be used
Number of pins:
Speed:
To remove the memory module, reverse the installation procedure.
1.
Simultaneously press outward the white clips located at
either end of the socket.
Voltage:
Capacity:
Board height:
168-pin
100 MHz (PC100 CL=2)
133 MHz (PC133 CL=3)
3.3 V
64/128/256/512 MB
38 mm or less
fig.DIMM-04
* If a 512 MB DIMM is installed, the result will be the same as
if a 256 MB DIMM were installed (p. 195 SRX/RAM Mode).
2.
Remove the memory module from the socket.
* The Fantom-S/Fantom-S88 has been confirmed to work with
standard memory that meets the above specifications.
However, we cannot guarantee that all memory of these
specifications will work correctly. Please be aware that even
with identical specifications, differences in the design of the
memory module or the conditions of use may mean that a
memory module may not be usable.
* For details on the sizes of memory that will be recognized if the
SRX/RAM Mode parameter is set to “4 SRX/192MB,” refer
to p. 195.
208
Reference_e.book 209 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Ajouter de la mémoire
(French Language for Canadian Safety Standard)
Précautions à prendre lors
de l’ajout de mémoire
Installation du module de
mémoire
901 (F)
• Veuillez suivre attentivement les instructions suivantes quand
vous manipulez la carte afin d’éviter tout risque d’endommagement des pièces internes par l’électricité statique.
Installez le module de mémoire après avoir retiré le couvercle
inférieur.
1
1. Avant d’installer la mémoire additionnelle, mettez hors
tension le Fantom-S/S88 et tous les périphériques
connectés et débranchez tous les câbles, y compris le câble
d’alimentation du Fantom-S/S88.
• Toujours toucher un objet métallique relié à la terre (comme
un tuyau par exemple) avant de manipuler la carte pour vous
décharger de l’électricité statique que vous auriez pu
accumuler.
2
• Lorsque vous manipulez la carte, la tenir par les côtés. Évitez
de toucher aux composants ou aux connecteurs.
5
• Conservez le sachet d’origine dans lequel était la carte lors de
l’envoi et remettez la carte dedans si vous devez la ranger ou
la transporter.
• Utilisez un tournevis de type Philips de la taille adaptée à celle
des vis (tournevis numéro 2, Fantom-S Only). Un tournevis
inadéquat peut endommager la tête de la vis.
2. Sur les modèles Fantom-S/S88, retirer uniquement les vis
illustrées dans le schéma ci-dessous et retirer le couvercle.
Sur le modèle Fantom-S, le couvercle est situé sur le
panneau inférieur. Sur le modèle Fantom-S88, il est placé
sur le panneau avant. Une clé hexagonale est fournie avec le
Fantom-S88. Il faut utiliser cette clé pour retirer les vis.
fig.18-02.f
Fantom-S : Panneau inférieur
Vis à enlever
Ajouter de la mémoire
• Pour retirer une vis, tourner le tournevis dans le sens contraire
des aiguilles d’une montre. Pour serrer les vis, tourner le
tournevis dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre.
fig.Screw.f
desserrer
resserrer
• Assurez-vous que les vis que vous retirez ne tombent pas à
l'intérieur du Fantom-S/S88.
• Faites attention de ne pas vous couper sur le bord du couvercle
ou de l'ouverture lorsque vous retirez le couvercle.
Fantom-S88 : Panneau avant
911(F)
Vis à enlever
• Ne pas toucher aux circuits imprimés ou aux connecteurs.
912(F)
• Ne jamais forcer lors de l’installation de la carte de circuits
imprimés. Si la carte s’ajuste mal au premier essai, enlevez la
carte et recommencez l’installation.
913(F)
Clé hexagonale 5 mm
• Quand l’installation de la carte de circuits imprimés est terminée,
revérifiez si tout est bien installé.
914(F-Modified)
• Avant de procéder à l’installation d’un module DIMM, il faut
toujours mettre l’unité hors tension et débrancher le câble
d’alimentation.
915(F-Modified)
• Installez uniquement le module DIMM spécifié. Retirez
uniquement les vis spécifiées (p. 209).
928(F)
• Lorsque vous déposez le Fantom-S/Fantom-S88 face vers le bas,
placez des piles de journaux ou de magazines sous les quatre
coins (ou des deux côtés) pour le soutenir. Ainsi, les boutons,
manettes et autres pièces ne seront pas endommagés.
3. Appuyez sur les clips blancs à l’extrémité de la prise qui
devraient être orientés vers le bas.
fig.DIMM-01
929(F)
• En plaçant l’appareil sens dessus dessous, manipulez-le avec soin
pour éviter de l’échapper, de le laisser tomber ou de se renverser.
• Une fois l’installation du module terminée, remettez le couvercle
en place.
209
Reference_e.book 210 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Ajouter de la mémoire
4. Prenez bien note de l’emplacement et de l’orientation de
l’encoche du module de mémoire et insérez-le verticalement
à l’intérieur des guides qui se trouvent de chaque côté de la
prise.
fig.DIMM-02
Vérifier que la mémoire est
installée correctement
1. Mettre sous tension de la façon décrite sous “Turning On
the Power” (Quick Start; p. 4).
2. Appuyez sur la touche [MENU] pour ouvrir la fenêtre Menu.
3. Press
or
[ENTER].
to select “System, ” and then press
4. Appuyer sur [ENTER].
5. Appuyer sur [4 (System Info)].
6. Press [1(⇑)] or [2(⇓)] to select “SRX Info.”
S’assurer de lire dans la fenêtre la taille de la mémoire que vous
avez installée.
fig.18-06b_50
*
Si vous éprouvez de la difficulté à insérer le module de mémoire,
inclinez-le légèrement et insérez une extrémité à la fois.
5. Ramenez les clips blancs vers le haut et appuyez dessus
jusqu’à ce que le module de mémoire soit verrouillé en
place.
fig.DIMM-03
7. Appuyer sur [EXIT] pour quitter la fenêtre du menu du
système.
6. À l’aide des vis retirées à l’étape 2, remettez le couvercle en
place.
Si la taille de la mémoire dans la fenêtre n’est pas exacte, il est
possible que la mémoire n’ait pas été détectée correctement.
Éteindre tel que décrit sous « Ouverture/fermeture » (Quick
Start), et réinstaller la mémoire conformément aux instructions.
Retrait du module de mémoire
Pour retirer le module de mémoire, procédez à l’inverse de la
procédure d’installation.
1. Appuyez simultanément, vers l’extérieur, sur les clips
blancs situés aux extrémités de la prise.
Pour obtenir des renseignements sur les tailles de mémoire qui
seront reconnues si le paramètre SRX/RAM Mode est défini à “4
SRX/192 MB,” reportez-vous à la p. 195.
fig.DIMM-04
Si une DIMM de 512 Mo est installée, le résultat sera le même
que si une DIMM de 256 Mo est installée.
2. Retirez le module de mémoire de la prise.
210
Reference_e.book 211 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Troubleshooting
If the Fantom-S does not function in the way you expect, first check
the following points. If this does not resolve the problem, consult
your dealer or a nearby Roland Service Station.
* If any sort of message is being displayed on the screen during an
operation, refer to “Error Messages” (Parameter List).
Problems Concerning the Entire
Fantom-S
The power does not turn on.
Make sure that the Fantom-S's AC cord is connected correctly
to its power inlet and to the AC outlet (Quick Start; p. 3).
Issues Related to Sound
There is no sound.
A specific Part does not sound
Check the following points.
• Has the volume level of the part been lowered?
Adjust the Level parameter to raise the volume of the part that is
not heard (p. 85).
• Is the part being muted?
Set the Mute Switch parameter to “OFF” (p. 85).
Specific pitch ranges do not sound
Has a restricted range of notes been set?
If a specific range of notes does not sound, check the Key
Range settings for the Patch Tone, the Performance Part.
• Tone Key Range
Key Range Lower/Upper parameter (p. 48)
• Part Key Range
Key Range Lower/Upper parameter (p. 87)
• Is the power for connected amps and speakers turned on? Is the
volume turned all the way down?
The sound is distorted.
• Is the VOLUME knob turned all the way down?
Check the following points.
• Have connections been made correctly?
• Can you hear sound through headphones?
If there is sound in the headphones, it is possible that the
connection cables are broken, or that your amp/mixer has
malfunctioned. Check your cables and amp/mixer system once
again.
• If you do not hear sound when you play the keyboard, check
whether the Local Switch is turned OFF.
Make sure that the Local Switch parameter is turned on (p. 193).
• Have all tones in the patch been turned off?
Assign a check mark to “Tone Switch.” (p. 32)
• The Part level settings may be too low.
Access the Level parameter, and check the level of each part (p.
95).
• Are the Effect settings correct?
Check the Effect settings ON or OFF (p. 175), in the Effect Balance
or Level.➝[EFFECTS]
• Are the settings for the output destination correct?
Check the various output assign settings (p. 95).
• Is the Wave Expansion Board properly installed?
When selecting the settings that stipulate the use of EXP-A–D
waves, Patches, or Rhythm Sets, check that the specified Wave
Expansion Board is installed properly in the specified slot (p.
203).
• Has the volume been lowered by pedal operations or by MIDI
messages (volume messages or expression messages) received
from an external MIDI device?
• Have the samples been loaded correctly? (p. 170)
In the case of Performance mode, the value of volume messages
(Volume) and expression messages (Expression) can be viewed
in the Part Information window (p. 83).
• Is an effect which distorts the sound being applied?
If the sound for a specific patch or part is distorted, lower the
volume level on that part.
• If all sounds are distorted, use the VOLUME knob to lower the
volume level.
Pitch is incorrect.
Check the following points.
• Is the tuning of the Fantom-S incorrect?
Check the Master Tune parameter setting (p. 193).
• Has the pitch been changed by pedal operations or by Pitch Bend
messages received from an external MIDI device?
• In the case of Performance mode, the value of Pitch Bend
messages (Pitch Bend) can be viewed in the Part Information
window (p. 83).
• Have the Coarse Tune or Fine Tune parameters been set for
specific Parts?
Check the Coarse Tune parameter and Fine Tune parameter
settings (p. 43, p. 43).
The sound is interrupted.
Sounds will be interrupted if more than 64 voices are used
simultaneously.
• Reduce the number of Tones that you are using.
• Increase the Voice Reserve setting for parts that must not drop
out. (p. 88)
211
Troubleshooting
Check the following points.
Reference_e.book 212 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Troubleshooting
When I play the keyboard, notes do not stop.
Is the pedal polarity of the Hold Pedal reversed?
Check the Hold Pedal Polarity parameter setting (p. 189).
When I press a pad, the sound does not stop
sounding.
Could the [HOLD] pad be lit?
Press the [HOLD] pad once again so the light goes out.
The sound cuts off when I switch Patches in
Patch mode...
Although you can apply a wide variety of multi-effects with
the Fantom-S's multi-effects, switching the Patch also switches
the type of multi-effects used.
In such instances, discrepancies between the sound being produced
and the multi-effects type can arise, which may result in sounds
being different than intended, so sounds produced when Patches are
switched may be muted when factory settings are in effect. In certain
situations, such as when not using multi-effects that have a great
influence on the sound, remembering to set Patch Remain parameter
(p. 193) to “ON” allows you to switch Patches without sounds being
muted.
When switching Patches in Patch mode, the
volume and other parameters set with Control
Changes end up being reset.
Set Patch Remain parameter (p. 193) to “ON.” Even once they
have switched Patches, Control Change messages that have
been received are carried forward, so even when switching a Patch
whose level is turned all the way down by a Control Change volume
message, the level remains unchanged.
If the Tone Delay time value is set to the note,
then does the delay time not change beyond a
fixed length when the tempo is slowed down?
There is a maximum permissible value for the Delay Time
parameter (p. 56). So, if the time setting is specified in terms of
a note value, and the tempo is slowed down, this maximum
permissible value will be reached, and it cannot be increased further.
The upper time limit for each is the maximum value that can be set
other than the numerical value for the beat.
Even when I set the Pan for a Patch completely
to one side, sound still comes from the other
channel...
The Fantom-S's internal effects are in stereo, so if you have
effects applied to a Patch, even if the Pan is set all the way to
one side, you will still be able to hear sounds of the effect component
from the other channel.
212
Sometimes, when playing legato, the pitch
won't rise. Why is this?
When the Legato Switch parameter (p. 58) is “ON,” and the
Legato Retrigger parameter (p. 58) is “OFF,” and you hold
down keys in the high register to play legato, the upper pitch limit of
the wave may be exceeded, so that the pitch does not rise as far as
you expect, but will stop rising at a certain point. Additionally, if
differing upper pitch limits are used for the waves of a Patch that
uses multiple tones, it may stop being heard in MONO. When
making large pitch changes, set the Legato Retrigger parameter to
“ON.”
The notes sound strange in the upper registers
of the keyboard.
Sometimes when playing the keys in the upper part of the
Fantom-S's keyboard, the sound may stop, or the pitch may
stop rising; or with certain keys, there may be intermittent noise.
This occurs mainly when the Fantom-S's upper pitch limit is
exceeded, so this issue doesn't arise in the ranges normally used. But,
in any case, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Although the same Patch is selected, it sounds
different when I listen to it in the Performance.
In Performance mode, the parameters of each part of the
performance can apply further modification to parameters
such as pan, octave, and filter, relative to the settings specified by the
patch. Thus, Patches in a Performance may sound different than they
do when heard in Patch mode. To return these settings to their initial
conditions, select the Patch after execute Factory Reset Temporary
for the Performance. (p. 196)
Additionally, although a Patch may comprise tones created with the
use of the multi-effects, the multi-effects used in the Performance
may differ from the multi-effects selected by the Patch. Check the
multi-effect settings of the performance. Also do the same for the
Chorus and Reverb settings.
The volume level of the instrument connected
to Fantom-S is too low.
Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor?
Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor
Reference_e.book 213 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Troubleshooting
Effects not applied.
Check the following points.
• The “MFX,” “CHO,” “REV” or “MASTER” effect switches
located in the upper part of the PLAY screen may have been
turned off.
Press [EFFECTS]/[8 (Effect Sw)] to turn them on.
• Are the various effect settings correct? (p. 175)
• If the send level of each effect is set to 0, the effect will not be
applied. Check the settings.
• Even with send levels to each effect set at 0, effects are not
applied if the Multi-effects Output Level, the Chorus Level, or
the Reverb Level is set to 0. Check each setting.
• If Output Assign is set to other than “MFX,” the Multi-effects
sound will not be output.
• If Output Assign is set to “PATCH” for each Part of the
Performance, the sound will be output according to the
Output Assign settings of the Patch (for each Tone) which is
assigned to those Parts. This means that if Output Assign for
the Patch (each Tone) is set to other than “MFX,” the Multieffects sound will not be output.
The Modulation or other controller is always
on.
Check the Matrix Controller settings. (p. 61)
The Fantom-S allows you to use the Matrix Control to control
Patches in real time. The Matrix Control functions as the control
source for the Control Change and other MIDI messages received by
the Fantom-S, and makes changes to the various Patch parameters
based on these messages.
Multi-effect 43: TAP DELAY or other delay time
value is set to the note, and then the tempo is
slowed down, does the delay time not change
beyond a fixed length?
Such Delay time settings have an upper limit, so if the upper
limit of a value set to the note is exceeded when the tempo is
retarded, that upper value cannot rise any further. The upper time
limit for each is the maximum value that can be set other than the
numerical value for the beat.
Issues Related to Saving Data
The Performance sounds different than when it
was written.
If you have modified the settings of a patch used by a
performance, or if the temporary patch of the performance has
been modified by an external MIDI device, these patches must also
be saved.
If patches used by a performance have been edited when you write
that performance, the Fantom-S will display a message asking
whether you want to discard these patches. In such cases, first save
the patch (p. 42) or rhythm set (p. 66), and then save the performance
(p. 96) again.
Patches sound different than when written.
The write operation cannot be used to save Patches as
changed in Patch mode using Control Change messages from
an external MIDI device.
Refer to “MIDI Implementation” (Sound /Parameter List) for
more on the Control Change messages that are received.
Depending on these settings, the Fantom-S may be responding to
MIDI messages sent from external MIDI devices, and may result the
Patches sounding different than intended.
The Arpeggio and D Beam controller settings
in the Performance are different than those for
the Patch.
Raising the chorus or reverb send level for
each part of a performance still does not cause
the effect to be applied sufficiently.
Since the Fantom-S stores arpeggio and D Beam controller
settings for each performance, it will operate according to the
arpeggio and D Beam controller settings that were specified for each
performance.
Although you can make Send level settings to the Chorus and
Reverb for each individual Part in a Performance, these values
only set the upper limit of the Chorus and Reverb Send levels for the
Patch used. Accordingly, even when the value is set to the maximum of
127, if the Send level is lowered in the Patch being used, there will be no
effect. In addition, different Patch Chorus and Reverb Send level settings
can be used according to whether or not the multi-effects are used.
Using the Matrix Control or other such means
to control the LFO results in noise when the
Pan is changed suddenly.
Lower the change in speed (LFO Rate).
Due to the specialized processing used for the Pan, which
alters the volume level in each of the left and right sides, sudden Pan
movements causing rapid changes in these levels creates large
changes in volume, and noise from this may be audible as a result.
213
Troubleshooting
Issues Related to Effects
Reference_e.book 214 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Troubleshooting
Issues Related to Sequencer
Song data does not play back correctly
Check the following points.
• Has the Receive General MIDI/General MIDI 2 System On
Switch been turned ON?
Set the Rx GM System ON/Rx GM2 System ON parameter
(SYSTEM/MIDI) to “ON” (p. 193).
• Are you trying to start playback from midway through the song?
The beginning of a GM score song contains a General MIDI/
General MIDI 2 System On message. In some cases, a GM Score
cannot be played back correctly unless this message is received.
• Are you trying to play song data designed for the GS Format?
When the Fantom-S receives a GS Reset message, the Fantom-S is
enabled for the GS format. This permits playback of music data
bearing the GS logo (GS music data). However, data created
exclusively for the Sound Canvas Series may not play back
properly on the RD-700.
After recording, the song does not sound
when I play it back.
Have the tracks been muted?
Defeat muting (p. 85).
The tempo is different than the last time I
played back the song.
If a song is played back after the tempo is changed, then the
new tempo is not saved unless the song is saved to the user
memory or memory card. Conversely, the previous tempo will be
erased when you save the song. When saving songs, carefully check
the current tempo.
Locate Positions set in song have disappeared.
Check the following points.
• Was the disk saved in a format other than MRC-Pro format (SMF
0 or 1)? Locate positions will be saved with the song data only
when saving in MRC-Pro format.
• Are you using Quick Play? In order to use locate positions, the
song must be loaded into the Fantom-S.
Sound Device Tones Are Switched Arbitrarily
Use the Microscope (p. 162) to check the following points.
• Has an unneeded program change been input? Or are there
duplicate program changes?
• Were any mistakes made in setting the data MIDI channels when
Program Change messages were input?
214
Data supposed to be present does not appear
in microscope.
Check the following points.
• Are the wrong tracks selected?
• In View Select (p. 164), is any data set not to be displayed?
After using a MIDI sequencer to play a song,
sounds stopped playing, and no sound is
played even when Program Changes are sent.
It could be that a Bank Select in the song data that is not
specified by the Fantom-S was encountered in the song. No
sound is played if the tone group is not one designated by the
Fantom-S with Bank Select MSB/LSB. Note that if you omit the Bank
Select, and send only the Program Change, the tone in the currently
selected group that has the specified Program Change number will
play. Try reselecting the tone using the panel controls. Furthermore,
when selecting tones from an external MIDI device, be sure to send
the Bank Select MSB/LSB and the Program Change as a single set for
reliable reproduction. First sending the MSB and LSB (the order in
which these are sent does not matter), followed by the Program
Change.
For more about the relationship between the Bank Select MSB/
LSB and corresponding tone groups, refer to <Bank Select and
Program Change Correspondence Chart> (Parameter List).
In some cases, you may be unable to hear any sound after playing
the last song that was faded-out. This may be because the volume
has been lowered by volume messages or expression messages.
Check the value of these messages, and set them to appropriate
values.
Performances are sluggish, or have
interruptions.
Problems of sluggish and interrupted performances can crop
up very easily when the sequencer or sound generator used
for the performance has to handle heavy data loads.
Main causes and possible corrective measures are considered below.
• Are more than 64 voices playing simultaneously?
Reduce the number of voices. The composition of Fantom-S
Patches is such that up to eight Waves may be used for one Patch.
When using such Patches, even though only one sound may be
heard, it is actually eight sounds that are being played
simultaneously. In addition, with certain sounds like continuous
sounds with long releases, even though the actual sound may not
be audible to you, processing for playing the sound is still
underway, so in these cases as well, the performance data can
differ from the actual number of voices being played.
• In the Part Information window you can check the number of
notes for which sound is actually being processed (p. 43).
• Are you using a Patch that uses a lot of LFO?
Try changing to a different Patch. LFO processing invariably
places a big load on the machine, so heavy use of the LFO slows
down processing for the Fantom-S overall, which can end up
having affecting the expression of sounds themselves.
• Is the data concentrated at the beginning of the beats in the
Reference_e.book 215 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Troubleshooting
• Is there an Aftertouch or other such large Control Change at the point
where the song performance is sluggish?
Move the location of the data. If the data is no longer needed, delete
the data. In some cases, when using a keyboard that features
aftertouch to input data, you may end up inputting huge amounts of
data before realizing this is happening. Such large amounts of data
can place an excessive load on your sequencer and sound module.
You can use the Track Edit operation Data Thin (p. 161) to thin
out unwanted messages.
Issues Related to MIDI and External
Devices
No Sound from connected MIDI device.
Check the following points.
• Is the instrument set to transmit MIDI messages?
• In Patch Mode
Kbd Patch Rx/Tx Channel parameter (Keyboard part) (p. 192)
Pad Patch Rx/Tx Channel (Pad part) (p. 192)
• In Performance Mode
KBD switch → Performance Layer, Mixer screen/KBD
Exclusive messages are not received.
Check the following points.
• Is the instrument set to receive Exclusive messages?
Set the Rx Exclusive parameter to “ON” (p. 193).
• Does the Device ID number of the transmitting device match the
Device ID number of the Fantom-S?
Check the Device ID parameter (p. 192).
• Are you attempting to write to the User area? Data can be written
to the User area only in Librarian mode.
I connected an external sequencer or MIDI
keyboard to the MIDI IN connector, and
attempted to play a Fantom-S rhythm set, but there
was no sound. Why?
Check to make sure that the MIDI Transmit channel of the
external MIDI device and the Fantom-S's MIDI Receive
channel are matched. The MIDI Receive channel used by the
Fantom-S in Patch or Rhythm Set mode is set with the Patch/
Rhythm Rx Ch parameter. Rhythm Set performance data is generally
received on MIDI Channel 10.
When using sequencing software, operating the
knobs or other controls does not affect the sound.
For some sequencing programs, System Exclusive messages
are not transmitted by the Thru function. If you are using such
sequencer software and want to record system exclusive messages,
turn on the following parameters.
• In Patch Mode
Kbd Patch Rx/Tx channel parameter (p. 193).
• In Performance Mode
KBD switch (p. 81).
When the Bend Range for a Patch is increased
(48), the pitch does not rise sufficiently, even
when a MIDI Pitch Bend message is received.
While Patch Bend Ranges can be set anywhere between 0 and
48, when certain Waves in which the pitch is raised (in the +
direction) are used, the pitch may stop rising at a fixed point, rather
than continuing to go up. Although a value of 12 is ensured for the
upper limit of raised pitches, use caution when setting the Bend
Range above this figure.
Issues Related to Sampling
External input sound cannot be heard/volume
is too low
Check the following points.
• Could the Mix In parameter be set to “Off”?
Press [INPUT SETTING], and set it to “On.”
• The level of the external input may be lowered.
When you sample, use the EXT SOURCE “VOLUME” knob to
adjust the level appropriately.
• Check [INPUT SETTING] Level setting.
• The volume of the device connected to AUDIO INPUT may be
lowered.
Adjust it to an appropriate level.
• Are the audio cables connected correctly?
Check the connections.
• An audio cable may be broken.
• Could you be using an audio cable with a built-in resistor?
Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor (e.g.,
Roland PCS series).
215
Troubleshooting
sequence data?
Avoid overlapping data with the same timing by setting an offset
of 1–2 clocks instead. Data may easily become concentrated at the
beginning of the beats in the song data when, for example, the
song data is input using Step Recording, or if the data is
quantized after being input with a keyboard in real time. Because
of this, large amounts of data are sent to the Fantom-S, and the
processing for expressing sounds becomes bogged down.
• Is there a Program Change at the point where the song
performance is sluggish?
Change the position of the Program Change. When Program
Changes are inserted in songs, processing time for switching
patches increases, which may then cause the performance to
become sluggish.
• Is there a System Exclusive message at the point where the song
performance is sluggish?
Move the location of the data. System Exclusive messages contain
large amounts of data, thus placing a heavy burden on
sequencers and sound modules. Try repositioning data and
changing System Exclusive messages to Control Changes for any
data for which Control Changes can be substituted.
Reference_e.book 216 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Troubleshooting
External input sound is not stereo/is not
monaural
Issues Related to a Memory Card
Can’t select data from a memory card
Check the following points.
• Stereo Switch parameter (p. 120) may be set to monaural (stereo).
• Could the Input Select parameter be set to “LINE IN L,” or
“Microphone”?
Press [INPUT SETTING], and set it to “LINE IN L/R.”
Mic sound is not output/is too weak
Check the following points.
• Is the mic cable connected correctly?
Check the connection.
• The mic cable may be broken.
• The input source may be set to something other than mic.
Press EXT SOURCE [INPUT SETTING] to select “Microphone.”
• The mic level may have been lowered.
When sampling, use the EXT SOURCE “LEVEL” knob to adjust
the level appropriately.
Can’t record a sample
Check the following points.
• Is there enough memory capacity?
If there is insufficient sample memory, a message of “Sample
Memory Full!” will appear when you attempt to sample. (p. 123)
Erase unneeded samples to increase the amount of free space.
If there is still not enough, install additional memory (DIMM
modules). (p. 207)
Sampled sound contains excessive noise or
distortion
Check the following points.
• Is the input level appropriate? If the input level is too high, the
sampled sound will be distorted. If it is too low, noise will be
heard. When sampling, turn the LEVEL knob in the Sampling
Standby screen (p. 120) to adjust the level while watching the
level meter displayed in the upper part of the display. Adjust the
level so that the “CLIP” indication in the upper right of the
display does not appear.
• Are the effect settings appropriate?
Some types of effect may increase the level louder than the
original sample, or may intentionally distort the sound. Some
effects will also cause noise to be emphasized.
Temporarily turn off effects, and check whether the sample itself
contains noise or distortion. Then adjust the effect settings
appropriately.
• Are multiple samples being played simultaneously?
Even if the level of each individual sample is appropriate,
simultaneously playing multiple samples may cause the overall
level to be excessively high, causing distortion. Lower the level of
each sample so that the sound is not distorted.
216
Check the following points.
• Is the memory card inserted correctly?
Turn off the power, remove the memory card, then re-insert the
memory card correctly.
• Is the memory card an appropriate type?
The Fantom-S can use 8 MB–128 MB (3.3V) SmartMedia memory
cards. Other types cannot be used. (p. 187)
I can't use a memory card
Is the memory card formatted?
An unformatted floppy disk cannot be used. Perform the
Format procedure.
I can only use EXP slots A and B.
Could the SRX/RAM Mode parameter (p. 195) be set to “2
SRX/288MB Max”? Set it to “4 SRX/192MB Max.”
Reference_e.book 217 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Specifications
SRX expansion boards: 4 slots *1
Sampling memory expansion
DIMM: 1 slot (128 MB or 256 MB [3.3 V] recommended)
Memory card expansion
SmartMedia card: 1 slot (supports 8 M bytes/16M bytes/32M bytes/
64M bytes/128M bytes (3.3V))
■Sound Generator Section
■Others
Maximum Polyphony
64 voices (shared with the sampling section)
Parts
16 parts
Wave Memory
64 M bytes (16-bit linear equivalent)
Waveforms: 1,228
Preset Memory
Patches: [S] 640 + 256 (GM2), [S88] 648 + 256 (GM2)
Rhythm Sets: 32 + 9 (GM2)
Performances: 64
User Memory
Patches: 256, Rhythm Sets: 32, Performances: 64
Card Memory (SmartMedia)
Patches: 256, Rhythm Sets: 32, Performances: 64
Arpeggio
Preset: 128, User: 128
Rhythm Pattern
Preset: 256 (32 groups), User: 256 (32 groups)
Chord Memory
Preset: 64, User: 64
Display
320 x 240 dots, four-shade graphic LCD (QVGA)
Pads
16 pads, Velocity and Aftertouch sensitive
Controllers
Pitch Bend/Modulation Lever
Control Knobs x 4
Assignable Switch x 2
D Beam Controller
Connectors
Headphones Jack
A (MIX) Output Jacks (L (MONO), R) (1/4 inch TRS phone type)
B Output Jacks (L, R) (1/4 inch phone type)
Input Jacks (L (MONO)/MIC, R) (1/4 inch phone type)
Hold Pedal Jack (Half Pedal possible)
Control Pedal Jack (assignable)
MIDI Connectors (IN, OUT, THRU)
USB Connector (supports file transfer (mass storage class))
Digital Audio Interface (COAXIAL/OPTICAL OUTPUT only)
AC Inlet
Power Supply
AC 117 V, AC 230 V, AC 240 V
Power Consumption
17 W
Dimensions
[S] 1,050 (W) x 358 (D) x 109 (H) mm
41-3/8 (W) x 14-1/8 (D) x 4-5/16 (H) inches
[S88] 1,408 (W) 455 (D) x 151 (H) mm
55-7/16 (W) x 17-15/16 (D) x 6 (H) inches
Weight
[S] 12.5 kg / 27 lbs 9 oz
[S88] 29.5 kg / 65 lbs 1 oz
Accessories
Quick Start, Owner’s Manual, Sound/Parameter List
Sample Data (Audio) CD
CD-ROM (Editor)
Power Cord
Options
Wave Expansion Board: SRX Series
Keyboard Stand: [S] KS-12/[S88] KS-17
Pedal Switch: DP series
Foot Switch: BOSS FS-5U
Expression Pedal: EV-5
Sampling Section
Data Format
16-bit linear (File Type: .WAV/.AIFF)
Sampling Frequency
44.1 kHz (fixed)
Maximum Sampling Time
When DIMM has not been expanded (32 MB)
mono: 360 sec. approx., stereo: 180 sec. approx.
with DIMM (288 MB) *1
mono: 54 min. approx., stereo: 27 min. approx.
Number of Samples
User memory: 2,000 (maximum total approximately 16 M bytes)
Card memory: 7,000 (128 M bytes SmartMedia)
■Sequencer Section
Tracks
Phrase tracks (16 MIDI channels per track): 16
Pattern track (16 MIDI channels per track): 1
Tempo track: 1
Beat track: 1
* The Pattern Track can hold up to 100 patterns.
Resolution
480 TPQN
Tempo
5–300
Note Capacity
approx. 400,000 notes
Song Length
9,998 measures
Recording Method
Realtime recording, Step recording
Effects
Multi-Effects: 3 systems, [S] 77 types / [S88] 78 types
Chorus: 3 types
Reverb: 5 types
Input Effect: 6 types
Mastering Effect: 3-bands Compressor
Expansion Slot
*1 If the maximum DIMM expansion is installed, only two SRX slots will be
available.
* SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corp.
* In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of
this unit are subject to change without prior notice.
Internal sound generator expansion waveforms, Patch expansion/
217
Specifications
Fantom-S/S88: Synthesizer Keyboard (Conforms to General MIDI 2
System)
Keyboard
[S] 61 keys (with velocity and channel aftertouch)
[S88] 88 keys (Progressive Hammer action mechanism and channel
aftertouch)
Reference_e.book 218 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Index
Numerics
[4 (Mark Clear)] ....................................................................................123
[4 (Mark Clr All)] ..................................................................................123
[5 (Mark Set All)] ..................................................................................123
[5 (Mark Set)] ........................................................................................123
A
Accent Rate
Rhythm Pattern .............................................................................114
A-Env Level 1–3 (rhythm tone) ............................................................74
A-Env Level 1–3 (tone) ..........................................................................54
A-Env T1 V-Sens (rhythm tone) ...........................................................74
A-Env T1 V-Sens (tone) .........................................................................54
A-Env T4 V-Sens (rhythm tone) ...........................................................74
A-Env T4 V-Sens (tone) .........................................................................54
A-Env Time 1–4 (rhythm tone) ............................................................74
A-Env Time 1–4 (tone) ...........................................................................54
A-Env Time KF .......................................................................................54
A-Env V-Curve (rhythm tone) .............................................................74
A-Env V-Curve (tone) ............................................................................43
Aftertouch Sens ............................................................................137, 189
Aftertouch Sensitivity ..........................................................................137
Aftertouch sensitivity ..........................................................................189
Aftertouch Time Ctrl Sens ....................................................................68
AIFF ........................................................................................................124
Alter Pan Depth ......................................................................................54
Alternate Pan Depth (rhythm tone) .....................................................74
Alternate pan depth (tone) ....................................................................54
Amp ........................................................................................................131
Analog Feel .............................................................................................44
Analog feel depth ...................................................................................44
Arabian scale ...................................................................................89, 194
Arpeggio Edit ........................................................................................107
[ARPEGGIO HOLD] ............................................................................104
Arpeggio Style ......................................................................................105
Arpeggio Velocity ................................................................................106
Arpeggio/Rhythm function
Arpeggio .........................................................................................104
Rhythm ...........................................................................................112
Arpeggio/Rhythm Sync Switch .........................................................191
Assign Switch 1–2 (patch) .....................................................................37
Assign to Keyboard ..............................................................................127
Assign To Pad .......................................................................................126
Assign Type ............................................................................................68
[ASSIGNABLE] ...............................................................................98, 140
ASSIGNABLE (D Baem) ........................................................................98
Assignable switch 1–2 (Performance) .................................................94
Assignable Type ...............................................................................36, 99
Assignable Type (performance) ...........................................................94
ATTACK (Mastering Effect) ...............................................................183
Attack Time Offset (patch) ....................................................................44
Auto Chop .............................................................................................132
Auto divide sampling ..........................................................................119
Auto Trigger ..........................................................................................120
Auto Trigger Level ...............................................................................120
B
Background ...........................................................................................190
Background Picture ..............................................................................190
Backup ...................................................................................................196
Bank Select (performance) ....................................................................90
Base (Pad Base Note) ...........................................................................136
Beam Part Select (Patch) ........................................................................33
beat .........................................................................................................125
Bend Range Down .................................................................................49
Bend Range Up .......................................................................................49
Bender and Modulation Part Select (Patch) .......................................33
Bias ...........................................................................................................53
Bias Direction ..........................................................................................53
Bias Level .................................................................................................53
218
Bias Position ............................................................................................53
Booster .....................................................................................................47
Booster 1&2 .............................................................................................47
Booster 3&4 .............................................................................................47
Booster Gain 1&2 ....................................................................................47
Booster Gain 3&4 ....................................................................................47
BPM (sample) ........................................................................................126
[BWD] .....................................................................................................139
C
C-B (patch) .............................................................................................194
C-B (performance part) ..........................................................................88
Chain play .............................................................................................138
Change Channel ...................................................................................158
Change Duration ..................................................................................158
Change Velocity ....................................................................................157
Channel Pressure (performance) .........................................................90
Chop .......................................................................................................132
Chord Memory Function ....................................................................110
Chorus Level (patch) ............................................................................177
Chorus Level (performance) ...............................................................179
Chorus Level (rhythm set) ..................................................................177
Chorus Output Assign (patch) ...........................................................177
Chorus Output Assign (performance) ..............................................179
Chorus Output Assign (rhythm set) ..................................................177
Chorus Output Select (patch) .............................................................177
Chorus Output Select (performance) ................................................179
Chorus Output Select (rhythm set) ....................................................177
Chorus Send Level .........................................................................35, 100
Chorus Send Level (Solo Synth) ...........................................................93
Chorus Source .................................................................................85, 180
Chorus Source (rhythm set) ................................................................177
Chorus Sourcel (patch) ........................................................................177
Chorus type ...........................................................................................182
Chorus Type (patch) ............................................................................177
Chorus Type (performance) ................................................................179
Chorus Type (rhythm set) ...................................................................177
Clear (Song) ...........................................................................................141
Clear Step
Arpeggio Edit .................................................................................108
Rhythm Pattern Edit .....................................................................115
clipboard ................................................................................................136
Coarse tune (patch) ................................................................................43
Coarse tune (tone) ..................................................................................49
Combine .................................................................................................133
Compare function ................................................................41, 42, 65, 67
Continuous Hold Pedal ...............................................................103, 189
Control Aftertouch (performance) .......................................................91
Control aftertouch switch (performance) ...........................................91
Control Bender (performance) .............................................................91
Control D Beam (performance) ............................................................91
Control D Beam Switch (performance) ...............................................91
Control Hold Pedal (performance) ......................................................91
Control hold pedal switch (performance) ..........................................91
Control Knob (performance) ................................................................92
Control Knob Switch (performance) ...................................................92
Control Modulation ...............................................................................91
Control modulation switch ...................................................................91
Control pedal ........................................................................................102
Control Pedal 1, 2 (performance) .........................................................91
Control pedal 1, 2 switch (performance) ............................................91
Control Pedal Assign ...................................................................103, 189
Control Pedal Polarity .................................................................103, 189
Control pitch bend switch (performance) ..........................................91
Control Setting (Performance) screen .................................................91
Copy ...............................................................................................155, 166
file ....................................................................................................187
Micro edit .......................................................................................166
Track edit ........................................................................................155
Copy (sample) .......................................................................................136
Reference_e.book 219 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Index
D
D Beam
ASSIGNABLE ..................................................................................98
PAD Trigger .....................................................................................99
SOLO SYNTH ................................................................................100
D Beam controller ...................................................................................98
D Beam range lower (patch) ...........................................................36, 99
D Beam range lower (performance) ....................................................94
D Beam range upper (patch) ..........................................................36, 99
D Beam range upper (performance) ....................................................94
D Beam Sens ..........................................................................................189
D Beam Sensitivity ...............................................................................189
Data Thin ...............................................................................................161
Default File Type (system) ..................................................................195
Delay Time ..............................................................................................56
Delay Time KF ........................................................................................57
Delete .....................................................................................................155
file ....................................................................................................187
Track edit ........................................................................................155
Delete (sample) .....................................................................................123
Destination 1–4 .....................................................................................181
Device ID ...............................................................................................192
Device ID number ................................................................................192
Drop format ..........................................................................................191
Duration .................................................................................................158
Arpeggio .........................................................................................106
Rhythm Pattern .............................................................................114
E
Edit
Arpeggio .........................................................................................107
Patch ..................................................................................................39
Perfomance .......................................................................................84
Rhythm .............................................................................................64
Rhythm Group ...............................................................................116
Rhythm Pattern .............................................................................115
Song .................................................................................................149
Effects .....................................................................................................178
Applying effects in Patch mode ..................................................175
Applying effects in Performance mode .....................................178
Patch ................................................................................................175
Performance ...................................................................................178
Rhythm ...........................................................................................175
Turning effects on and off ............................................................175
Emphasis ...............................................................................................130
End Point ...............................................................................................125
End Step
Arpeggio Edit .................................................................................108
Rhythm Pattern Edit .....................................................................115
Env T4 V-Sens (tone) ..............................................................................52
Envelope depth (rhythm tone) .............................................................71
Envelope Mode (rhythm tone) .............................................................68
Envelope mode (tone) ............................................................................61
Equal temperament ........................................................................89, 194
Erase ...............................................................................................154, 165
Micro edit .......................................................................................165
Realtime erase ................................................................................145
Track edit ........................................................................................154
Exchange ................................................................................................161
Expression (performance) .....................................................................90
Ext Bank Select LSB ................................................................................89
Ext Bank Select MSB ..............................................................................89
Ext Level ..................................................................................................89
Ext Pan .....................................................................................................90
Ext Program Number ............................................................................89
External bank select LSB .......................................................................89
External bank select MSB ......................................................................89
External Chorus Send Level ...............................................................118
External level ...........................................................................................89
External Output Assign .......................................................................118
External Output Level .........................................................................118
External pan ............................................................................................90
External program change number .......................................................89
External Reverb Send Level ................................................................118
External Source Select (system) ..........................................................195
Extract ....................................................................................................159
F
Factory Reset .........................................................................................196
Fade Mode ...............................................................................................57
Fade Time ................................................................................................57
Fantom-S Editor ....................................................................................199
Fantom-S Librarian ..............................................................................199
Favorite sound
Patch ............................................................................................28, 30
Performance ...............................................................................78, 79
Rhythm set .......................................................................................31
Features ..................................................................................................195
F-Env Depth (rhythm tone) ..................................................................73
F-Env Depth (tone) .................................................................................52
F-Env Level 0–4 (tone) ...........................................................................52
F-Env Level 1–4 (rhythm tone) .............................................................73
F-Env T1 V-Sens (rhythm tone) ............................................................73
F-Env T1 V-Sens (tone) ..........................................................................52
F-Env T4 V-Sens (rhythm tone) ............................................................73
F-Env Time 1–4 (rhythm tone) .............................................................73
F-Env Time 1–4 (tone) ............................................................................52
F-Env Time KF ........................................................................................52
F-Env V-Curve (rhythm tone) ..............................................................73
F-Env V-Curve (tone) .............................................................................52
F-Env V-Sens (rhythm tone) .................................................................73
F-Env V-Sens (tone) ................................................................................52
File Utility ..............................................................................................187
Filter Type .......................................................................................35, 100
Filter Type (rhythm tone) ......................................................................72
Filter Type (Solo Synth) .........................................................................93
Filter Type (tone) ....................................................................................50
Fine tune (patch) .....................................................................................43
Fine tune (tone) .......................................................................................49
Frequency cross modulation ..........................................................45, 69
[FWD] .....................................................................................................139
FXM ....................................................................................................45, 69
FXM Color (rhythm wave) ....................................................................69
FXM Color (tone) ....................................................................................45
FXM Depth (rhythm wave) ...................................................................69
219
Index
Count in .................................................................................................143
Create .....................................................................................................165
Create Event window ..........................................................165, 166, 167
Create Multisample ..............................................................................128
Create Position window ..............................................................166, 167
Create Rhythm ......................................................................................128
CTRL Destination 1–4 ............................................................................62
CTRL Sens1–4 .........................................................................................63
CTRL Tone 1–4 (CTRL) .........................................................................63
Cutoff ...............................................................................................35, 100
Cutoff (Solo Synth) .................................................................................93
Cutoff Frequency (rhythm tone) ..........................................................72
Cutoff frequency (tone) .........................................................................51
Cutoff frequency key follow .................................................................51
Cutoff frequency velocity curve (rhythm tone) .................................73
Cutoff frequency velocity curve (tone) ...............................................51
Cutoff Keyfollow ....................................................................................51
Cutoff Offset (Patch) ..............................................................................44
Cutoff V-Curve (rhythm tone) .............................................................73
Cutoff V-Curve (tone) ............................................................................51
Cutoff velocity sensitivity (rhythm tone) ...........................................73
Cutoff velocity sensitivity (tone) ..........................................................51
Cutoff V-Sens (rhythm tone) ................................................................73
Cutoff V-Sens (tone) ...............................................................................51
Reference_e.book 220 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Index
FXM Depth (tone) ...................................................................................45
FXM Switch (rhythm wave) ..................................................................69
FXM Switch (tone) ..................................................................................45
G
Gap Time ...............................................................................................120
Gap Time (system) ...............................................................................195
Gate Time ..............................................................................................146
General
Patch ..................................................................................................43
Performance .....................................................................................95
Rhythm set .......................................................................................67
General MIDI ..........................................................................................13
General MIDI 2 .......................................................................................13
Grid
Arpeggio .........................................................................................106
Rhythm Pattern .............................................................................113
Grid Quantize Strength .......................................................................144
Grid Resolution ....................................................................................144
H
[ARPEGGIO HOLD] ..............................................................................14
[HOLD] ..................................................................................................135
Hold function ........................................................................................135
Hold Pedal Polarity ......................................................................103, 189
Hold-1 (performance) ............................................................................90
I
Import Audio ................................................................................171, 185
Import Audio file .................................................................................124
Import BMP ...........................................................................................185
Initialize
Arpeggio .........................................................................................108
memory card ..................................................................................187
Patch ..................................................................................................40
Performance .....................................................................................96
Rhythm Pattern .............................................................................116
Rhythm set .......................................................................................65
System .............................................................................................188
Input Effect SW .....................................................................................118
Input Effect Type ..........................................................................118, 119
Input Quantize ......................................................................................144
Input Select ....................................................................................118, 120
[INPUT SETTING] ...............................................................................118
INPUT SETTING ..................................................................................118
Input Velo (Step Rec) ...........................................................................146
Input Velocity
Arpeggio Edit ................................................................................108
Rhythm Pattern Edit .....................................................................115
Insert .......................................................................................................156
J
Just temperament ...........................................................................89, 194
K
Kbd Patch Rx/Tx Ch ...........................................................................192
Key Fade Lower (tone) ..........................................................................48
Key Fade Upper (tone) ..........................................................................48
Key Range Lower (tone) ........................................................................48
Key Range Upper (tone) ........................................................................48
Key Touch (piano mode) .....................................................................198
Key Trigger .............................................................................................57
Keyboard ...............................................................................................189
Keyboard fade width lower (tone) ......................................................48
Keyboard fade width upper (tone) ......................................................48
Keyboard Patch Receive/Transmit Channel ...................................192
Keyboard Range Lower (performance part) ......................................87
Keyboard range lower (tone) ................................................................48
Keyboard Range Upper (performance part) ......................................88
Keyboard range upper (tone) ...............................................................48
Keyboard Sens ......................................................................................189
Keyboard sensitivity ............................................................................189
220
Keyboard Sw (performance part) ........................................................87
Keyboard Switch ....................................................................................84
Keyboard Velocity ................................................................................189
Knob .......................................................................................................101
Knob Assign 1–4 .....................................................................................36
Knob Assign 1–4 (Performance) ...................................................94, 101
Knob Part Select (Patch) ........................................................................33
L
LAYER screen .........................................................................................76
Legato Retrigger .....................................................................................58
Legato retrigger switch ..........................................................................58
Legato switch ..........................................................................................58
Legato Switch (patch) ............................................................................58
Level .................................................................................................35, 100
LEVEL (Mastering Efect) .....................................................................183
Level (performance part) .......................................................................85
Level (Solo Synth) ..................................................................................93
Level V-Curve (tone) .............................................................................53
Level velocity sensitivity (rhythm tone) .............................................74
Level V-Sens (rhythm tone) ..................................................................74
Level V-Sens (tone) ................................................................................53
LFO ...........................................................................................................56
LFO Osc 1 Pitch Depth ..................................................................35, 100
LFO Osc 1 Pitch Depth (Solo Synth) ....................................................93
LFO Osc 1 Pulse Width Depth .....................................................35, 101
LFO Osc 1 Pulse Width Depth (Solo Synth) .......................................93
LFO Osc 2 Pitch Depth ..................................................................35, 101
LFO Osc 2 Pitch Depth (Solo Synth) ....................................................93
LFO Osc 2 Pulse Width Depth .....................................................35, 101
LFO Osc 2 Pulse Width Depth (Solo Synth) .......................................93
LFO Rate ....................................................................................35, 56, 100
LFO Rate (Solo Synth) ...........................................................................93
LFO Step 1–16 .........................................................................................57
LFO Step Type ........................................................................................57
LFO1/2 delay time .................................................................................56
LFO1/2 delay time key follow .............................................................57
LFO1/2 fade mode .................................................................................57
LFO1/2 fade time ...................................................................................57
LFO1/2 key trigger ................................................................................57
LFO1/2 offset ..........................................................................................56
LFO1/2 pan depth .................................................................................57
LFO1/2 pitch depth ...............................................................................57
LFO1/2 rate .............................................................................................56
LFO1/2 rate detune ...............................................................................56
LFO1/2 TVA depth ................................................................................57
LFO1/2 TVF depth .................................................................................57
LFO1/2 waveform .................................................................................56
Load
all samples ......................................................................................123
sample .....................................................................................123, 171
Load All Samples .................................................................................171
Load Song
song .................................................................................................171
Load Song File (Track) .........................................................................149
Load with Samples ...............................................................................171
Local Switch ..........................................................................................193
Locate position ......................................................................................150
Loop End Fine .......................................................................................126
Loop Mode ............................................................................................125
Loop play ...............................................................................................140
Loop point .............................................................................................151
Loop recording .....................................................................................143
Loop Start ..............................................................................................125
Loop Start Fine ......................................................................................126
Loop Tune .............................................................................................126
Loop waveform ................................................................................41, 66
M
Mark Clear .............................................................................................123
Reference_e.book 221 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Index
MTC Frame Rate ...................................................................................191
MTC offset time frame .........................................................................191
MTC offset time hour ...........................................................................191
MTC offset time minute ......................................................................191
MTC offset time second .......................................................................191
MTC Sync Output ................................................................................191
MTC sync output switch .....................................................................191
Multi-Effects ............................................................................................20
Multi-effects 1–3 source .......................................................................179
Multi-effects chorus send level (patch) .............................................177
Multi-effects chorus send level (performance) ................................179
Multi-effects chorus send level (rhythm set) ....................................177
Multi-effects control channel ..............................................................181
Multi-Effects Control Destination 1–4 ...............................................181
Multi-Effects Control Sensitivity 1–4 .................................................181
Multi-Effects Control Source 1–4 .......................................................181
Multi-Effects Eontrol Destination 1–4 ...............................................181
Multi-effects output assign (patch) ....................................................177
Multi-effects output assign (performance) .......................................179
Multi-effects output assign (rhythm set) ..........................................177
Multi-effects Output level (patch) .....................................................177
Multi-effects output level (performance) ..........................................179
Multi-effects Output level (rhythm set) ............................................177
Multi-effects reverb send level (patch) ..............................................177
Multi-effects reverb send level (performance) .................................179
Multi-effects reverb send level (rhythm set) ....................................177
Multi-effects type .................................................................................180
Multi-effects type (performance) .......................................................179
Multi-effects type (rhythm set) ...........................................................176
Multitimbre Edit
Chorus .............................................................................................182
MFX .........................................................................................180, 181
MFX Control ..........................................................................180, 181
Reverb .............................................................................................182
Multi-velocity ........................................................................................137
Mute
Part ....................................................................................................82
Track ................................................................................................150
Mute Group .............................................................................................68
Mute Switch (performance part) ..........................................................85
N
Non-drop format ..................................................................................191
Normalize ..............................................................................................130
Note (Pad Note) ....................................................................................137
Note Type ..............................................................................................146
O
Octave Range (Arpeggio) ....................................................................107
Octave shift ..............................................................................................31
Octave Shift (patch) ................................................................................43
Offset ........................................................................................................56
[ON/OFF] ..............................................................................................104
One Shot Mode (rhythm wave) ............................................................68
One-shot waveform .........................................................................41, 66
Open/Close (piano mode) ..................................................................197
Original Key ..........................................................................................126
OSC 1/2 Coarse Tune ....................................................................35, 100
OSC 1/2 Coarse Tune (Solo Synth) .....................................................92
OSC 1/2 Fine Tune .........................................................................35, 100
OSC 1/2 Fine Tune (Solo Synth) ..........................................................92
OSC 1/2 Pulse Width ....................................................................35, 100
OSC 1/2 Pulse Width (Solo Synth) ......................................................92
OSC 1/2 Waveform .......................................................................35, 100
OSC 1/2 Waveform (Solo Synth) .........................................................92
OSC Sync Switch ....................................................................................35
OSC1 Sync Switch ................................................................................100
OSC1 Sync Switch (Solo Synth) ............................................................93
OSC2 Level ......................................................................................35, 100
OSC2 Level (Solo Synth) .......................................................................92
221
Index
Mark Clr All ..........................................................................................123
Mark Set .................................................................................................123
Mark Set All ..........................................................................................123
Master Key Shift ...................................................................................193
Master Level ..........................................................................................193
Master Tune ..........................................................................................193
Mastering Effect
ATTACK .........................................................................................183
LEVEL .............................................................................................183
RATIO .............................................................................................183
RELEASE ........................................................................................183
Split Frequency High ....................................................................183
Split Frequency Low .....................................................................183
THRESHOLD .................................................................................183
Matrix control .........................................................................................61
Matrix control destination 1–4 .............................................................62
Matrix control sens 1–4 ..........................................................................63
Matrix Ctrl ...............................................................................................61
Memory Information ...........................................................................195
Merge .....................................................................................................159
Metronome ............................................................................................192
Metronome Mode .................................................................................192
Metronome Sound ...............................................................................192
MFX 1-3 Control Channel (Performance) ...........................................95
MFX Chorus Send Level (patch) ........................................................177
MFX Chorus Send Level (performance) ...........................................179
MFX Chorus Send Level (rhythm set) ...............................................177
MFX Control Channel ..........................................................................181
MFX Output Assign (patch) ...............................................................177
MFX Output Assign (performance) ...................................................179
MFX Output Assign (rhythm set) ......................................................177
MFX Output Level (patch) ..................................................................177
MFX Output Level (performance) .....................................................179
MFX Output Level (rhythm set) ........................................................177
MFX Reverb Send Level (patch) ........................................................177
MFX Reverb Send Level (performance) ............................................179
MFX Reverb Send Level (rhythm set) ...............................................177
MFX Type (patch) .................................................................................176
MFX Type (performance) ....................................................................179
MFX-1–3 Source ....................................................................................179
MFX1–3 Source .......................................................................................85
Micro edit ..............................................................................................162
Copy ................................................................................................166
Create ..............................................................................................165
Erase ................................................................................................165
Move ...............................................................................................165
Microscope window ............................................................................162
MIDI .......................................................................................................192
MIDI clock .............................................................................................190
MIDI time code .....................................................................................190
MIDI update ..........................................................................................139
Mix Sampling ........................................................................................119
Mix/Parallel ..........................................................................................193
MIXER screen ..........................................................................................76
Mixer screen ............................................................................................76
Mix-In .....................................................................................................118
MMC Mode ...........................................................................................191
MMC Output ........................................................................................191
MMC output switch .............................................................................191
Modulation (performance) ....................................................................90
Mono/Poly (patch) ..........................................................................49, 58
Motif
Arpeggio .........................................................................................106
Move .......................................................................................................165
file ....................................................................................................187
Move Event window ...........................................................................165
MTC ........................................................................................................190
Types of MTC ................................................................................191
MTC Error Level ...................................................................................192
Reference_e.book 222 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Index
P
Pad Common Velo ...............................................................................137
Pad Common Velocity .........................................................................137
Pad Control Mode ............................................................................34, 99
Pad Control Mode (performance) ........................................................92
Pad Mode ..............................................................................................116
Pad Note ................................................................................................116
Pad Number ..............................................................................34, 99, 136
Pad Number (performance) ..................................................................92
Pad Part ..................................................................................................136
Pad Patch Receive/Transmit Channel ..............................................192
Pad Patch Rx/Tx Ch ............................................................................192
Pad Sens .................................................................................................137
Pad Sensitivity ......................................................................................137
Pad Set ...................................................................................................136
[PAD SETTING] ...................................................................................136
Pad Setting ............................................................................................136
[PAD TRIGGER] .....................................................................................99
PAD Trigger ............................................................................................99
PAD Trigger (D Beam) ..........................................................................99
Pad Velocity ..............................................................................34, 99, 116
Pad Velocity (performance) ..................................................................92
Pan (performance part) .........................................................................85
Pan (performance) ..................................................................................90
Pan Depth ................................................................................................57
Pan Key Follow .......................................................................................53
Part ...........................................................................................................19
Part (Arpeggio) .....................................................................................107
Part Attack Time Offset (performance part) ......................................87
Part Chorus Send Level .................................................................85, 178
Part Coarse Tune (performance part) ..................................................86
Part Cutoff Offset (performance part) .................................................87
Part Decay Time Offset ..........................................................................87
Part Fine Tune (performance part) ......................................................86
Part Information .....................................................................................83
Part Legato Switch (performance part) ...............................................86
Part level (performance part) ...............................................................85
Part Mono/Poly (performance part) ...................................................86
Part Octave Shift (performance part) ..................................................86
Part Output Assign ........................................................................85, 178
Part Output Level ...........................................................................85, 178
Part Output MFX Select .................................................................85, 178
Part output multi-effects select ....................................................85, 178
Part pan (performance part) .................................................................85
Part Pitch Bend Range (performance part) .........................................86
Part Portamento Switch (performance part) ......................................86
Part Portamento Time (performance part) .........................................86
Part Release Time Offset (performance part) .....................................87
Part Resonance Offset (performance part) .........................................87
Part Reverb Send Level .................................................................85, 178
Part Select ..............................................................................................178
Part Select (effect) .................................................................................176
Part Velocity sensitivity offset (performance part) ...........................88
Part Vibrato Delay ..................................................................................88
Part Vibrato Depth .................................................................................88
Part Vibrato Rate ....................................................................................88
Patch .........................................................................................................42
Category ...........................................................................................30
Patch group ......................................................................................27
Patch parameters .............................................................................43
Patch settings ...................................................................................39
Selecting a patch ..............................................................................27
Patch Bank (performance part) ............................................................84
Patch Category ........................................................................................43
Patch Coarse Tune ..................................................................................43
Patch Compare .......................................................................................42
Patch Copy ..............................................................................................40
Patch Edit .................................................................................................39
Chorus .............................................................................................182
222
Effects ..............................................................................................175
General ..............................................................................................43
LFO ....................................................................................................56
Matrix Ctrl ........................................................................................61
MFX .........................................................................................180, 181
MFX Control ..........................................................................180, 181
Pitch ...................................................................................................49
Reverb .............................................................................................182
TMT ...................................................................................................46
TVA ...................................................................................................53
TVF ....................................................................................................50
Wave .................................................................................................45
Patch finder .............................................................................................29
Patch Fine Tune ......................................................................................43
Patch Level ..............................................................................................43
Patch List .................................................................................................28
Patch Mode
Playing in Patch mode ....................................................................26
Patch Number (performance part) ......................................................84
Patch Out Assign ....................................................................................55
Patch Output Assign ............................................................................176
Patch output assign (patch) ..................................................................55
Patch Pan .................................................................................................43
Patch Play ................................................................................................26
Patch Priority ..........................................................................................43
Patch Remain ........................................................................................193
Patch remain switch .............................................................................193
Patch Scale Tune for C–B ....................................................................194
Patch Type (performance part) ............................................................84
Patch Write ..............................................................................................42
Patch/Rhythm Set Group ...................................................................136
Patch/Rhythm Set Number ................................................................136
Patch/Rhythm Set Type ......................................................................136
Pattern
Assigning a pattern to a phrase track .........................................148
Pattern call message .............................................................................148
PEDAL CONTROL jack ......................................................................102
PEDAL HOLD jack ..............................................................................102
Pedal/D Beam ......................................................................................189
P-Env Depth (rhythm tone) ..................................................................71
P-Env Depth (tone) .................................................................................50
P-Env Level 0–4 (rhythm tone) .............................................................72
P-Env Level 0–4 (tone) ...........................................................................50
P-Env T1 V-Sens (rhythm tone) ............................................................71
P-Env T1 V-Sens (tone) ..........................................................................49
P-Env T4 V-Sens (rhythm tone) ............................................................71
P-Env T4 V-Sens (tone) ..........................................................................49
P-Env Time 1–4 (rhythm tone) .............................................................71
P-Env Time 1–4 (tone) ............................................................................50
P-Env Time KF ........................................................................................49
P-Env V-Sens (rhythm tone) .................................................................71
P-Env V-Sens (tone) ...............................................................................49
Performance ............................................................................................96
Layer performance ..........................................................................80
Performance group .........................................................................78
Selecting a performance .................................................................78
Split performance ............................................................................80
Performance control channel ..............................................................192
Performance Edit
Chorus .............................................................................................182
General ..............................................................................................95
MFX .........................................................................................180, 181
MFX Control ..........................................................................180, 181
Reverb .............................................................................................182
Performance List .....................................................................................78
Performance mode
Playing in Performance mode .......................................................76
Performance Write .................................................................................96
Phase Lock (performance) .....................................................................90
Reference_e.book 223 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Phase lock switch (performance) .........................................................90
Phrase loop ........................................................................................45, 69
Phrase preview .......................................................................................29
Piano mode (fFantom-S88) ..................................................................197
Pitch
Patch ..................................................................................................49
Rhythm set .......................................................................................71
Pitch Bend (performance) .....................................................................90
Pitch bend range (rhythm tone) ...........................................................68
Pitch bend range down .........................................................................49
Pitch bend range up ...............................................................................49
Pitch Depth ..............................................................................................57
Pitch envelope depth (tone) ..................................................................50
Pitch envelope level 0–4 (rhythm tone) ...............................................72
Pitch envelope level 0–4 (tone) .............................................................50
Pitch envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity (rhythm tone) .................71
Pitch envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity (tone) ...............................49
Pitch envelope time 1–4 (rhythm tone) ...............................................71
Pitch envelope time 1–4 (tone) .............................................................50
Pitch envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity (rhythm tone) .................71
Pitch envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity (tone) ...............................49
Pitch envelope time key follow ............................................................49
Pitch envelope velocity sensitivity (rhythm tone) .............................71
Pitch envelope velocity sensitivity (tone) ...........................................49
Pitch Keyfollow ......................................................................................49
Place Event window ............................................................................166
[PLAY] ...................................................................................................138
Polyphonic Key Pressure (performance) ............................................90
Portamento ........................................................................................33, 59
Portamento Mode ...................................................................................59
Portamento Start .....................................................................................59
Portamento Switch (patch) ...................................................................59
Portamento Time (patch) ......................................................................59
Portamento Type ....................................................................................59
Power Up Mode ...................................................................................195
Pre Sample Time ...................................................................................120
Pre Sample Time (system) ...................................................................195
Preset Default Load (system) ..............................................................195
Preset Memory ........................................................................................20
Preview ............................................................................................29, 194
Arpeggio Edit ................................................................................108
Rhythm Pattern Edit .....................................................................115
Preview 1–4 note number ...................................................................194
Preview 1–4 velocity ............................................................................194
Preview Mode .......................................................................................194
Program Change (performance) ..........................................................90
Punch-in
Manual punch-in ...........................................................................144
Punch-in recording ..............................................................................143
Auto punch-in ................................................................................144
Q
Quantize ........................................................................................144, 152
Grid quantize .................................................................................144
Recording quantize .......................................................................144
Shuffle quantize .............................................................................144
Track edit ........................................................................................152
Quick play .............................................................................................138
R
Random Pan Depth (rhythm tone) ......................................................74
Random pan depth (tone) .....................................................................54
Random Pitch Depth (tone) ..................................................................49
Range ................................................................................................35, 101
Range (Solo Synth) .................................................................................93
Range Lower (patch) ........................................................................36, 99
Range Lower (performance) .................................................................94
Range Upper (patch) ........................................................................36, 99
Range Upper (performance) .................................................................94
Rate .........................................................................................................145
Rate Detune .............................................................................................56
RATIO (Mastering Effect) ...................................................................183
Realtime control button assign 1–2 (patch) ........................................37
Realtime Control Knob Assign 1–4 ......................................................36
Realtime Control Knob Assign 1–4 (Performance) ...................94, 101
Realtime controller ...............................................................................101
Realtime erase .......................................................................................145
Realtime phrase sequence ...................................................................172
Realtime recording ...............................................................................142
[REC] ......................................................................................................142
Receive bank select switch ..................................................................193
Receive bank select switch (performance) ..........................................90
Receive Channel (performance part) ...................................................89
Receive channel pressure switch (performance) ...............................90
Receive expression switch (performance) ..........................................90
Receive expression switch (rhythm tone) ...........................................68
Receive expression switch (tone) .........................................................61
Receive GM system on switch ............................................................193
Receive GM2 system on switch ..........................................................193
Receive GS reset switch .......................................................................193
Receive hold 1 switch (performance) ..................................................90
Receive hold switch (tone) ....................................................................61
Receive hold-1 switch (rhythm tone) ..................................................68
Receive modulation switch (performance) .........................................90
Receive pan mode (rhythm tone) .........................................................68
Receive pan switch (performance) .......................................................90
Receive pitch bend switch (performance) ..........................................90
Receive polyphonic key pressure switch (performance) ..................90
Receive program change switch ........................................................193
Receive program change switch (performance) ................................90
Receive Switch (performance part) ......................................................89
Receive system exclusive switch ........................................................193
Receive volume switch (performance) ................................................90
Recommended Rhy ..............................................................................116
Recommended Rhythm Set ................................................................116
Recommended Tempo (Performance) ................................................95
Recording mode
Realtime recording ........................................................................142
Step recording ........................................................................146, 148
Recording quantize ..............................................................................144
Recording Select ...................................................................................145
Recording Standby ...............................................................................142
Rehearsal function ................................................................................145
RELEASE (Mastering Effect) ..............................................................183
Release Time Offset (patch) ..................................................................44
Remote Keyboard Sw ..........................................................................193
Remote keyboard switch .....................................................................193
[RESET] ..................................................................................................139
Resonance ........................................................................................35, 100
piano mode .....................................................................................198
Resonance (rhythm tone) ......................................................................72
Resonance (Solo Synth) .........................................................................93
Resonance (tone) .....................................................................................51
Resonance Offset (patch) .......................................................................44
Resonance velocity sensitivity (rhythm tone) ....................................73
Resonance velocity sensitivity (tone) ..................................................52
Resonance V-Sens .............................................................................52, 73
Rest
Step Rec ...........................................................................................147
Rest (Clear)
Arpeggio Edit .................................................................................108
Rhythm Pattern Edit .....................................................................115
Restore ...................................................................................................196
Reverb Level (multitimbre) .................................................................179
Reverb Level (patch) ............................................................................177
Reverb Level (performance) ...............................................................179
Reverb Level (rhythm set) ...................................................................177
Reverb Output Assign (multitimbre) ................................................179
223
Index
Index
Reference_e.book 224 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Index
Reverb Output Assign (patch) ...........................................................177
Reverb Output Assign (performance) ...............................................179
Reverb Output Assign (rhythm set) ..................................................177
Reverb Send Level ..........................................................................35, 100
Reverb Send Level (Solo Synth) ...........................................................93
Reverb Source .................................................................................85, 180
Reverb Source (patch) ..........................................................................177
Reverb Source (rhythm set) ................................................................177
Reverb type ...........................................................................................182
Reverb Type (multitimbre) .................................................................179
Reverb Type (patch) .............................................................................177
Reverb Type (performance) ................................................................179
Reverb Type (rhythm set) ...................................................................177
Rhy Ptn Number ..................................................................................116
Rhy Ptn Velocity ...................................................................................116
Rhythm
Rhythm set group ...........................................................................37
Rhythm Compare ...................................................................................67
Rhythm Copy ..........................................................................................65
Rhythm Edit ............................................................................................64
Chorus .............................................................................................182
Effects ..............................................................................................175
General ..............................................................................................67
MFX .........................................................................................180, 181
MFX Control ..........................................................................180, 181
Pitch ...................................................................................................71
Reverb .............................................................................................182
TVA ...................................................................................................73
TVF ....................................................................................................72
WMT .................................................................................................70
Rhythm Group ......................................................................................112
Rhythm Group Edit .............................................................................116
Rhythm Level ..........................................................................................67
Rhythm Out Assign ...............................................................................75
Rhythm Output Assign (rhythm tone) ...............................................75
Rhythm Pattern Number ....................................................................116
Rhythm Pattern Velocity .............................................................114, 116
Rhythm Pettern Edit ............................................................................115
Rhythm set
Rhythm set parameters ..................................................................67
Rhythm set settings .........................................................................64
Selecting a rhythm set .....................................................................37
Rhythm set level .....................................................................................67
Rhythm Set Name ..................................................................................66
Rhythm Tone Name ...............................................................................68
Ring modulator ......................................................................................47
Rndom Pan Depth ..................................................................................54
Roll function ..........................................................................................135
RPS function ..........................................................................................172
RPS Setup ..............................................................................................172
Rx Bank Select .......................................................................................193
Rx Exclusive ..........................................................................................193
Rx GM System On ................................................................................193
Rx GM2 System On ..............................................................................193
Rx GS Reset ...........................................................................................193
Rx Program Change .............................................................................193
S
Sample
amp ..................................................................................................131
assign to keyboard ........................................................................127
auto chop ........................................................................................132
beat ..................................................................................................125
chop .................................................................................................132
combine ..........................................................................................133
create multisample ........................................................................128
create rhythm .................................................................................128
delete ...............................................................................................123
emphasis .........................................................................................130
import audio ..................................................................................124
224
Load .................................................................................................123
normalize ........................................................................................130
sample edit screen .........................................................................124
sample list .......................................................................................122
sample parameter ..........................................................................125
time stretch .....................................................................................131
truncate ...........................................................................................129
unload .....................................................................................123, 129
Zoom In/Out .................................................................................124
Sample assign to pad ...........................................................................126
Sample Default Load (system) ...........................................................195
Sample Edit screen ...............................................................................124
[SAMPLE LIST] ....................................................................................122
Sample List ............................................................................................122
Sample Parameter ................................................................................125
Sampling ................................................................................................195
Sampling Length ..................................................................................120
Sampling mode .....................................................................................119
Save
all samples ......................................................................................169
Arpeggio Edit .................................................................................109
Chord Memory ..............................................................................111
Patch ..................................................................................................42
Patch (piano mode) .......................................................................198
Performance .....................................................................................96
Rhythm Group ...............................................................................117
Rhythm Pattern .............................................................................116
Rhythm Set .......................................................................................66
Rhythm set .......................................................................................66
SMF ..................................................................................................170
System .............................................................................................188
Save All Samples ..................................................................................169
Save as SMF ...........................................................................................170
Save Song ...............................................................................................169
Save Song+Samples .............................................................................168
SAVE/LOAD ........................................................................................168
Scale Tune ..............................................................................................194
Scale tune C-B (patch) ..........................................................................194
Scale tune C-B (performance part) .......................................................88
Scale Tune Switch .................................................................................194
Screen Saver ..........................................................................................190
Send Level (Output=MFX) ..............................................................55, 75
Send Level (Output=non MFX) ......................................................55, 75
Sens 1–4 ..................................................................................................181
Shift Clock .............................................................................................160
Shuffle Quantize Rate ..........................................................................145
Shuffle Resolution ................................................................................145
Skip Back Sampling ..............................................................................121
Skip Back Time (system) .....................................................................195
S-MRC format .......................................................................................140
Soft Through .........................................................................................192
Soft through switch ..............................................................................192
Solo ...........................................................................................................82
Solo sampling ........................................................................................120
Solo Switch (performance) ....................................................................84
[SOLO SYNTH] ....................................................................................100
SOLO SYNTH (D Beam) .....................................................................100
Solo synth range .............................................................................35, 101
Solo synth range (Solo Synth) ...............................................................93
Song ..........................................................................................................21
Editing Song ...................................................................................149
Loading Song .................................................................................149
Playing back a song .......................................................................138
Recording song ..............................................................................141
Song clear .......................................................................................141
Song Clear .............................................................................................141
Song List window .................................................................................149
Song Play screen ...................................................................................149
Sound .....................................................................................................193
Reference_e.book 225 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Source 1–4 ..............................................................................................181
Split Frequency High ...........................................................................183
Split Frequency Low ............................................................................183
SRX Information ...................................................................................195
SRX/RAM Mode ..................................................................................195
Start Fine ................................................................................................126
Start Point ..............................................................................................125
Start up ...................................................................................................195
Step Back
Step Rec ...........................................................................................147
Step Rec
Arpeggio Edit ................................................................................108
Rhythm Pattern Edit .....................................................................115
Step recording .......................................................................................146
Step Recording Standby ..............................................................146, 148
Stop Trigger ...........................................................................................120
Strength ..................................................................................................144
Stretch Tune Depth ................................................................................43
Structure Type 1 & 2 ..............................................................................46
Structure Type 3 & 4 ..............................................................................46
Switch .....................................................................................................102
Switch 1–2 (Performance) .....................................................................94
Sync Mode .............................................................................................190
Sync Output ..........................................................................................190
Sync output switch ...............................................................................190
Sync/Temp ............................................................................................190
Sys Ctrl 1–4 Source ...............................................................................190
System Control .....................................................................................190
System Ctrl ............................................................................................190
System Exclusive Edit ..........................................................................163
System exclusive message ...................................................................163
System function ....................................................................................188
System function settings ..............................................................188
System parameters ........................................................................189
System Memory ......................................................................................20
T
TEMPO
sample .............................................................................................126
Tempo
Arpeggio .........................................................................................104
Rhythm Pattern .............................................................................112
Tempo Rec Sw ......................................................................................143
Tempo recording ..................................................................................143
Temporary Area .....................................................................................20
THRESHOLD ........................................................................................183
Tie
Arpeggio Edit ................................................................................108
Rhythm Pattern Edit .....................................................................115
Step Rec ...........................................................................................147
Time Fit ..................................................................................................162
Time signature ......................................................................................141
Time Stretch ..........................................................................................131
Time Stretch Type ................................................................................126
TMT ..........................................................................................................46
TMT Control Sw .....................................................................................48
TMT control switch ................................................................................48
TMT Velocity Control ............................................................................48
TMT velocity control switch .................................................................48
Tone
Tone on/off ......................................................................................32
Tone Chorus Send ............................................................................55, 75
Tone Chorus Send Level .........................................................55, 75, 176
Tone chorus send level (tone) .........................................................55, 75
Tone Coarse Tune ............................................................................49, 71
Tone Coarse tune (rhythm tone) ..........................................................71
Tone Control Switch 1–4 .......................................................................63
Tone Delay ..............................................................................................60
Tone Delay Mode ...................................................................................60
Tone Delay Time ....................................................................................60
Tone Dry Send Level .......................................................................55, 75
Tone dry send level (tone) ..............................................................55, 75
Tone Env Mode (rhythm tone) .............................................................68
Tone Env Mode (tone) ...........................................................................61
Tone Fine Tune .................................................................................49, 71
Tone Fine tune (rhythm tone) ...............................................................71
Tone Level (rhythm tone) .....................................................................74
Tone Level (tone) ....................................................................................53
Tone Name ..............................................................................................68
Tone Out Assign ...............................................................................55, 75
Tone Out Level .................................................................................55, 75
Tone Output Assign .............................................................................176
Tone output assign (rhythm tone) .......................................................75
Tone output assign (tone) .....................................................................55
Tone Output Level ...............................................................................176
Tone Output level (rhythm tone) .........................................................75
Tone output level (tone) ........................................................................55
Tone Pan (tone) .......................................................................................53
Tone Pitch Bend Range (rhythm tone) ................................................68
Tone Random Pitch Depth (rhythm tone) ..........................................71
Tone Receive Expression (rhythm tone) .............................................68
Tone Receive Hold-1 (rhythm tone) ....................................................68
Tone Receive Pan Mode (rhythm tone) ...............................................68
Tone receive pitch bend switch ............................................................61
Tone Redamper Sw ................................................................................61
Tone redamper switch ...........................................................................61
Tone Reverb Send .............................................................................55, 75
Tone Reverb Send Level ......................................................................176
Tone Rx Bender .......................................................................................61
Tone Rx Expression (tone) ....................................................................61
Tone Rx Hold-1 (tone) ...........................................................................61
Tone Rx Pan Mode (tone) ......................................................................61
Tone Select .............................................................................................176
Tone Switch .............................................................................................32
Track edit ...............................................................................................151
Change channel .............................................................................158
Change Duration ...........................................................................158
Change velocity .............................................................................157
Copy ................................................................................................155
Data thin .........................................................................................161
Delete ..............................................................................................155
Erase ................................................................................................154
Exchange .........................................................................................161
Extract .............................................................................................159
Insert ...............................................................................................156
Merge ..............................................................................................159
Quantize .........................................................................................152
Shift clock .......................................................................................160
Time fit ............................................................................................162
Transpose .......................................................................................156
Truncate ..........................................................................................162
Trans .........................................................................................................32
Transmit active sensing switch ..........................................................192
Transmit bank select switch ................................................................192
Transmit edit data switch ....................................................................192
Transmit program change switch ......................................................192
Transpose ........................................................................................32, 156
Track edit ........................................................................................156
Trigger Level (system) .........................................................................195
Trim Sw ..................................................................................................120
Trimming Switch (system) ..................................................................195
Truncate .........................................................................................129, 162
TVA
Patch ..................................................................................................53
Rhythm set .......................................................................................73
TVA Depth ..............................................................................................57
TVA envelope level 1–3 (rhythm tone) ...............................................74
TVA envelope level 1–3 (tone) .............................................................54
TVA envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity (rhythm tone) .................74
225
Index
Index
Reference_e.book 226 ページ 2003年7月14日 月曜日 午後3時25分
Index
TVA envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity (tone) ................................54
TVA envelope time 1–4 (rhythm tone) ................................................74
TVA envelope time 1–4 (tone) ..............................................................54
TVA envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity (rhythm tone) .................74
TVA envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity (tone) ................................54
TVA envelope time key follow .............................................................54
TVA level velocity curve (rhythm tone) .............................................74
TVA level velocity curve (tone) .....................................................43, 53
TVA level velocity sensitivity (tone) ...................................................53
TVF
Patch ..................................................................................................50
Rhythm set .......................................................................................72
TVF Depth ...............................................................................................57
TVF envelope depth (rhythm tone) .....................................................73
TVF envelope depth (tone) ...................................................................52
TVF envelope level 0–4 (tone) ..............................................................52
TVF envelope level 1–4 (rhythm tone) ................................................73
TVF envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity (rhythm tone) ..................73
TVF envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity (tone) .................................52
TVF envelope time 1–4 (rhythm tone) ................................................73
TVF envelope time 1–4 (tone) ...............................................................52
TVF envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity (rhythm tone) ..................73
TVF envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity (tone) .................................52
TVF envelope time key follow .............................................................52
TVF envelope velocity curve (tone) .....................................................52
TVF envelope velocity curve type (rhythm tone) ..............................73
TVF envelope velocity sensitivity (rhythm tone) ..............................73
TVF envelope velocity sensitivity (tone) ............................................52
Tx Active Sensing .................................................................................192
Tx Bank Select .......................................................................................192
Tx Edit Data ..........................................................................................192
Tx Program Change .............................................................................192
Type ................................................................................................180, 182
Type (performance) ...............................................................................94
U
Unload ...........................................................................................123, 129
User Memory ..........................................................................................20
V
Velo Fade Lower (rhythm wave) .........................................................70
Velo Fade Lower (tone) .........................................................................48
Velo Fade Upper (rhythm wave) .........................................................71
Velo Fade Upper (tone) .........................................................................48
Velo Range Lower (rhythm wave) ......................................................70
Velo Range Lower (tone) .......................................................................48
Velo Range Upper (rhythm wave) .......................................................70
Velo Range Upper (tone) .......................................................................48
Velocity
Arpeggio .........................................................................................106
Rhythm Pattern .............................................................................114
Velocity (Pad Velocity) ........................................................................137
Velocity control switch ..........................................................................70
Velocity Curve (performance) ..............................................................90
Velocity fade width lower (rhythm wave) .........................................70
Velocity fade width lower (tone) .........................................................48
Velocity fade width upper (rhythm wave) .........................................71
Velocity fade width upper (tone) .........................................................48
Velocity range lower (rhythm wave) ..................................................70
Velocity range lower (tone) ..................................................................48
Velocity range upper (rhythm wave) ..................................................70
Velocity range upper (tone) ..................................................................48
Velocity Sens Offset (patch) ..................................................................44
Velocity sensitivity offset (patch) .........................................................44
Version Information .............................................................................195
View Select window ............................................................................164
Voice Reserve (performance part) .......................................................88
Volume (performance) ..........................................................................90
W
WAV .......................................................................................................124
226
WAV/AIFF ...........................................................................................124
WAV/AIFF file .....................................................................................171
Wave .........................................................................................................45
Wave Alter Pan Sw ................................................................................70
Wave alternate pan switch ....................................................................70
Wave Bank (rhythm wave) ...................................................................69
Wave Bank (tone) ...................................................................................45
Wave Coarse Tune (rhythm wave) ......................................................70
Wave expansion board
Installing the wave expansion board .................................203, 205
SRX series ...................................................................................27, 37
Wave Fine Tune (rhythm wave) ..........................................................70
Wave Gain ...............................................................................................45
Wave Gain (rhythm wave) ....................................................................69
Wave Gain (tone) ....................................................................................45
Wave Generator ......................................................................................17
Wave Group (rhythm wave) ................................................................69
Wave Group (tone) .................................................................................45
Wave Level ..............................................................................................70
Wave No. L (Mono) (tone) ....................................................................45
Wave No. L (rhythm wave) ..................................................................69
Wave No. R (rhythm wave) ..................................................................69
Wave No. R (tone) ..................................................................................45
Wave Number L (Mono) (rhythm wave) ............................................69
Wave Number L (Mono) (tone) ............................................................45
Wave Number R (rhythm wave) .........................................................69
Wave Number R (tone) ..........................................................................45
Wave Pan .................................................................................................70
Wave pan (rhythm tone) .......................................................................70
Wave random pan switch .....................................................................70
Wave Rnd Pan Sw ..................................................................................70
Wave Tempo Sync (rhythm wave) ......................................................69
Wave Tempo Sync (tone) ......................................................................45
Waveform ................................................................................................56
WMT .........................................................................................................70
WMT Velocity Control ..........................................................................70
Write ...................................................................................................42, 96
Arpeggio Edit .................................................................................109
Chord Memory ..............................................................................111
Patch ..................................................................................................42
Patch (piano mode) .......................................................................198
Performance .....................................................................................96
Rhythm Group ...............................................................................117
Rhythm Pattern .............................................................................116
Rhythm Set .......................................................................................66
Rhythm set .......................................................................................66
System .............................................................................................188
Z
Zoom In
Arpeggio Edit .................................................................................108
Rhythm Pattern Edit .....................................................................115
Step Rec ...........................................................................................147
Zoom In/Out (sample) ........................................................................124
Zoom Out
Arpeggio Edit .................................................................................108
Rhythm Pattern Edit .....................................................................115
Step Rec ...........................................................................................147
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with
one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the
third prong are provided for your safety. When the provided
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12. Never use with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
or table except as specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing
is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any
way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid
has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,
the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does
not operate normally, or has been dropped.
For the U.K.
WARNING:
THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
GREEN-AND-YELLOW: EARTH, BLUE: NEUTRAL, BROWN: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the
letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
2
For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Information
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as
shown below.
AFRICA
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street,
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,
Cairo 11341, EGYPT
TEL: 20-2-417-1828
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules Hermann,
Chaudron - BP79 97 491
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
REUNION ISLAND
TEL: (0262) 218-429
SOUTH AFRICA
11 Melle St., Braamfontein,
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA
P.O.Box 32918, Braamfontein 2017
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (011) 403 4105
Paul Bothner (PTY) Ltd.
IRELAND
OMNI MUSIC
Roland Ireland
140 & 142, Jalan Bukit Bintang
55100 Kuala Lumpur,MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 2144-3333
75 Avenida Norte y Final
Alameda Juan Pablo ,
Edificio No.4010 San Salvador,
EL SALVADOR
TEL: 262-0788
G2 Calmount Park, Calmount
Avenue, Dublin 12
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 4294444
MEXICO
ITALY
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar
de los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F.
MEXICO
TEL: (55) 5668-6699
Viale delle Industrie 8,
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
PHILIPPINES
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
TEL: (02) 899 9801
SINGAPORE
Swee Lee Company
150 Sims Drive,
SINGAPORE 387381
TEL: 6846-3676
CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE
LTD
Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E,
#02-2148, SINGAPORE 489980
TEL: 6243-9555
TAIWAN
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan
N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN,
R.O.C.
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
P.O.BOX 23032, Claremont 7735,
SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 674 4030
THAILAND
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
ASIA
330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2,
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 2248821
CHINA
VIETNAM
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
Shanghai 200090, CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(BEIJING OFFICE)
10F. No.18 Anhuaxili
Chaoyang District, Beijing 100011
CHINA
TEL: (010) 6426-5050
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(GUANGZHOU OFFICE)
2/F., No.30 Si You Nan Er Jie Yi
Xiang, Wu Yang Xin Cheng,
Guangzhou 510600, CHINA
Tel: (020) 8736-0428
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
Service Division
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen
Wan, New Territories,
HONG KONG
TEL: 2415 0911
Saigon Music
Suite DP-8
40 Ba Huyen Thanh Quan Street
Hochiminh City, VIETNAM
Tel: (08) 930-1969
AUSTRALIA
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty., Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
TEL: (02) 9982 8266
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Corporation Ltd.
32 Shaddock Street, Mount Eden,
Auckland, NEW ZEALAND
TEL: (09) 3098 715
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
ARGENTINA
8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39
Chatham Road South, T.S.T,
Kowloon, HONG KONG
TEL: 2333 1863
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
INDIA
BRAZIL
409, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi
Flats Compound Off. Dr. Edwin
Moses Road, Mumbai-400011,
INDIA
TEL: (022) 2493 9051
INDONESIA
PT Citra IntiRama
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
KOREA
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855
PARAGUAY
Distribuidora De
Instrumentos Musicales
J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira
Asuncion PARAGUAY
TEL: (021) 492-124
URUGUAY
Roland Brasil Ltda
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
COSTA RICA
JUAN Bansbach
Instrumentos Musicales
Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237,
San Jose, COSTA RICA
TEL: 258-0211
CHILE
Comercial Fancy
S.A.
Rut.: 96.919.420-1
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor
Santiago - Centro, CHILE
TEL: (02) 688-9540
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Kontor Norge
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
TEL: (021) 285-4169
ISRAEL
Halilit P. Greenspoon &
Sons Ltd.
8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St.
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
JORDAN
AMMAN Trading Agency
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
TEL: 2273 0074
245 Prince Mohammad St.,
Amman 1118, JORDAN
TEL: (06) 464-1200
POLAND
Easa Husain Al Yousifi Est.
P. P. H. Brzostowicz
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND
TEL: (022) 679 44 19
PORTUGAL
KUWAIT
Abdullah Salem Street,
Safat, KUWAIT
TEL: 243-6399
LEBANON
Chahine S.A.L.
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine Bldg.,
Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-5857
Beirut, LEBANON
TEL: (01) 20-1441
Todo Musica S.A.
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771
C.P.: 11.800
Montevideo, URUGUAY
TEL: (02) 924-2335
Cais Das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto
4050-465 PORTO
PORTUGAL
TEL: (022) 608 00 60
VENEZUELA
ROMANIA
Musicland Digital C.A.
FBS LINES
Av. Francisco de Miranda,
Centro Parque de Cristal, Nivel
C2 Local 20 Caracas
VENEZUELA
TEL: (212) 285-8586
Piata Libertatii 1,
RO-4200 Gheorghehi
TEL: (095) 169-5043
SAUDI ARABIA
RUSSIA
aDawliah Universal
Electronics APL
MuTek
EUROPE
Roland Austria GES.M.B.H.
Siemensstrasse 4, P.O. Box 74,
A-6063 RUM, AUSTRIA
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
BELGIUM/HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG
Roland Benelux N. V.
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
TEL: (014) 575811
DENMARK
3-Bogatyrskaya Str. 1.k.l
107 564 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 169 5043
SPAIN
Roland Electronics
de España, S. A.
Calle Bolivia 239, 08020
Barcelona, SPAIN
TEL: (93) 308 1000
SWEDEN
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWITZERLAND
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
TEL: 3916 6200
Roland (Switzerland) AG
FRANCE
Roland France SA
4, Rue Paul Henri SPAAK,
Parc de l'Esplanade, F 77 462 St.
Thibault, Lagny Cedex FRANCE
TEL: 01 600 73 500
FINLAND
Av.Santa Fe 2055
(1123) Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA
TEL: (011) 4508-2700
NORWAY
MOCO, INC.
Tecnologias Musica e Audio,
Roland Portugal, S.A.
AUSTRIA
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
Parsons Music Ltd.
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A.
Boulevard Andrews, Albrook,
Panama City, REP. DE PANAMA
TEL: 315-0101
17 Werdmuller Centre,
Main Road, Claremont 7708
SOUTH AFRICA
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
PANAMA
IRAN
QATAR
Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio
& Stores)
P.O. Box 62, Doha, QATAR
TEL: 4423-554
Corniche Road, Aldossary Bldg.,
1st Floor, Alkhobar,
SAUDI ARABIA
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 898 2081
Khaled Ebn Al Walid St.
Bldg. No. 47, P.O.BOX 13520,
Damascus, SYRIA
TEL: (011) 223-5384
TURKEY
Barkat muzik aletleri ithalat
ve ihracat Ltd Sti
Zak Electronics & Musical
Instruments Co. L.L.C.
Elannontie 5
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 702701
CANADA
MIDDLE EAST
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Toronto Office)
BAHRAIN
170 Admiral Boulevard
Mississauga On L5T 2N6
CANADA
TEL: (905) 362 9707
Oststrasse 96, 22844 Norderstedt,
GERMANY
TEL: (040) 52 60090
GREECE
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
Patras 26442, GREECE
TEL: 2610 435400
HUNGARY
Roland East Europe Ltd.
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY
TEL: (23) 511011
Moon Stores
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,
State of BAHRAIN
TEL: 211 005
CYPRUS
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.
17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,
CYPRUS
TEL: (022) 66-9426
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS” (Owner’s manual p. 2), “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (Owner’s
manual p. 3), and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (Owner’s manual p. 4). These sections
provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit.
Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every
feature provided by your new unit, Owner’s Manual, Sound/Parameter List should
be read in its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a
convenient reference.
This Owner's Manual applies to both the Fantom-S and the Fantom-S88. The manual uses
the term “Fantom-S” to indicate both models. If you have the Fantom-S88, please read
“Fantom-S” as “Fantom-S88.”
NORTH AMERICA
UNITED KINGDOM
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
.
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai, U.A.E.
TEL: (04) 3360715
Roland Scandinavia As,
Filial Finland
GERMANY
/
Siraselviler Caddesi Siraselviler
Pasaji No:74/20
Taksim - Istanbul, TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 2499324
U.A.E.
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the Roland
Technical Light & Sound
Center
UKRAINE
Mira Str. 19/108
P.O. Box 180
295400 Munkachevo, UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
OWNER’S MANUAL
SYRIA
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,
CH-4452 Itingen,
SWITZERLAND
TEL: (061) 927-8383
TIC-TAC
OWNER’S MANUAL
That Other Music Shop
(PTY) Ltd.
EL SALVADOR
BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD
/
REUNION
MALAYSIA
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Head Office)
5480 Parkwood Way Richmond
B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA
TEL: (604) 270 6626
U. S. A.
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,
U. S. A.
TEL: (323) 890 3700
As of July 1, 2003 (Roland)
03121989
’03-07-5N
Copyright © 2003 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without
the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising